Pictorial index Search by illustration

For safety Make sure to read through them

1
and security (Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)

Fuel cell electric vehicle characteristics,

Fuel cell system precautions, etc. 2
(Main topics: Fuel cell system)
Vehicle status
Reading driving-related information
information and 3
(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)
indicators
Opening and closing the doors and windows,
Before driving adjustment before driving 4
(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)
Operations and advice which are necessary for
Driving driving 5
(Main topics: Starting fuel cell system, refueling)

Usage of the interior features

Interior features 6
(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)

Maintenance Caring for your vehicle and maintenance

procedures 7
and care
(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)

When trouble What to do in case of malfunction and emergency

8
arises (Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)

Vehicle Vehicle specifications, customizable features

9
specifications (Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)

For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, seat belt
and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners 10

Search by symptom
Index
Search alphabetically

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS

For your information................... 6

Vehicle status
Reading this manual ................13
3 information and
How to search..........................14
indicators
Pictorial index ..........................16
3-1. Instrument cluster
1 For safety and security
Warning lights and indicators
.......................................90
1-1. For safe use
Gauges and meters..........96
Before driving...................26
Multi-information display 102
For safe driving ................27
Energy monitor/consumption
Seat belts .........................29 screen/air purification
SRS airbags .....................33 screen.......................... 109
Pop Up Hood ...................40
Front passenger occupant 4 Before driving
classification system ......43
1-2. Child safety 4-1. Key information
Riding with children ..........48 Keys .............................. 116
Child restraint systems.....49 Digital key...................... 119
1-3. Emergency assistance 4-2. Opening, closing and lock-
Safety Connect ................62 ing the doors and trunk
Doors............................. 121
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Trunk ............................. 126
Immobilizer system ..........67
Smart key system.......... 129
Alarm................................68
Theft prevention labels 4-3. Adjusting the seats
(Except for Canada) .......70 Front seats .................... 135
Head restraints .............. 136
2 Fuel cell system 4-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle Steering wheel............... 138
Fuel cell electric vehicle char- Inside rear view mirror... 139
acteristics .......................72 Outside rear view mirrors
Fuel cell electric vehicle pre- .................................... 140
cautions..........................77 4-5. Opening, closing the win-
Fuel cell electric vehicle driv- dows
ing tips............................87 Power windows ............. 142

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3
4-6. Favorite settings LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
My Settings ................... 145 .................................... 216
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
5 Driving .................................... 221
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
5-1. Before driving .................................... 224
Driving the vehicle......... 149 PDA (Proactive driving 1
assist) .......................... 229
Cargo and luggage ....... 155
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic
Vehicle load limits ......... 157 Alert)............................ 236 2
Trailer towing................. 158 RSA (Road Sign Assist). 238
Dinghy towing ............... 159 Dynamic radar cruise control
5-2. Driving procedures .................................... 241 3
Power switch ................. 160 Cruise control ................ 252
Shift position ................. 165 Emergency Driving Stop Sys- 4
Turn signal lever............ 170 tem .............................. 256
Parking brake................ 171 Traffic Jam Assist .......... 259
Brake Hold .................... 174 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) 5
.................................... 265
Water release (H2O switch)
.................................... 176 Safe Exit Assist.............. 270
Intuitive parking assist ... 275 6
5-3. Operating the lights and
wipers RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Headlight switch ............ 178 Alert) function .............. 281
7
AHB (Automatic High Beam) RCD (Rear Camera Detec-
.................................... 180 tion) ............................. 287
Windshield wipers and PKSB (Parking Support 8
washer......................... 184 Brake).......................... 291
5-4. Refueling Parking Support Brake func-
tion (static objects front and 9
Opening the fuel door ... 189 rear of the vehicle)....... 295
5-5. Using the driving support Parking Support Brake func-
systems tion (moving vehicles rear of 10
Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 soft- the vehicle) .................. 298
ware update ................ 193 Parking Support Brake func-
Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 195 tion (pedestrians rear of the
Driver monitor ............... 203 vehicle) ........................ 299
PCS (Pre-Collision System) Driving mode select switch
.................................... 205 .................................... 301

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Snow mode ................... 302 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Driving assist systems .. 303 Do-it-yourself service precau-
5-6. Driving tips tions............................. 369
Winter driving tips ......... 308 Hood.............................. 371
Positioning a floor jack .. 371
6 Interior features Fuel cell unit compartment
.................................... 373
6-1. Using the air conditioning 12-volt battery................ 378
system and defogger Tires .............................. 381
ALL AUTO control ......... 312 Replacing the tire .......... 394
Automatic air conditioning Tire inflation pressure .... 397
system......................... 313 Wheels .......................... 399
Heated steering wheel/seat Air conditioning filter ...... 401
heaters ........................ 321
Cleaning the traction battery
6-2. Using the interior lights air intake vents ............ 402
Interior lights list ............ 323 Electronic key battery .... 405
6-3. Using the storage features Checking and replacing fuses
List of storage features . 326 .................................... 407
Trunk features ............... 328 Headlight aim ................ 411
6-4. Using the other interior fea- Light bulbs ..................... 412
tures
Other interior features ... 330
8 When trouble arises
Garage door opener...... 350
8-1. Essential information
7 Maintenance and care Emergency flashers....... 414
If your vehicle has to be
7-1. Maintenance and care stopped in an emergency
.................................... 414
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle exterior ............ 358 If the vehicle is submerged or
water on the road is rising
Cleaning and protecting the
.................................... 415
vehicle interior ............. 362
8-2. Steps to take in an emer-
7-2. Maintenance
gency
Maintenance requirements
If your vehicle needs to be
.................................... 365
towed........................... 417
General maintenance.... 366
If you think something is
wrong........................... 421

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5
If a warning light turns on or a Seat belt instructions for
warning buzzer sounds 422 Canadian owners (in
If a warning message is dis- French) ........................ 501
played.......................... 432 SRS airbag instructions for
If you have a flat tire...... 438 Canadian owners ........ 502
If the fuel cell system will not Headlight aim instructions for
start ............................. 451 Canadian owners (in 1
French) ........................ 508
If you lose your keys ..... 453
If the fuel door cannot be
Index
opened ........................ 453 2
If the electronic key does not
operate properly .......... 454 What to do if... (Troubleshoot-
ing) .............................. 510 3
If the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged ....................... 456 Alphabetical Index ......... 513
If your vehicle overheats 462 4
If the vehicle becomes stuck
.................................... 466
5
9 Vehicle specifications

9-1. Specifications 6
Maintenance data (fuel, fluid
level, etc.).................... 468
7
Tire information ............. 474
9-2. Customization
Customizable features .. 484 8
9-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ........... 497
9

10 For owners
10
[Link] owners
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners................. 500
Reporting safety defects for
Canadian owners ........ 500

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6

For your information Toyota vehicles are currently

available in the market. You
should know that Toyota does
Main Owner’s Manual not warrant these products and
Please note that this manual is not responsible for their per-
applies to all models and formance, repair, or replace-
explains all equipment, including ment, or for any damage they
options. Therefore, you may find may cause to, or adverse effect
explanations for equipment not they may have on, your Toyota
installed on your vehicle and the vehicle.
illustrations used may differ from This vehicle should not be modi-
your vehicle. fied with non-genuine Toyota
All specifications provided in this products. Modification with non-
manual are current at the time of genuine Toyota products could
printing. Over time, your vehicle affect its performance, safety or
may receive updates that modify durability, and may even violate
the vehicle and make material in governmental regulations. In
this manual incomplete and/or addition, damage or perfor-
inaccurate. Because of Toyota’s mance problems resulting from
interest in continual product the modification may not be cov-
improvement, Toyota reserves ered under warranty.
the right to make changes to this Also, remodeling like this will
manual at any time without have an effect on advanced
notice. safety equipment such as Toy-
If Toyota chooses to update the ota Safety Sense and there is a
manual, updated versions can danger that it will not work prop-
be viewed by selecting your erly or the danger that it may
vehicle by model and year at the work in situations where it
following URL or on your mobile should not be working.
device if you have access to the
Toyota app. Cyber Attack Risk
[Link]/owners Installing electronic devices and
radios increases the risk of
Accessories, spare parts cyber attacks through the
and modification of your installed parts, which may lead
Toyota to unexpected accidents and
leakage of personal informa-
A wide variety of non-genuine tion. Toyota does not make any
spare parts and accessories for guarantees for problems caused

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7
by installing non-genuine Toyota Vehicle data recording
products.
This vehicle is equipped with
Installation of a mobile sophisticated computers that
two-way radio system record certain data regarding
vehicle controls and operations.
The installation of a mobile two- ■ Data recorded by the com-
way radio system in your vehicle
puters*1
could affect electronic systems
*1: The recorded data varies accord-
such as:
ing to the vehicle grade level and
 Fuel cell system options with which it is equipped.
 Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 Certain data, such as the follow-
ing, is recorded depending on
 Anti-lock brake system the operation timing and status
 Vehicle dynamics integrated of each function.
management  Basic vehicle behavior related
 SRS airbag system data (electric motor speed,
accelerator/brake pedal oper-
 Seat belt pretensioner system
ation, vehicle speed, etc.)
Be sure to check with your Toy-
 Operating state of the driving
ota dealer for precautionary
support systems (recorded
measures or special instructions
during system operation,
regarding installation of a mobile
includes basic vehicle behav-
two-way radio system.
ior related data)
High voltage parts and cables
 Driving support system sen-
on the fuel cell electric vehicles
sor data
emit approximately the same
amount of electromagnetic  Image data (images from the
waves as the conventional gas- front, rear, vehicle periphery,
oline powered vehicles or home and driver monitor cameras)*2
electronic appliances despite of *2
: The vehicle has multiple cam-
their electromagnetic shielding. eras. For details on from which
Unwanted noise may occur in cameras images are recorded,
the reception of the mobile two- contact your Toyota dealer.
way radio.  Location information
These computers do not record
conversations, sounds, or images
of the inside of the vehicle.
Also, personal information which

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8
may be used to identify the owner may be used for collision analy-
of the vehicle (name, gender, age, sis, malfunction diagnosis, auto-
etc.) is not recorded. mated driving, advanced safety
■ Usage of recorded data and and map related technologies
personal information by the (technology, product develop-
Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 ment, product improvement,
The operating state of each sys- etc.) and products and services
tem, data from each sensor, which use data (maps used for
image data (images from the automated driving and
front/rear cameras), and posi- advanced safety technologies,
tion information is recorded by driving condition analysis, analy-
the Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 in sis of the driving environment,
the following situations. Toyota such as road infrastructure, traf-
obtains this information when fic condition communication,
the vehicle is brought to the etc. Herein referred to as “indi-
dealership or when sent to the vidual services”.)
Toyota servers. Also, this data may be used for
customer support related to a
 In certain collisions or colli-
collision, collision analysis or
sion-like situations
resolution.
 When driving on roads with In situations such as the follow-
certain traffic situations, such ing, Toyota may disclose the
as congestion, poor road sur- recorded data to a third party:
faces, poor weather, etc.
 When the consent of the vehi-
 When driving on certain cle owner (or the lessee if the
roads, such as roads which vehicle is leased) has been
were recently opened or given
extended
 When officially requested by
 After the fuel cell system is the police, a court of law or a
started, for a certain amount government agency
of time
 When it is to be used by Toy-
To learn more about the vehicle ota in a lawsuit
data collected, used and shared
 When data is to be used
by Toyota, please visit
research purposes after pro-
[Link]
cessing so that the data is not
privacyvts/.
tied to a specific vehicle or
■ Data provision and use pur- vehicle owner
pose by third parties
In addition to the above, Toyota
Data recorded by the computers may disclose the data recorded

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9
by the Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 communication individual ser-
to a third party in the following vices
situations:  When providing image data
 When separate consent of the from near a fire, or other area
vehicle owner (or the lessee if that emergency services are
the vehicle is leased) has dispatched, to the fire depart-
been given. This includes sit- ment of a local government
uations when the user sub- which has entered a separate
scribes to an individual contract with Toyota
service which is provided by a
second party and uses vehi- Image information recorded by the
vehicle can be erased by your Toy-
cle recorded data, where the ota dealer.
provider has obtained the The image recording function can
user’s consent for providing be disabled. However, if the function
data to a third party is disabled, data from when systems
 When providing data to a operate will not be available.
company involved in autono- If you wish to stop the collection of
mous driving software, etc. for Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 data by the
the purpose of research and Toyota servers for the purpose of
research and development and pro-
development (technology,
vision to individual services, contact
product development, prod- your Toyota dealer.
uct improvement, etc.) of
automated driving, advanced
safety and map related tech-
Usage of data collected
nologies through Safety Connect
([Link] only)
 When providing image data
and position information to a If your Toyota has Safety Con-
company involved in map cre- nect and if you have subscribed
ation, etc. for the purpose of to those services, please refer to
research and development the Safety Connect Telematics
map related technologies Subscription Service Agreement
 When providing image data for information on data collected
and position information to a and its usage.
local government for the pur-  To learn more about the vehi-
pose of road maintenance, cle data collected, used and
etc. shared by Toyota, please visit
 When providing processed [Link]/privacyvts/.
image data and position infor-
mation to traffic condition

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 10

Statement on Warranty denying warranty coverage.

Additionally, federal law allows a
Coverage for Aftermarket
manufacturer to void a motor
and Recycled Parts (For
vehicle warranty or deny war-
U.S. Owners) ranty coverage if the manufac-
The Magnuson-Moss Warranty turer provides the article or
Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., service to consumers free of
makes it illegal for motor vehicle charge under the warranty or
manufacturers to void a motor the manufacturer has secured a
vehicle warranty or deny war- waiver from the Federal Trade
ranty coverage solely because Commission.
an aftermarket or recycled part
has been used to repair the Event data recorder
vehicle or someone other than
the authorized service provider This vehicle is equipped with an
performed service on the vehi- event data recorder (EDR). The
cle. This provision does not main purpose of an EDR is to
apply to a new motor vehicle record, in certain crash or near
purchased solely for commercial crash-like situations, such as an
or industrial use. air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will
Under federal law, a manufac- assist in understanding how a
turer may deny warranty cover- vehicle’s systems performed.
age and charge for repairs to a The EDR is designed to record
vehicle if it is discovered that an data related to vehicle dynamics
aftermarket or recycled part and safety systems for a short
installed on the vehicle is defec- period of time, typically 30 sec-
tive or was installed incorrectly onds or less.
and caused damage to another
part of the vehicle otherwise The EDR in this vehicle is
covered under warranty. The designed to record such data
Federal Trade Commission as:
requires that a manufacturer • How various systems in your
demonstrate that an aftermar- vehicle were operating;
ket or recycled part or service • Whether or not the driver and
performed by a person other passenger safety belts were
than an authorized service pro- buckled/fastened;
vider caused damage to another • How far (if at all) the driver
part of the vehicle otherwise was depressing the accelera-
covered under warranty before tor and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was trav-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 11
eling. • For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
These data can help provide a  However, if necessary, Toy-
better understanding of the cir- ota may:
cumstances in which crashes • Use the data for research on
and injuries occur. vehicle safety performance
NOTE: EDR data are recorded • Disclose the data to a third party
by your vehicle only if a non-triv- for research purposes without
ial crash situation occurs; no disclosing information about the
specific vehicle or vehicle owner
data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., Scrapping of your Toyota
name, gender, age, and crash
The SRS airbag, seat belt pre-
location) are recorded. How-
tensioner devices and Pop Up
ever, other parties, such as law
Hood system in your Toyota
enforcement, could combine the
contain explosive chemicals. If
EDR data with the type of per-
the vehicle is scrapped with the
sonally identifying data rou-
airbags, seat belt pretensioners
tinely acquired during a crash
and Pop Up Hood micro gas
investigation.
generators left as they are, this
To read data recorded by an
may cause an accident such as
EDR, special equipment is
fire. Be sure to have the sys-
required, and access to the
tems of the SRS airbag, seat
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
belt pretensioner and Pop Up
addition to the vehicle manufac-
Hood micro gas generators
turer, other parties, such as law
removed and disposed of by a
enforcement, that have the spe-
qualified service shop or by your
cial equipment, can read the
Toyota dealer before you scrap
information if they have access
your vehicle.
to the vehicle or the EDR.
 Disclosure of the EDR data Perchlorate Material
Toyota will not disclose the data
recorded in an EDR to a third party Special handling may apply, See
except when: [Link]/
• An agreement from the vehicle’s hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
owner (or the lessee for a leased Your vehicle has components
vehicle) is obtained that may contain perchlorate.
• In response to an official request These components may include
by the police, a court of law or a airbags, seat belt pretension-
government agency ers, Pop Up Hood system, wire-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 12
less remote control batteries, WARNING
and the batteries in the tire pres-
■ General precautions while
sure warning valve and trans- driving
mitters. Driving under the influence: Never
drive your vehicle when under the
influence of alcohol or drugs that
“QR code” have impaired your ability to oper-
ate your vehicle. Alcohol and cer-
The word “QR Code” is regis- tain drugs delay reaction time,
tered trademark of DENSO impair judgment and reduce coor-
WAVE INCORPORATED in dination, which could lead to an
accident that could result in death
Japan and other countries. or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive
Caution symbols attached defensively. Anticipate mistakes
that other drivers or pedestrians
to the high voltage com- might make and be ready to avoid
ponents accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give
High voltage components, such your full attention to driving. Any-
as the power control unit, may thing that distracts the driver, such
as adjusting controls, talking on a
have labels attached indicating cellular phone or reading can
care required. result in a collision with resulting
death or serious injury to you,
Each caution symbol indicates your occupants or others.
the following: ■ General precaution regarding
children’s safety
Symbols Meanings
Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, and never allow
children to have or use the key.
Indicates danger
Children may be able to start the
vehicle or shift the vehicle into
neutral. There is also a danger
that children may injure them-
Indicates high volt- selves by playing with the win-
age part dows, or other features of the
vehicle. In addition, heat build-up
or extremely cold temperatures
inside the vehicle can be fatal to
Indicates not to children.
touch

Indicates high tem-

perature part

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 13

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 14

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 13

Reading this manual Symbols Meanings

Indicates the action
Explains symbols used in (pushing, turning,
this manual. etc.) used to operate
switches and other
devices.
Symbols in this manual
Indicates the out-
come of an operation
Symbols Meanings
(e.g. a lid opens).
WARNING:
Explains something
that, if not obeyed,
could cause death or
serious injury to peo-
ple.
NOTICE:
Explains something
that, if not obeyed,
could cause dam-
age to or a malfunc- Symbols Meanings
tion in the vehicle or Indicates the compo-
its equipment. nent or position
Indicates operating being explained.
or working proce- Means Do not, Do
dures. Follow the not do this, or Do
steps in numerical not let this happen.
order.

Symbols in illustrations

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 14

How to search ■ Searching by title

 Table of contents: P.2
■ Searching by name
 Alphabetical index: P.513

■ Searching by installation
position
 Pictorial index: P.16

■ Searching by symptom or
sound
 What to do if... (Troubleshoot-
ing): P.510

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 15

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 16 Pictorial index

Pictorial index
■Exterior

Doors................................................................................... P.121
Locking/unlocking ................................................................ P.121
Opening/closing the side windows ....................................... P.142
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key .................. P.454
Warning lights/warning messages ............................... P.422, 432
Trunk ................................................................................... P.126
Opening from inside the cabin ............................................. P.127
Opening from outside........................................................... P.127
Opening by using the mechanical key ................................. P.454
Warning lights/warning messages ............................... P.422, 432
Outside rear view mirrors ................................................. P.140
Adjusting the mirror angle .................................................... P.140
Folding the mirrors ............................................................... P.141
Defogging the mirrors .......................................................... P.315
Windshield wipers.............................................................. P.184
Precautions for winter season.............................................. P.308

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 Pictorial index 17

To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)*.................... P.320

Precautions for car wash
(vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers) .................... P.359
Fuel door............................................................................. P.189
Refueling method ................................................................. P.189
Fuel type/hydrogen tanks’ fuel capacity ............................... P.469
Tires..................................................................................... P.381
Tire size/inflation pressure ................................................... P.472
Winter tires/tire chains ......................................................... P.308
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system .................. P.381
Coping with flat tires............................................................. P.438
Hood .................................................................................... P.371
Opening ............................................................................... P.371
Fuel cell unit compartment cover ......................................... P.374
Coping with overheating ...................................................... P.462
Warning messages .............................................................. P.432

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

(Replacing method: P.412)

Headlights........................................................................... P.178

Parking lights/daytime running lights.............................. P.178

Turn signal lights ............................................................... P.170

Tail lights............................................................................. P.178

Tail lights............................................................................. P.178

Stop lights
License plate lights............................................................ P.178

Back-up lights
Changing the shift position to R ........................................... P.165
Side marker lights .............................................................. P.178
*
: If equipped

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 18 Pictorial index

■Instrument panel

Turn signal lever................................................................. P.170

Headlight switch ................................................................ P.178
Headlights/tail lights/license plate lights/
daytime running lights .......................................................... P.178
AHB (Automatic High Beam) ............................................... P.180
Multi-information display .................................................. P.102
Display ................................................................................. P.102
Energy monitor..................................................................... P.109
When a warning message is displayed................................ P.432
Meters ................................................................................... P.96
Reading the meters/
adjusting the instrument panel light ............................... P.96, 101
Warning lights/indicator lights ................................................ P.90
When a warning light turns on ............................................. P.422
Windshield wiper and washer switch............................... P.184
Usage................................................................................... P.184

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 Pictorial index 19

Adding washer fluid.............................................................. P.377

Warning messages .............................................................. P.432
Emergency flasher switch................................................. P.414

Audio system*
Air conditioning system .................................................... P.313
Usage................................................................................... P.313
Air conditioning system .................................................... P.313
Usage................................................................................... P.313
Rear window defogger ......................................................... P.315
Trunk opener main switch................................................. P.128

Shift lever............................................................................ P.165

Changing the shift position................................................... P.166
Precautions for towing ......................................................... P.417
Power switch ...................................................................... P.160
Starting the fuel cell system/changing the modes........ P.160, 164
Emergency stop of the fuel cell system ............................... P.414
When the fuel cell system will not start ................................ P.451
Warning messages .............................................................. P.432
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch ..................... P.138
Adjustment ........................................................................... P.138
Hood lock release lever ..................................................... P.371
*: Refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 20 Pictorial index

■Switches

H2O switch .......................................................................... P.176

“ODO/TRIP” switch ............................................................ P.100

Instrument panel light control switches .......................... P.101

Automatic High Beam switch ........................................... P.180

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) OFF switch..................... P.304

Camera switch*1, 2

AC 120V switch*1................................................................ P.341

Trunk opener switch .......................................................... P.127

Fuel door opener switch ................................................... P.191

P position switch................................................................ P.166

Snow mode switch............................................................. P.302

Driving mode select switch............................................... P.301

Parking brake switch ......................................................... P.171

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 Pictorial index 21

Applying/releasing................................................................ P.171
Precautions against winter season ...................................... P.309
Warning buzzer/message ............................................ P.173, 422
Brake hold switch .............................................................. P.174
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Outside rear view mirror switches ................................... P.140

Window lock switch ........................................................... P.144

Door lock switches ............................................................ P.124

Power window switches .................................................... P.142

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 22 Pictorial index

Meter control switches ...................................................... P.103

Phone switch*

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch ..................................... P.219

Cruise control switches

Dynamic radar cruise control ............................................... P.244
Cruise control ....................................................................... P.252
Audio remote control switches*

Talk switch*
*
: Refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 Pictorial index 23

■Interior

SRS airbags .......................................................................... P.33

Floor mats............................................................................. P.26

Front seats.......................................................................... P.135

Head restraints ................................................................... P.136

Seat belts .............................................................................. P.29

Inside lock buttons ............................................................ P.124

Console box ....................................................................... P.327

Cup holders ........................................................................ P.327

Assist grips ........................................................................ P.339

Coat hooks ......................................................................... P.340

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 24 Pictorial index

■Ceiling

Auxiliary box ...................................................................... P.328

Interior light ........................................................................ P.324

Personal lights ................................................................... P.324

“SOS” button........................................................................ P.62

Door-linked interior light switch ....................................... P.324

Vanity mirrors ..................................................................... P.349

Sun visors........................................................................... P.349

Inside rear view mirror ...................................................... P.139

Garage door opener buttons ............................................ P.350

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 25

For safety and security

1
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.................26
For safe driving ..............27 1

Seat belts .......................29

For safety and security

SRS airbags ...................33
Pop Up Hood .................40
Front passenger occupant
classification system ....43
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children ........48
Child restraint systems...49
1-3. Emergency assistance
Safety Connect ..............62
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system ........67
Alarm..............................68
Theft prevention labels
(Except for Canada) .....70

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 26 1-1. For safe use

The shape of the retaining hooks

Before driving
[Link] safe use

(clips) may differ from that shown in

the illustration.
Observe the following
before starting off in the WARNING
vehicle to ensure safety of Observe the following precau-
driving. tions.
Failure to do so may cause the
driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly
interfering with the pedals while
Installing floor mats driving. An unexpectedly high
speed may result or it may
Use only floor mats designed become difficult to stop the vehi-
specifically for vehicles of the cle. This could lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious
same model and model year as injury.
your vehicle. Fix them securely
in place onto the carpet. ■ When installing the driver’s
floor mat
1 Insert the retaining hooks ● Do not use floor mats designed
(clips) into the floor mat eye- for other models or different
lets. model year vehicles, even if
they are Toyota Genuine floor
mats.
● Only use floor mats designed
for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat
securely using the retaining
hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor
mats on top of each other.

2 Turn the upper knob of each ● Do not place the floor mat bot-
tom-side up or upside-down.
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.

Always align the marks .

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-1. For safe use 27

WARNING For safe driving

■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is For safe driving, adjust the
securely fixed in the correct seat and mirror to an appro-
place with all the provided
retaining hooks (clips). Be espe- priate position before driv-
cially careful to perform this ing.
check after cleaning the floor. 1

Correct driving posture

For safety and security

● With the fuel cell system
stopped and the shift position in
P, fully depress each pedal to
the floor to make sure it does
not interfere with the floor mat.
Adjust the angle of the seat-
back so that you are sitting
straight up and so that you do
not have to lean forward to
steer. (P.135)
Adjust the seat so that you
can depress the pedals fully
and so that your arms bend
slightly at the elbow when
gripping the steering wheel.
(P.135)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P.136)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P.29)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 28 1-1. For safe use

WARNING child becomes large enough to

properly wear the vehicle’s seat
■ For safe driving
belt. (P.49)
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in Adjusting the mirrors
death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the position of the Make sure that you can see
driver’s seat while driving. backward clearly by adjusting
Doing so could cause the driver the inside rear view mirror and
to lose control of the vehicle.
outside rear view mirrors prop-
● Do not place a cushion between erly. (P.139, 140)
the driver or passenger and the
seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct
posture from being achieved,
and reduce the effectiveness of
the seat belt and head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the
front seats.
Objects placed under the front
seats may become jammed in
the seat tracks and stop the
seat from locking in place. This
may lead to an accident and the
adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
● Always observe the legal speed
limit when driving on public
roads.
● When driving over long dis-
tances, take regular breaks
before you start to feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy
while driving, do not force your-
self to continue driving and take
a break immediately.

Correct use of the seat

belts
Make sure that all occupants are
wearing their seat belts before
driving the vehicle. (P.29)
Use a child restraint system
appropriate for the child until the

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-1. For safe use 29

Seat belts ■ Pregnant women

Make sure that all occu-

pants are wearing their seat
belts before driving the
vehicle.
1
WARNING
Observe the following precautions

For safety and security

to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt Obtain medical advice and wear
● Ensure that all passengers wear the seat belt in the proper way.
a seat belt. (P.30)
Women who are pregnant should
● Always wear a seat belt prop- position the lap belt as low as
erly. possible over the hips in the same
● Each seat belt should be used manner as other occupants,
by one person only. Do not use extending the shoulder belt com-
a seat belt for more than one pletely over the shoulder and
person at once, including chil- avoiding belt contact with the
dren. rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn prop-
● Toyota recommends that chil- erly, not only the pregnant
dren be seated in the rear seat woman, but also the fetus could
and always use a seat belt suffer death or serious injury as a
and/or an appropriate child result of sudden braking or a colli-
restraint system. sion.
● To achieve a proper seating ■ People suffering illness
position, do not recline the seat
more than necessary. The seat Obtain medical advice and wear
belt is most effective when the the seat belt in the proper way.
occupants are sitting up straight (P.30)
and well back in the seats. ■ When children are in the vehi-
● Do not wear the shoulder belt cle
under your arm. P.57
● Always wear your seat belt low ■ Seat belt damage and wear
and snug across your hips. ● Do not damage the seat belts
by allowing the belt, plate, or
buckle to be jammed in the
door.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 30 1-1. For safe use

WARNING  Position the lap belt as low as

possible over the hips.
● Inspect the seat belt system
periodically. Check for cuts,  Adjust the position of the
fraying, and loose parts. Do not seatback. Sit up straight and
use a damaged seat belt until it
is replaced. Damaged seat belts well back in the seat.
cannot protect an occupant  Do not twist the seat belt.
from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate ■ Child seat belt usage
are locked and the belt is not
twisted. The seat belts of your vehicle were
If the seat belt does not function principally designed for persons of
correctly, immediately contact adult size.
your Toyota dealer. ● Use a child restraint system
appropriate for the child, until the
● Replace the seat assembly, child becomes large enough to
including the belts, if your vehi- properly wear the vehicle’s seat
cle has been involved in a seri- belt. (P.49)
ous accident, even if there is no
obvious damage. ● When the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehi-
● Do not attempt to install, cle’s seat belt, follow the instruc-
remove, modify, disassemble or tions regarding seat belt usage.
dispose of the seat belts. Have (P.29)
any necessary repairs carried ■ Seat belt extender
out by your Toyota dealer. Inap-
propriate handling may lead to If your seat belts cannot be fastened
incorrect operation. securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toy-
Correct use of the seat ota dealer free of charge.
belts

WARNING
■ Using a seat belt extender
Observe the following precautions
 Extend the shoulder belt so to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
that it comes fully over the swerving or an accident.
shoulder, but does not come Failure to do so may cause death
into contact with the neck or or serious injury.
slide off the shoulder.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-1. For safe use 31

WARNING a click sound is heard.

● Do not wear the seat belt 2 To release the seat belt,
extender if you can fasten the
seat belt without the extender. press the release button .
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out
● Do not use the seat belt
extender when installing a child of the retractor, firmly pull the belt
restraint system because the and release it.
belt will not securely hold the 1
child restraint system, increas- ■ Emergency locking retractor
ing the risk of death or serious (ELR)

For safety and security

injury in the event of an acci-
dent. The retractor will lock the belt during
a sudden stop or on impact. It may
● The personalized extender may also lock if you lean forward too
not be safe on another vehicle, quickly. A slow, easy motion will
when used by another person, allow the belt to extend so that you
or at a different seating position can move around fully.
other than the one originally ■ Automatic locking retractor
intended. (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is
completely extended and then
NOTICE
retracted even slightly, the belt is
■ When using a seat belt locked in that position and cannot
extender be extended. This feature is used to
hold the child restraint system
When releasing the seat belt, (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again,
press on the buckle release but- fully retract the belt and then pull the
ton on the extender, not on the belt out once more. (P.49)
seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the ■ After using the rear center seat
vehicle interior and the extender belt
itself. Stow seat belt buckle in the pocket.

Fastening and releasing

the seat belt

1 To fasten the seat belt, push

the plate into the buckle until

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 32 1-1. For safe use

Adjusting the seat belt retract the seat belts of the front
seats and rear outer seats to
shoulder anchor height
securely restrain the occupants.
(front seats)
The pretensioners will not operate
in minor frontal or side impacts, or
rear impacts.

■ Replacing the belt after the pre-

tensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple
collisions, the pretensioner will acti-
vate for the first collision, but will not
activate for the second or subse-
quent collisions.
1 Push the seat belt shoulder ■ PCS-linked control
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System)
anchor down while pressing determines that the possibility of a
the release button . collision with a vehicle is high, the
seat belt pretensioners will be pre-
2 Push the seat belt shoulder pared to operate.
anchor up while pressing the
WARNING
release button .
■ Seat belt pretensioners
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of injury in the
click. event of sudden braking or an
accident.
WARNING Failure to do so may result in
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor death or serious injury.
Always make sure the shoulder ● Do not place anything, such as
belt is positioned across the cen- a cushion, on the front passen-
ter of your shoulder. The belt ger’s seat. Doing so will
should be kept away from your disperse the passenger’s
neck, but not falling off your shoul- weight, which prevents the sen-
der. Failure to do so could reduce sor from detecting the passen-
the amount of protection in an ger’s weight properly. As a
accident and cause death or seri- result, the seat belt pretensioner
ous injuries in the event of a sud- for the front passenger’s seat
den stop, sudden swerve or may not operate in the event of
accident. a collision.
● If the pretensioner has oper-
Seat belt pretensioners ated, the SRS warning light will
illuminate. In this situation, the
When the vehicle is subjected to seat belt cannot be used and
must be replaced by your Toy-
a severe frontal or side impact ota dealer.
or rollover, the pretensioners

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-1. For safe use 33

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags deploy when the vehicle is subjected to cer-

tain types of severe impact that may cause significant injury
to the occupants. The airbags work together with the seat
belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
1

SRS airbag system

For safety and security

■ Location of the SRS airbags

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Help reduce impact to the head and chest of the driver and front
passenger
SRS knee airbags
Help reduce impact to the driver and front passenger
SRS side airbags
Help reduce impact to the chest of the occupants of the front
seats
SRS curtain shield airbags
• Help reduce impact to the heads of the occupants of the front and rear
outer seats

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 34 1-1. For safe use

• Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the
event of a vehicle rollover
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed
based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The air-
bag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on
information obtained from the sensors, etc., shown in the system
components diagram above. This information includes crash sever-
ity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical
reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to
help restrain the motion of the occupants.
with the occupants to ascertain
■ If the SRS airbags deploy the level of emergency and assis-
(inflate) tance required. If the occupants
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising, are unable to communicate, the
etc., may be sustained from SRS agent automatically treats the call
airbags, due to the extremely high as an emergency and helps to dis-
speed of deployment (inflation) by patch the necessary emergency
hot gases. services. (P.62)
• When an SRS airbag has been
● A loud noise and white powder will deployed
be emitted. • When a seat belt pretensioner has
● Parts of the airbag module (steer- operated
ing wheel hub, airbag cover and • When the vehicle has been
inflator) as well as the parts involved in a severe rear-end colli-
around the airbags may be hot for sion
several minutes. The airbag itself ■ The SRS airbags deploy in a
may also be hot. frontal impact when
● The windshield may crack. ● The following SRS airbags will
● The fuel cell system will be deploy in the event of an impact
stopped and hydrogen supply will that exceeds a threshold level
be stopped. (P.85) (level of force corresponding to an
● All of the doors will be unlocked. approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 -
(P.122) 30 km/h] frontal collision with a
fixed wall that does not move or
● The brakes and stop lights will be deform):
controlled automatically. (P.304) • SRS front airbags
● The interior lights will turn on auto- • SRS knee airbags
matically. (P.325) ● The threshold level at which the
● The emergency flashers will turn SRS airbags will deploy will be
on automatically. (P.414) higher than normal in the in the
following situations:
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if • When the vehicle collides with an
any of the following situations object, such as a parked vehicle
occur, the system is designed to or sign pole, which moves or
send an emergency call to the deforms on impact
response center, notifying them of • If the vehicle is involved in an
the vehicle’s location (without underride collision, such as a colli-
needing to push the “SOS” button) sion in which the front of the vehi-
and an agent will attempt to speak cle “underrides”, or goes under,

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-1. For safe use 35
the bed of a truck
● Depending on the type of collision,
only the following may deploy:
• Seat belt pretensioners
• SRS knee airbags
● The SRS airbags for the front pas-
senger’s seat will not deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
passenger seat. However, the 1
● The following airbags may deploy
SRS airbags for the front passen- if the vehicle becomes signifi-
ger’s seat may deploy, even if the cantly tilted or is strongly impacted

For safety and security

seat is unoccupied, if luggage is by skidding into a curb, etc.:
put on the seat. • SRS curtain shield airbags
● In the event of an especially
severe frontal collision, the left
and right SRS curtain shield air-
bags may also deploy.
■ The SRS airbags deploy in a
side impact when
● The following SRS airbags will
deploy in the event of an impact
that exceeds the set threshold
level (level of force corresponding ■ The SRS side airbags will not
to the impact force produced by deploy when
an approximately 1500 kg [3300 ● The following SRS airbags will not
lb.] vehicle colliding with the pas- normally deploy in side or rear col-
senger compartment at a perpen- lisions, vehicle rollovers, or low
dicular angle at an approximate speed frontal collisions. However,
speed of 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18 if such a collision causes sufficient
mph]): sudden deceleration, the SRS air-
• SRS side airbags bags may deploy.
• SRS curtain shield airbags • SRS front airbags
● If the vehicle is involved in a roll- • SRS knee airbags
over, the following SRS airbags
will deploy:
• Both left and right SRS curtain
shield airbags
■ The SRS airbags deploy in an
underside impact when
● The following airbags may deploy
if the underside of the vehicle col-
lides with a hard object: ● The following SRS airbags may
• SRS front airbags not deploy if the vehicle is collided
• SRS knee airbags with at a certain angle or in a side
• SRS side airbags collision where an area of the
• SRS curtain shield airbags vehicle other than the passenger
compartment is collided with:
• SRS side airbags
• SRS curtain shield airbags

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 36 1-1. For safe use

• SRS front airbags

• SRS knee airbags

● The following SRS airbags will not

normally deploy in front or rear
collisions, vehicle rollovers, or low ● When a door or its surrounding
speed side collisions: area is damaged, deformed or has
• SRS side airbags had a hole made in it, or was
involved in a collision that was not
severe enough to cause any of
the following SRS airbags to
deploy:
• SRS side airbags
• SRS curtain shield airbags

● The following SRS airbags will not

normally deploy in rear collisions,
end over end vehicle rollovers, or
low speed front or side collisions:
• SRS curtain shield airbags

● When the pad section of the steer-

ing wheel, the dashboard near the
front passenger SRS airbag or the
lower side of the instrument panel
is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
● When the surface of a seat with
an SRS side airbag is scratched,
■ When to contact your Toyota cracked, or otherwise damaged.
dealer
● When the part of a front pillar, rear
In the following situations, the vehi- pillar or roof side rail garnish (pad-
cle will require inspection and/or ding) which covers a SRS curtain
repair. Contact your Toyota dealer shield airbag is scratched,
as soon as possible. cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● When any of the SRS airbags
have been deployed WARNING
● When the front of the vehicle is
damaged or deformed, or was ■ SRS airbag precautions
involved in a collision that was not Observe the following precau-
severe enough to cause any of tions. Failure to do so may result
the following SRS airbags to in death or serious injury.
deploy:

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-1. For safe use 37

WARNING • If your steering wheel is adjust-

able, tilt it downward. This
● The driver and all passengers points the airbag toward your
must wear their seat belts cor- chest instead of your head and
rectly. neck. The seat should be
The SRS airbags are supple- adjusted as recommended by
mental devices to be used with the NHTSA, while still being
the seat belts. able to control the vehicle with
the pedals and steering wheel, 1
● The SRS driver airbag deploys and maintaining your view of the
with considerable force, and instrument panel controls.
can cause death or serious

For safety and security

injury, especially if the driver is ● If a seat belt extender has been
very close to the airbag. The connected to a front seat belt
National Highway Traffic Safety buckle but the latch plate of the
Administration (NHTSA) seat belt has not been fastened
advises: to the seat belt extender, the
Since the risk zone for the SRS airbag system will judge
driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 that the occupant is wearing the
in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, seat belt even though the seat
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) belt has not been fastened. In
from your driver airbag provides this case, the SRS front airbags
you with a clear margin of may not deploy correctly in a
safety. This distance is mea- collision, resulting in death or
sured from the center of the serious injury. Be sure to wear
steering wheel to your breast- the seat belt correctly when
bone. If your current driving using a seat belt extender.
position places you less than 10
in. (250 mm) away from the
driver airbag, you can change
your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as
far as possible while still being
able to reach the pedals com-
fortably.
● The SRS front passenger air-
• Slightly recline the seatback. bag deploys with considerable
Although vehicle designs vary, force, and can cause death or
many drivers can achieve the serious injury, especially if the
10 in. (250 mm) distance, even front passenger is very close to
with the driver seat all the way the airbag. The front passenger
forward, simply by reclining the seat should be positioned as far
seatback somewhat. If reclining possible from the airbag with
the seatback makes it hard to the seatback adjusted so that
see the road, raise yourself by the passenger is sat upright.
using a firm, non-slippery cush-
ion, or raise the seat if your
vehicle has that feature.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 38 1-1. For safe use

WARNING ● Do not lean against the door,

roof side rail, or front, side, or
● Improperly seated and/or rear pillar.
restrained infants and children
can be killed or seriously injured
by a deploying airbag. An infant
or child who is too small to use
a seat belt should be properly
secured using a child restraint
system. Toyota strongly recom-
mends that all infants and chil-
dren be placed in the rear seats
of the vehicle and properly
restrained. The rear seats are ● Do not allow anyone to kneel on
safer for infants and children a seat toward the door or put
than the front passenger seat. their head or hands outside the
(P.49) vehicle.
● Do not sit on the edge of the
seat or lean against the dash-
board.

● Do not attach anything to or

lean anything against areas
such as the dashboard, steering
wheel pad and lower portion of
● Do not allow a child to stand in the instrument panel.
front of the SRS front passenger
airbag or sit on the knees of a
front passenger.

● Front seat occupants should

never hold items on their lap.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-1. For safe use 39

WARNING ● Do not touch any components

of the SRS airbags immediately
● Do not attach anything to areas after the SRS airbags have
such as the doors, windshield, deployed (inflated) as they may
side windows, front or rear pil- be hot.
lars, roof side rails and assist
grips. (With the exception of the ● If breathing becomes difficult
speed limit label P.443) after the SRS airbags have
deployed, open a door or win- 1
dow to allow fresh air in, or
leave the vehicle if it is safe to
do so. Wash off any residue as

For safety and security

soon as possible to prevent skin
irritation.
● If a part where an SRS airbag is
stored is damaged or cracked,
have it replaced by your Toyota
● Do not hang coat hangers or dealer.
other hard objects on the coat
hooks. These items could ● Do not place anything, such as
become projectiles if the SRS a cushion, on the front passen-
curtain shield airbags deploy, ger’s seat. Doing so will
possibly leading to death or disperse the passenger’s
serious injury. weight, which prevents the sen-
sor from detecting the passen-
● If a vinyl cover is attached to the ger’s weight properly. As a
area where the SRS knee air- result, the SRS front airbags for
bag deploys, be sure to remove the front passenger’s seat may
it. not deploy in the event of a colli-
sion.
● Do not use seat accessories
which cover the parts from ■ Modification and disposal of
which the SRS airbags deploy, SRS airbag system compo-
as they may interfere with infla- nents
tion of the SRS airbags. Such Do not dispose of your vehicle or
accessories may prevent the perform any of the following modi-
SRS airbags from deploying fications without consulting your
correctly, may disable the sys- Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags
tem or cause the SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy unin-
to inflate unintentionally, possi- tentionally, possibly leading to
bly resulting in death or serious death or serious injury.
injury.
● Removal, installation, disas-
● Do not strike or apply significant sembly or repair of the SRS air-
force to the SRS airbag system bags
components, front doors or their
surrounding area. ● Repair, removal or modification
Doing so may cause the SRS of the following parts or their
airbags to malfunction. surrounding
• Steering wheel
• Instrument panel

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 40 1-1. For safe use

WARNING Pop Up Hood

• Dashboard
• Seats
In the event of a frontal col-
lision with a body, such as a
• Seat upholstery pedestrian, the Pop Up
• Front pillars Hood system raises the
• Side pillars
hood to reduce the possibil-
ity of a serious impact to the
• Rear pillars pedestrian’s head area by
• Roof side rails adding clearance to the fuel
cell unit compartment.
• Front door panels
• Front door trim When the sensors located
at the back of the front
• Front door speakers bumper detect a frontal
● Modifications to the front door impact with a body, such as
panels (such as making holes in a pedestrian, which meets
them)
or exceeds the threshold
● Repair or modification of the fol- level while the vehicle is
lowing parts or their surrounding
being driven within the
• Front fender operational speed range,
• Front bumper the system operates.
• Sides of the vehicle interior
System components
● Installation of the following parts
or accessories
• Bull bars or kangaroo bars
• Snow plows
• Winches
• Roof luggage carriers
● Modifications to the vehicle’s
suspension
● Installation of electronic devices
such as mobile two-way radios Sensors
(RF-transmitter) and CD players
Hood
● Modifications to your vehicle for
a persons with a physical dis- Lifters
ability

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-1. For safe use 41
■ Conditions under which the
■ Pop Up Hood precautions Pop Up Hood may not operate
● Before scrapping your vehicle, properly
make sure to contact your Toyota ● If a pedestrian collides with the
dealer. right or left corner of the front
● The Pop Up Hood system cannot bumper or the side of the vehicle.
be reused once it has operated. As such impacts may be difficult to
Have it replaced by your Toyota detect, the system may not oper-
dealer. ate. 1
■ PCS-linked functions ● If the vehicle speed is not
detected correctly, such as if the
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System)

For safety and security

vehicle is sliding sideways, the
determines that the possibility of a system may not operate properly.
collision with a pedestrian or bicy-
clist is high, the Pop Up Hood will be ■ Conditions under which the
prepared to operate. Pop Up Hood will not operate
■ Pop Up Hood operational condi- The Pop Up Hood will not operate in
tions the following situations:
The Pop Up Hood will operate when ● Colliding with a lying person
the vehicle detects an impact such ● A frontal impact applied to the
as the following: front bumper while driving at
● The front bumper detects a frontal speeds outside of the operational
impact equivalent to or greater speed range
than that of a pedestrian while the ● A side impact or rear impact
vehicle being driven within the ● A vehicle rollover (In some acci-
operational speed range of dent situations, the Pop Up Hood
approximately 16 to 34 mph (25 to may operate.)
55 km/h). (The system is operated
by an impact of threshold level or
greater, even in the case of a WARNING
minor collision that may not leave
a trace on the front bumper. Also, ■ When the Pop Up Hood is
depending on the impact condi- operated
tions or vehicle speed, the system ● Do not pull the hood lock
may operate by a collision with a release lever. Doing so after the
light or small object or a small ani- Pop Up Hood has operated will
mal.) further raise the hood and may
● In other situations, such as the fol- cause an injury. Do not drive
lowing the system may operate with the hood raised, as doing
when an impact is applied to the so may block the driver’s vision,
lower part of the vehicle or front possibly causing an accident.
bumper: ● Do not forcibly push down the
• Colliding with a curb hood. As the popped up hood
• Falling into a deep hole cannot be lowered by hand,
• Landing hard doing so may deform the hood
• Hitting the slope of a parking lot, or cause an injury.
an undulating road, a protruding
object or falling object

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 42 1-1. For safe use

WARNING ● Do not install anything to the

front bumper or hood, as doing
● If the Pop Up Hood has oper- so may prevent the sensors
ated, have it replaced by your from detecting an impact cor-
Toyota dealer. If the Pop Up rectly and prevent the system
Hood has operated, stop the from operating properly.
vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer. ● Do not close the hood with force
or apply load to the lifters, as
● Do not touch the lifters immedi- doing so may damage the lifters
ately after the Pop Up Hood has and prevent the system from
operated, as the lifters may be operating properly.
hot and burn you.
● Do not modify the suspension,
as changes made to the vehicle
NOTICE height may prevent the system
from operating properly.
■ Pop Up Hood precautions
● Make sure to close the hood
before driving, as the system
may not operate properly if the
hood is not fully closed.
● Make sure that all 4 tires are of
the specified size and inflated to
the specified tire pressure. If
tires of a different size are used,
the system may not operate
properly.
● If something has hit the area
around the front bumper, the
sensors may be damaged even
if the Pop Up Hood has not
operated. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
● Do not remove or repair the
parts or wiring of the Pop Up
Hood, as doing so may cause
accidental operation or prevent
the system from operating prop-
erly. If repair or replacement is
necessary, contact your Toyota
dealer.
● Do not remove such compo-
nents as the front bumper, hood
or suspension, or replace them
with non-genuine parts, as
doing so may prevent the sys-
tem from operating properly.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-1. For safe use 43

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant

classification system. This system detects the conditions of
the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the fol-
lowing SRS airbags.
1
 SRS front passenger airbag
 SRS front passenger knee airbag

For safety and security

System components

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

SRS warning light
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light
“AIRBAG ON” indicator light

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 44 1-1. For safe use

Front passenger occupant classification system condi-

tions and operation

■ Adult*1

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG

“AIR BAG ON”
OFF” indicator lights
Indicators/warning
SRS warning light Off
lights
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light Off*2 or flashing*3

Front passenger airbag

Devices Activated
Front passenger knee airbag

■ Child*4

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG “AIR BAG OFF” or

OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG ON”*4
Indicators/warning
lights SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light Off*2 or flashing*3

Front passenger airbag Deactivated or

Devices
Front passenger knee airbag activated*4

■ Child restraint system with infant*5

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF”*6
Indicators/warning
SRS warning light Off
lights
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light Off*2 or flashing*3

Front passenger airbag

Devices Deactivated
Front passenger knee airbag

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-1. For safe use 45
■ Unoccupied

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG

“AIR BAG OFF”
OFF” indicator lights
Indicators/warning
SRS warning light
lights
Front passenger’s seat belt Off
reminder light 1
Front passenger airbag
Devices Deactivated

For safety and security

Front passenger knee airbag

■ System malfunction

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG

“AIR BAG OFF”
OFF” indicator lights
Indicators/warning
SRS warning light
lights
Front passenger’s seat belt On
reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Devices Deactivated
Front passenger knee airbag
*1
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize them
as an adult depending on their physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt
*3
: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*4
: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convert-
ible seat, the system may not recognize them as a child. Factors which
may affect this can be the physique or posture.
*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on
the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P.52)
*6
: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how
to install the child restraint system properly. (P.49)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 46 1-1. For safe use

WARNING ● Do not put objects under the

front passenger seat.
■ Front passenger occupant
classification system precau- ● Do not recline the front passen-
tions ger seatback so far that it
Observe the following precautions touches a rear seat. This may
regarding the front passenger cause the “AIRBAG OFF” indi-
occupant classification system. cator light to be illuminated,
Failure to do so may cause death which indicates that the SRS
or serious injury. airbags for the front passenger
will not activate in the event of a
● Wear the seat belt properly. severe accident. If the seatback
touches the rear seat, return the
● Make sure the front passenger’s seatback to a position where it
seat belt plate has not been left does not touch the rear seat.
inserted into the buckle before Keep the front passenger seat-
someone sits in the front pas- back as upright as possible
senger seat. when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback exces-
● Make sure the “AIRBAG OFF” sively may lessen the effective-
indicator light is not illuminated ness of the seat belt system.
when using the seat belt
extender for the front passenger ● If an adult sits in the front pas-
seat. If the “AIRBAG OFF” indi- senger seat, the “AIRBAG ON”
cator light is illuminated, discon- indicator light is illuminated. If
nect the extender tongue from the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator is
the seat belt buckle, and recon- illuminated, ask the passenger
nect the seat belt. Reconnect to sit up straight, well back in
the seat belt extender after the seat, feet on the floor, and
making sure the “AIRBAG ON” with the seat belt worn correctly.
indicator light is illuminated. If If the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator
you use the seat belt extender still remains illuminated, either
while the “AIRBAG OFF” indica- ask the passenger to move to
tor light is illuminated, the SRS the rear seat, or if that is not
airbags for the front passenger possible, move the front pas-
will not activate, which could senger seat fully rearward.
cause death or serious injury in
the event of a collision. ● When it is unavoidable to install
a forward-facing child restraint
● Do not apply a heavy load to the system on the front passenger
front passenger seat or equip- seat, install the child restraint
ment (e.g. seatback pocket). system on the front passenger
seat in the proper order.
● Do not put weight on the front (P.52)
passenger seat by putting your
hands or feet on the front pas- ● Do not modify or remove the
senger seat seatback from the front seats.
rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift
the front passenger seat with
their feet or press on the seat-
back with their legs.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-1. For safe use 47

WARNING
● Do not kick the front passenger
seat or subject it to severe
impact. Otherwise, the SRS
warning light may come on to
indicate a malfunction of the
front passenger occupant clas-
sification system. In this case, 1
contact your Toyota dealer
immediately.

For safety and security

● Child restraint systems installed
on the rear seat should not con-
tact the front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory,
such as a cushion and seat
cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the
upholstery of the front seat.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 48 1-2. Child safety

Riding with children

[Link] safety

WARNING
■ When children are in the vehi-
Observe the following pre- cle
cautions when children are Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, and never allow
in the vehicle. children to have or use the key.
Use a child restraint system Children may be able to start the
appropriate for the child, vehicle or shift the vehicle into
until the child becomes neutral. There is also a danger
that children may injure them-
large enough to properly selves by playing with the win-
wear the vehicle’s seat belt. dows or other features of the
vehicle. In addition, heat build-up
 It is recommended that chil- or extremely cold temperatures
dren sit in the rear seats to inside the vehicle can be fatal to
avoid accidental contact children.
with the shift lever, wiper
switch, etc.
 Use the rear door child-pro-
tector lock or the window
lock switch to avoid children
opening the door while driv-
ing or operating the power
window accidentally.
(P.124, 144)
 Do not let small children
operate equipment which
may catch or pinch body
parts, such as the power
window, hood, trunk, seats,
etc.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-2. Child safety 49

Child restraint sys- Points to remember

tems
The laws of all 50 states of the
U.S.A. as well as Canada now
Before installing a child
require the use of child restraint
restraint system in the vehi-
systems.
cle, there are precautions
that need to be observed,  Prioritize and observe the 1
different types of child warnings, as well as the laws
restraint systems, as well and regulations for child

For safety and security

as installation methods, restraint systems.
etc., written in this manual.  Use a child restraint system
Use a child restraint system until the child becomes large
when riding with a small child enough to properly wear the
that cannot properly use a vehicle’s seat belt.
seat belt. For the child’s  Choose a child restraint sys-
safety, install the child tem that suits your vehicle
restraint system to a rear seat. and is appropriate to the age
Be sure to follow the installa- and size of the child.
tion method that is in the oper-
WARNING
ation manual enclosed with
the restraint system. ■ When a child is riding
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Table of contents Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
Points to remember: P.49 ● For effective protection in auto-
Child restraint system: P.51 mobile accidents and sudden
stops, a child must be properly
When using a child restraint sys- restrained, using a seat belt or
tem: P.52 child restraint system which is
correctly installed. For installa-
Child restraint system installa- tion details, refer to the opera-
tion manual enclosed with the
tion method child restraint system. General
• Fixed with a seat belt: P.53 installation instruction is pro-
• Fixed with a child restraint vided in this manual.
LATCH anchor: P.58
• Using an anchor bracket (for
top tether strap): P.60

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 50 1-2. Child safety

WARNING
● Toyota strongly urges the use of
a proper child restraint system
that conforms to the weight and
size of the child, installed on the
rear seat. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seat than in the front seat.
● Holding a child in your or some-
one else’s arms is not a substi-
tute for a child restraint system.
In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield
or between the holder and the
interior of the vehicle.
■ Handling the child restraint
system
If the child restraint system is not
properly fixed in place, the child or
other passengers may be seri-
ously injured or even killed in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving, or an accident.
● If the vehicle were to receive a
strong impact from an accident,
etc., it is possible that the child
restraint system has damage
that is not readily visible. In
such cases, do not reuse the
restraint system.
● Make sure you have complied
with all installation instructions
provided with the child restraint
system manufacturer and that
the system is properly secured.
● Keep the child restraint system
properly secured on the seat
even if it is not in use. Do not
store the child restraint system
unsecured in the passenger
compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the
child restraint system, remove it
from the vehicle or store it
securely in the trunk.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-2. Child safety 51

Child restraint system

■ Types of child restraint system installation methods
Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint
system about the installation of the child restraint system.
Installation method Page
1

For safety and security

Seat belt attachment P.53

Child restraint LATCH

P.58
anchors attachment

Anchor brackets (for

top tether strap) attach- P.60
ment

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 52 1-2. Child safety

When using a child WARNING

restraint system ■ When using a child restraint
system
■ When installing a child Observe the following precau-
restraint system to a front tions.
passenger seat Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
For the safety of a child, install
● Never install a rear-facing child
child restraint systems to a rear restraint system on the front
seats. When installing child passenger seat even if the “AIR-
restraint system to a front pas- BAG OFF” indicator light is illu-
minated. In the event of an
senger seat is unavoidable, accident, the force of the rapid
adjust the seat as follows and inflation of the front passenger
install the child restraint system. airbag can cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child if the rear-
 Move the front seat fully rear- facing child restraint system is
ward. installed on the front passenger
seat.
 Adjust the seatback angle to
● A forward-facing child restraint
the most upright position. system may be installed on the
When installing a forward-facing front passenger seat only when
it is unavoidable. A child
child seat, if there is a gap between restraint system that requires a
the child seat and the seatback, top tether strap should not be
adjust the seatback angle until used in the front passenger seat
good contact is achieved. since there is no top tether strap
anchor for the front passenger
 If the head restraint interferes seat.
with the child restraint system
installation and the head
restraint can be removed,
remove the head restraint.
Otherwise, put the head
restraint in the upper most
position.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-2. Child safety 53

WARNING ● When a booster seat is

installed, always ensure that the
● A forward-facing child restraint shoulder belt is positioned
system may be installed on the across the center of the child’s
front passenger seat only when shoulder. The belt should be
it is unavoidable. When install- kept away from the child’s neck,
ing a forward-facing child but not so that it could fall off the
restraint system on the front child’s shoulder.
passenger seat, adjust the seat- 1
back angle to the most upright ● Use child restraint system suit-
position, move the seat to the able to the age and size of the
rearmost position, and raise the child and install it to the rear

For safety and security

seat to the upper most position, seat.
even if the “AIRBAG OFF” indi-
cator light is illuminated. ● If the driver’s seat interferes
with the child restraint system
and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the
child restraint system to the
right-hand rear seat.

● Do not allow the child to lean

his/her head or any part of
his/her body against the door or
the area of the seat, front or rear
pillars, or roof side rails from
which the SRS side airbags or ● Adjust the front passenger seat
SRS curtain shield airbags so that it does not interfere with
deploy even if the child is the child restraint system.
seated in the child restraint sys-
tem. It is dangerous if the SRS
side and curtain shield airbags Child restraint system
inflate, and the impact could fixed with a seat belt
cause death or serious injury to
the child.
A child restraint system for a
small child or baby must itself be
properly restrained on the seat
with the lap portion of the
lap/shoulder belt.
■ Installing child restraint
system using a seat belt
(child restraint lock func-
tion belt)
Install the child restraint system
in accordance to the operation

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 54 1-2. Child safety

manual enclosed with the child in lock mode. In lock mode,

restraint system. the belt cannot be extended.
■ Rear-facing  Infant
seat/convertible seat
1 Adjust the head restraint to
the lowermost position.
(P.136)
2 Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the rear seat facing
the rear of the vehicle.
5 While pushing the child
restraint system down into
the rear seat, allow the shoul-
der belt to retract until the
child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
3 Run the seat belt through the check that it cannot be extended.
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.

6 After installing the child

restraint system, rock it back
and forth to ensure that it is
installed securely. (P.57)
4 Fully extend the shoulder belt ■ Forward-facing  Convert-
and allow it to retract to put it ible seat
1 Adjust the seat
 When using the front passen-
ger seat
If installing the child restraint sys-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-2. Child safety 55
tem to the front passenger seat is in lock mode. In lock mode,
unavoidable, refer to P.52 for front the belt cannot be extended.
passenger seat adjustment.
 When using the rear seat
Adjust the head restraint to the low-
ermost position. (P.136)
2 Place the child restraint sys- 1
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.

For safety and security

5 While pushing the child
restraint system into the rear
seat, allow the shoulder belt
to retract until the child
restraint system is securely in
place.
After the shoulder belt has
3 Run the seat belt through the retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
child restraint system and check that it cannot be extended.
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.

6 If the child restraint has a top

tether strap, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s
4 Fully extend the shoulder belt operation manual regarding
and allow it to retract to put it the installation, using the top
tether strap to latch onto the
top tether strap anchor.
(P.60)
7 After installing the child
restraint system, rock it back

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 56 1-2. Child safety

and forth to ensure that it is Check that the shoulder belt is cor-
installed securely. (P.57) rectly positioned over the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is as
■ Booster seat low as possible. (P.29)
1 If installing the child restraint
system to the front passen-
ger seat is unavoidable, refer
to P.52 for front passenger
seat adjustment.
2 Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
 Booster type ■ Removing a child restraint
system installed with a seat
belt
Press the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
When releasing the buckle, the
child restraint system may spring
up due to the rebound of the seat
cushion. Release the buckle while
holding down the child restraint
 High back type system.
Since the seat belt automatically
reels itself, slowly return it to the
stowing position.

3 Sit the child in the child

restraint system. Fit the seat
belt to the child restraint sys-
tem according to the manu-
facturer’s instructions and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-2. Child safety 57

WARNING ● When securing some types of

child restraint systems in rear
■ When installing a child seats, it may not be possible to
restraint system properly use the seat belts in
Observe the following precau- positions next to the child
tions. restraint without interfering with
Failure to do so may result in it or affecting seat belt effective-
death or serious injury. ness. Be sure your seat belt fits
snugly across your shoulder 1
● Do not allow children to play and low on your hips. If it does
with the seat belt. If the seat belt not, or if it interferes with the
becomes twisted around a child restraint, move to a differ-

For safety and security

child’s neck, it may lead to ent position. Failure to do so
choking or other serious injuries may result in death or serious
that could result in death. injury.
If this occurs and the buckle
cannot be unfastened, scissors ● When installing a child restraint
should be used to cut the belt. system in the rear center seat,
adjust both seat cushions to the
● Ensure that the belt and plate same position and align both
are securely locked and the seatbacks at the same angle.
seat belt is not twisted. Otherwise, the child restraint
system cannot be securely
● Shake the child restraint system restrained and this may cause
left and right, and forward and death or serious injuries in the
backward to ensure that it has event of sudden braking, sud-
been securely installed. den swerving or an accident.
● When a booster seat is ● If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm
installed, always ensure that the the security of the child restraint
shoulder belt is positioned system.
across the center of the child’s
shoulder. The belt should be ■ When installing a booster
kept away from the child’s neck, seat
but not so that it could fall off the To prevent the belt from going into
child’s shoulder. ALR lock mode, do not fully
● Follow all installation instruc- extend the shoulder belt. ALR
tions provided by the child mode causes the belt to tighten
restraint system manufacturer. only. This could cause injury or
discomfort to the child. (P.31)
■ Do not use a seat belt
extender
If a seat belt extender is used
when installing a child restraint
system, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint
system, which could cause death
or serious injury to the child or
other passengers in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerv-
ing or an accident.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 58 1-2. Child safety

Child restraint system The symbol on a child

fixed with a child restraint restraint system indicates
LATCH anchor the presence of a lower con-
nector system.
■ Child restraint LATCH
anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for
the outboard rear seat. (Buttons
displaying the location of the
anchors are attached to the
seats.)

■ When installing in the rear

outboard seats Canada only
Install the child restraint system
 With rigid lower attachments
in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child 3 Latch the buckles onto the
restraint system. LATCH anchors.
1 Adjust the head restraint to For owners in Canada:
the lowermost position. The symbol on a child
(P.136) restraint system indicates
2 Widen the gap between the
seat cushion and seatback
slightly.
 With flexible lower attach-
ments
3 Latch the hooks of the lower
attachments onto the LATCH
anchors.
For owners in Canada:

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-2. Child safety 59

the presence of a lower con- apart, can be used if the child

nector system. restraint system manufacturer’s
instructions permit use of those
anchors with the anchor spacing
stated.
Child restraint systems with rigid
lower attachments cannot be 1
installed in the center seat. This
type of child restraint system

For safety and security

can only be installed in the out-
board seat.

■ Laws and regulations pertain-

ing to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming
to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci-
fications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform
to SAE J1819.
Canada only
4 If the child restraint has a top WARNING
tether strap, follow the child ■ When installing a child
restraint manufacturer’s restraint system
operation manual regarding Observe the following precau-
tions.
the installation, using the top Failure to do so may result in
tether strap to latch onto the death or serious injury.
top tether strap anchor. ● When using the LATCH
(P.60) anchors, be sure that there are
no foreign objects around the
5 After installing the child anchors and that the seat belt is
restraint system, rock it back not caught behind the child
and forth to ensure that it is restraint system.
installed securely. (P.57) ● Follow all installation instruc-
tions provided by the child
■ When installing in the rear restraint system manufacturer.
center seat
There are no LATCH anchors
behind the rear center seat.
However, the inboard LATCH
anchors of the outboard seats,
which are 18.1 in. (460 mm)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 60 1-2. Child safety

WARNING  Outboard rear seats

● Never attach two child restraint
system attachments to the
same anchor. In a collision, one
anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child
restraint system attachments
and may break.
If the LATCH anchors are
already in use, use the seat belt
to install a child restraint system
in the center seat.
● When securing some types of Anchor brackets
child restraint systems in rear
seats, it may not be possible to Top tether strap
properly use the seat belts in  Rear center seat
positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with
it or affecting seat belt effective-
ness. Be sure your seat belt fits
snugly across your shoulder
and low on your hips. If it does
not, or if it interferes with the
child restraint, move to a differ-
ent position. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious
injury.
● If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm
the security of the child restraint Anchor bracket
system.
Top tether strap
Using an anchor bracket ■ Fixing the top tether strap
(for top tether strap) to the anchor bracket
Install the child restraint system
■ Anchor brackets (for top
in accordance to the operation
tether strap)
manual enclosed with the child
Anchor brackets are provided restraint system.
for each rear seat. 1 Adjust the head restraint to
Use anchor brackets when fix- the lowermost position.
ing the top tether strap. (P.136)
2 Open the anchor bracket
cover, latch the hook onto the
anchor bracket and tighten
the top tether strap.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-2. Child safety 61
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched. (P.57) WARNING
 Outboard rear seats ■ When installing a child
restraint system
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
1
● Firmly attach the top tether
strap and make sure that the
belt is not twisted.

For safety and security

● Do not attach the top tether
strap to anything other than the
anchor bracket.
Hook
● Follow all installation instruc-
Top tether strap tions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
 Rear center seat
● Be sure to have the top tether
strap pass over the top of the
head restraint. If the belt passes
below the head restraint, it is
possible that the child restraint
system may not be securely
fixed.
● If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm
the security of the child restraint
system.

Hook NOTICE
Top tether strap ■ Anchor brackets (for top
tether strap)
■ Laws and regulations pertain- When not in use, make certain to
ing to anchors close the lid. If it remains open,
the lid may be damaged.
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming
to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci-
fications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform
to SAE J1819.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 62 1-3. Emergency assistance

Safety Connect*
[Link] assistance

System components
*
: If equipped
Safety Connect is a sub-
scription-based telematics
service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS)
data and embedded cellular
technology to provide
safety and security fea-
tures to subscribers. Safety
Connect is supported by
Toyota’s designated
response center, which
operates 24 hours per day, 7 Microphone
days per week.
“SOS” button
Safety Connect service is
available by subscription on LED light indicators
select, telematics hardware- Speaker
equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Con- ■ Certification for Safety Connect
nect service, you are agree- P.528
ing to be bound by the
Telematics Subscription Services
Service Agreement and its
Terms and Conditions, as in Subscribers have the following
effect and amended from Safety Connect services avail-
time to time, a current copy able:
of which is available at Toy-  Automatic Collision Notifica-
[Link]. All use of the tion*
Safety Connect service is Helps drivers receive necessary
subject to such then-appli- response from emergency service
cable Terms and Condi- providers. (P.64)
tions. *: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
 Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle
theft. (P.64)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-3. Emergency assistance 63
 Emergency Assistance Button device being in operative condi-
(“SOS”) tion, cellular connection availabil-
ity, and GPS satellite signal
Connects drivers to response-cen- reception, which can limit the abil-
ter support. (P.64) ity to reach the response center or
receive emergency service sup-
 Enhanced Roadside Assis- port. Enrollment and Telematics
tance Subscription Service Agreement
required. A variety of subscription
Provides drivers various on-road terms is available; charges vary 1
assistance. (P.64) by subscription term selected and
location.

For safety and security

● Automatic Collision Notification,
Subscription Emergency Assistance and Stolen
Vehicle Location will function in
After you have signed the the United States, including
Telematics Subscription Service Hawaii and Alaska, Puerto Rico
and in Canada, and Enhanced
Agreement and are enrolled, Roadside Assistance will function
you can begin receiving ser- in the United States, Puerto Rico
vices. and in Canada.
● Automatic Collision Notification,
A variety of subscription terms is Emergency Assistance, Stolen
available for purchase. Contact Vehicle and Enhanced Road
your Toyota dealer, call the fol- Assistance will not function in the
United States Virgin Islands.
lowing or push the “SOS” button For vehicles first sold in the USVI,
in your vehicle for further sub- no Safety Connect services will
scription details. function in and outside the United
States Virgin Islands.
 The United States ● Safety Connect services are not
subject to section 255 of the Tele-
1-800-331-4331 communications Act and the
 Canada device is not TTY compatible.
1-888-869-6828 ■ Languages
The Safety Connect response cen-
 Puerto Rico ter will offer support in multiple lan-
1-877-855-8377 guages. The Safety Connect system
will offer voice prompts in English,
Spanish, and French. Please indi-
■ Safety Connect Services Infor- cate your language of choice when
mation enrolling.
● Phone calls using the vehicles ■ When contacting the response
Bluetooth® technology will not be center
possible during Safety Connect. You may be unable to contact the
● Safety Connect is available begin- response center if the network is
ning Fall 2009 on select Toyota busy.
models (in the contiguous United
States only). Contact with the
Safety Connect response center
is dependent upon the telematics

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 64 1-3. Emergency assistance

Safety Connect LED light pants are unable to communi-

cate, the agent automatically
Indicators
treats the call as an emergency,
When the power switch is turned contacts the nearest emer-
to ON, the red indicator light gency services provider to
comes on for 2 seconds then describe the situation, and
turns off. Afterward, the green requests that assistance be sent
indicator light comes on, indicat- to the location.
ing that the service is active. ■ Stolen Vehicle Location
The following indicator light pat- If your vehicle is stolen, Safety
terns indicate specific system Connect can work with local
usage conditions: authorities to assist them in
 Green indicator light on = locating and recovering the
Active service vehicle. After filing a police
 Green indicator light flashing report, call the Safety Connect
= Safety Connect call in pro- response center at 1-800-331-
cess 4331 in the United States, 1-
877-855-8377 in Puerto Rico or
 Red indicator light (except at 1-888-869-6828 in Canada, and
vehicle start-up) = System follow the prompts for Safety
malfunction (contact your Toy- Connect to initiate this service.
ota dealer)
In addition to assisting law
 No indicator light (off) = enforcement with recovery of a
Safety Connect service not stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-
active equipped vehicle location data
may, under certain circum-
Safety Connect services stances, be shared with third
parties to locate your vehicle.
■ Automatic Collision Notifi-
Further information is available
cation
at [Link].
In case of either airbag deploy-
■ Emergency Assistance But-
ment or severe rear-end colli-
ton (“SOS”)
sion, the system is designed to
automatically call the response In the event of an emergency on
center. The responding agent the road, push the “SOS” button
receives the vehicle’s location to reach the Safety Connect
and attempts to speak with the response center. The answer-
vehicle occupants to assess the ing agent will determine your
level of emergency. If the occu- vehicle’s location, assess the
emergency, and dispatch the

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-3. Emergency assistance 65
necessary assistance required. (FCC) adopted RF exposure
If you accidentally press the “SOS” guidelines with safety levels for
button, tell the response-center mobile wireless phones. Those
agent that you are not experiencing guidelines are consistent with
an emergency. the safety standards previously
■ Enhanced Roadside Assis- set by the following U.S. and
tance international standards bodies. 1
Enhanced Roadside Assistance  ANSI (American National
adds GPS data to the already Standards Institute) C95.1

For safety and security

included warranty-based Toyota [1992]
roadside service.  NCRP (National Council on
Subscribers can press the Radiation Protection and
“SOS” button to reach a Safety Measurement) Report 86
Connect response-center agent, [1986]
who can help with a wide range  ICNIRP (International Com-
of needs, such as: towing, flat mission on Non-Ionizing Radi-
tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a ation Protection) [1996]
description of the Roadside
Those standards were based on
Assistance services and their
comprehensive and periodic
limitations, please see the
evaluations of the relevant sci-
Safety Connect Terms and Con-
entific literature. Over 120 scien-
ditions, which are available at
tists, engineers, and physicians
[Link].
from universities, and govern-
ment health agencies and
Safety information for industries reviewed the avail-
Safety Connect able body of research to
develop the ANSI Standard
Important! Read this informa-
(C95.1).
tion about exposure to radio fre-
quency signals before using The design of Safety Connect
Safety Connect; complies with the FCC guide-
lines in addition to those stan-
The Safety Connect system
dards.
installed in your vehicle is a low-
power radio transmitter and
■ Free /Open Source Software
receiver. It receives and also Information
sends out radio frequency (RF) This product contains Free/Open
signals. Source Software (FOSS). The
License information and/or the
In August 1996, the Federal source code of such FOSS can be
Communications Commission found at the following

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 66 1-3. Emergency assistance

[Link]
list?types=ALL&search=TL21BNU

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-4. Theft deterrent system 67

Immobilizer system
[Link] deterrent system

■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free
The vehicle’s keys have type immobilizer system.
built-in transponder chips ■ Conditions that may cause the
that prevent the fuel cell system to malfunction
system from starting if a key ● If the grip portion of the key is in
contact with a metallic object 1
has not been previously
● If the key is in close proximity to or
registered in the vehicle’s touching a key to the security sys-
on-board computer. tem (key with a built-in transpon-

For safety and security

der chip) of another vehicle
Never leave the keys inside
the vehicle when you leave NOTICE
the vehicle.
■ To ensure the system oper-
This system is designed to ates correctly
help prevent vehicle theft Do not modify or remove the sys-
tem. If modified or removed, the
but does not guarantee proper operation of the system
absolute security against all cannot be guaranteed.
vehicle thefts.

Operating the system

The indicator light flashes after
the power switch has been
turned off to indicate that the
system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the power switch has been
turned to ACC or ON to indicate
that the system has been can-
celed.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 68 1-4. Theft deterrent system

Alarm being on to flashing when the sys-

tem is set.

The alarm uses light and

sound to give an alert when
an intrusion is detected.
The alarm is triggered in the
following situations when
the alarm is set:
 A locked door or trunk is
unlocked or opened in any
way other than using the ■ Deactivating or stopping
entry function, wireless Do one of the following to deac-
remote control. (The doors tivate or stop the alarms:
will lock again automati-  Unlock the doors or trunk
cally.) using the entry function or
 The hood is opened. wireless remote control.
 Turn the power switch to ACC
Setting/deactivating/stop- or ON, or start the fuel cell
ping the alarm system system. (The alarm will be
deactivated or stopped after a
■ Items to check before lock- few seconds.)
ing the vehicle
■ Setting the alarm
To prevent unexpected trigger-
ing of the alarm and vehicle The alarm can be set if all the doors
are closed even with the hood open.
theft, make sure of the following:
■ System maintenance
 Nobody is in the vehicle. The vehicle has a maintenance-free
 The windows are closed type alarm system.
before the alarm is set. ■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the
 No valuables or other per- following situations:
sonal items are left in the (Stopping the alarm deactivates the
vehicle. alarm system.)
● For Canada: The doors are
■ Setting unlocked using the mechanical
Close the doors, trunk and key.
hood, and lock all the doors.
The system will be set automati-
cally after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 1-4. Theft deterrent system 69
alarm is activated.
● While the alarm is activated, a
person remaining in the vehicle
unlocks the door.
● When recharging or replacing the
12-volt battery

NOTICE 1
● For Canada: The trunk is opened
using the mechanical key. ■ To ensure the system oper-
ates correctly

For safety and security

Do not modify or remove the sys-
tem. If modified or removed, the
proper operation of the system
cannot be guaranteed.

Pre-alarm

● A person inside the vehicle opens If a door is unlocked with the

a door, the trunk or hood, or mechanical key while the alarm
unlocks the vehicle. is being set, the pre-alarm will
sound for 10 seconds.
If either the door is locked again
or the pre-alarm is stopped
within those 10 seconds, an
alarm will sound.
Do any of the following in order
● The 12-volt battery is recharged or to deactivate or stop the pre-
replaced when the vehicle is alarm:
locked. (P.459)
• Close the doors, and lock all
doors by smart key system or
wireless remote control.
• Turn the power switch to ACC
or ON, or start the fuel cell
system. (The alarm will be
deactivated and stop after a
■ Alarm-operated door lock few seconds.)
In the following cases, depending
on the situation, the door may auto-
matically lock to prevent improper
entry into the vehicle:
● When a person remaining in the
vehicle unlocks the door and the

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 70 1-4. Theft deterrent system

Theft prevention
labels (Except for Can-
ada)

These labels are attached to

the vehicle to reduce vehi-
cle theft by facilitating the
tracing and recovery of
parts from stolen vehicles.
Do not remove under the
penalty of law.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 71

Fuel cell system

2
2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle
Fuel cell electric vehicle
characteristics ..............72
Fuel cell electric vehicle pre-
cautions........................77
2
Fuel cell electric vehicle
driving tips ....................87

Fuel cell system

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 72 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle

Fuel cell electric vehicle characteristics

[Link] cell electric vehicle

Fuel cell electric vehicle efficiently use electricity, which is

generated by a chemical reaction between hydrogen and oxy-
gen in a fuel cell stack, and electricity charged in a traction
battery to drive the electric motor (traction motor).
The fuel is H2 (compressed hydrogen gas), so the exhaust is
only water and water vapor. As they do not release emissions
such as CO2 (Carbon Dioxide) and NOx (Nitrogen Oxides),
fuel cell electric vehicles are environmentally friendly vehi-
cles.

Fuel cell electric vehicle components

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual
item.
Fuel cell stack
Fuel cell converter and auxiliary inverter
Hydrogen tanks
Traction battery

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle 73

Electric motor (traction motor)

Tailpipe

■ Sounds unique to the fuel cell electric vehicle

Because there is no engine sound or vibration, it is easy to mistake the fuel
cell vehicle for being off when it is actually still running, as indicated by the
“READY” indicator being illuminated. For safety, make sure to always shift
the shift position to P and apply the parking brake when parked.
Due to the design of your fuel cell electric vehicle, there are various relays,
valves and pumps which under normal driving conditions will produce
sounds. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not indicate a 2
malfunction.
Furthermore, these sounds may differ based on usage environment or con-

Fuel cell system

dition.
Noticeable sounds Source of the sounds
Operation of relays and hydrogen tank valves
Clunking, clicking and
clacking (Sounds may be heard when starting or stop-
ping the fuel cell system.)
The parking lock is engaged

Knocking (Sounds may be heard when pressing the P

position switch or stopping the fuel cell sys-
tem.)
Gas is flowing through the nozzle and valves
Whooshing, squealing
(Sounds may be heard when filling the fuel.)
Operation of the pumps
(In particular, sounds may be heard when
 High pitch sound starting the fuel cell system, accelerating from
 Pulsing sound a stop, or pressing the H2O switch. The sound
 Whooshing sound may be louder when in Br mode or when the
vehicle decelerates during dynamic radar
cruise control.)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 74 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle

Noticeable sounds Source of the sounds

Operation of the motor
 Humming sound
 High pitch sound (In particular, sounds may be heard when
accelerating or decelerating.)
Exhaust water or air is being purged
May also occur periodically while parked when
Blowing and draining it is cold to prevent freezing.
sound (Sounds may be heard when vehicle is
stopped, fuel cell system is stopped or while
parked)

■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, in D.

and disposal
■ Charging the traction battery
Contact your Toyota dealer regard-
Because electricity generated by the
ing maintenance, repair, recycling,
and disposal. Do not dispose of the fuel cell stack and regenerative
vehicle or any of its components braking charges the traction battery,
the battery does not need to be
yourself.
charged from an outside source.
However, if the vehicle is left parked
Driving the vehicle for a long time, the traction battery
will slowly discharge. For this rea-
The electric motor (traction son, be sure to drive the vehicle at
least once every few months for at
motor) allows smooth, powerful least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16
takeoff and acceleration. This km).
vehicle drives similarly to a gas- If the traction battery becomes fully
oline vehicle without any special discharged and you are unable to
start the fuel cell system, contact
actions by the driver. (P.149) your Toyota dealer.
As there are no engine sounds ■ Charging the 12-volt battery
and the vehicle is quiet, opera- P.458
tion noises unique to fuel cell ■ Sounds and vibrations specific
electric vehicle components to a fuel cell electric vehicle
may be heard. (P.73) Because there is no engine sound
or vibration, it is easy to mistake the
■ Regenerative braking fuel cell electric vehicle for being off
when it is actually still running, as
In the following situations, the vehi- indicated by the “READY” indicator
cle generates electricity from the being illuminated. For safety, make
deceleration of the vehicle while sure to always shift the shift position
driving. to P and apply the parking brake
● The accelerator pedal is released when parked.
while driving with the shift position
in D.
● The brake pedal is depressed
while driving with the shift position

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle 75
● In very noisy areas
Fuel cell system
● In the wind or the rain
The system may behave differ- Also, as the acoustic vehicle alerting
ently on cold days as it may be system is installed on the front of the
vehicle, it may be more difficult to
performing a special cold-start hear from the rear of the vehicle
process to improve the start up compared to the front.
performance. (P.160) ■ If “Acoustic Vehicle Alerting
System Malfunction Visit your
Operation noises (P.73), Dealer” is displayed on the
purge process (P.163), etc., multi-information display
may differ from usual. However, The system may be malfunctioning. 2
this is not a malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.

Fuel cell system

Fuel filling Predictive efficient drive*
Compressed hydrogen gas fuel *
: This function can only be used in
can be filled at hydrogen sta- the mainland U.S.A. It cannot be
tions. used in other states and territo-
More information about hydrogen ries, including Alaska and Hawaii.
fuel and fueling can be found in the This system operates based on
“Opening the fuel door” section of the driving situation and traffic
this manual. (P.189) information to enhance fuel
economy.
Acoustic vehicle alerting For details about Predictive effi-
system cient drive, refer to “MULTIME-
DIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Fuel cell electric vehicles do not
have engine sounds like gaso- ■ Predictive deceleration sup-
line vehicles. Therefore, a port
sound that changes in accor-  When the vehicle approaches
dance with the driving speed, to predictive deceleration sup-
will be played in order to warn port points registered in the
people nearby of the vehicle’s
navigation system, the refer-
approach. The sound will stop
when the vehicle speed ence operation range of
exceeds approximately 23 mph the ECO Accelerator Guid-
(37 km/h). ance (P.105) on the multi-
information display will be
■ How to hear the warning turned off to encourage the
In the following cases, the acoustic driver to reduce excessive
vehicle alerting system may be diffi-
cult for surrounding people to hear. acceleration.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 76 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle

 The regenerative braking

force will be increased
according to the driving condi-
tions to more efficiently
charge the traction battery
after the accelerator pedal is
released.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle 77

Fuel cell electric vehicle precautions

System components
■ Hydrogen-related components
The fuel cell electric vehicle has hydrogen tanks (10150 psi [70 MPa,
714 kgf/cm2, 700 bar]), fuel cell stack, and hydrogen pipelines as
hydrogen-related components. Pay attention to all warning labels
attached to the vehicle.
2

Fuel cell system

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual
item.
Warning label
Fuel cell stack (fuel cell and hydrogen pump)
Hydrogen detectors
Hydrogen tanks
Hydrogen tank valves
Hydrogen pipelines
Hydrogen supply unit

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 78 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle

■ High-voltage and high-temperature components

The fuel cell electric vehicle has high-voltage components (about

650 V maximum) such as a fuel cell stack, traction battery, power
control unit, fuel cell converter, high-voltage cables (which are distin-
guished from low-voltage cables by their orange covers), electric
motor (traction motor), etc., and high-temperature parts such as the
radiator for cooling. Read the following descriptions carefully before
using the fuel cell system, and handle the fuel cell system correctly.
Note that warning labels with a mark are attached to the high
voltage components, to remind you of careful handling required.

This diagram is for illustrative purposes only and may differ from the actual
vehicle.
Radiator for inverter cooling
Radiator for fuel cell stack cooling
Fuel cell water pump
Fuel cell converter and auxiliary inverter
Power control unit
Cabin coolant heater
Traction battery

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle 79

Service plug
Electric motor (traction motor)
High-voltage cables (orange)
Fuel cell stack (fuel cell and hydrogen pump)
Air compressor
Air conditioning compressor
amounts of dust 2
■ If “Hydrogen Leakage Detected • Extended use in areas with high
Visit Your Dealer” is displayed levels of sulfur (such as volcanoes
on the multi-information display or hot springs).

Fuel cell system

A small amount of hydrogen gas • Extended use in areas with high
may be leaking. Have the vehicle concentrations of the following
inspected immediately at the near- substances:
est Toyota dealer. -Organic solvents, such as paint and
■ If “FCV System Shutdown Due thinner
to Hydrogen Leakage Stop in a -Amine-related materials such as
Safe Place See Owner’s Man-
ual” is displayed on the multi- ammonia
information display -Chlorinated substances such as
● Hydrogen gas may be leaking. salt air and snow-melting agent
When hydrogen gas is leaking or • Salt water gets into the air cleaner
some other malfunction is filter
detected: P.83 It is recommended to replace the
● The air conditioning system will air cleaner filter and clean the sur-
shut off automatically. rounding components. Have the
vehicle inspected at your Toyota
■ Running out of fuel dealer
When the vehicle has run out of fuel • The number of times the fuel cell
and the fuel cell system cannot be system is started and stopped is
started, refuel the vehicle until the excessively high
low fuel level warning light (P.428) • Extended use in freezing tem-
turns off before trying to restart. It peratures
may not be able to restart if the refu- • Fill fuel with impurities which do
eled amount is too low. not follow ISO-14687
■ Fuel cell stack ■ Hydrogen tanks
● Depending on the usage environ- ● The hydrogen tanks are the high-
ment, the fuel cell power output pressure storage containers that
may decline over the life of the are filled with compressed hydro-
vehicle. However, this will have gen gas. The vehicle can be refu-
almost no effect on driving perfor- eled at hydrogen stations.
mance. ● The hydrogen tanks have an expi-
● In the following situations, the fuel ration date. Vehicles with expired
cell power output may decline hydrogen tanks must not be
faster than normal driving: driven or refueled until the hydro-
• Extended use in areas with high gen tanks are replaced. The expi-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 80 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle

ration date is written on the inside ● If the tailpipe is blocked, the fuel
of the fuel door. Consult your Toy- cell system will stop.
ota dealer. ● In the following state when cold, a
● Consult your Toyota dealer if the white mist may be emitted. Water
hydrogen tanks or valves need to vapor is being emitted as a sys-
be disposed. tem protection and it is not a mal-
function.
■ Fuel cell stack coolant
• If several minutes have passed
● Fuel cell stack coolant uses a spe- after opening the fuel lid, such as
cifically-designed fluid with high refueling.
electrical insulation properties, in • Several hours have passed after
order to safely cool the high-volt- the power switch was turned off.
age fuel cell stack.
■ Hydrogen detectors
● Never add water or other coolants
to the fuel cell stack cooling sys- When the power switch is turned to
tem, as they will cause permanent ON, the hydrogen detectors are
damage. activated.
● Consult your Toyota dealer for ■ Power output restriction
replenishing or changing the fuel When the power output is restricted,
cell stack coolant. the vehicle may fail to accelerate or
■ Ion filter even decelerate, even though the
accelerator pedal is depressed. If a
● An ion filter is installed in the cool- safe driving speed cannot be main-
ant lines for the fuel cell stack, in tained, stop the vehicle in a safe
order to maintain the normal insu- place away from the traffic. This
lation properties of the coolant. may be caused by the following con-
● It is necessary to periodically ditions:
change the ion filter. (P.437) ● The coolant temperature may be
Contact your Toyota dealer for this too high. This can be caused by
periodic maintenance. driving conditions such as
■ Tailpipe repeated sudden acceleration and
deceleration, continuous driving
● When the power switch is turned on an incline, continuous driving
off and the fuel cell system is at high altitudes with a high load,
stopped (P.162) after driving, etc. In such situations, “FCV sys-
exhaust water is discharged. Be tem overheated Output power
careful when standing behind the reduced” is displayed on the multi-
vehicle to avoid dripping or spray- information display, and the power
ing. output is restricted. Once the cool-
● It is possible to manually purge ant returns to normal temperature,
the exhaust. This may be desir- the power output will return to nor-
able, for instance, before parking mal. (P.432)
in a garage. This is done by press- ● The remaining fuel may be low.
ing the H2O switch. (P.176) After the low fuel level warning
● On cold days, water vapor in the light comes on, the output power
exhaust may appear as a white will be gradually restricted in order
mist emitted from the tailpipe. This to extend the possible driving dis-
is not a malfunction. A white mist tance. Once getting to this point,
may be emitted from the vehicle the remaining driving distance
side depending on the wind direc- possible is short. Immediately refill
tion. If it is a concern, consult with the vehicle with hydrogen.
a Toyota dealer. ● On cold days, the low fuel level

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle 81
warning light comes on faster than ■ Starting the fuel cell system in
usual and the output power is an extremely cold environment
restricted. When the traction battery is
■ Electromagnetic waves (EMF) extremely cold (below approxi-
mately -22˚F [-30˚C]) under the
● High-voltage parts and cables in
fuel cell electric vehicles have an influence of outside temperature, it
electromagnetic shielding configu- may not be possible to start the fuel
cell system. In this case, try to start
ration, and therefore emit approxi-
mately the same amount of the fuel cell system again after the
electromagnetic waves as con- temperature of the traction battery
increases due to the outside tem-
ventional gasoline-powered vehi-
cles or home electronic perature increase etc.
appliances. ■ Traction battery 2
● Your vehicle may cause sound The traction battery has a limited
interference in some third party- service life. The lifespan of the trac-

Fuel cell system

produced radio parts. tion battery can change according to
driving style and driving conditions.
■ Hydrogen Gas Characteristics
● Hydrogen gas ignites more easily than gasoline, however it is light than air
and disperses quickly. The hydrogen system and tank sufficiently serve as
a counter-measure to prevent gas leaks. However, if by chance there is a
gas leak, the hydrogen gas is rapidly diluted until it is no longer flammable.
● As with gasoline and natural gas, hydrogen gas is not dangerous if it is
handled properly. Thoroughly read and understand the characteristics
shown in the table below.
LPG (Liquid
Hydrogen gas Gasoline
Petroleum Gas)
Volatile liquid
Gaseous (Lighter Gaseous (evaporates eas-
Normal state
than air) (Heavier than air) ily) (Heavier than
air)
Easier than gaso- At the same level
Ease of ignition —
line as gasoline

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 82 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle

LPG (Liquid
Hydrogen gas Gasoline
Petroleum Gas)
 Disperses
upward and is
 Spreads on the
diluted to safe  Spreads on the
ground or floor
Ease of accumu- concentrations ground or floor
 Does not
lation in open air  Adheres to
adhere to cloth-
 Does not clothing
ing
adhere to cloth-
ing
 Due to its color-
less and odor-
less state,
difficult to
detect by sight
 Detectable by
or smell  Detectable by
Detectability odor and gas
 Vehicle hydro- color and odor
leaking noise
gen detectors
will display a
warning on the
multi-informa-
tion display

■ Basic concepts of hydrogen aged components.

safety ● Disperse the leaked hydrogen gas
● Prevent leakage The hydrogen tanks and pipelines
The pipe joints of the hydrogen are located outside of the passenger
pipelines are designed to prevent compartment, so any leaked gas will
leaks. disperse into the atmosphere by
The joints are checked for gas leak- design.
age at every official vehicle inspec- ● Eliminate sources of fire
tion. No source of fire is located near the
● Detect to stop leakage hydrogen pipelines by design.
• The vehicle is equipped with
hydrogen detectors. If the hydro-
gen detectors detect a leak, the WARNING
hydrogen tank valves automati- ■ Hydrogen-related compo-
cally close to prevent more hydro- nents
gen from escaping.
• The vehicle is equipped with a col- ● Never alter, customize, or disas-
lision sensor. If the collision sen- semble any hydrogen-related
sor detects a collision, the parts.
hydrogen tank valves automati-
cally close to prevent hydrogen
gas from leaking from any dam-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle 83

WARNING ● You may notice a strange odor

from the tailpipe for a while after
● The hydrogen tanks, fuel cell the purchase of a new vehicle
stack, hydrogen pipelines, and or after an extended period of
connecting components are non-use, but this is not a mal-
filled with hydrogen gas. Do not function. Also, the odor is harm-
remove or disassemble these less but it may be unpleasant,
parts. Doing so can cause a so do not breathe in the
hydrogen gas leak, resulting in exhaust.
fire or explosion of the vehicle,
which may result in death or ■ High-voltage and high-tem-
serious injury. perature precautions
■ When hydrogen gas leak or This vehicle is equipped with a 2
other malfunction is detected high-voltage system. Follow the
instructions below as high-volt-
● If a large amount of hydrogen ages can cause severe burns and

Fuel cell system

gas leaking is noticed, turn off electric shock that may result in
the power switch, exit the vehi- death or serious injury.
cle, and stay far away from it.
Display warning signs and keep ● Never touch, disassemble,
sources of fire away from the remove, or replace the high-
vehicle. If possible, get assis- voltage parts, cables (orange),
tance. When the above is done, or connectors.
immediately contact your Toyota ● Do not touch the high voltage
dealer. components. they are extremely
● If you notice gas leaking or any hot, especially after driving.
other malfunction, immediately ● Never touch the service plug
stop the vehicle in a safe and that is installed on the traction
well-ventilated place, exit the battery. The service plug is used
vehicle, and stay far away from to block high-voltages coming
it. from the traction battery during
● If a warning message is dis- maintenance or repair at your
played in the multi-information Toyota dealer.
display, immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe, well-ventilated
outdoor place.
■ Tailpipe
● Do not directly touch the water
or steam coming out of the tail-
pipe. Doing so may cause low-
temperature burns.
● The fuel cell electric vehicle
generates water during power
generation. The generated
water discharged from the tail-
pipe is not suitable for drinking.
Never drink the water coming
out of the tailpipe.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 84 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle

WARNING ● In case of a vehicle fire, the

hydrogen gas in the hydrogen
■ Road accident cautions tanks is released angled down-
In the event of an accident, ward on both the right side of
observe the following precautions. the vehicle as well as the rear of
Failure to do so can cause fire or the vehicle, in order to reduce
electric shocks, resulting in death damage to the hydrogen tanks.
or serious injury. Keep away from the vehicle and
do not stand on either the right
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place side or the rear of the vehicle.
to prevent subsequent acci-
dents. Shift the shift position to ● If a vehicle fire occurs, it can be
P and apply the parking brake. extinguished with a Class A, B,
or C fire extinguisher. If using
● Check for hydrogen gas leak- water, apply a large amount
age. from a hydrant.
Hydrogen leaks will cause a
warning message to be shown ● If your vehicle needs to be
on the multi-information dis- towed, do so with the rear
play. Larger leaks may also be wheels lifted. If the wheels are
audible. touching the ground, the electric
motor (traction motor) may con-
● If a large amount of hydrogen tinue to generate electricity.
gas leaking is noticed, turn off This may cause a fire.
the power switch, exit the vehi-
cle, and stay far away from it. ■ Traction battery
Display warning signs and keep
sources of fire away from the ● Never resell, transfer, or modify
vehicle. If possible, get assis- the traction battery. To prevent
tance. When the above is done, accidents, traction batteries that
immediately contact your Toyota have been removed from dis-
dealer. posed vehicle are collected
through Toyota dealers. Do not
● Do not touch the high-voltage dispose of the traction battery
parts, cables (orange), or con- yourself.
nectors. If the traction battery is not
properly collected, the following
● If electric wires are exposed may occur, resulting in death or
inside or outside your vehicle, serious injury:
an electric shock may occur.
Never touch exposed electric • The traction battery may be ille-
wires. gally disposed or dumped, and
it is hazardous to the environ-
● If a fluid leak occurs, do not ment. Additionally, someone
touch the fluid as it may be the may touch a high-voltage part,
carbonate ester-based organic resulting in an electric shock.
electrolyte from the traction bat-
tery. If it comes into contact with
your skin or eyes, wash it off
immediately with a large
amount of water, and seek
immediate medical attention.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle 85

WARNING Emergency shut off sys-

• The traction battery is intended tem
to be used exclusively with your
fuel cell electric vehicle. If the When a certain level of impact
traction battery is used outside from an accident is detected, the
of your vehicle or modified in
any way, accidents, such as fuel cell system is shut down
electric shock, heat generation, and the system shuts out the
smoke generation, ignition, high voltage.
explosion and electrolyte leak-
age may occur. Also, the fuel supply is stopped
In particular, reselling or transfer- from the hydrogen tank valves. 2
ring the traction battery exposes If the emergency shut off system
the receiving party to risks of acci-
dents as they may not be aware activates, your vehicle will not

Fuel cell system

of these dangers. Make sure to restart. To restart the fuel cell
inform them of the contents of this system, contact your Toyota
Owner’s Manual.
dealer.
● If your vehicle is disposed with-
out the traction battery having
been removed, there is a dan- If the Emergency shut off System
ger of serious electric shock in does not operate, the fuel cell sys-
case high-voltage parts, cables, tem can be forcibly stopped by per-
or their connectors are touched. forming the following operations*.
(P.78) *
: Use only in emergencies.
When disposing of your vehicle,
the traction battery must be dis- ● Press and hold the power switch
posed by your Toyota dealer, or for 5 seconds or more.
a qualified service shop. If the If the fuel cell system is forcibly
traction battery is not disposed stopped, the meter screen display
of properly, it may cause electric
shock that can result in death or will turn off.
serious injury.

NOTICE
■ Traction battery
Do not carry large amounts of
water such as water cooler bottles
in the vehicle. If water spills onto
the traction battery, the battery If the fuel cell system is forcibly
may be damaged. Have the vehi- stopped, it may take a long time to
cle inspected by your Toyota
dealer. start the next time or it may not be
possible to start the system.
■ Fuel cell stack coolant Repeatedly stopping the fuel cell
Never add water or other coolants system in this manner may result in
to the fuel cell stack cooling sys- reduced power output.
tem, as they will cause permanent
damage.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 86 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle

If input/output of the traction battery

Fuel cell warning mes-
becomes limited and the distance
sage that the vehicle can be driven using
the traction motor is reduced, the
A message is automatically dis-
fuel economy may be reduced.
played when a malfunction
occurs in the fuel cell system or
an improper operation is
attempted. (P.432)
If a warning message is shown
on the multi-information display,
read the message and follow the
instructions.

NOTICE
■ Traction battery air intake
vents
● Make sure not to block the air
intake vents with anything, such
as cover, or luggage. The
input/output of the traction bat-
tery may be restricted, leading
to a reduction in traction battery
output and a malfunction.
■ If a warning light comes on, a
warning message is displayed, ● Periodically clean the air intake
or the 12-volt battery connec- vents to prevent them from clog-
tion is disconnected ging. (P.402)
The fuel cell system may not be ● Do not get water or foreign
able to restart. materials in the air intake vents
If the “READY” indicator does not as this may cause a short circuit
come on, even when the start pro- and damage the traction bat-
cedure is repeated, contact your tery.
Toyota dealer.

Traction battery air intake

vents
There are air intake vents on
each side of the rear seatback
with the purpose of cooling the
traction battery. If the vents are
blocked, it may interfere with the
cooling of the traction battery.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle 87

Fuel cell electric vehi- decreased fuel economy. Check

cle driving tips traffic reports before leaving and
avoid delays as much as possi-
ble. When driving in a con-
To maximize fuel economy
gested traffic situations, gently
and range, pay attention to
release the brake pedal to allow
the following:
the vehicle to move forward
slightly while avoiding overuse
Use of Fuel cell System of the accelerator pedal. Doing
Indicator so can help control excessive 2
fuel consumption.
Maintaining the Fuel cell System

Fuel cell system

Indicator to Eco area on the
Driving with high power
multi-information display can
extend your driving range. output
(P.99) Similar to an electric vehicle, a
fuel cell electric vehicle uses the
Accelerator pedal/brake most fuel in high output driving
pedal operation such as driving on a steep uphill
or at high speeds. Moderate the
Drive your vehicle smoothly. vehicle speed and maintain a
Avoid abrupt acceleration and steady speed.
deceleration.
Mild acceleration and decelera- Using Eco drive mode
tion can help curb wasteful fuel
When using Eco drive mode, the
consumption.
torque corresponding to the
accelerator pedal depression
When braking amount can be generated more
If the brakes are operated gently smoothly than it is in normal
and in a timely manner, a conditions. In addition, the oper-
greater amount of electrical ation of the air conditioning sys-
energy can be regenerated tem (heating/cooling) will be
when slowing down. minimized, improving the fuel
economy. (P.301)
Delays
Air conditioning
Repeated acceleration and
deceleration, as well as long  Use the air conditioning only
waits at traffic lights, will lead to when necessary. Doing so

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 88 2-1. Fuel cell electric vehicle

can help reduce excessive reduce fuel economy.

fuel consumption.
In summer: When the ambient
temperature is high, use the
recirculated air mode. Doing
so will help to reduce the bur-
den on the air conditioning
system and reduce fuel con-
sumption as well.
In winter: Avoid excess heat-
ing. Use the seat heater (if
equipped) or steering heater
(if equipped) to minimize the
need for cabin heating
(P.321).
 Using eco air conditioning
mode, this helps curb fuel
consumption even with the air
conditioning system turned
on. (P.314)

Checking tire inflation

pressure
Make sure to check the tire infla-
tion pressure frequently.
Improper tire inflation pressure
can cause poor fuel economy.
Also, as snow tires can cause
large amounts of friction, their
use on dry roads can lead to
poor fuel economy. Use tires
that are appropriate for the sea-
son.

Luggage
Carrying heavy luggage will lead
to reduced fuel economy. Install-
ing a large roof rack will also

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 89

Vehicle status informa-

tion and indicators
3
3-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indica-
tors ...............................90
Gauges and meters .......96
Multi-information display
.................................. 102
Energy monitor/consump-
tion screen/air purification 3
screen ....................... 109

Vehicle status information and indicators

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 90 3-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators

[Link] cluster

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster,

center panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver
of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

Instrument cluster
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all
warning lights and indicators illuminated.

The meter type can be changed on of the multi-information dis-

play. (P.108)
 Type 1

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on
the target region.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 3-1. Instrument cluster 91
 Type 2

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on

Vehicle status information and indicators

the target region.
 Type 3

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on
the target region.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 92 3-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights Electric power steer-

ing system warning
Warning lights inform the driver (Yellow) light*1 (P.424)
of malfunctions in the indicated PCS warning light*1
vehicle’s systems. (P.424)
Hydrogen leak warn-
LDA indicator
ing light*1 (P.422) (P.424)
(Yellow)
Brake system warn-
ing light*1 (P.422) LTA indicator
(U.S.A.) (P.425)
(Yellow)
Brake system warn-
PDA indicator
(Canada) ing light*1 (P.422) (P.425)
(Red) (Yellow)
Driving assist informa-
Brake system warn-
tion indicator*1
ing light*1 (P.422) (P.425)
(Yellow)
High coolant tempera- Dynamic radar cruise
ture warning light control indicator
(P.423) (Yellow) (P.425)
(Red)
Fuel cell system over-
Cruise control indica-
heat warning light*2 tor (P.426)
(P.423) (Yellow)
Charging system Intuitive parking assist
warning light*2 OFF indicator*1 (if
(P.423) equipped) (P.426)
SRS warning light*1 Slip indicator light*1
(P.423) (P.426)
Pop Up Hood warning Inappropriate pedal
operation warning
light*1 (P.423)
light*2 (P.427)
ABS warning light*1
Brake hold operated
(P.424)
(U.S.A.) indicator*1 (P.427)
(Flashes)
ABS warning light*1
(P.424) Parking brake indica-
(Canada)
(U.S.A.) tor (P.427)
Electric power steer-
(Flashes)
ing system warning
(Red) light*1 (P.424)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 3-1. Instrument cluster 93

NOTICE
Parking brake indica-
tor (P.427) ■ To prevent damage to the fuel
(Canada) cell system and its compo-
(Flashes) nents
Tire pressure warning This vehicle is equipped with high
light*1 (P.428) coolant temperature warning light
(P.462), instead of, coolant tem-
Low fuel level warn- perature gauge.
ing light (P.428) The fuel cell system may be over-
heating if the high coolant tem-
Driver’s and front pas- perature warning light flashes or
senger’s seat belt comes on. In this case, immedi-
reminder light ately stop the vehicle in a safe
(P.428) place, and check the fuel cell sys-
Rear passengers’ seat tem after it has cooled completely.
3
belt reminder lights
(P.429)

Vehicle status information and indicators

*1: These lights turn on when the
power switch is turned to ON to
indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn
off after the fuel cell system is
on, or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a sys-
tem if the light does not come on,
or turn off. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*2
: This light illuminates on the
multi-information display with a
message.

WARNING
■ If a safety system warning
light does not come on
Should a safety system light such
as the ABS and SRS warning light
not come on when you start the
fuel cell system, this could mean
that these systems are not avail-
able to help protect you in an acci-
dent, which could result in death
or serious injury. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately if this occurs.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 94 3-1. Instrument cluster

Indicators
PDA indicator (P.229)
The indicators inform the driver *3
( )
of the operating state of the Driving assist information
vehicle’s various systems. indicator*4, 6 (P.265,
Turn signal indicator 270, 281, 287, 291)
(P.170) Intuitive parking assist
OFF indicator*4, 6 (if
Headlight indicator equipped) (P.275)
(P.178) Intuitive parking assist
(U.S.A.)
detection indicator*5 (if
Tail light indicator equipped) (P.275)
(P.178)
(Canada) Slip indicator light*6
Headlight high beam indi- (P.304)
(Flashes)
cator (P.180)
VSC OFF indicator*4, 6
(P.304)
AHB indicator (P.181)
PCS warning light*4, 6
Low coolant temperature (P.205)
indicator*1 Outside rear view mirror
(Blue) indicators*7 (P.265,
Smart key system indica- 282)
tor*2 (P.160) Brake hold standby indi-
cator*6 (P.174)
Cruise control indicator
(P.252) Brake hold operated indi-
(*3) cator*6 (P.174)
Dynamic radar cruise Security indicator*8
control indicator (P.67, 68)
(*3) (P.241)
“READY” indicator
(P.160)
LDA indicator (P.216,
224) Low outside temperature
(*3) indicator*9 (P.99)
LDA OFF indicator
(P.228) Parking brake indicator
(P.171)
(U.S.A.)
LTA indicator (P.216)
Parking brake indicator
(*3)
(P.171)
(Canada)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 3-1. Instrument cluster 95

Br mode indicator side rear view mirrors.

(P.166) *8
: This light illuminates on the cen-
ter panel.
Eco drive mode indicator
*9: When the outside temperature is
(P.301)
approximately 37°F (3°C) or
Sport mode indicator lower, the indicator will flash for
(P.301) approximately 10 seconds, then
Snow mode indicator stay on.
(P.302)
■ Intuitive parking assist OFF
indicator (if equipped)
“AIRBAG ON/OFF” indi-
Vehicles without multimedia display:
cator*6, 8 (P.43) The indicators turn off when the shift
position is changed to R regardless 3
of whether the intuitive parking
Stop lights indicator assist function is turned on or off.

Vehicle status information and indicators

■ Stop lights indicator
REC indicator (P.263) This light comes on when the stop
lights are illuminated by the opera-
*1 tion of the brake pedal or the driving
: Indicates the coolant tempera-
ture is cool. assist system.
*2
: This light illuminates on the
multi-information display with a
message.
*3: Depending on the operating con-
ditions of the system, the color
and state (illuminated/blinking) of
the indicator change.
*4
: The light comes on when the
system is turned off.
*5
: Vehicles without multimedia dis-
play or rear camera.
*6: These lights turn on when the
power switch is turned to ON to
indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn
off after the fuel cell system is
on, or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a sys-
tem if the lights do not turn on, or
turn off. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*7
: This light illuminates on the out-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 96 3-1. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

The meters display various drive information.

Meter display
■ Locations of gauges and meters

The meter type can be changed on of the multi-information dis-

play. (P.108)
 Type 1/Type 2

The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of

the vehicle.
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data. (P.102)
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs. (P.432)
Shift position indicator (P.165)
Outside temperature(P.99)
Analog meter (Type 2 only)
The dial type of analog meter can be changed on of the multi-informa-
tion display. (P.108)
Analog speedometer: Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel cell System Indicator: Displays the Fuel cell System Indicator. (P.99)
Digital speedometer

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 3-1. Instrument cluster 97
Displays the vehicle speed.
Clock (P.101)
Automatically adjusts the time by using the GPS time information (GPS
clock).
For details, refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Widget (Audio system-linked display)
Displays the selected audio source or track on the meter. (P.107)
While list of items for content display area (P.104) is displayed, widget will
not be displayed.
Distance to empty
Displays the possible driving distance computed from the fuel consumption
studied from the driving history and the current remaining amount of fuel. 3
(P.100)
Fuel gauge

Vehicle status information and indicators

Displays the fuel level.
Widget (Fuel Economy)
Displays fuel economy information. (P.105)
While list of items for content display area (P.104) is displayed, widget will
not be displayed.
Fuel cell System Indicator
Displays the Fuel cell System Indicator (P.99)
Odometer and trip meter (P.100)
 Type 3

The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of

the vehicle.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 98 3-1. Instrument cluster

Fuel cell System Indicator

Displays the Fuel cell System Indicator (P.99)
Shift position indicator (P.165)
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data. (P.102)
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs. (P.432)
Outside temperature (P.99)
Digital speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Clock (P.101)
Automatically adjusts the time by using the GPS time information (GPS
clock).
For details, refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Analog speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Distance to empty
Displays the possible driving distance computed from the fuel consumption
studied from the driving history and the current remaining amount of fuel.
(P.100)
Fuel gauge
Displays the fuel level.
Odometer and trip meter (P.100)

■ The meters and display illumi-

nate when
The power switch is in ON.
■ When changing driving mode
Background color is changed follow-
ing the selected driving mode.
(P.301, 302)
■ If the units of measure for
speedometer can be changed
The other units of measure is also
displayed as shown in the illustra-
tions.

Type 1/Type 2

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 3-1. Instrument cluster 99

Type 3 ● “READY” Indicator is not illumi-

nated.
■ Fuel cell System Indicator ● The shift position is in a range
other than D or Br mode.
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the cor-
rect outside temperature may not
be displayed, or the display may
take longer than normal to
change.
• When stopped, or driving at low
speeds (less than 12 mph [20
km/h])
• When the outside temperature
has changed suddenly (at the
entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, 3
etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the

Vehicle status information and indicators

system may be malfunctioning.
Charge area Take your vehicle to your Toyota
dealer.
Shows regeneration* status. ● Displays the outside temperature
within the range of -40°F (-40°C)
Regenerated energy will be used to to 122°F (50°C).
charge the traction battery.
● When the outside temperature is
Eco area approximately 37°F (3°C) or
Shows that the vehicle is being lower, the indicator will flash
driven in an Eco-friendly manner. for approximately 10 seconds,
then stay on.
By keeping the indicator needle or
bar display within Eco area, more ■ Distance to empty
Eco-friendly driving can be ● Displays the possible driving dis-
achieved. tance computed from the fuel con-
sumption studied from the driving
Power area history and the current remaining
amount of fuel.
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving
● When the air conditioning system
range is being exceeded (during full
power driving, etc.) is operating, is displayed
* below the driving range and this
: When used in this manual, regen-
will be the driving range with the
eration refers to the conversion of air conditioning system on is dis-
energy created by the movement played.
of the vehicle into electrical ● The actual possible driving dis-
energy. tance may differ as fuel consump-
In the following situation, the Fuel tion changes, depending on
driving environment (weather, traf-
cell System Indicator does not oper- fic, etc.) and conditions (sudden
ate. acceleration, air conditioning,

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 100 3-1. Instrument cluster

etc.).
Odometer and trip meter
● The driving range may shorten
even when not driving due to display
power consumption by the sys-
tem. ■ Display items
● The possible driving distance will  Odometer
be displayed as “--- mi (--- km)” in
the following cases: Displays the total distance the vehi-
• When the remaining fuel is being cle has been driven.
calculated (short time).
• When the remaining fuel total  Trip meter A/Trip meter B
reaches “E”. Displays the distance the vehicle
• When a malfunction occurs where
the possible driving distance can- has been driven since the meter
not be calculated. was last reset. Trip meters A and B
can be used to record and display
■ Liquid crystal display
different distances independently.
P.103
■ Changing the display
■ Free/Open Source Software
Information Each time the “ODO/TRIP”
This product contains Free/Open switch is pressed, the displayed
Source Software (FOSS). The
license information and/or the item will be changed. When the
source code of such FOSS can be trip meter is displayed, pressing
found at the following URL. and holding the switch will reset
[Link] the trip meter.
rd-tech/oss/880
■ Customization
The gauges and meters can be cus-
tomized in of the multi-informa-
tion display. (P.484)

WARNING
■ The information display at
low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to
warm up before using the liquid Instrument panel light
crystal information display. At control
extremely low temperatures, the
information display monitor may The brightness of the instrument
respond slowly, and display
changes may be delayed. panel lights can be adjusted.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 3-1. Instrument cluster 101

Multi-information dis-
play

The multi-information dis-

play is used to display fuel
efficiency related informa-
tion and various types of
driving-related information.
1 Brighter The multi-information dis-
2 Darker play can also be used to
change the display settings
■ Instrument cluster brightness and other settings.
adjustment 3
The instrument cluster brightness
levels when the tail lights are on and Display contents

Vehicle status information and indicators

off can be adjusted individually.
However, when the surroundings Following information is dis-
are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on played in each area on the
the tail lights will not change the
instrument cluster brightness. multi-information display.

Adjusting the clock

The clocks on the following can
be adjusted on the multimedia
system screen.
 Multi-information display
 Multimedia system screen
For details, refer to “MULTIMEDIA
OWNER’S MANUAL”.

■ Clock settings screen

If “Clock :00” is displayed when Content display area (left)

is selected on the multi-information
display, the system may be malfunc- Content display area (center)
tioning. Content display area (right)
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer. Driving support system infor-
mation display area
When driving information support
system is displayed on the content

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 102 3-1. Instrument cluster

display area, the system operating

state will not be displayed in this ■ Liquid crystal display
area. Small spots or light spots may
appear on the display. This phenom-
RSA (Road Sign Assist) dis- enon is characteristic of liquid crys-
play area (P.238) tal displays, and there is no problem
continuing to use the display.
■ Content display area (cen-
ter) WARNING
 Blank ■ Caution for use while driving
 Driving support system infor- ● When operating the multi-infor-
mation display while driving,
mation display (P.106) pay extra attention to the safety
 Settings display (P.108) of the area around the vehicle.

 Warning message display ● Do not look continuously at the

multi-information display while
 Map display (P.107) driving as you may fail to see
pedestrians, objects on the
■ Content display area (left) road, etc., ahead of the vehicle.
 Blank ■ The information display at
low temperatures
 Fuel Economy (P.105)
P.100
 Energy monitor (P.109)
■ Content display area (right) Changing the display
 Blank
The multi-information display is
 Fuel Economy (P.105) operated using the meter control
 ECO Accelerator Guid- switches.
ance/Eco Score (P.105)
 Driving support system infor-
mation display (P.106)
 Navigation system-linked dis-
play (P.107)
 Audio system-linked display
(P.107)
 Drive information (P.107)
 Trip meter A/Trip meter B / : Change displayed
(P.107) content and scroll up/down
the screen
 Energy monitor (P.108)
/ : Change the screen
 Tire inflation pressure
(P.108) and move the cursor

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 3-1. Instrument cluster 103

Press: Enter/Set each 3 content display areas.

Press and hold: Reset/Dis- Press or of the meter
play customizable items
control switches to scroll the
Return to the previous screen screen.
Call sending/receiving and
history display
Linked with the hands-free
system, sending or receiving
call is displayed. For details
regarding the hands-free sys-
tem, refer to “MULTIMEDIA
OWNER’S MANUAL”. 3

WARNING

Vehicle status information and indicators

■ Caution for use while driving
For safety, avoid operating the
meter control switch while driving
as much as possible, and do not ■ Changing the display con-
look continuously at the multi-
information display while driving.
tents
Stop the vehicle and operate the Switches items displayed on
meter control switch. Failure to do
so may cause a steering wheel each contents display area
operation error, resulting in an (left/center/right).
unexpected accident.
1 Press and hold to display
Changing the display the cursor on the content dis-
play area (center).
The multi-information display is
operated using the meter control 2 Press or to move the
switches. cursor and select the content
■ Changing the meter display display area.
type setting
3 Press or to select the
The meter display type setting
display items.
can be changed on .
■ Items displayed in the con-
(P.108) tent display area
■ Changing the screen Select items to enable/disable
Select items from the combina- on the content display area
tion of 3 screens to display on (right).

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 104 3-1. Instrument cluster

fuel Economy.
1 Press and hold to display
Average fuel economy
area (center).
Displays the average fuel economy
2 Press or to move the since the function was reset or the
average fuel economy after starting
cursor and select the content
or refueling.*1, 2, 3
display area.
The average fuel economy
3 Press to display contents selected by Fuel Economy on
list. the screen is displayed.
4 Press or to select the *1: Use the displayed fuel consump-
display items. tion as a reference only.
*2
: Average fuel economy after
5 Press to enable/disable starting is reset each time the
Fuel cell system stops.
items.
*3
: Average fuel economy since
WARNING
function was reset can be reset
■ Caution for use while driving
For safety, avoid operating the by pressing and holding .
meter control switches while driv-
ing as much as possible, and do
not look continuously at the multi- ECO Accelerator Guid-
information display while driving. ance/Eco Score
Stop the vehicle and operate the
meter control switches. Failure to Displays a reference operation
do so may cause a steering wheel
operation error, resulting in an range for using the accelerator
unexpected accident. pedal according to driving condi-
tions, and a score result that
Fuel Economy evaluates the current driving
status.

Current fuel economy

ECO Accelerator Guidance
Displays the instantaneous current

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 3-1. Instrument cluster 105

Eco score tion, driving without sudden

acceleration, and smooth stop-
■ ECO Accelerator Guidance
ping. When the vehicle is
stopped, an Eco score out of
100 points will be displayed.

Eco area
3
Show that the vehicle is being
driven in an Eco-friendly manner. Score result

Vehicle status information and indicators

Power area
Eco start status
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving
range is being exceeded (during full Eco cruise status
power driving etc.).
Eco stop status
Current acceleration
3 situations are displayed with each
Reference operation range icon while driving.
A zone is displayed in green under
the Eco area which can be used as
a reference operation range for
using the accelerator pedal accord-
ing to driving conditions such as
starting off and cruising.
The ECO Accelerator Guidance
display changes according to the
driving status, such as when start-
ing off or cruising. It is easier to
drive in an Eco-friendly manner by
driving according to the display
showing the accelerator pedal
operations and staying within the
reference operating range.
■ Eco Score
The following 3 Eco driving
methods are evaluated in 5 lev-
els: Smooth start-off accelera-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 106 3-1. Instrument cluster

 How to read the bar display

Not yet evaluated

Low
High
• After the Fuel cell system is
started, the Eco score will not be
displayed until the vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h).
• The Eco score will be reset each
time the Fuel cell system is
started.

■ ECO Accelerator Guidance/Eco

score will not operate when
The ECO Accelerator Guidance/Eco
score will not operate in the follow-
ing situations:
● The Fuel cell System Indicator is
not operating.
● The vehicle is being driven using
the dynamic radar cruise control.

Driving support system

information display
Select to display the operational
status of the following systems:
 LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
(P.224)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 3-1. Instrument cluster 107
 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) Driving information dis-
(P.216)
play
 LCA (Lane Change Assist)
(P.221) ■ Drive information

 Dynamic radar cruise control 2 items that are selected using

(P.241) the “Drive Info. Items” setting
(average speed, distance and
 Cruise control (P.252)
total time) can be displayed ver-
 PDA (Proactive driving assist) tically.
(P.229)
Use the displayed information as a
 PCS (Pre-Collision System) reference only.
(P.205) Following items will be dis- 3
 FCTA (Front Cross Traffic played.
Alert) (P.236)  “Average Speed”: Displays

Vehicle status information and indicators

the average vehicle speed
Map display since Fuel cell system start*
Displays the map data accord-  “Distance”: Displays the dis-
ing to the navigation system. tance driven since Fuel cell
Switches the displayed map system start*
 “Total Time”: Displays the
size by pressing .
elapsed time since Fuel cell
system start*
Navigation system-linked *
: These items are reset each time
display the Fuel cell system stops.
Select to display the following ■ Trip information
navigation system-linked infor- 2 items that are selected using
mation: the “TRIP A Items” or “TRIP B
 Route guidance to destination Items” setting (average speed,
 Compass display (heading-up distance and total time) can be
display) displayed vertically.
Use the displayed information as a
reference only.
Audio system-linked dis-
play  “Average Speed”: Displays
the average vehicle speed
The operating conditions of the since the display was reset*
audio system can be displayed
 “Distance”: Displays the dis-
on the multi-information display.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 108 3-1. Instrument cluster

tance driven since the display consumption display between after

start/after reset/after refuel.
was reset*
(P.105)
 “Total Time”: Displays the
 Fuel cell system
elapsed time since the display
Select to display/not display the
was reset* Eco Accelerator Guidance.
*: To reset, display the desired item (P.105)
 Drive information and Trip A/B
and press and hold .
items
Select to set the first and second
Energy monitor items of the drive information dis-
play to any of the following: aver-
P.109
age vehicle
speed/distance/elapsed time.
Tire inflation pressure  Pop-up display
Displays inflation pressure of Select to enable/disable pop-up
each tire. displays for each relevant system.
 Default setting
Settings display Select to reset the meter display
settings to the default setting.
■ Meter display settings that
■ Vehicle functions and set-
can be changed
tings that can be changed
 Language
P.484
Select to change the language dis-
played. ■ Suspension of the settings dis-
 Units play
● Some settings cannot be changed
Select to change the units of mea- while driving. When changing set-
sure displayed. tings, park the vehicle in a safe
 Meter Type place.
● If a warning message is displayed,
Select to change the meter type operation of the settings display
setting. will be suspended.
 Meter Style
NOTICE
Select to change the meter style.
■ During setting up the display
 Dial Type
To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
Select to change dial type. charge, ensure that the Fuel cell
system is operating while setting
 Fuel economy display up the display features.
Select to change the average fuel

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 3-1. Instrument cluster 109

Warning message display Energy monitor/con-

sumption screen/air
Select to display warning mes-
purification screen
sages and measures to be
taken if a malfunction is
The state of the fuel cell
detected. (P.432)
system can be viewed on
the multi-information dis-
Suggestion function play and multimedia display.
Displays suggestions to the
driver in the following situations. System components
To select a response to a dis-
played suggestion, use the 3
meter control switches.
■ Suggestion to turn on the

Vehicle status information and indicators

headlights
If the headlight switch is in other
than or , and the vehicle
speed is 3 mph (5 km/h) or
higher for a certain amount of
Multi-information display
time when the surroundings are
dark, a suggestion message will Multimedia display
be displayed. Meter control switches
■ Suggestion to turn off the
headlights Energy monitor
If the headlights are left on for a
The energy monitor can be used
certain amount of time after the
to check the vehicle drive status,
power switch has been turned
fuel cell system operation status
off, a suggestion message will
and energy regeneration status.
be displayed.
■ Display procedure
If the driver’s door is opened after
the power switch is turned off, this  Multi-information display
suggestion message will not be dis-
Use the meter control switches,
played.
display the energy monitor on
■ Customization
the multi-information display.
For detail regarding the multi-
The suggestion function can be
turned on/off. (Customizable fea- information display, refer to
tures: P.484)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 110 3-1. Instrument cluster

P.102  Multimedia display

 Multimedia display
1 Select on the main
menu.
2 Select “Energy flow”.
■ Display
When energy is flowing, an
arrow appears to show the
direction of the flow of energy. The figure shows all the arrows for
the purpose of this explanation, but
When energy is not flowing, an
the actual contents of the display
arrow is not displayed.
will differ.
Blue: Shows that the electrical
energy is charged or recovered. Fuel cell system
Yellow: Shows that the electrical Traction battery
energy is used.
Electric motor (traction
 Multi-information display motor)
Rear tires
Front tires

■ Traction battery status

The display changes in 8 levels
according to the remaining charge
amount of the traction battery.
• The figure shows the multi-infor-
The figure shows all the arrows for mation display as an example for
the purpose of this explanation, but explanation.
the actual contents of the display • These images are examples only,
will differ. and may vary slightly from actual
conditions.
Fuel cell system • The electrical charge and dis-
charge arrow display for the fluc-
Front tires tuations of the remaining battery
charge display and Fuel cell Sys-
Rear tires tem Indicator may not always
match. However, this is not a mal-
Traction battery function.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 3-1. Instrument cluster 111

Resetting the consumption

data
Fuel consumption in the past
15 minutes
Current fuel consumption
Average vehicle speed since
Low
the Fuel cell system was
High started
Trip range
History fuel consumption
Elapsed time since the Fuel
screen (multimedia dis- 3
cell system was started
play only)
■ History screen

Vehicle status information and indicators

■ Display procedure
If a screen other than history
1 Select on the main screen is displayed, press “His-
menu. tory”.
2 Select “Trip information”. Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference.
■ Current fuel consumption
screen Some screens may vary
depending on the type of multi-
If a screen other than current
media display.
fuel consumption screen is dis-
played, touch “Current”. The image is an example only,
and may vary slightly from
Use the displayed average fuel
actual conditions.
consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only,
and may vary slightly from
actual conditions.

Latest fuel consumption

Best recorded fuel consump-
tion

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 112 3-1. Instrument cluster

Previous fuel consumption ■ Display

record
Resetting the history data
Updating the latest fuel con-
sumption data

■ Updating the history data

Update the latest fuel consumption
by selecting “Update” to measure
the current fuel consumption again. Instant air cleaning amount
■ Resetting the data
Displays the instant air cleaning
The fuel consumption data can be amount per unit of time.
deleted by selecting “Clear”.
■ Trip range Air cleaning amount estima-
Displays the estimated maximum tion display
distance that can be driven with the Displays the total amount of air
quantity of fuel remaining. cleaning from starting the fuel cell
This distance is computed based on system.
your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that Air cleaning amount between
can be driven may differ from that resets
displayed. Displays the total air cleaning esti-
mated amount after resets.
Air Purification screen
Runner display
(multimedia display)
Runners increase depending on the
Displays the air amount that was estimated amount of air cleaning
cleaned by fuel cell system this between resets.
time, with regards to optimal Resetting the data
power generated by fuel cell Clear all the history up to now.
system due to the accelerator
The image is an example only, and
and fuel cell system operation may vary slightly from actual condi-
status. tions.
■ Display procedure
■ Data in Air purification is
1 Select on the main reseted when
menu. “Clear” is selected to reset data in
air cleaning amount between resets
2 Select “Air Purification”. and runner display.
■ Display Runner
When ten runners are collected,

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 3-1. Instrument cluster 113
they are absorbed into a runner
mark.
■ Display
● The actual amount of air may dif-
fer because the amount of air
required for power generation
changes due to usage environ-
ment (climate, altitude, etc.) and
the status of power generation, as
well as driving conditions.
● The instant air cleaning amount
may operate slowly and may be
delayed in operating, but this is
not a malfunction.

Vehicle status information and indicators

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 114 3-1. Instrument cluster

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 115

Before driving
4
4-1. Key information
Keys ............................ 116
Digital key ................... 119
4-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
trunk
Doors .......................... 121
Trunk ........................... 126
Smart key system ....... 129
4-3. Adjusting the seats
4
Front seats .................. 135
Head restraints............ 136

Before driving
4-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel ............ 138
Inside rear view mirror 139
Outside rear view mirrors
.................................. 140
4-5. Opening, closing the win-
dows
Power windows ........... 142
4-6. Favorite settings
My Settings ................. 145

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 116 4-1. Key information

Keys fuel cell system is stopped.

[Link] information

● To reduce key battery depletion

when the electronic key is to not
The keys be used for long periods of time,
set the electronic key to the bat-
The following keys are provided tery-saving mode. (P.131)
with the vehicle. ● As the electronic key always
receives radio waves, the battery
will become depleted even if the
electronic key is not used. The fol-
lowing symptoms indicate that the
electronic key battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery
when necessary.
• The smart key system or the wire-
less remote control does not oper-
ate.
• The detection area becomes
smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key sur-
Electronic keys face does not turn on.
• Operating the smart key system You can replace the battery by your-
(P.129) self (P.405). However, as there is
• Operating the wireless remote a danger that the electronic key may
control function (P.118) be damaged, it is recommended
Mechanical keys that replacement is carried out by
your Toyota dealer.
Key number plate ● To avoid serious deterioration, do
not leave the electronic key within
■ When riding in an aircraft 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electri-
cal appliances that produce a
When bringing an electronic key magnetic field:
onto an aircraft, make sure you do • TVs
not press any buttons on the elec- • Personal computers
tronic key while inside the aircraft • Cellular phones, cordless phones
cabin. If you are carrying an elec- and battery chargers
tronic key in your bag, etc., ensure • Table lamps
that the buttons are not likely to be • Induction cookers
pressed accidentally. Pressing a
button may cause the electronic key ● If the electronic key is near the
to emit radio waves that could inter- vehicle for longer than necessary,
fere with the operation of the air- even if the smart key system is not
craft. operated, the key battery may
become depleted faster than nor-
■ Electronic key battery depletion mal. When not operating the
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 smart key system, it is recom-
years. mended to not stay with the elec-
tronic key near the vehicle longer
● If the battery becomes low, an than necessary.
alarm will sound in the cabin and a
message will be shown on the ■ Replacing the battery
multi-information display when the P.405

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-1. Key information 117
■ Confirmation of the number of
registered keys NOTICE
The number of keys already regis- ■ To prevent key damage
tered to the vehicle can be con- ● Do not drop the keys, subject
firmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for them to strong shocks, or bend
details. them.
■ If a message regarding the state
● Do not expose the keys to high
of the electronic key or power
switch mode, etc. is shown temperatures for a long period
of time.
To prevent trapping the electronic
key inside the vehicle, leaving the ● Do not get the keys wet or wash
vehicle carrying the electronic key them in an ultrasonic washer,
on your person without turning the etc.
power switch to OFF or other pas-
sengers from unintentionally taking ● Do not attach metallic or mag-
the key out of the vehicle, etc., a netic materials to the keys or
message that prompts the user to place the keys close to such
confirm the state of the electronic materials.
key or power switch mode may be
● Do not disassemble the keys.
shown on the multi-information dis- 4
play. In those cases, follow the ● Do not attach a sticker or any-
instructions on the display immedi- thing else to the surface of the
ately.

Before driving
electronic key.
■ If “Key Battery Low Replace
Key Battery” is displayed on ● Do not place the keys near
the multi-information display objects that produce magnetic
fields, such as TVs, audio sys-
The electronic key has a low battery. tems and induction cookers.
Replace the electronic key battery.
(P.405) ● Do not place the keys near
■ If “A New Key has been Regis-
medical electrical equipment
tered Contact Your Dealer for such as low-frequency therapy
Details” is shown on the multi- equipment or microwave ther-
information display apy equipment, and do not
receive medical attention with
This message will be displayed the keys on your person.
each time the driver’s door is
opened when the doors are ■ Carrying the electronic key
unlocked from the outside for on your person
approximately 10 days after a new Carry the electronic key 3.9 in.
electronic key has been registered. (10 cm) or more away from elec-
If this message is displayed but you tric appliances that are turned on.
have not had a new electronic key Radio waves emitted from electric
registered, ask your Toyota dealer to appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm)
check if an unknown electronic key of the electronic key may interfere
(other than those in your posses- with the key, causing the key to
sion) has been registered. not function properly.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 118 4-1. Key information

To stop the alarm, press any button

NOTICE on the electronic key.
■ In case of a smart key system
malfunction or other key-
related problems
P.454
■ When an electronic key is lost
P.453

Wireless remote control

Using the mechanical key
The electronic keys are
equipped with the following To take out the mechanical key,
wireless remote control: slide the release lever and
take the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a lock cyl-
inder, turn it over and re-attempt to
insert it.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
Locks the doors (P.121)
the electronic key. If the electronic
Unlocks the doors (P.121) key battery is depleted or the entry
function does not operate properly,
Opens the windows* you will need the mechanical key.
(P.121) (P.454)
Opens the trunk (P.127)
Sounds the alarm
*: This setting must be customized
at your Toyota dealer.

■ Theft deterrent panic mode

When is pressed for longer

than about one second, an alarm
will sound intermittently and the ■ When required to leave the
vehicle lights will flash to deter any vehicle’s key with a parking
person from trying to break into or attendant
damage your vehicle. Turn the trunk opener main switch

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-1. Key information 119
off (P.128) and lock the glove box
(P.326) as circumstances Digital key*
demand.
*
Remove the mechanical key for : If equipped
your own use and provide the atten-
dant with the electronic key only. A smartphone can be used
■ If you lose your mechanical
instead of the electronic key
keys of the vehicle by installing
P.453 the dedicated Digital Key
■ If a wrong key is used App on a smartphone. Also,
The key cylinder rotates freely, iso- Digital Key can be shared
lated from the internal mechanism. with your family or friends
using the Digital Key App.

■ Free/open source software

information
This product contains Free/open
source software (FOSS). 4
License information and/or the
source code of this FOSS can be

Before driving
obtained at the following URL:
[Link]
opensource/dkey/toyota/

Digital key usage condi-

tions
In order to use the Digital Key,
you need to install the Toyota
App, Register the Vehicle to the
customer’s Toyota App profile,
and subscribe to Remote Ser-
vices, and enroll in Digital Key.

Digital key precautions

 A Digital Key can be used
when the smartphone and
server can communicate. The
Digital Key may become
unusable if the smartphone is
not connected to the Internet.
Be sure to carry the electronic

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 120 4-1. Key information

key of the vehicle if traveling to lock and unlock the doors,

to a location with unreliable start the fuel cell system and
communications. perform any other operations
 If the smartphone battery is as same as the electronic key
depleted, the smartphone of the vehicle. Be especially
cannot be used as Digital Key. careful not to lose the smart-
If the battery level is low, be phone or allow it to be stolen.
sure to charge the smart- If the smartphone is lost or
phone prior to going out. stolen, contact your Toyota
dealer immediately.
 The Digital Key system is
related to the smart key sys-  When taking your vehicle to a
tem. If the smart key system Toyota dealer for an inspec-
has been deactivated in the tion or repairs, make sure to
vehicle customization setting, bring an electronic key.
the Digital Key will also be  With the Digital Key alone, no
disabled. vehicle lights will illuminate
 Depending on the radio wave when approached to the vehi-
environment, the Digital Key cle.
may not be able to be used.
P.131
 When transferring vehicle
ownership, make sure to
delete the Digital Keys.
 If the vehicle is not operated
for 14 days or more, the Digi-
tal Key will not connect auto-
matically. Therefore, it may
take some time before the
system operates after a door
handle is touched.
 A part of the services may be
stopped for a certain period of
time due to server mainte-
nance. However, registered
Digital Keys can be used
during the maintenance.
 A smartphone with the Digital
Key App enabled will be able

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 121

Doors ■ Wireless remote control

[Link], closing and locking the doors and trunk

Unlocking and locking the

doors from the outside
■ Smart key system (entry
function)
Carry the electronic key to
enable this function.
1 Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
2 Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button 4
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other door.

Before driving
Press and hold to open the win-
1 Grip the driver’s door handle dows.*
to unlock the door. Holding *
: This setting must be customized
the driver’s door handle for
at your Toyota dealer.
approximately 2 seconds
unlocks all the doors. Grip ■ Switching the door unlock func-
any passenger door handle tion
to unlock all the doors.* It is possible to set which doors the
entry function unlocks using the
Make sure to touch the sensor on wireless remote control.
the back of the handle. 1 Turn the power switch off.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3
2 When the indicator light on the
seconds after the doors are locked.
key surface is not on, press and
*: The door unlock settings can be hold , or for
changed.
approximately 5 seconds while
2 Touch the lock sensor (inden-
pressing and holding .
tation on the surface of the
door handle) to lock all the The setting changes each time an
operation is performed, as shown
doors. below. (When changing the setting
Check that the door is securely continuously, release the buttons,
locked. wait for at least 5 seconds, and
repeat step 2.)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 122 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Multi-informa- Unlocking func- windows are operating.

tion display/Beep tion ■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within
Holding the
approximately 60 seconds after the
driver’s door vehicle is unlocked, the security fea-
handle unlocks ture automatically locks the vehicle
only the driver’s again. (However, depending on the
door. location of the electronic key, the
key may be detected as being in the
Exterior: Beeps 3 Holding the front vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be
times passenger door unlocked.)
handle unlocks ■ When the doors cannot be
all the doors. locked by the lock sensor on
the surface of the door handle
Holding the When the doors cannot be locked
driver’s door even if the lock sensor on the sur-
handle or the face of the door handle is touched
passenger door by a finger, touch the lock sensor
Exterior: Beeps handle unlocks with the palm.
twice all the doors. If you are wearing gloves, remove
them.
To prevent unintended triggering of
the alarm, unlock the doors using
the wireless remote control and
open and close a door once after
the settings have been changed. (If
a door is not opened within 60 sec-
onds after is pressed, the doors
will be locked again and the alarm
■ Open door warning buzzer
will automatically be set.)
In a case that the alarm is triggered, If an attempt to lock the doors is
immediately stop the alarm. (P.68) made when a door is not fully
closed, a buzzer sounds continu-
■ Impact detection door lock ously for 5 seconds. Fully close the
release system door to stop the buzzer, and lock the
In the event that the vehicle is sub- vehicle once more.
ject to a strong impact, all the doors ■ Setting the alarm
are unlocked. Depending on the
force of the impact or the type of Locking the doors will set the alarm
accident, however, the system may system. (P.68)
not operate. ■ Conditions affecting the opera-
■ Operation signals tion of the smart key system or
wireless remote control
A buzzer sounds and the emer-
gency flashers flash to indicate that P.131
the doors have been ■ If the smart key system or the
locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; wireless remote control does
Unlocked: twice) not operate properly
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the Use the mechanical key to lock and

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 123
unlock the doors. (P.454)
Replace the key battery with a new WARNING
one if it is depleted. (P.405) ■ To prevent an accident
■ If the 12-volt battery is dis- Observe the following precautions
charged while driving the vehicle.
The doors cannot be locked and Failure to do so may result in a
unlocked using the smart key sys- door opening and an occupant
tem or wireless remote control. Lock falling out of the vehicle, resulting
or unlock the doors using the in death or serious injury.
mechanical key. (P.454)
● Ensure that all doors are prop-
■ Rear seat reminder function erly closed and locked.
● In order to remind you not to for- ● Do not pull the inside handle of
get luggage, etc., in the rear seat, the doors while driving.
when the power switch is turned to
OFF after any of the following con- Be especially careful for the front
ditions are met, a buzzer will doors, as the doors may be
sound and a message will be dis- opened even if the inside lock but-
played on the multi-information tons are in locked position.
display for approximately 6 sec-
onds. 4
● Set the rear door child-protector
• The fuel cell system is started locks when children are seated
within 10 minutes after opening in the rear seats.

Before driving
and closing a rear door.
• A rear door has been opened and ■ When opening or closing a
closed after the fuel cell system door
was started. Check the surroundings of the
However, if a rear door is opened vehicle such as whether the vehi-
and then closed within approxi- cle is on an incline, whether there
mately 2 seconds, the rear seat is enough space for a door to
open and whether a strong wind
reminder function may not operate. is blowing. When opening or clos-
● The rear seat reminder function ing the door, hold the door handle
determines that luggage, etc., has tightly to prepare for any unpre-
been placed in a rear seat based dictable movement.
on opening and closing of a rear
door. Therefore, depending on the
situation, the rear seat reminder
function may not operate and you
may still forget luggage, etc., in
the rear seat, or it may operate
unnecessarily.
● The rear seat reminder function
can be enabled/disabled.
(P.484)
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.484)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 124 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Unlocking and locking the time to open the door.

doors from the inside When the door is unlocked, the
inside lock button will pop up.
■ Door lock switches (to
lock/unlock)

■ Locking the front doors from

the outside without a key
1 Locks all the doors 1 Push down the inside lock but-
2 Unlocks all the doors ton.
2 Close the door.
■ Inside lock buttons (to lock)
The door cannot be locked if the
Push down the inside lock but- power switch is in ACC or ON, or
the electronic key is left inside the
ton to lock the door. vehicle. However, the key may not
be detected correctly and the door
may be locked.
■ Open door warning buzzer
If the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph
(5 km/h), a buzzer sounds to indi-
cate that the door(s), the hood or
the trunk is not fully closed.
The open door(s) or trunk is indi-
cated on the multi-information dis-
play.
■ Inside door handles (to
unlock) Rear door child-protector
lock
 For the front doors
Pull the handle to unlock and The door cannot be opened
open the door. from inside the vehicle when the
lock is set.
When the door is unlocked, the
inside lock button will pop up.
 For the rear doors
Pull the handle to unlock the
door. Pull the handle a second

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 125

Function Operation
Shift position All doors are auto-
linked door matically unlocked
unlocking when the shift posi-
function tion is shifted to P.
All doors are auto-
matically unlocked
Driver’s door when driver’s door
linked door is opened within
unlocking approximately 45
function seconds after turn-
ing the power
switch off.
1 Unlock
2 Lock
These locks can be set to prevent 4
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear

Before driving
door switch to lock both rear doors.

Automatic door locking

and unlocking systems
The following functions can be
set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing,
refer to P.484.

Function Operation
All doors are auto-
matically locked
Speed linked
when vehicle
door locking
speed is approxi-
function
mately 12 mph (20
km/h) or higher.
All doors are auto-
Shift position matically locked
linked door when the shift posi-
locking func- tion is shifted to a
tion position other than
P.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 126 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Trunk ● Remove any heavy loads, such

as snow and ice, from the trunk
lid before opening it. Failure to
The trunk can be opened do so may cause the trunk lid to
using the trunk opener suddenly shut again after it is
opened.
switch, entry function or
wireless remote control. ● When opening or closing the
trunk lid, thoroughly check to
make sure the surrounding area
WARNING is safe.
Observe the following precau- ● If anyone is in the vicinity, make
tions. sure they are safe and let them
Failure to do so may result in know that the trunk is about to
death or serious injury. open or close.
■ Before driving ● Use caution when opening or
● Make sure that the trunk lid is closing the trunk lid in windy
fully closed. If the trunk lid is not weather as it may move
fully closed, it may open unex- abruptly in strong wind.
pectedly while driving and hit
near-by objects or luggage in ● The trunk lid may suddenly shut
the trunk may be thrown out, if it is not opened fully. It is more
causing an accident. difficult to open or close the
trunk lid on an incline than on a
● Do not allow children to play in level surface, so beware of the
the trunk. trunk lid unexpectedly opening
If a child is accidentally locked or closing by itself. Make sure
in the trunk, they could suffer that the trunk lid is fully open
from heat exhaustion, suffoca- and secure before using the
tion or other injuries. trunk.
● Do not allow a child to open or
close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk
lid to open unexpectedly, or
cause the child’s hands, head,
or neck to be caught by the
closing trunk lid.
■ Important points while driving
Never let anyone sit in the trunk. ● When closing the trunk lid, take
In the event of sudden braking or extra care to prevent your fin-
a collision, they are susceptible to gers, etc., from being caught.
death or serious injury.
■ Using the trunk
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause parts
of the body to be caught, resulting
in serious injury.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 127

WARNING
● When closing the trunk lid,
make sure to press it lightly on
its outer surface. If the trunk
handle is used to fully close the
trunk lid, it may result in hands
or arms being caught.
● Do not attach any accessories
other than genuine Toyota parts
to the trunk lid. Such additional
■ Wireless remote control
weight on the trunk lid may
cause the lid to suddenly shut Press and hold the switch.
again after it is opened.
A buzzer will sound.

Opening/closing the trunk

■ Trunk opener switch
4
Press the trunk opener switch.

Before driving
■ Trunk grip
Using the trunk grip, pull down
the trunk lid without applying
sideways force and push the
■ Smart key system trunk lid down from the outside
to close it.
While carrying the electronic
key, press the button on the
trunk lid.
When all the doors are unlocked
using one of the following meth-
ods, the trunk can be opened
without the electronic key:
 Entry function
 Wireless remote control
■ Trunk light
 Door lock switches
● The trunk light turns on when the
 Mechanical key trunk is opened.
● If the trunk light is left on when the

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 128 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

power switch is turned off, the light

will go off automatically after 20
minutes.
■ Function to prevent the trunk
being locked with the electronic
key inside
● When all doors are locked, closing
the trunk lid with the electronic key
left inside the trunk will sound an ■ Using the mechanical key
alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be The trunk can be also opened using
opened pressing the trunk release the mechanical key. (P.454)
button on the trunk lid. ■ If the smart key system or the
● If the spare electronic key is put in wireless remote control does
the trunk with all the doors locked, not operate properly
the key confinement prevention Use the mechanical key to unlock
function is activated so the trunk the trunk. (P.454)
can be opened. In order to pre- Replace the key battery with a new
vent theft, take all electronic keys one if it is depleted.
with you when leaving the vehicle.
■ Open door warning buzzer
● If the electronic key is put in the
trunk with all the doors locked, the P.124
key may not be detected depend- ■ Customization
ing on the location of the key and
the surrounding radio wave condi- Some functions can be customized.
tions. In this case, the key con- (P.484)
finement prevention function
cannot be activated, causing the Luggage security system
doors to lock when the trunk is
closed. Make sure to check where
the key is before closing the trunk. The trunk opener switch can be
● The key confinement prevention
temporarily disabled to protect
function cannot be activated if any luggage stored in the trunk
one of the doors is unlocked. In against theft.
this case, open the trunk using the
trunk opener. Turn the main switch in the
■ Internal trunk release lever glove box off to disable the trunk
The trunk lid can be opened by pull- opener.
ing the glow-in-the-dark lever
located on the inside of the trunk lid
to the side.
The lever will continue to glow for
some time after the trunk lid is
closed.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 129

On Smart key system

Off
The following operations
The trunk lid cannot be opened
even with the wireless remote con-
can be performed simply by
trol or entry function. carrying the electronic key
on your person, for example
■ When leaving a key to the vehi- in your pocket. The driver
cle with a parking attendant should always carry the
P.119 electronic key.
 Locks and unlocks the
doors (P.121)
 Opens the trunk (P.127)
 Starts the fuel cell system
(P.160) 4

■ Antenna location

Before driving

Antennas outside the cabin

Antennas inside the cabin

Antenna inside the trunk

Antenna outside the trunk

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 130 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Effective range (areas within ● When an exterior alarm sounds

which the electronic key is once for 5 seconds
detected)
Correction
Situation
procedure
An attempt was Close all of
made to lock the the doors
vehicle while a door and lock the
was open. doors again.
Retrieve the
The trunk was closed
electronic
When locking or unlocking the while the electronic
key from the
doors key was still inside
trunk and
the trunk and all the
The system can be operated when close the
doors were locked.
the electronic key is within about 2.3 trunk lid.
ft. (0.7 m) of either of the front door
● When an interior alarm sounds
handles. (Only the doors detecting continuously
the key can be operated.)
Correction
When opening the trunk Situation
procedure
The system can be operated when The power switch
the electronic key is within about 2.3 was turned to ACC Turn the
ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release but- while the driver’s power
ton. door was open (or switch off
When starting the fuel cell sys- the driver’s door was and close
tem or changing power switch opened while the the driver’s
power switch was in door.
modes
ACC).
The system can be operated when
The power switch
the electronic key is inside the vehi- Close the
was turned off while
cle. driver’s
the driver’s door was
■ If an alarm sounds or a warning door.
open.
message is displayed
An alarm sounds and warning mes- ■ If “Key Detected in Vehicle” is
sages are displayed on the multi- shown on the multi-information
information display to protect display
against unexpected accidents or An attempt was made to lock the
theft of the vehicle resulting from doors using the smart key system
erroneous operation. When a warn- while the electronic key was still
ing message is displayed, take inside the vehicle. Retrieve the elec-
appropriate measures based on the tronic key from the vehicle and lock
displayed message. (P.432) the doors again.
When only an alarm sounds, cir- ■ Battery-saving function
cumstances and correction proce-
dures are as follows. The battery-saving function will be
activated in order to prevent the

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 131
electronic key battery and the 12- in advance.
volt battery from being discharged
■ When electronic key function
while the vehicle is not in operation
for a long time. stops
● In the following situations, the
If the position of the electronic key
smart key system may take some has not changed for a certain
amount of time such as when the
time to unlock the doors. Also the
illuminated entry system may not electronic key is left somewhere, the
operate properly. function of the electronic key stops
to reduce depletion of the battery.
• The electronic key is left in the
vicinity of the vehicle for a certain In this case, function can automati-
period of time. cally be restored by moving the
• The smart key system has not position of the key such as by lifting
been used for 5 days or longer. it up.
● If the smart key system has not ■ Conditions affecting operation
been used for 14 days or longer, The smart key system uses weak
the doors cannot be unlocked at radio waves. In the following situa-
any doors except the driver’s door. tions, the communication between
In this case, take hold of the the electronic key and the vehicle
driver’s door handle, or use the may be affected, preventing the
wireless remote control or the 4
smart key system, wireless remote
mechanical key, to unlock the control and immobilizer system from
doors.

Before driving
operating properly.
■ Turning an electronic key to ● When the electronic key battery is
battery-saving mode depleted
● When battery-saving mode is set, ● Near a TV tower, electric power
battery depletion is minimized by plant, gas station, radio station,
stopping the electronic key from large display, airport or other facil-
receiving radio waves. ity that generates strong radio
waves or electrical noise
Press twice while pressing and
● When the electronic key is in con-
holding . Confirm that the elec- tact with, or is covered by the fol-
lowing metallic objects
tronic key indicator flashes 4 times. • Cards to which aluminum foil is
While the battery-saving mode is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have alumi-
set, the smart key system cannot be num foil inside
used. To cancel the function, press • Metallic wallets or bags
any of the electronic key buttons. • Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that
emit radio waves) are being used
nearby
● When carrying the electronic key
together with the following devices
that emit radio waves
• Portable radio, cellular phone,
● Electronic keys that will not be cordless phone or other wireless
used for long periods of time can communication devices
be set to the battery-saving mode • Another electronic key or a wire-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 132 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

less key that emits radio waves glove box when the fuel cell sys-
• Personal computers or personal tem is started or power switch
digital assistants (PDAs) modes are changed.
• Digital audio players • The electronic key is blocked by a
• Portable game systems body between the electronic key
● If window tint with a metallic con- and the vehicle when the door is
tent or metallic objects are unlocked.
attached to the rear window ● Do not leave the electronic key on
● When the electronic key is placed top of the instrument panel or near
near a battery charger or elec- the door pockets when exiting the
tronic devices vehicle. Depending on the radio
wave reception conditions, it may
● When the vehicle is parked in a be detected by the antenna out-
pay parking spot where radio side the cabin and the doors will
waves are emitted. become lockable from the outside,
If the doors cannot be possibly trapping the electronic
locked/unlocked using the smart key key inside the vehicle.
system, lock/unlock the doors by ● As long as the electronic key is
performing any of the following: within the effective range, the
doors may be locked or unlocked
● Bring the electronic key close to by anyone. However, only the
either front door handle and oper- doors detecting the electronic key
ate the entry function. can be used to unlock the vehicle.
● Operate the wireless remote con- ● Even if the electronic key is not
trol. inside the vehicle, it may be possi-
If the doors cannot be ble to start the fuel cell system if
the electronic key is near the win-
locked/unlocked using the above dow.
methods, use the mechanical key.
● The doors may unlock or lock if a
(P.454) large amount of water splashes on
If the fuel cell system cannot be the door handle, such as in the
started using the smart key system, rain or in a car wash, when the
electronic key is within the effec-
refer to P.455. tive range. (The doors will auto-
■ Note for the entry function matically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the
● Even when the electronic key is doors are not opened and closed.)
within the effective range (detec-
tion areas), the system may not ● If the wireless remote control is
operate properly in the following used to lock the doors when the
cases: electronic key is near the vehicle,
• The electronic key is too close to there is a possibility that the door
the window or outside door han- may not be unlocked by the entry
dle, near the ground, or in a high function. (Use the wireless remote
place when the doors are locked control to unlock the doors.)
or unlocked. ● Touching the door lock sensor
• The electronic key is near the while wearing gloves may delay or
ground or in a high place, or too prevent lock operation. Remove
close to the center of the rear the gloves and touch the lock sen-
bumper when the trunk is opened. sor again.
• The electronic key is on the instru-
● When the lock operation is per-
ment panel, rear package tray or
formed using the lock sensor, rec-
floor, or in the door pockets or

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 133
ognition signals will be shown up ● Battery-saving mode can reduce
to two consecutive times. After the power consumption of elec-
this, no recognition signals will be tronic keys. (P.131)
given.
■ To operate the system properly
● If the door handle becomes wet
● Make sure to carry the electronic
while the electronic key is within
key when operating the system.
the effective range, the door may
lock and unlock repeatedly. In this Do not get the electronic key too
case, follow the following correc- close to the vehicle when operat-
ing the system from the outside of
tion procedures to wash the vehi-
cle: the vehicle.
• Place the electronic key in a loca- Depending on the position and hold-
tion 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from ing condition of the electronic key,
the vehicle. (Take care to ensure the key may not be detected cor-
that the key is not stolen.)
rectly and the system may not oper-
• Set the electronic key to battery-
saving mode to disable the smart ate properly. (The alarm may go off
entry & start system. (P.131) accidentally, or the door lock pre-
● If the electronic key is inside the vention function may not operate.)
vehicle and a door handle ● Do not leave the electronic key
becomes wet during a car wash, a 4
inside the trunk.
message may be shown on the The key confinement prevention
multi-information display and a function may not operate, depend-

Before driving
buzzer will sound outside the vehi- ing on the location of the key (the
cle. To turn off the alarm, lock all inside edge of the trunk), condi-
the doors. tions (inside a metal bag, close to
● The lock sensor may not work metallic objects) and the radio
properly if it comes into contact waves in the surrounding area.
with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean (P.128)
the lock sensor and attempt to ■ If the smart key system does
operate it again. not operate properly
● A sudden approach to the effec- ● Locking and unlocking the doors
tive range or door handle may pre- and trunk: P.454
vent the doors from being
unlocked. In this case, return the ● Starting the fuel cell system:
door handle to the original position P.455
and check that the doors unlock ■ Customization
before pulling the door handle
again. Some functions can be customized.
(P.487)
● If there is another electronic key in If the smart key system has been
the detection area, it may take deactivated in a customized setting,
slightly longer to unlock the doors refer to the explanations for the fol-
after the door handle is gripped. lowing operations.
■ When the vehicle is not driven ● Locking and unlocking the doors
for extended periods and opening the trunk:
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do Use the wireless remote control or
not leave the electronic key within mechanical key. (P.121, 127,
6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle. 454)
● The smart key system can be ● Starting the fuel cell system and
deactivated in advance. changing power switch modes:
P.455

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 134 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

● Stopping the fuel cell system:

P.162
■ Certification
P.530

WARNING
■ Caution regarding interfer-
ence with electronic devices
● People with implantable car-
diac pacemakers, cardiac
resynchronization therapy-
pacemakers or implantable car-
dioverter defibrillators should
keep away from the smart key
system antennas. (P.129)
The radio waves may affect the
operation of such devices. If
necessary, the entry function
can be disabled. Ask your Toy-
ota dealer for details, such as
the frequency of radio waves
and timing of the emitted radio
waves. Then, consult your doc-
tor to see if you should disable
the entry function.
● User of any electrical medical
device other than implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac
resynchronization therapy-
pacemakers or implantable car-
dioverter defibrillators should
consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its
operation under the influence of
radio waves.
Radio waves could have unex-
pected effects on the operation
of such medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details
for disabling the entry function.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-3. Adjusting the seats 135

Front seats
[Link] the seats

WARNING
■ When adjusting the seat posi-
Adjustment procedure tion
● Take care when adjusting the
■ Seat adjustment switches seat position to ensure that
other passengers are not
injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the
seat or near the moving parts to
avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become
jammed in the seat mechanism.
● Make sure to leave enough
space around the feet so they
do not get stuck.
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under 4
the lap belt during a collision, do
not recline the seat more than
necessary.

Before driving
Seat position adjustment If the seat is too reclined, the lap
belt may slide past the hips and
Seatback angle adjustment apply restraint forces directly to
the abdomen, or your neck may
Seat cushion (front) angle contact the shoulder belt, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious
adjustment (if equipped) injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made
Vertical height adjustment (if while driving as the seat may
equipped) unexpectedly move and cause
the driver to lose control of the
Lumbar support adjustment vehicle.
(for driver’s side)

■ When adjusting the seat

● Make sure that any surrounding
passengers or objects are not
contact the seat.
● Take care when adjusting the seat
so that the head restraint does not
touch the ceiling.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 136 4-3. Adjusting the seats

Head restraints ■ Adjusting the height of the head

restraints
Head restraints are provided
for all seats.

WARNING
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the head restraints.
Failure to do so may result in Make sure that the head restraints
death or serious injury. are adjusted so that the center of
the head restraint is closest to the
● Use the head restraints top of your ears.
designed for each respective
seat. ■ Adjusting the rear center seat
head restraint
● Adjust the head restraints to the Always raise the head restraint one
correct position at all times. level from the stowed position when
● After adjusting the head using.
restraints, push down on them
and make sure they are locked Removing the head
in position.
restraints
● Do not drive with the head
restraints removed. ■ Front seat

Pull the head restraint up while

Adjusting a head restraint
pressing the lock release button
.
If the head restraint touches the
ceiling, making the removal diffi-
cult, change the seat height or
angle. (P.135)

1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button .

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-3. Adjusting the seats 137
■ Rear seat
Head restraints cannot be
removed.

■ Removing the rear center seat

head restraints
For removal and installation of the
head restraint, contact your Toyota
dealer.

Installing the head

restraints
Align the head restraint with the
installation holes and push it
down to the lock position.
4
Press and hold the lock release
button when lowering the

Before driving
head restraint.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 138 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel
[Link] the steering wheel and mirrors

Adjustment procedure
Operating the switch moves the
steering wheel in the following
directions:
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.484)

WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to
mishandle the vehicle and cause
1 Up an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
2 Down
3 Toward the driver Sounding the horn
4 Away from the driver
Press on or close to the
■ The steering wheel can be
adjusted when mark.
The power switch is in ACC or ON*.
*
: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened,
the steering wheel can be
adjusted regardless of power
switch mode.
■ Automatic tilt-away & returning
function
When the power switch is turned off,
the steering wheel is automatically
adjusted to a position that allows
driver to enter and exit the vehicle
easily.
When the power switch has been
turned ACC or ON, the steering
wheel automatically returns to the
original position.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors 139

Inside rear view mirror ■ To prevent sensor error

To ensure that the sensors operate
The rear view mirror’s posi- properly, do not touch or cover
them.
tion can be adjusted to
enable sufficient confirma-
tion of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of

rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mir-
ror can be adjusted to suit your
driving posture.
Adjust the height of the rear
view mirror by moving it up and 4
down.

Before driving

WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the
mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling
of the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious
injury.

Anti-glare function
Responding to the level of
brightness of the headlights of
vehicles behind, the reflected
light is automatically reduced.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 140 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Outside rear view mir- Left

rors Right
2 To adjust the mirror, operate
The rear view mirror’s posi-
the switch.
tion can be adjusted to
enable sufficient confirma-
tion of the rear view.

■ When using the outside rear

view mirrors in a cold weather
P.308

WARNING
■ Important points while driving
Up
Observe the following precautions
while driving. Right
Failure to do so may result in loss
of control of the vehicle and cause Down
an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury. Left
● Do not adjust the mirrors while
driving. ■ Mirror angle can be adjusted
when
● Do not drive with the mirrors
folded. The power switch is in ACC or ON.
■ Defogging the mirrors
● Both the driver and passenger
side mirrors must be extended The outside rear view mirrors can
and properly adjusted before be cleared using the mirror defog-
driving. gers. Turn on the rear window
defogger to turn on the outside rear
view mirror defoggers. (P.315)
Adjustment procedure
WARNING
1 To select a mirror to adjust,
turn the switch. ■ When the mirror defoggers
are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror
surfaces, as they can become
very hot and burn you.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors 141

Folding and extending the when the vehicle is reversing in

order to give a better view of the
mirrors
ground.
To disable this function, select
neither “L” nor “R”.
■ Adjusting the mirror angle
when the vehicle is revers-
ing
With the shift position in R,
adjust the mirror angle at a
desired position.
1 Folds the mirrors The adjusted angle will be mem-
2 Extends the mirrors orized and the mirror will auto-
Putting the switch in the neutral matically tilt to the memorized
position sets the mirrors to auto- angle whenever the shift posi-
4
matic mode. Automatic mode tion is shifted to R from next
allows the folding or extending of time.

Before driving
the mirrors to be linked to lock-
The memorized downward tilt posi-
ing/unlocking of the doors.
tion of the mirror is linked to the
normal position (angle adjusted
■ Using automatic mode in cold
with the shift position in other than
weather
R). Therefore, if the normal position
P.309 is changed after adjustment, the tilt
■ Customization position will also change.
Some functions can be customized. When the normal position is
(P.484) changed, readjust the angle in
reversing.
WARNING
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mir-
ror malfunction, be careful not to
get your hand caught by the mov-
ing mirror.

Linked mirror function

when reversing
When either “L” or “R” of the mir-
ror select switch is selected, the
outside rear view mirrors will
automatically angle downwards

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 142 4-5. Opening, closing the windows

Power windows between the window and the win-

[Link], closing the windows

dow frame while the window is clos-

ing, window movement is stopped
and the window is opened slightly.
Opening and closing the
■ Catch protection function
power windows
If an object becomes caught
The power windows can be between the door and window while
the window is opening, window
opened and closed using the movement is stopped.
switches. ■ When the side window cannot
Operating the switch moves the be opened or closed
windows as follows: When the jam protection function or
catch protection function operates
unusually and the side window can-
not be opened or closed, perform
the following operations with the
power window switch of that door.
● Stop the vehicle. With the power
switch in ON, within 4 seconds of
the jam protection function or
catch protection function activat-
ing, continuously operate the
power window switch in the one-
touch closing direction or one-
1 Closing touch opening direction so that the
2 One-touch closing* side window can be opened and
closed.
3 Opening ● If the side window cannot be
4 One-touch opening* opened and closed even when
performing the above operations,
* perform the following procedure
: To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the opposite for function initialization.
direction. 1 Turn the power switch to ON.
2 Pull and hold the power window
switch in the one-touch closing
■ The power windows can be direction and completely close
operated when the side window.
The power switch is in ON 3 Release the power window
■ Operating the power windows switch for a moment, resume
after turning the fuel cell sys- pulling the switch in the one-
tem off touch closing direction, and hold
it there for approximately 6 sec-
The power windows can be oper- onds or more.
ated for approximately 45 seconds 4 Press and hold the power win-
even after the power switch is dow switch in the one-touch
turned to ACC or turned off. They opening direction. After the side
cannot, however, be operated once window is completely opened,
either front door is opened. continue holding the switch for
■ Jam protection function an additional 1 second or more.
If an object becomes jammed

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-5. Opening, closing the windows 143
5 Release the power window
switch for a moment, resume WARNING
pushing the switch in the one- Observe the following precau-
touch opening direction, and tions.
hold it there for approximately 4 Failure to do so may result in
seconds or more. death or serious injury.
6 Pull and hold the power window
switch in the one-touch closing ■ Closing the windows
direction again. After the side ● The driver is responsible for all
window is completely closed, the power window operations,
continue holding the switch for a including the operation for the
further 1 second or more. passengers. In order to prevent
If you release the switch while the accidental operation, especially
window is moving, start again from by a child, do not let a child
the beginning. operate the power windows. It is
If the window reverses and cannot possible for children and other
be fully closed or opened, have the passengers to have body parts
vehicle inspected by your Toyota caught in the power window.
dealer. Also, when riding with a child, it
is recommended to use the win-
■ Door lock linked window opera- dow lock switch. (P.144) 4
tion
● The power windows can be ● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of

Before driving
opened and closed using the
their body in a position where it
mechanical key.* (P.455) could be caught when a window
● The power windows can be is being operated.
opened using the wireless remote
control.* (P.121)
● The alarm may be triggered if the
alarm is set and the power window
is closed using the door lock
linked power window operation
function. (P.68)
*: These settings must be custom-

ized at your Toyota dealer.

● When using the wireless remote
■ Power windows open warning control or mechanical key and
buzzer operating the power windows,
A message is shown on the multi operate the power window after
information display when the power checking to make sure that
switch is turned to OFF and the there is no possibility of any
driver’s door is opened with the passenger having any of their
power windows open. body parts caught in the win-
dow. Also do not let a child
■ Customization operate window by the wireless
Some functions can be customized. remote control or mechanical
(P.489) key. It is possible for children
and other passengers to get
caught in the power window.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 144 4-5. Opening, closing the windows

WARNING
● When exiting the vehicle, turn
the power switch off, carry the
key and exit the vehicle along
with the child. There may be
accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly
lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body
to intentionally activate the jam ■ The window lock switch can be
protection function. operated when
● The jam protection function may
The power switch is in ON.
not work if something gets ■ When the 12-volt battery is dis-
jammed just before the window connected
is fully closed. Be careful not to The window lock switch is disabled.
get any part of your body If necessary, press the window lock
jammed in the window. switch after reconnecting the 12-volt
■ Catch protection function battery.
● Never use any part of your body
or clothing to intentionally acti-
vate the catch protection func-
tion.
● The catch protection function
may not work if something gets
caught just before the window is
fully opened. Be careful not to
get any part of your body or
clothing caught in the window.

Preventing accidental
operation (window lock
switch)
This function can be used to
prevent children from acciden-
tally opening or closing a pas-
senger window.
Press the switch.
The indicator will come on and
the passenger windows will be
locked.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 4-6. Favorite settings 145

My Settings For details on registering and delet-

[Link] settings

ing facial information, refer to the

separate “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S
By recognizing an individ- MANUAL”
ual through Bluetooth An individual identified using facial
devices, the vehicle settings identification is prioritized even
recorded for that driver can when an individual is identified with
be recalled when that indi- an electronic or Digital Key.
vidual enters the vehicle. By  Face identification
assigning an authentication
Individuals are identified by detect-
device to a driver in ing the face from the driver monitor.
advance, the vehicle can be
entered with the preferred  Bluetooth® devices
settings of the driver. Set- An individual can be detected if the
tings for up to 3 drivers can same Bluetooth® device that was
be recorded with My Set- used as a hands free phone the last
4
tings. For details on how to time the vehicle was entered is con-
assign/delete Bluetooth nected to the audio system.

Before driving
devices, set driver names, Bluetooth® is a registered trade-
perform initialization, mark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
change drivers manually, or *: If equipped
delete a driver, refer to the
“MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S
Recalled functions
MANUAL”.
When an individual is identified
Types of assigned from an authentication device,
settings for the following func-
authentication devices
tions are recalled.
An individual can be identified  Vehicle settings that can be
using the following authentica- set using the multimedia dis-
tion devices. play
 Electronic key • Identification using electronic key:
An individual is identified when the The door is unlocked and opened
smart key system detects their using the smart key system or wire-
electronic key. (P.116, 129) less remote control.
 Digital Key* • Identification using Digital Key*1:
An individual is identified when the The door is unlocked and opened
smart key system detects their Digi- using the smart key system.
tal Key. (P.119)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 146 4-6. Favorite settings

 Display settings*2 (meter, Mul-

timedia Display)
When an individual is identified, the
display settings used when the
power switch was last turned off are
recalled.
When an individual is identified, the
vehicle settings used when the
power switch was last turned off are
recalled.
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Some settings are excluded

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 147

Driving
5
5-1. Before driving PCS (Pre-Collision System)
Driving the vehicle....... 149 .................................. 205
Cargo and luggage ..... 155 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
.................................. 216
Vehicle load limits ....... 157
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Trailer towing............... 158 .................................. 221
Dinghy towing ............. 159 LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
5-2. Driving procedures .................................. 224
Power switch ............... 160 PDA (Proactive driving
Shift position ............... 165 assist) ........................ 229
Turn signal lever.......... 170 FCTA (Front Cross Traffic
Alert).......................... 236
Parking brake.............. 171
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
Brake Hold .................. 174 .................................. 238 5
Water release (H2O switch) Dynamic radar cruise con-
.................................. 176 trol ............................. 241

Driving
5-3. Operating the lights and Cruise control .............. 252
wipers
Emergency Driving Stop
Headlight switch .......... 178 System ...................... 256
AHB (Automatic High Traffic Jam Assist ........ 259
Beam)........................ 180
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
Windshield wipers and .................................. 265
washer....................... 184
Safe Exit Assist ........... 270
5-4. Refueling
Intuitive parking assist . 275
Opening the fuel door . 189
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
5-5. Using the driving support Alert) function ............ 281
systems
RCD (Rear Camera Detec-
Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 tion) ........................... 287
software update......... 193
PKSB (Parking Support
Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 Brake)........................ 291
.................................. 195
Driver monitor ............. 203

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 148

Driving
5
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (static objects front
and rear of the vehicle)
.................................. 295
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (moving vehicles rear
of the vehicle)............ 298
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (pedestrians rear of
the vehicle)................ 299
Driving mode select switch
.................................. 301
Snow mode ................. 302
Driving assist systems 303
5-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips ....... 308

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-1. Before driving 149

Driving the vehicle 3 Shift the shift position to P.

[Link] driving

(P.166)
The following procedures Check that the shift position indica-
tor shows P and the parking brake
should be observed to indicator is illuminated.
ensure safe driving: 4 Press the power switch to
stop the fuel cell system.
Driving procedure 5 Slowly release the brake
pedal.
■ Starting the fuel cell system
6 Lock the door, making sure
P.160
that you have the electronic
■ Driving key on your person.
1 With the brake pedal If parking on a hill, block the wheels
depressed, shift the shift as needed.
position to D. ■ Starting off on a steep
Check that the shift position indica- uphill
tor shows D. 1 Firmly depress the brake
2 If the parking brake is set, pedal and shift the shift posi- 5
release the parking brake. tion to D.
(P.171)
The hill-start assist control will be

Driving
3 Gradually release the brake activated.
pedal and gently depress the 2 Set the parking brake.
accelerator pedal to acceler- (P.171)
ate the vehicle. 3 Release the brake pedal and
■ Stopping gently depress the accelera-
1 Depress the brake pedal. tor pedal to accelerate the
vehicle.
2 If necessary, set the parking
brake. 4 Release the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an
(P.171)
extended period of time, shift the
shift position to P. (P.166) ■ For fuel-efficient driving
■ Parking the vehicle Keep in mind that fuel cell electric
vehicles are similar to conventional
1 Depress the brake pedal to vehicles, and it is necessary to
stop the vehicle completely. refrain from activities such as sud-
den acceleration. (P.87)
2 If the parking brake is
released, set the parking ■ Driving in the rain
brake. (P.171) ● Drive carefully when it is raining,
because visibility will be reduced,
the windows may become fogged-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 150 5-1. Before driving

up, and the road will be slippery. ● A warning message is displayed

● Drive carefully when it starts to on the multi-information display
rain, because the road surface will while the system is operating.
be especially slippery. ■ Breaking in your new Toyota
● Refrain from high speeds when To extend the life of the vehicle,
driving on an expressway in the observing the following precautions
rain, because there may be a is recommended:
layer of water between the tires
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):
and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from Avoid sudden stops.
operating properly.
● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
■ ECO Accelerator Guidance • Do not drive at extremely high
(P.105) speeds.
Eco-friendly driving may be • Avoid sudden acceleration.
achieved more easily by staying • Do not drive continuously in low
within the zone of Eco acceleration. gears.
Also, by staying within the zone of • Do not drive at a constant speed
Eco acceleration, it will be easier to for extended periods.
obtain a good Eco score. ■ Drum-in-disc type parking
● When starting off: brake system
Gradually depress the accelerator Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type
parking brake system. This type of
pedal to stay within the zone of Eco brake system needs bedding-down
acceleration and accelerate to the of the brake shoes periodically or
desired speed. By refraining from whenever the parking brake shoes
excessive acceleration, a good eco and/or drum are replaced. Have
start score will be obtained. your Toyota dealer perform the bed-
ding down operation.
● When driving:
■ Operating your vehicle in a for-
After accelerating to the desired eign country
speed, release the accelerator Comply with the relevant vehicle
pedal and drive at a stable speed registration laws and confirm the
while staying within the zone of Eco availability of the correct fuel.
acceleration. By staying within the (P.469)
zone of Eco acceleration, a good
eco cruise score will be obtained. WARNING
● When stopping: Observe the following precau-
By starting to release the accelera- tions.
Failure to do so may result in
tor pedal early before decelerating, death or serious injury.
a good eco stop score will be
obtained. ■ When starting the vehicle
■ Restraining the fuel cell system
Always keep your foot on the
output (Brake Override System) brake pedal while stopped with
the “READY” indicator is illumi-
● When the accelerator and brake nated. This prevents the vehicle
pedals are depressed at the same from creeping.
time, the fuel cell system output
may be restrained.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-1. Before driving 151

WARNING ● During normal driving, do not

turn off the fuel cell system.
■ When driving the vehicle Turning the fuel cell system off
● Do not drive if you are unfamil- while driving will not cause loss
iar with the location of the brake of steering or braking control,
and accelerator pedals to avoid however, power assist to the
depressing the wrong pedal. steering will be lost. This will
make it more difficult to steer
• Accidentally depressing the smoothly, so you should pull
accelerator pedal instead of the over and stop the vehicle as
brake pedal will result in sudden soon as it is safe to do so.
acceleration that may lead to an In the event of an emergency,
accident. such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal
• When backing up, you may twist way: P.414
your body around, leading to dif-
ficulty in operating the pedals. ● Using the brakes continuously
Make sure to operate the pedals may cause the brakes to over-
properly. heat and lose effectiveness
when driving down a steep hill.
• Make sure to keep a correct
driving posture even when mov- ● Do not adjust the positions of
ing the vehicle only slightly. This the steering wheel, the seat, or
allows you to depress the brake the inside or outside rear view
and accelerator pedals properly. mirrors while driving. 5
Doing so may result in a loss of
• Depress the brake pedal using vehicle control.
your right foot. Depressing the

Driving
brake pedal using your left foot ● Always check that all passen-
may delay response in an emer- gers’ arms, heads or other parts
gency, resulting in an accident. of their body are not outside the
vehicle.
● The driver should pay extra
attention to pedestrians as this ● Do not drive in excess of the
vehicle is powered only by an speed limit. Even if the legal
electric motor (traction motor). speed limit permits it, do not
As there is no engine noise, the drive over 85 mph (140 km/h)
pedestrians may misjudge the unless your vehicle has high-
vehicle’s movement. Even with speed capability tires. Driving
the acoustic vehicle alerting over 85 mph (140 km/h) may
system activate, drive with care result in tire failure, loss of con-
as pedestrians in the vicinity trol and possible injury. Be sure
may still not notice the vehicle if to consult a tire dealer to deter-
the surrounding area is noisy. mine whether the tires on your
vehicle are high-speed capabil-
ity tires or not before driving at
such speeds.
■ When driving on slippery
road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration
and steering may cause tire
slippage and reduce your ability
to control the vehicle.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 152 5-1. Before driving

WARNING ● Be careful not to change the

shift position with the accelera-
● Sudden acceleration or regen- tor pedal depressed. Changing
erative braking due to shifting the shift position to any posi-
could cause the vehicle to skid. tions other than P or N may lead
to unexpected rapid accelera-
● After driving through a puddle, tion of the vehicle that may
lightly depress the brake pedal cause an accident and result in
to make sure that the brakes death or serious injury.
are functioning properly. Wet After changing the shift position,
brake pads may prevent the make sure to confirm the cur-
brakes from functioning prop- rent shift position displayed on
erly. If the brakes on only one the shift position indicator inside
side are wet and not functioning the meter.
properly, steering control may
be affected. ■ If you hear a squealing or
scraping noise (brake pad
■ When shifting the shift posi- wear limit indicators)
tion
Have the brake pads checked and
● Do not let the vehicle roll back- replaced by your Toyota dealer as
ward while a forward driving soon as possible.
position is selected, or roll for-
ward while the shift position is in Rotor damage may result if the
R. pads are not replaced when
Doing so may result in an acci- needed.
dent or damage to the vehicle.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle
● Do not shift the shift position to when the wear limits of the brake
P while the vehicle is moving. pads and/or those of the brake
Doing so can damage the trans- discs are exceeded.
mission and may result in a loss
of vehicle control. ■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not shift the shift position to ● Do not depress the accelerator
R while the vehicle is moving pedal unnecessarily.
forward. If the shift position is in any
Doing so can damage the trans- position other than P or N, the
mission and may result in a loss vehicle may accelerate sud-
of vehicle control. denly and unexpectedly, caus-
ing an accident.
● Do not shift the shift position to
a driving position while the vehi- ● In order to prevent accidents
cle is moving backward. due to the vehicle rolling away,
Doing so can damage the trans- always keep depressing the
mission and may result in a loss brake pedal while stopped with
of vehicle control. the “READY” indicator is illumi-
nated, and apply the parking
● Changing the shift position to N brake as necessary.
while the vehicle is moving will
disengage the fuel cell system.
Regenerative braking is not
available with the fuel cell sys-
tem disengaged.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-1. Before driving 153

WARNING ● Do not leave a door or window

open if the curved glass is
● If the vehicle is stopped on an coated with a metallized film
incline, in order to prevent acci- such as a silver-colored one.
dents caused by the vehicle roll- Reflected sunlight may cause
ing forward or backward, always the glass to act as a lens, caus-
depress the brake pedal and ing a fire.
securely apply the parking
brake as needed. ● Always apply the parking brake,
shift the shift position to P, stop
■ When the vehicle is parked the fuel cell system and lock the
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette vehicle.
lighters, spray cans, or soft Do not leave the vehicle unat-
drink cans in the vehicle when it tended while the “READY” indi-
is in the sun. cator is illuminated.
Doing so may result in the fol- If the vehicle is parked with the
lowing: shift position in P but the park-
ing brake is not set, the vehicle
• Gas may leak from a cigarette may start to move, possibly
lighter or spray can, and may leading to an accident.
lead to a fire.
■ When taking a nap in the vehi-
• The temperature inside the cle
vehicle may cause the plastic Always turn the fuel cell system
lenses and plastic material of off. Otherwise, if you accidentally 5
glasses to deform or crack. move the shift lever or depress
• Soft drink cans may fracture, the accelerator pedal, causing the
vehicle to unintentionally move,

Driving
causing the contents to spray
over the interior of the vehicle, which can lead to an accident,
and may also cause a short cir- resulting in death or serious injury.
cuit in the vehicle’s electrical ■ When braking
components.
● When the brakes are wet, drive
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in more cautiously.
the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter Braking distance increases
is in a place such as the glove when the brakes are wet, and
box or on the floor, it may be lit this may cause one side of the
accidentally when luggage is vehicle to brake differently than
loaded or the seat is adjusted, the other side. Also, the parking
causing a fire. brake may not securely hold the
vehicle.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to
the windshield or windows. Do ● If the electronically controlled
not place containers such as air brake system does not operate,
fresheners on the instrument do not follow other vehicles
panel or dashboard. Adhesive closely and avoid hills or sharp
discs or containers may act as turns that require braking.
lenses, causing a fire in the In this case, braking is still pos-
vehicle. sible, but the brake pedal
should be depressed more
firmly than usual. Also, the brak-
ing distance will increase. Have
your brakes fixed immediately.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 154 5-1. Before driving

WARNING ■ If you get a flat tire while driv-

ing
● The brake system consists of 2
or more individual hydraulic sys- A flat or damaged tire may cause
tems; if one of the systems fails, the following situations. Hold the
the other(s) will still operate. In steering wheel firmly and gradu-
this case, the brake pedal ally depress the brake pedal to
should be depressed more slow down the vehicle.
firmly than usual and the brak- ● It may be difficult to control your
ing distance will increase. Have vehicle.
your brakes fixed immediately.
● The vehicle will make abnormal
sounds or vibrations.
NOTICE
● The vehicle will lean abnor-
■ When driving the vehicle mally.
● Do not depress the accelerator Information on what to do in case
and brake pedals at the same of a flat tire (P.438)
time during driving, as this may
restrain the fuel cell system out- ■ When encountering flooded
put. roads
● Do not use the accelerator Do not drive on a road that has
pedal or depress the accelera- flooded after heavy rain, etc.
tor and brake pedals at the Doing so may cause the following
same time to hold the vehicle on serious damage to the vehicle:
a hill.
● Fuel cell system stalling
■ When parking the vehicle
● Short in electrical components
Always set the parking brake, and
shift the shift position to P. Failure ● Fuel cell system damage
to do so may cause the vehicle to caused by water immersion
move or the vehicle may acceler-
ate suddenly if the accelerator In the event that you drive on a
pedal is accidentally depressed. flooded road and the vehicle is
flooded, be sure to have your Toy-
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle ota dealer check the following:
parts
● Fuel cell system
● Do not turn the steering wheel
fully in either direction and hold ● Brake function
it there for an extended period
of time. ● Changes in quantity and quality
Doing so may damage the of transmission fluid, etc.
power steering motor.
● Lubricant condition for the bear-
● When driving over bumps in the ings and suspension joints
road, drive as slowly as possible (where possible), and the func-
to avoid damaging the wheels, tion of all joints, bearings, etc.
underside of the vehicle, etc.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-1. Before driving 155

NOTICE Cargo and luggage

If the shift control system is dam-
aged by flooding, it may not be Take notice of the following
possible to shift the shift position
to P, or from P to other positions. information about storage
In this case, contact your Toyota precautions, cargo capacity
dealer. and load:

Sudden start restraint Capacity and distribution

control (Drive-Start Con-
trol [DSC]) Cargo capacity depends on the
total weight of the occupants.
When the following unusual
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load
operation is performed with the
capacity) — (Total weight of
accelerator pedal depressed,
occupants)
the fuel cell system output may
be restrained. Steps for Determining Correct
• When the shift position is Load Limit —
shifted to R*. (1) Locate the statement “The
5
• When the shift position is combined weight of occupants
shifted from P or R to forward and cargo should never exceed

Driving
drive shift position such as D*. XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
When the system operates, a mes-
sage appears on the multi-informa- (2) Determine the combined
tion display. Read the message and weight of the driver and passen-
follow the instruction. gers that will be riding in your
*
: Depending on the situation, the vehicle.
shift position may not be (3) Subtract the combined
changed. weight of the driver and passen-
gers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
■ Drive-Start Control (DSC)
● When the TRAC is turned off (4) The resulting figure equals
(P.304), sudden start restraint the available amount of cargo
control also does not operate. If and luggage load capacity.
your vehicle have trouble escap-
ing from the mud or fresh snow For example, if the “XXX”
due to sudden start restraint con- amount equals 1400 lbs. and
trol operation, deactivate TRAC
(P.304) so that the vehicle may there will be five 150 lb passen-
become able to escape from the gers in your vehicle, the amount
mud or fresh snow. of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 −

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 156 5-1. Before driving

750 (5  150) = 650 lbs.) total load capacity (vehicle

(5) Determine the combined capacity weight) of B lb. (kg),
weight of luggage and cargo the available amount of cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. and luggage load capacity will
That weight may not safely be C lb. (kg) as follows:
exceed the available cargo and B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb.
luggage load capacity calcu- (kg)
lated in Step 4. *1
: A =Weight of people
(6) If your vehicle will be towing *2
: B =Total load capacity
a trailer, load from your trailer *3
: C =Available cargo and luggage
will be transferred to your vehi-
load
cle. Consult this manual to
In this condition, if 3 more passen-
determine how this reduces the
gers with the combined weight of D
available cargo and luggage lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo
load capacity of your vehicle. and luggage load will be reduced E
(P.157) lb. (kg) as follows:
Toyota does not recommend towing
C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb.
a trailer with your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed for trailer
(kg)
*4: D =Additional weight of people
towing.
*5
: E =Available cargo and luggage
Calculation formula for load
your vehicle As shown in the example above,
if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and lug-
gage load will be reduced by an
amount that equals the
increased weight due to the
additional occupants. In other
words, if an increase in the num-
ber of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity
Cargo capacity (combined weight of occupants
plus cargo and luggage load),
Total load capacity (vehicle you must reduce the cargo and
capacity weight) (P.468) luggage on your vehicle.
When 2 people with the com-
bined weight of A lb. (kg) are rid-
ing in your vehicle, which has a

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-1. Before driving 157

WARNING Vehicle load limits

■ Things that must not be car-
ried in the trunk Vehicle load limits include
The following things may cause a total load capacity, seating
fire if loaded in the trunk:
capacity, towing capacity
● Receptacles containing gaso- and cargo capacity.
line
 Total load capacity (vehicle
● Aerosol cans
capacity weight): P.468
■ Storage precautions
Total load capacity means the
Observe the following precau- combined weight of occu-
tions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pants, cargo and luggage.
pedals from being depressed
properly, may block the driver’s  Seating capacity: P.468
vision, or may result in items hit- Seating capacity means the
ting the driver or passengers, pos-
sibly causing an accident. maximum number of occu-
pants whose estimated aver-
● Stow cargo and luggage in the
trunk whenever possible. age weight is 150 lb. (68 kg)
per person. 5
● Do not place cargo or luggage
in or on the following locations.  TWR (Trailer Weight Rat-
ing)

Driving
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear Toyota does not recommend
seats (when stacking items) towing a trailer with your vehi-
• On the package tray cle.

• On the instrument panel  Cargo capacity

• On the dashboard Cargo capacity may increase
or decrease depending on the
● Secure all items in the occupant
compartment.
weight and the number of
occupants.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum
axle weight rating or the total ■ Total load capacity and seating
vehicle weight rating. capacity
These details are also described on
● Even if the total load of occu- the tire and loading information
pant’s weight and the cargo label. (P.397)
load is less than the total load
capacity, do not apply the load
unevenly. Improper loading may
cause deterioration of steering
or braking control which may
cause death or serious injury.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 158 5-1. Before driving

WARNING Trailer towing

■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle. Toyota does not recom-
It may not only cause damage to mend towing a trailer with
the tires, but also degrade steer-
ing and braking ability, resulting in your vehicle. Toyota also
an accident. does not recommend the
installation of a tow hitch or
the use of a tow hitch carrier
for a wheelchair, scooter,
bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailer tow-
ing or for the use of tow
hitch mounted carriers.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-1. Before driving 159

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed

to be dinghy towed (with 4
wheels on the ground)
behind a motor home.

NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to
your vehicle 5
Do not tow your vehicle with the
four wheels on the ground.

Driving

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 160 5-2. Driving procedures

Power switch from any power switch mode.

[Link] procedures

Performing the following

operations when carrying
the electronic key on your
person starts the fuel cell
system or changes power
switch modes.

Starting the fuel cell sys- 4 Check that the “READY” indi-
cator is illuminated.
tem
The vehicle cannot be driven if the
1 Pull the parking brake switch “READY” indicator is off.
to check that the parking
■ Power switch illumination
brake is set. (P.171)
According to the situation, the
The parking brake indicator will power switch illumination operates
come on. as follows.
2 Firmly depress the brake ● When driver’ door or front passen-
pedal. ger’ door is opened, the power
switch illumination illuminates.
and a message will be dis- ● When the power switch is in OFF
played on the multi-information dis- and depressing the brake pedal
play. with carrying the electronic key on
If it is not displayed, the fuel cell your person, the power switch illu-
system cannot be started. mination blinks.
When the shift position is N, the ● When the power switch is in ACC
fuel cell system cannot start. Shift or ON, the power switch illumina-
the shift position to P when starting tion illuminates.
the fuel cell system. (P.166)
● When the power switch mode is
3 Press the power switch changed from ACC or ON to OFF,
shortly and firmly. the power switch illumination illu-
minates for a certain amount of
When operating the power switch, time. Afterwards, the power switch
one short, firm press is enough. It is illumination turns off.
not necessary to press and hold the
switch. ■ Starting the fuel cell system in
cold temperatures
If the “READY” indicator turns on,
the fuel cell system will operate nor- ● When the fuel cell system is
mally. started during cold temperatures,
the fuel cell stack quickly warms
Continue depressing the brake up using waste heat during power
pedal until the “READY” indicator is generation. Operation noises will
illuminated. be louder than usually, but this is
The fuel cell system can be started not a malfunction. Depending on
the situation, the operation noises
may also continue for a fixed

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-2. Driving procedures 161
period of time after the “READY” shown on the multi-information
indicator is turned on. (P.73) display, read the message and fol-
● When the temperatures are cold, low the instructions.
it may take more time than usual ● Check that the fuel door is closed.
until the “READY” indicator turns When the fuel door is open, the
on. In those cases, the progress fuel cell system cannot be started.
state is displayed in the multi- Close the fuel door before starting
information display. the system. (P.191)
● If the door is unlocked with the
mechanical key, the fuel cell sys-
tem cannot be started using the
smart key system. Refer to
P.455 to start the fuel cell system.
However, if the electronic key is
carried inside the vehicle and the
doors are locked (P.124), the
fuel cell system can be started.
“FCV System is Warmed Up ■ Sounds and vibrations specific
to a fuel cell electric vehicle
Waiting...”
P.74
● When starting the fuel cell system
during cold weather, “FCV System ■ If the 12-volt battery is dis-
Shutdown Due to Freezing Stop in charged
a Safe Place See Owner’s Man- The fuel cell system cannot be 5
ual” may be displayed in the multi- started using the smart key system.
information display. Refer to P.456to restart the fuel cell

Driving
The fuel cell system is frozen and system.
cannot be started. Contact your Toy- ■ Electronic key battery depletion
ota dealer. P.116
● The power output will be tempo- ■ Conditions affecting operation
rarily limited until the fuel cell sys- P.131
tem reaches full operating
temperature. ■ Notes for the entry function
● When the traction battery is P.132
extremely cold (below approxi- ■ If “Smart Key System Malfunc-
mately -22˚F [-30˚C]) under the tion See Owner’s Manual” is
influence of outside temperature, displayed on the multi-informa-
it may not be possible to start the tion display
fuel cell system. In this case, try to
start the fuel cell system again The system may be malfunctioning.
after the temperature of the trac- Have the vehicle inspected by your
tion battery increases due to the Toyota dealer immediately.
outside temperature increase etc. ■ If the “READY” indicator does
■ If the fuel cell system does not not come on
start In the event that the “READY” indi-
● The immobilizer system may not cator does not come on even after
have been deactivated. (P.67) performing the proper procedures
Contact your Toyota dealer. for starting the vehicle, contact your
Toyota dealer immediately.
● If a message related to start-up is

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 162 5-2. Driving procedures

■ If the fuel cell system is mal- ■ Symptoms indicating a mal-

functioning function with the power
P.432 switch
■ Electronic key battery If the power switch seems to be
operating somewhat differently
P.405
than usual, such as the switch
■ Operation of the power switch sticking slightly, there may be a
● If the switch is not pressed shortly malfunction. Contact your Toyota
and firmly, the power switch mode dealer immediately.
may not change or the fuel cell
system may not start.
Stopping the fuel cell sys-
● If attempting to restart the fuel cell
system immediately after turning tem
the power switch off, the fuel cell
system may not start in some 1 Stop the vehicle completely.
cases. After turning the power
switch off, please wait a few sec- 2 Set the parking brake.
onds before restarting the fuel cell (P.171)
system.
3 Press the P position switch.
■ Customization
(P.166)
If the smart key system has been
deactivated in a customized setting, Check that the shift position indica-
refer to P.454. tor shows P and the parking brake
indicator is illuminated.
WARNING 4 Press the power switch.
■ When starting the fuel cell The fuel cell system will stop, and
system the meter display will be extin-
Always start the fuel cell system guished (the shift position indicator
while sitting in the driver’s seat. will be extinguished a few seconds
Do not depress the accelerator after the meter display).
pedal while starting the fuel cell 5 Release the brake pedal and
system under any circumstances. check that “ACCESSORY”,
Doing so may cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury. “POWER ON” is not shown
on the meter.
NOTICE
■ Stopping the fuel cell system in
■ When starting the fuel cell cold temperatures
system ● When the power switch is pressed
If the fuel cell system becomes and the fuel cell system is stopped
difficult to start, have your vehicle during cold temperatures, the time
checked by your Toyota dealer for water purge from the tailpipe
immediately. may be longer than usual to pre-
vent liquid in the fuel cell stack
from freezing.
● If the “FCV System Purge in Prog-
ress Purge will Stop Automati-
cally” is displayed in the multi-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-2. Driving procedures 163
information display, however it is switch (P.124) from the inside or
no problem to exit the vehicle. the mechanical key from the out-
● The water purge time may also be side, the automatic fuel cell sys-
long if the system is stopped tem shut off feature will be
before fuel cell system warm-up is disabled. The timer for the auto-
completed. matic fuel cell system shut off fea-
ture will be re-enabled if the
● It is normal to hear hissing and driver’s door is opened.
other sounds during purge.
(P.73) ■ When the shift control system
malfunctions
● It is not a problem to do refueling
operations while the system is If the shift control system is malfunc-
purging. tioning, when attempting to turn the
The purging process is carried out power switch off, it may not be able
automatically after several min- to be turned off. In this situation, it
utes and a white mist may be may be possible to turn the power
emitted, however this is not a mal- switch off by applying the parking
function. brake and then operating the power
switch.
■ Parking the vehicle during cold
weather If there is a malfunction in the sys-
tem, have the vehicle inspected by
● Water may automatically purge your Toyota dealer immediately.
from the tailpipe, even when the
fuel cell system is off, in order to ■ Automatic P position selection
prevent liquid in the fuel cell stack, function 5
hydrogen pipelines, etc., from P.167
freezing. Also, water vapor may
■ Water release (H2O switch)

Driving
be purged, but this is not malfunc-
tion. P.176
● It is normal to hear hissing and
other sounds during purge.
(P.73)
■ Automatic fuel cell system shut
off feature
● The vehicle is equipped with a
feature that automatically shuts off
the fuel cell system when the shift
position is in P with the fuel cell
system operating for an extended
period.
● The fuel cell system will automati-
cally shut off after approximately 1
hour if it has been left running
while the shift position is in P.
● The timer for the automatic fuel
cell system shut off feature will
reset if the brake pedal is
depressed or if the shift position is
in a position other than P.
● After the vehicle is parked, if the
door is locked with the door lock

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 164 5-2. Driving procedures

WARNING
■ Stopping the fuel cell system
in an emergency
● If you want to stop the fuel cell
system in an emergency while
driving the vehicle, press and
hold the power switch for more
than 2 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in suc-
cession. (P.414)
However, do not touch the
power switch while driving
except in an emergency. Turn-
ing the fuel cell system off while
driving will not cause loss of
steering or braking control.
However, power assist for the “ACCESSORY”
steering wheel may be lost mak-
ing it difficult to steer smoothly “POWER ON”
before stopping the vehicle 1 OFF
depending on the remaining
charge in the 12-volt battery or The emergency flashers can be
usage conditions. In this situa- used.
tion, you should pull over and
stop the vehicle as soon as it is 2 ACC*
safe to do so. Some electrical components such
● If the power switch is operated as the audio system can be used.
while the vehicle is running, a “ACCESSORY” will be displayed
warning message will be shown on the meter.
on the multi-information display
and a buzzer sounds. 3 ON
All electrical components can be
● When restarting the fuel cell
system after an emergency used.
shutdown, shift the shift position “POWER ON” will be displayed on
to N and press the power the meter.
switch. *
: ACC mode can be enabled/dis-
abled on the customize menu.
Changing power switch (P.489)
modes
■ When ACC customization is in
Modes can be changed by off
pressing the power switch with ● With the power switch turned off,
the brake pedal released. (The the multimedia system can still be
used for a certain time until the
mode changes each time the battery saving function starts
switch is pressed.) operating.
● When the safe exit assist is oper-
ating, a buzzer will sound and a

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-2. Driving procedures 165
voice guidance will be given.
Shift position
■ Auto power off function
● If the vehicle is left in ACC or ON
(with fuel cell system not operat- Select the shift position
ing) for more than 20 minutes with depending on your pur-
the shift position in P, the power pose and situation.
switch will automatically turn off.
However, this function cannot
entirely prevent the 12-volt battery
discharge. Do not leave the vehi- Shift position purpose
cle with the power switch in ACC and functions
or ON for long periods of time
when the fuel cell system is not
operating. Shift posi-
Objective or function
tion
NOTICE Parking the vehi-
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- P cle/starting the fuel cell
charge system
● Do not leave the power switch R Reversing
in ACC or ON for long periods of
time without the fuel cell system N Neutral
on.
D Normal driving 5
● If “ACCESSORY”, “POWER
ON” is displayed on the meter, Br mode is not a shift position.
the power switch is not off. Exit

Driving
(P.169)
the vehicle after turning the
power switch off.
■ If a message about a shift oper-
ation is shown
To prevent the shift position from
being selected incorrectly or the
vehicle from moving unexpectedly,
the shift position may be changed
automatically or operating the shift
lever may be required. In this case,
change the shift position following
the messages on the multi-informa-
tion display.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 166 5-2. Driving procedures

securely in the direction of the

NOTICE
arrow on the shift position indicator.
■ Situations where shift control To shift to N, slide the shift lever in
system malfunctions are pos-
sible the direction of the arrow and hold
it.
If any of the following situations
occurs, shift control system mal- Release the shift lever after each
functions are possible. shifting operation to allow it to
Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place on level ground, apply return to its regular position ( ).
the parking brake, and then con-
tact your Toyota dealer. Shifting to Br mode is only possible
when the shift position is in D.
● When the warning message
indicating the shift control sys- When shifting from P to N, D or R,
tem appears on the multi-infor- from N, D, Br mode or R to P, from
mation display. (P.432) D or Br mode to R, or from R to D,
ensure that the brake pedal is being
● The display indicates that no
shift position is selected for depressed and the vehicle is sta-
more than a few seconds. tionary.
Shift position indicator
Shift position display and Meter display:
how to change the shift The current shift position is high-
position lighted.
P position switch
Fully stop the vehicle and set the
parking brake, and then press the P
position switch.
When the shift position is changed
to P, the switch illuminates.
Check that the shift position indica-
tor shows P.

■ Changing the shift position in

each power switch mode
● The shift position cannot be
changed when the power switch is
in ACC or off.
● When the power switch is in ON, if
the READY indicator is not illumi-
nated, the shift position can only
be changed to N.
● When the READY indicator is illu-
Shift lever minated, the shift position can be
changed from P to D, N, or R.
Operate the shift lever gently and
● When the READY indicator is

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-2. Driving procedures 167
flashing, the shift position cannot mode
be changed from P to any other ● When the P position switch is
position, even if the shift lever is pressed while driving
operated. Operate the shift lever
again after the READY indicator When driving at an extremely low
changes from flashing to illumi- speed, the shift position may
nated. change to P.
■ Shifting the shift position from ■ The shift position automatically
P to other positions changes to N when
● While depressing the brake pedal In the following situations, a buzzer
firmly, operate the shift lever. If the will sound to inform you that the shift
shift lever is operated without position has been changed to N.
depressing the brake pedal, the Use the appropriate operation to
buzzer will sound and the shifting attempt to change the shift position
operation will be disabled. again.
● When selecting the shift position, ● When attempting to change the
make sure that the shift position shift position to R while the vehicle
has been changed to the desired is moving forward
position by checking the shift posi-
tion indicator provided on the When driving at a low speed, the
instrument cluster. shift position may change to R.
● The shift position cannot be ● When attempting to change the
changed from P to Br mode shift position to D while the vehicle
directly. 5
is moving backward
■ The shift position cannot be When driving at a low speed, the

Driving
changed when shift position may change to D.
In the following situations, a buzzer ● When attempting to change the
will sound to inform you that the shift
shift position from R to Br mode
position cannot be changed. Use
the appropriate operation to attempt ■ If the N shift position is selected
to change the shift position again. while driving
● When attempting to change the If the shift lever is moved to N while
shift position from P with the brake driving above a certain speed, the
pedal not depressed shift position will change to N with-
● When attempting to change the out holding the shift lever in the N
shift position from P with the position. In this situation, a buzzer
accelerator pedal depressed will sound and a message will be
displayed on the multi-information
● When attempting to change the display to inform you that the shift
shift position from N while stopped position has been changed to N.
or driving at an extremely low
speed with the brake pedal not ■ Automatic P position selection
depressed function
● When attempting to change the In the following situations, the shift
shift position from N while stopped position is automatically changed to
or driving at an extremely low P.
speed with the accelerator pedal ● When pressing the power switch
depressed with the vehicle stopped while the
● When attempting to change the power switch is in ON and the shift
shift position from P or N to Br position is in a position other than
P (after the shift position has

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 168 5-2. Driving procedures

changed to P, the power switch

WARNING
will turn off)*
● If the driver’s door is opened and ■ For the shift lever
all of the following conditions are ● Do not remove the shift lever
met, while the shift position is in a knob or use anything but a gen-
position other than P uine TOYOTA shift lever knob.
• The power switch is in ON. Also, do not hang anything on
• The driver is not wearing the seat the shift lever. Doing so could
belt. prevent the shift lever from
• The brake pedal is not depressed. returning to position, causing
To start off the vehicle after the shift unexpected accidents to occur
when the vehicle is in motion.
position is changed to P, operate the
shift lever again. ● In order to prevent the shift
position from accidentally being
● When the vehicle is stopped after changed, do not touch the shift
the fuel cell system has been lever when not using them.
stopped in an emergency while
driving. ■ P position switch
● When voltage of the 12-volt bat- ● Do not press the P position
tery drops while the shift position switch while the vehicle is mov-
is in a position other than P. ing.
*
: When the power switch is pressed If the P position switch is
while driving at extremely slow pressed when driving at very
low speeds (for example,
speeds, such as immediately directly before stopping the
before stopping the vehicle, the vehicle), the vehicle may stop
shift position may automatically suddenly when the shift position
change to P. Make sure that the switches to P, which could lead
vehicle is completely stopped to an accident.
before pressing the power switch. ● In order to prevent the shift
position from accidentally being
■ If the shift position cannot be changed, do not touch the P
shifted from P position switch when not using
There is a possibility that the 12-volt them.
battery is discharged. Check the 12-
volt battery in this situation.
(P.456) NOTICE
■ Customization ■ Notes regarding shift lever
Some functions can be customized. and P position switch opera-
(P.485) tion
Avoid repeatedly operating the
shift lever and P position switch in
quick succession. The system
protection function may activate
and it will not be temporarily pos-
sible to shift the shift position
other than P. If this happens,
please wait for a while before
attempting to change the shift
position again.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-2. Driving procedures 169

NOTICE other than N, first press the P

position switch to change the
■ When exiting the vehicle
(driver’s seat only) shift position to P.
Check that the shift position indi-  Make sure to operate the shift
cator shows P and that the park- lever with the fuel cell system
ing brake indicator is illuminated
before opening the door and exit- is operating. If the fuel cell
ing the vehicle. system is not operating, it
may not be possible to hold
Keeping the shift position the shift position in N.
*: To keep this state, do not operate
in N without activating the
the power switch. If the power
automatic P position
switch is operated repeatedly, the
selection function power switch will turn off after the
shift position has automatically
 By performing the following
changed to P.
operation, the shift position
can be held in N until the shift
position switches to P without Selecting the driving
activating the automatic P mode
5
position selection function. ■ Driving mode
1 Operate the shift lever and
P.301

Driving
change the shift position to N
when the fuel cell system is ■ Snow mode
operating. P.302
2 Return the shift lever to its ■ Br mode
Suitable for driving that requires
regular position ( ).
strong deceleration force, such
3 Operate the shift lever to N as down-hill driving, etc.
and hold it there until the To select Br mode, shift the shift
buzzer sounds. lever down.
4 Press the power switch within The Br mode indicator will illumi-
5 seconds after the buzzer nate on the meter.
sounds. To return to normal driving mode,
The fuel cell system stops with the depress the accelerator pedal or
shift position in N.* select the D position again with the
Make sure to check that the buzzer shift lever.
sounds and “Holding N Push P
Switch When Done” is displayed on
the multi-information display.
 In order to shift to a position

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 170 5-2. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

■ Br mode
Depending on the condition of the
traction battery, Br mode may not be
available. In that case, a message is
displayed on the multi-information
display.
■ Sounds when in Br mode
P.73

1 Right turn
2 Lane change to the right
(move the lever partway and
release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3
times.
3 Lane change to the left
(move the lever partway and
release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.
4 Left turn

■ Turn signals can be operated

when
The power switch is in ON.
■ If the indicator flashes faster
than usual
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-2. Driving procedures 171
■ If the turn signals stop flashing
before a lane change has been Parking brake
performed
Operate the lever again. The parking brake can be
set or released automati-
cally or manually.
In automatic mode, the
parking brake can be set or
released automatically
according to the shift lever
operation. Also, even in
automatic mode, the park-
ing brake can be set or
released manually.

Operating instructions
■ Using the manual mode
5
The parking brake can be set
and released manually.

Driving

U.S.A.
Canada
1 Pull the switch to set the
parking brake
The parking brake indicator light
will turn on.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 172 5-2. Driving procedures

Pull and hold the parking brake  When the shift position is
switch if an emergency occurs and shifted to P, the parking brake
it is necessary to operate the park- will be set, and the parking
ing brake while driving.
brake indicator light will turn
2 Push the switch to release on.
the parking brake
• Operate the parking brake switch Operate the shift lever and P
while depressing the brake pedal. position switch with the vehicle
• Using the parking brake auto- stopped and the brake pedal
matic release function, the park- depressed.
ing brake can be released by
■ Turns automatic mode off
depressing the accelerator pedal.
When using this function, slowly While the vehicle is stopped,
depress the accelerator pedal. press and hold the parking
Make sure that the parking brake brake switch until a message is
indicator light turn off. shown on the multi-information
■ Turns automatic mode on display.
While the vehicle is stopped,
pull and hold the parking brake
switch until a message is shown
on the multi-information display.

“EPB Shift Interlock Function

Deactivated”
Operate the shift lever and P
position switch with the vehicle
“EPB Shift Interlock Function stopped and the brake pedal
Activated” depressed.
When the automatic mode is
■ Parking brake operation
turned on, the parking brake
● When the power switch is not in
operates as follows. ON, the parking brake cannot be
 When the shift position is released using the parking brake
switch.
shifted from P, the parking
● When the power switch is not in
brake will be released, and ON, automatic mode (automatic
the parking brake indicator brake setting and releasing) is not
light will turn off. available.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-2. Driving procedures 173
■ Parking brake automatic does not indicate a malfunction.
release function
■ When the parking brake switch
● When the shift position is shifted malfunctions
from P, the parking brake will be
released in automatic mode. Automatic mode (automatic brake
setting and releasing) will be turned
● When all of the following condi- on automatically.
tions are met in manual mode, the
parking brake can be released by ■ Parking the vehicle
depressing the accelerator pedal. P.149
• The driver’s door is closed
■ Parking brake engaged warning
• The driver is wearing the seat belt
buzzer
• The shift position is in D or R
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is
■ If “Parking Brake Temporarily driven with the parking brake
Unavailable” is displayed on engaged. “Parking Brake ON” is dis-
the multi-information display played on the multi-information dis-
If the parking brake is operated play. (with the vehicle reached a
repeatedly over a short period of speed of 3 mph [5 km/h])
time, the system may restrict opera- ■ If the parking brake indicator
tion to prevent overheating. If this
flashes
happens, refrain from operating the
parking brake. Normal operation will P.427
return after about 1 minute. ■ Usage in winter time
■ If “Parking Brake Unavailable” P.308 5
is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
WARNING

Driving
Operate the parking brake switch. If
the message does not disappear ■ When parking the vehicle
after operating the switch several
times, the system may be malfunc- Do not leave a child in the vehicle
tioning. Have the vehicle inspected alone. The parking brake may be
by your Toyota dealer. released unintentionally and there
is the danger of the vehicle mov-
■ Parking brake operation sound ing that may lead to an accident
When the parking brake operates, a resulting in death or serious injury.
motor sound (whirring sound) may
be heard. This does not indicate a
malfunction. NOTICE
■ Parking brake operation ■ When parking the vehicle
● Depending on the power switch Before you leave the vehicle, set
mode, the parking brake indicator the parking brake, shift the shift
light will turn on and stay on as position to P and make sure that
described below: the vehicle does not move.
ON: Comes on until the parking
brake is released. ■ When the system malfunc-
Not in ON: Stays on for approxi- tions
mately 15 seconds. Stop the vehicle in a safe place
● When the power switch is turned and check the warning messages.
off with the parking brake set, the
parking brake indicator light will
stay on for about 15 seconds. This

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 174 5-2. Driving procedures

NOTICE Brake Hold

■ When the parking brake can-
not be released due to a mal- The brake hold system
function
keeps the brake applied
Driving the vehicle with the park-
ing brake set will lead to brake when the shift position is in
components overheating, which D or N with the system on
may affect braking performance and the brake pedal has
and increase brake wear.
been depressed to stop the
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer immediately if vehicle. The system
this occurs. releases the brake when the
accelerator pedal is
depressed with the shift
position in D to allow
smooth start off.

Enabling the system

Turns the brake hold system on
The brake hold standby indicator
(green) comes on. While the
system is holding the brake, the
brake hold operated indicator (yel-
low) comes on.

■ Brake hold system operating

conditions
The brake hold system cannot be
turned on in the following condi-
tions:
● The driver’s door is not closed.
● The driver is not wearing the seat

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-2. Driving procedures 175
belt. Make sure that the parking brake
● The parking brake is engaged. indicator light goes off. (P.171)
If any of the conditions above are ■ When an inspection at your
detected when the brake hold sys- Toyota dealer is necessary
tem is enabled, the system will turn When the brake hold standby indi-
off and the brake hold standby indi- cator (green) does not illuminate
cator light will go off. In addition, if even when the brake hold switch is
any of the conditions are detected pressed with the brake hold system
while the system is holding the operating conditions met, the sys-
brake, a warning buzzer will sound tem may be malfunctioning. Have
and a message will be shown on the the vehicle inspected at your Toyota
multi-information display. The park- dealer.
ing brake will then be set automati-
cally. ■ If “Brake Hold Malfunction
Press Brake to Deactivate Visit
■ Brake hold function Your Dealer” or “Brake Hold
● If the brake pedal is left released Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”
for a period of about 3 minutes is displayed on the multi-infor-
after the system has started hold- mation display
ing the brake, the parking brake The system may be malfunctioning.
will be set automatically. In this Have the vehicle inspected by your
case, a warning buzzer sounds Toyota dealer.
and a message is shown on the
multi-information display. ■ Warning messages and buzzers
Warning messages and buzzers are 5
● To turn the system off while the
system is holding the brake, firmly used to indicate a system malfunc-
depress the brake pedal and tion or to inform the driver of the

Driving
press the button again. need for caution. If a warning mes-
sage is shown on the multi-informa-
● The brake hold function may not tion display, read the message and
hold the vehicle when the vehicle follow the instructions.
is on a steep incline. In this situa-
tion, it may be necessary for the ■ If the brake hold operated indi-
driver to apply the brakes. A warn- cator flashes
ing buzzer will sound and the P.427
multi-information display will
inform the driver of this situation. If
a warning message is shown on WARNING
the multi-information display, read ■ When the vehicle is on a
the message and follow the steep incline
instructions.
When using the brake hold sys-
■ When the parking brake is set tem on a steep incline exercise
automatically while the system caution. The brake hold function
is holding the brakes may not hold the vehicle in such a
Perform any of the following opera- situation.
tions to release the parking brake.
● Depress the accelerator pedal.
(The parking brake will not be
released automatically if the seat
belt is not fastened.)
● Operate the parking brake switch
with the brake pedal depressed.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 176 5-2. Driving procedures

WARNING Water release (H2O

■ When stopped on a slippery switch)
road
The system cannot stop the vehi- When the fuel cell system is
cle when the gripping ability of the
tires has been exceeded. Do not stopped, water is automati-
use the system when stopped on cally purged from the tail-
a slippery road. pipe.
To minimize water accumu-
NOTICE lation at parking garages,
■ When parking the vehicle etc., purge can be done
The brake hold system is not manually before parking.
designed for use when parking
the vehicle for a long period of
time. Turning the power switch off H2O switch
while the system is holding the
brake may release the brake, When the H2O switch pressed
which would cause the vehicle to
move. When operating the power while the “READY” indicator is
switch, depress the brake pedal, on, the vehicle purges water.
shift the shift position to P and set
the parking brake. When the switch is pressed
again, purging stops.

System purging and purging com-

plete messages are displayed in
the multi-information display.

■ Water release function during

cold weather
In the following cases, the fuel cell
system automatic drainage may not
operate. It may not be possible to
start the fuel cell system due to the
fuel cell stack, hydrogen pipes, etc.,
being frozen.
● When transporting or towing the

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-2. Driving procedures 177
vehicle in frozen areas
● When the 12-volt battery terminals
are disconnected and remain as
such in frozen areas
Operate the water release function
with the following procedure before-
hand to prevent water from freezing
in the system.
1 Turn the power switch to ON and
press the H2O switch.
Check that the “Active Purge Mode
ON” message is displayed in the
multi-information display.
2 While depressing the brake,
press the power switch to start
the fuel cell system.
Check that the “READY” indicator
turns on.
3 Press the power switch to stop
the fuel cell system.
The water release is automatically
performed. (Longer than normal 5
water purge)
■ Purging while parked

Driving
The water release function does not
completely prevent purging while
parked. The purge capacity while
parked changes depending on out-
side temperature and operating con-
ditions.
If the “READY” indicator continues
to remain on after water release has
been performed, water may be gen-
erated and purged when parked.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 178 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch
[Link] the lights and wipers

all the lights listed above turn

on and off automatically.
The headlights can be oper- 4 (if equipped) The day-
ated manually or automati-
cally. time running lights turn off.

■ AUTO mode can be used when

Operating instructions The power switch is in ON.
■ Daytime running light system
Operating the switch ● The daytime running lights illumi-
turns on the lights as follows: nate using the same lights as the
parking lights and illuminate
brighter than the parking lights.
● To make your vehicle more visible
to other drivers during daytime
driving, the daytime running lights
turn on automatically when all of
the following conditions are met.
(The daytime running lights are
not designed for use at night.)
• The fuel cell system is operating
• The parking brake is released
• The headlight switch is in the
*
or position
*
: When the surroundings are bright
● The daytime running lights remain
U.S.A. on after they illuminate, even if the
parking brake is set again.
Canada
● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running
lights can be turned off by operat-
1 The side marker, parking, ing the switch.
tail, license plate, instrument ● Compared to turning on the head-
lights, the daytime running light
panel lights, and daytime run- system offers greater durability
ning lights (P.178) turn on. and consumes less electricity, so
it can help improve fuel economy.
2 The headlights and all ■ Headlight control sensor
lights listed above (except The sensor may not function prop-
erly if an object is placed on the sen-
daytime running lights) turn sor, or anything that blocks the
on. sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
3 The headlights, daytime detecting the level of ambient light
and may cause the automatic head-
running lights (P.178) and light system to malfunction.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers 179
headlights will turn on automatically
after several seconds to help
enhance the visibility of your vehi-
cle.
■ 12-volt battery-saving function
In order to prevent the 12-volt bat-
tery of the vehicle from discharging,
if the headlights and/or tail lights are
■ Automatic light off system on when the power switch is turned
● When the headlights are on: The off the 12-volt battery saving func-
tion will operate and automatically
headlights and tail lights turn off turn off all the lights after approxi-
30 seconds after the driver’s door mately 20 minutes. When the power
is opened and closed if the power switch is turned to ON, the 12-volt
switch is turned to off. (The lights battery-saving function will be dis-
turn off immediately if on the abled.
When any of the following are per-
key is pressed after all the doors formed, the 12-volt battery-saving
are closed.) function is canceled once and then
● When only the tail lights are on: reactivated. All the lights will turn off
The tail lights turn off automati- automatically 20 minutes after the
cally if the power switch is turned 12-volt battery-saving function has
to ACC or off and the driver’s door been reactivated:
is opened. 5
● When the headlight switch is oper-
To turn the lights on again, turn the ated
power switch to ON, or turn the light ● When a door or the trunk is

Driving
opened or closed
switch to the or position
■ Customization
once and then back to or . Some functions can be customized.
(P.484)
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the power NOTICE
switch is turned off and the driver’s
door is opened while the lights are ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
turned on. charge
■ Automatic headlight leveling Do not leave the lights on longer
system than necessary when the fuel cell
The level of the headlights is auto- system is off.
matically adjusted according to the
number of passengers and the load-
ing condition of the vehicle to
ensure that the headlights do not
interfere with other road users.
■ Windshield wiper linked head-
light illumination
When driving during daytime with
the headlight switch turned to , if
the windshield wipers are used, the

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 180 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Turning on the high beam AHB (Automatic High

headlights Beam)

The Automatic High Beam

uses a front camera located
on the upper portion of the
windshield to detect the
brightness of the lights of
vehicles ahead, street-
lights, etc., and automati-
cally changes the head
1 With the headlights on, push lights between the high
the lever away from you to beams and low beams.
turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the WARNING
center position to turn the high ■ For safe use
beams off. Do not overly rely on the Auto-
2 Pull the lever toward you and matic High Beam. Always drive
safely, taking care to observe your
release it to flash the high surroundings and turning the high
beams once. beams on or off manually if nec-
You can flash the high beams with essary.
the headlights on or off. ■ To prevent unintentional
operation of the Automatic
High Beam System
When it is necessary to disable
the system: P.195

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers 181
lights on the road ahead.
Using the Activating the
● If any of the following conditions
Automatic High Beam are met, the headlights will
system change to the low beams:
• Vehicle speed drops below
1 Press the Automatic High approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is
Beam switch. not dark.
• There is a vehicle ahead with
lights on.
• There are many streetlights or
other lights on the road ahead.
■ Front camera detection
● In the following situations, the high
beams may not be automatically
changed to the low beams:
• When a vehicle cuts in front of
your vehicle
• When another vehicle crosses in
2 Turn the headlight switch to front of the vehicle
• When vehicles ahead are repeat-
the or position. edly detected and then hidden
due to repeated curves, road
When the headlight switch lever is dividers or roadside trees 5
in the low beam position, the AHB • When a vehicle ahead
system will be enabled and the approaches from a far lane

Driving
AHB indicator will illuminate. • When a vehicle ahead is far away
• When a vehicle ahead has no
lights
• When the lights of a vehicle ahead
are dim
• When a vehicle ahead is reflecting
strong light, such as own head-
lights
• Situations in which the sensors
may not operate properly: P.200
● The headlights may change to the
low beams if a vehicle ahead that
is using fog lights without its head-
lights turned on is detected
■ Automatic operating condi-
tions of the high beams ● House lights, street lights, traffic
signals, and illuminated billboards
● When all of the following condi- or signs may cause the high
tions are met, the high beams will beams to change to the low
illuminate automatically: beams, or the low beams to
• The vehicle speed is approxi- remain on.
mately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.
• The area ahead of the vehicle is ● The following may change the tim-
dark. ing at which the headlights
• There are no vehicles ahead with change to the low beams:
lights on. • The brightness of lights of vehi-
• There are few streetlights or other cles ahead

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 182 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers

• The movement and direction of may not operate properly: P.200

vehicles ahead ■ Temporarily reducing front
• The distance between the vehicle
camera sensitivity (except for
and a vehicle ahead Canada)
• When a vehicle ahead only has
lights illuminated on one side The sensitivity of the front camera
• When a vehicle ahead is a two can be temporarily reduced.
wheeled vehicle 1 Turn the power switch off with
• The condition of the road (gradi- the following conditions met.
ent, curve, condition of the road
surface, etc.) ● The headlight switch is in the
• The number of passengers and
amount of luggage or position.
● The headlights may change
between the high beams and low ● The headlight switch lever is in the
beams unexpectedly. low beam position.
● Bicycles and other small vehicles ● The automatic High Beam switch
may not be detected. is on.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.
● In the following situations, the sys-
tem may not be able to correctly 3 Within 60 seconds after perform-
detect the brightness of the sur- ing step 2, push the headlight
roundings. This may cause the switch lever to the high beam
low beams to remain on or the position then pull it to the original
high beams to flash or dazzle position quickly 10 times, then
pedestrians or vehicles ahead. In leave the lever in its original posi-
such a case, it is necessary to tion.
manually change between the 4 If the sensitivity is changed, the
high beams and low beams. Automatic High Beam indicator
• When there are lights similar to will blink 3 times.
headlights or tail lights in the sur-
rounding area
• When headlights or tail lights of Turning the high beams
vehicles ahead are turned off, on/off manually
dirty, changing color, or not aimed
properly ■ Changing to the high
• When the headlights are repeat-
edly changing between the high beams
beams and low beams. Push the lever forward.
• When use of the high beams is
inappropriate or when the high The AHB indicator will turn off and
beams may be flashing or daz- the high beam indicator will turn on.
zling pedestrians or other drivers.
• When the vehicle is used in an Pull the lever to its original position
area in which vehicles travel on to enable the Automatic High Beam
the opposite side of the road of system again.
the country for which the vehicle
was designed, for example using
a vehicle designed for right-hand
traffic in a left-hand traffic area, or
vice versa
• When it is necessary to disable
the system: P.195
• Situations in which the sensors

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers 183
inal position, the low beams will
remain on for a certain amount of
time. After this, the Automatic High
Beam system will operate.

■ Changing to the low beams

Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The AHB indicator will turn off.
Press the switch to enable the
Automatic High Beam system
again.

Driving

Temporarily changing to
the low beams
It is recommended to switch to
the low beams when use of the
high beams is inappropriate or
when the high beams may
cause problems or distress to
other drivers or pedestrians
nearby.
Pull the lever rearward and then
return it to its original position.
The high beams will illuminate
while the lever is pulled, however,
after the lever is returned to its orig-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 184 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Windshield wipers and Off

washer 2
Intermittent operation
Operating the lever can
switch between automatic 3
operation and manual oper- Low speed wiper operation
ation, or can use the 4
washer. High speed wiper operation
NOTICE 5
■ When the windshield is dry Temporary operation
Do not use the wipers, as they Wiper intervals can be adjusted
may damage the windshield.
when intermittent operation is
selected.
Operating the wiper lever

Operate the lever oper-

ates the wipers or washer as fol-
lows:
 Intermittent windshield wipers

When intermittent windshield

wiper operation is selected, the
wiper interval can be also 6 Increases the intermittent
adjusted. windshield wiper frequency
7 Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency

8 Windshield cleaning
washer/wiper dual operation
1
Pulling the lever operates the wip-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers 185
ers and washer.
(After operating several times, the 3
wipers operate once more time Low speed wiper operation
after a short delay to prevent drip-
ping. However, the dripping preven- 4
tion does not operate while the High speed wiper operation
vehicle is moving.)
 Rain-sensing windshield wip- 5
ers Temporary operation

When is selected, the wip- When is selected, the sen-

ers will operate automatically sor sensitivity can be adjusted
when the sensor detects falling by turning the switch ring.
rain. The system automatically
adjusts wiper timing in accor-
dance with rain volume and
vehicle speed.

Driving
6 Increases the sensitivity
7 Decreases the sensitivity

1
Off
8 Washer/wiper dual
2
operation
Rain-sensing wiper operation
Pulling the lever operates the wip-
The wipers will operate automati-
ers and washer.
cally when the sensor detects fall-
(After operating several times, the
ing rain. The system automatically
wipers operate once more time
adjusts wiper timing in accordance
after a short delay to prevent drip-
with rain volume and vehicle speed.
ping. However, the dripping preven-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 186 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers

tion does not operate while the ■ If no windshield washer fluid

vehicle is moving.) sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are
■ The windshield wiper and not blocked if there is washer fluid in
washer can be operated when the windshield washer fluid reser-
voir.
The power switch is in ON.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on
wiper operation
Even when the wipers are not in
AUTO mode, vehicle speed affects
the time until the drip prevention
wiper sweep occurs.
With low speed windshield wiper
operation selected, wiper operation
will be switched from low speed to ■ Front door opening linked wind-
intermittent wiper operation only shield wiper stop function
when the vehicle is stationary. (vehicles with rain-sensing
(However, when the sensor sensitiv- windshield wipers)
ity is adjusted to the highest level,
the mode cannot be switched.) When is selected and the wind-
■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with shield wipers are operating, if a front
rain-sensing windshield wipers) door is opened while the vehicle is
● The raindrop sensor judges the stopped and the P shift position is
amount of raindrops. selected, operation of the wind-
An optical sensor is adopted. It shield wipers will be stopped to pre-
may not operate properly when vent anyone near the vehicle from
sunlight from the rising or setting being sprayed by water from the
of the sun intermittently strikes the wipers. When the front door is
windshield, or if bugs, etc., are closed, wiper operation will resume.
present on the windshield.
■ When stopping fuel cell system
in an emergency while driving
If the windshield wipers are operat-
ing when fuel cell system is
stopped, the windshield wipers will
operate in high speed operation.
After the vehicle is stopped, opera-
tion will return to normal when the
power switch is turned to ON, or
operation will stop when the driver’s
● If the wiper is turned to AUTO door is opened.
mode while the power switch is in
ON, the wipers will operate once ■ Using the voice control system
to show that AUTO mode is acti- The following operations can be
vated. performed using the voice control
● If the temperature of the raindrop system:
sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, ● Operating the windshield wipers
or 5°F (-15°C) or lower, automatic only once
operation may not occur. In this
case, operate the wipers in any ● Operating the windshield clean-
mode other than AUTO mode. ing washer (it can be performed

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers 187
only when the vehicle is stopped) ■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles
For details regarding the voice with rain-sensing windshield
control system, refer to. “MULTI- wipers)
MEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.
If the windshield is coated with
water repellent coating, the rain-
WARNING drop sensor may not properly
■ Caution regarding the use of detect raindrops, preventing auto-
windshield wipers in AUTO matic mode from operating prop-
mode (vehicles with rain- erly.
sensing windshield wipers) ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
The windshield wipers may oper- charge
ate unexpectedly if the sensor is Do not leave the wipers on longer
touched or the windshield is sub- than necessary when the fuel cell
ject to vibration in AUTO mode. system is off.
Take care that your fingers or any-
thing else do not become caught
in the windshield wipers.
Changing the windshield
■ Caution regarding the use of wiper rest position/Lifting
washer fluid
the windshield wipers
When it is cold, do not use the
washer fluid until the windshield When the windshield wipers are
becomes warm. The fluid may 5
freeze on the windshield and not being used, they retract to
cause low visibility. This may lead below the hood. To enable the
to an accident, resulting in death windshield wipers to be lifted

Driving
or serious injury.
when parking in cold conditions
or when replacing a windshield
NOTICE wiper insert, change the rest
■ When there is no washer fluid position of the windshield wipers
spray from the nozzle
to the service position using the
Damage to the washer fluid pump wiper lever.
may be caused if the lever is
pulled toward you and held con- ■ Raising the wipers to the
tinually.
service position
■ When a nozzle becomes
blocked Within approximately 45 sec-
In this case, contact your Toyota onds of turning the power switch
dealer. off, move the wiper lever to the
Do not try to clear it with a pin or
other object. The nozzle will be (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
damaged.
position and hold it for approxi-
mately 2 seconds or more.
The wipers will move to the service
position.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 188 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers

deviate while the power switch is off,

the wipers will return to the normal
position.

NOTICE
■ When lifting the windshield
wipers
● Do not lift the windshield wipers
when they are in the retracted
position below the hood. Other-
wise, they may contact the
hood, possibly resulting in dam-
age to a windshield wiper and/or
the hood.
● Do not lift a windshield wiper by
the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper blade may be deformed.

■ Lifting the windshield wip-

ers
While holding the hook portion
of the wiper arm, lift the wind-
shield wiper from the wind-
● Do not operate the wiper lever
shield. when the windshield wipers are
lifted. Otherwise, the wind-
shield wipers may contact the
hood, possibly resulting in dam-
age to the windshield wipers
and/or hood.

■ Lowering the windshield wipers

to the retracted position
With the windshield wipers placed
on the windshield, turn the power
switch to ON and then move the
wiper lever to an operating position.
When the wiper switch is turned off,
the windshield wipers will stop at the
retracted position. Even if the wipers

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-4. Refueling 189

Opening the fuel door

[Link]

 Vehicles with expired hydro-

gen tanks must not be used.
 Fuel with compressed Check P.79 to learn how
hydrogen gas only at hydro- and when to check the expi-
gen stations. ration. Consult your Toyota
dealer.
 Fuel at hydrogen stations
conforming with the Society
of Automotive Engineers Before filling
(SAE) J2601 fueling proto-  Close the all the doors and
col or laws that may super- windows.
sede such SAE protocols.
 Set the parking brake.
 Refer to the Mirai Station
 Shift the shift position to P.
Finder Application in Con-
nected services,  Turn the power switch off.
[Link]  Turn off the headlights.
[Link]/connected-ser-
vices/ (for U.S. owners) or ■ Fuel types
5
[Link] P.469
ota/en/about/connected- ■ Notes on fueling
services (for Canadian own-

Driving
● Fueling will not be possible if the
ers), or call 1-800-331-4331 pressure inside the vehicle’s
(for U.S. owners) or 1-888- hydrogen tanks is higher than the
supply pressure of the hydrogen
869-6828 (for Canadian station. If the hydrogen tanks are
owners). more than half full, the vehicle will
be unable to fuel at a H35 dis-
 Observe any notices or penser. A hydrogen station with a
instructions shown at hydro- H70 dispenser (supply pressure of
gen stations. 10150 psi) [70 MPa, 714 kgf/cm2,
700 bar] is necessary to com-
 The filling time and amount pletely fill hydrogen tanks.
of fuel may depend on out- ● If the fueling cannot be completed
due to trouble with the station
side temperature and the equipment, call the number indi-
equipment at that hydrogen cated on the equipment.
station.
WARNING
■ When filling
Observe the following precautions
while fueling the vehicle. Failure
to do so may result in death or
serious injury.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 190 5-4. Refueling

WARNING NOTICE
● Turn the power switch off before ■ When filling
fueling. ● Fuel only with compressed
● Ensure the hydrogen gas noz- hydrogen gas at stations com-
zle is locked onto the vehicle pliant with the Society of Auto-
receptacle before filling. This motive Engineers (SAE) J2601
can be done by pulling on the fueling protocol or laws that may
hydrogen gas nozzle to check supersede such SAE protocols.
that it cannot be pulled off. Fail- If improper fuels are used, the
ure to do so may result in injury fuel cell stack will be damaged.
or damage to the hydrogen gas ● Do not swing or drop the hydro-
nozzle or vehicle. gen gas nozzle, or subject it to a
● Do not smoke while fueling. large amount of force. Doing so
may cause damage.
● Because the fuel is cold, the
hydrogen gas nozzle and vehi- ● If the hydrogen gas nozzle can-
cle receptacle surface will not be removed after fueling, it
become cold, and frost may may be frozen to the vehicle
develop. After fueling is com- receptacle. Wait for the hydro-
pleted, remove the hydrogen gen gas nozzle to thaw before
gas nozzle by the plastic handle attempting to remove. Do not
only. Do not touch any other pull or rotate the hydrogen gas
parts of the hydrogen gas noz- nozzle forcibly. Failure to follow
zle or vehicle receptacle with these precautions may cause
bare hands immediately after damage.
fueling, as frostbite may occur. ● Be sure to replace the cap after
● Be sure to use hydrogen gas filling. If foreign material gets in
nozzles at 350 bar/700 bar for the vehicle receptacle, it may
passenger vehicles. cause damage.
Do not use hydrogen gas noz- ● Do not put anything sharp, such
zles designed for commercial as a screwdriver, blade, or any
vehicles. Check the instructions foreign object into the opening
at hydrogen station or ask the of the vehicle receptacle. If the
station operator for assistance. vehicle receptacle is damaged,
● Only fuel the vehicle at hydro- hydrogen gas may leak during
gen stations designed for pas- fueling.
senger vehicles. Do not fuel the ● If you notice anything unusual
vehicle at hydrogen stations about the vehicle receptacle,
designed for forklifts, buses, or please notify your Toyota
trucks. Ask the station operator dealer.
for assistance.
● If you notice anything unusual
with the hydrogen dispenser or
hydrogen gas nozzle, please
notify the hydrogen station
operator. Contact information is
usually displayed on the dis-
penser.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-4. Refueling 191

NOTICE ■ If “Stop in a Safe Place Turn

● Do not put anti-freeze in the fuel Power OFF Open Hydrogen
inlet opening. If foreign materi- Filler Door” is displayed on the
als enter the fuel inlet opening, multi-information display
it may lead to damage. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and
press the fuel door opener switch
● Do not use a hydrogen gas fuel- once more with the following proce-
ing nozzle that has water drop- dure:
lets attached to it, when fueling. 1 Shift the shift position to P.
The attached water droplets will
freeze and the hydrogen gas 2 Turn the power switch off.
fueling nozzle may no be able to 3 Press the fuel door opener
be removed. switch.
■ Sounds during filling
Opening the fuel door When fueling with compressed
hydrogen gas, noises from gas flow-
ing through the hydrogen gas noz-
1 Press the opener switch. zle and hydrogen tank valves can
If the “READY” indicator is on or the sometimes be heard. (P.73)
power switch is in ON, the fuel door
will not be unlocked. Closing the fuel door
1 Replace the cap. 5

Driving

2 Remove the cap and attach it

to the holder.
2 Close the fuel door.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 192 5-4. Refueling

■ Error operation prevention

function
When the fuel door is open, the fuel
cell system will not start. When the
“READY” indicator is on, the fuel
door will not open.
■ If “Open Filler Door Detected
Stop in a Safe Place Close
Hydrogen Filler Door” is dis-
played on the multi-information
display
The fuel door is open. Stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place and close the fuel
door.
■ If “Open Filler Door Detected
Close Hydrogen Filler Door
Restart Vehicle” is displayed on
the multi-information display
The fuel door is open and the fuel
cell system cannot be started. Shift
the shift position to P and, turn the
power switch off, then:
1 Check whether the cap has been
reinstalled.
2 Close the fuel door.
If the warning message on the multi-
information display turns off at this
time, there is no malfunction. How-
ever, if the display continues to
show, the sensor may be damaged.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
It can be started 1 time at intervals
of repeating the starting operations
5 times (With the brake pedal
depress, press the power switch
operations 9 times within the inter-
val of 2 seconds). Operate the vehi-
cle after checking to be sure that the
hydrogen fueling nozzle is not con-
nected to the vehicle.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 193

Toyota Safety Sense read the Owner’s Manual which

[Link] the driving support systems

3.0 software update corresponds to the software ver-

sion of the system.
It is necessary to enter a ■ Precautions for use
connected services con-
● Be aware that some functions
tract, provided by Toyota, to may temporarily be disabled if a
use these functions. For legal or safety related issue
details, contact your Toyota occurs.
dealer. ● If a connected services contract
has not been entered or has
expired, software updates will not
WARNING be able to be performed wire-
lessly.
■ For safe use
When the Toyota Safety Sense
3.0 software is updated, the oper- Checking your vehicle’s
ating methods of functions may Toyota Safety Sense 3.0
change. Using this system without
knowing the correct operating version
methods may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury. If the software of this system
has been updated after initial 5
● Make sure to read the Digital
Owner’s Manual which corre- purchase of the vehicle, to
sponds to the software version access the appropriate Owner’s

Driving
of the system, available at the
Owner’s Manual website,
Manual, it is necessary to check
before using this system. the software version of the sys-
tem and then visit the Owner’s
Content of the Toyota Manual website.
Safety Sense 3.0 Owner’s ■ Checking the version using
Manual ToyotaAPP
The software version of the sys-
This Owner’s Manual contains
tem can be checked using Toy-
information for Ver. 2. For the
otaAPP.
latest information about the con-
trols, use, warnings/precautions,
etc. of each function of Toyota
Safety Sense 3.0, refer to the
Digital Owner’s Manual at the
Owner’s Manual website.
If the software of this system
has been updated after initial
purchase of the vehicle, before
using this system, be sure to

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 194 5-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Using your vehicle’s Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 version

1 Access the following URL using a computer or smartphone:

Country Language URL QR code

[Link]
resources/warranty-owners-manuals/
U.S.A. English
manual?om=[Link].
[Link]

[Link]
English manual?om=[Link].
[Link]
Canada
[Link]
French manual?om=[Link].
[Link]

2 Select the file which includes the previously checked system ver-
sion.

■ What can be checked using the

Updating the software ToyotaAPP
If a software update is available, The following items can be checked
or performed.
a notification will be displayed
● Software version, update details,
by ToyotaAPP. Follow the precautions, use methods, etc.
instructions displayed on the ● Software update
screen.

■ Software update precautions

● After a software update has been
performed, it will not be possible
to revert to a previous version.
● Depending on the communication
environment and the content of an
update, a software update may
take several hours. Although an
update will be suspended when
the power switch is turned off, it
will resume when the power
switch is changed back to ON.
● Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 can still
be used while a software update is
being performed.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 195

Toyota Safety Sense ● If attention is necessary while

performing driving operations or
3.0 a system malfunction occurs, a
warning message or warning
The Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 buzzer will be operated. If a
warning message is displayed
consists of the driving on the display, follow the
assist systems and contrib- instructions displayed.
utes to a safe and comfort- ● Depending on external noise,
able driving experience: the volume of the audio system,
etc. it may be difficult to hear the
warning buzzer. Also, depend-
WARNING ing on the road conditions, it
■ Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 may be difficult to recognize the
operation of the system.
The Toyota Safety Sense 3.0
operates under the assumption ■ When it is necessary to dis-
that the driver will drive safely, able the system
and is designed to help reduce
the impact to the occupants in a In the following situations, make
collision and assist the driver sure to disable the system.
under normal driving conditions. Failure to do so may lead to the
As there is a limit to the degree of system not operating properly,
recognition accuracy and control possibly leading to an accident 5
performance that this system can resulting in death or serious injury.
provide, do not overly rely on this
system. The driver is solely ● When the vehicle is tilted due to

Driving
responsible for paying attention to being overloaded or having a
the vehicle’s surroundings and flat tire
driving safely.
● When driving at extremely high
■ For safe use speeds
● Do not overly rely on this sys- ● When towing another vehicle
tem. The driver is solely respon-
sible for paying attention to the ● When the vehicle is being trans-
vehicle’s surroundings and driv- ported by a truck, ship, train,
ing safely. This system may not etc.
operate in all situations and pro-
vided assistance is limited. ● When the vehicle is raised on a
Over-reliance on this system to lift and the tires are allowed to
drive the vehicle safely may rotate freely
lead to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury. ● When inspecting the vehicle
using a drum tester such as a
● Do not attempt to test the oper- chassis dynamometer or speed-
ation of the system, as it may ometer tester, or when using an
not operate properly, possibly on vehicle wheel balancer
leading to an accident.
● When the vehicle is driven in a
sporty manner or off-road
● When using an automatic car
wash

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 196 5-5. Using the driving support systems

■ FCTA (Front Cross Traffic

WARNING
Alert)
● When a sensor is misaligned or
deformed due to a strong P.236
impact being applied to the sen-
sor or the area around the sen- ■ PDA (Proactive Driving
sor Assist)
● When accessories which P.229
obstruct a sensor or light are
temporarily installed to the vehi- ■ RSA (Road Sign Assist)
cle P.238
● When a compact spare tire or ■ Dynamic radar cruise con-
tire chains are installed to the
vehicle or an emergency tire trol
puncture repair kit has been
used P.241
■ Cruise control
● When the tires are excessively
worn or the inflation pressure of P.252
the tires is low
■ Emergency Driving Stop
● When tires other than the manu-
facturer specified size are System
installed P.256
● When the vehicle cannot be ■ Driver monitor
driven stably, due to a collision,
malfunction, etc. P.203

Driving assist systems Sensors used by Toyota

Safety Sense 3.0
■ AHB (Automatic High
Beam) Various sensors are used to
P.180 obtain the necessary informa-
tion for system operation.
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)
P.205
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
P.216
■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
P.224
■ LCA (Lane Change Assist)
P.221

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 197
■ Sensors which detect the
WARNING
surrounding conditions
■ To prevent malfunction of the
 Front radar sensors
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may lead to
a radar sensor not operating prop-
erly, possibly leading to an acci-
dent resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Keep the radar sensors and
radar sensor covers clean at all
times.
Clean the front of a radar sensor
or the front or back of a radar sen-
Front radar sensor sor cover if it is dirty or covered
Front camera with water droplets, snow, etc.
When cleaning the radar sensor
Front side radar sensors and radar sensor cover, use a soft
 Rear (rear side radar sensors) cloth to remove dirt so as to not
damage them.
5

Driving

Radar sensor
■ Sensors which detect the
driver condition Radar sensor cover
● Keep the surrounding area of
the front side radar sensors on
the front bumper clean at all
times.

Driver monitor camera

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 198 5-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING • Even if a glass coating agent is

applied to the windshield, it will
● Do not attach accessories, still be necessary to use the
stickers (including transparent windshield wipers to remove
stickers), aluminum tape, etc. to water droplets, etc. from the
a radar sensor or radar sensor area of the windshield in front of
cover and their surrounding the front camera.
area.
• If the inner side of the wind-
● Do not subject a radar sensor or shield where the front camera is
its surrounding area to impact. installed is dirty, contact your
If a radar sensor, the front grille, Toyota dealer
or front bumper has been sub-
jected to a impact, have the ● Do not attach stickers (including
vehicle inspected by your Toy- transparent stickers) or other
ota dealer. items to the area of the wind-
shield in front of the front cam-
● Do not disassemble the radar era (shaded area in the
sensors. illustration).
● Do not modify or paint the radar
sensors or radar sensor cover,
or replace them with anything
other than Toyota genuine parts.
● In the following situations, recal-
ibration of the radar sensors will
be necessary. For details, con-
tact by your Toyota dealer.
• When a radar sensor is Approximately 1.6 in. (4 cm)
removed and installed, or
replaced Approximately 1.6 in. (4 cm)
• When the front bumper or the ● If the part of the windshield in
front grille has been replaced front of the front camera is
fogged up or covered with con-
■ To prevent malfunction of the densation or ice, use the wind-
front camera shield defogger to remove the
Observe the following precau- fog, condensation, or ice.
tions.
Failure to do so may lead to the ● If water droplets cannot be
front camera not operating prop- properly removed from the area
erly, possibly leading to an acci- of the windshield in front of the
dent resulting in death or serious front camera by the windshield
injury. wipers, replace the wiper insert
or wiper blade.
● Always keep the windshield
clean. ● Do not attach window tint to the
windshield.
• If the windshield is dirty or cov-
ered with an oily film, water
droplets, snow, etc., clean the
windshield.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 199

WARNING ● Do not modify or change the

headlights and other lights.
● Replace the windshield if it is
damaged or cracked. ■ Front camera installation area
If the windshield has been on the windshield
replaced, recalibration of the If the system determines that the
front camera will be necessary. windshield may be fogged up, it
For details, contact your Toyota will automatically operate the
dealer. heater to defog the part of the
● Do not allow liquids to contact windshield around the front cam-
the front camera. era. When cleaning, etc., be care-
ful not to touch the area around
● Do not allow bright lights to the front camera until the wind-
shine into the front camera. shield has cooled sufficiently, as
touching it may cause burns.
● Do not damage the lens of the
front camera or allow it to ■ Precautions for the driver
become dirty. monitor camera
When cleaning the inside of the Observe the following precau-
windshield, do not allow glass tions.
cleaner to contact the lens of
the front camera. Do not touch Failure to do so may lead to mal-
the lens of the front camera. function of the driver monitor cam-
If the lens of the front camera is era and the systems not operating
dirty or damaged, contact your properly, possibly leading to an 5
Toyota dealer. accident resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.

Driving
● Do not subject the front camera
to a strong impact. ● Do not subject the driver moni-
tor camera or its surrounding
● Do not change the position or area to strong impact.
orientation of the front camera If subjected to a strong impact,
or remove it. the driver monitor camera may
move out of alignment and the
● Do not disassemble the front driver may no longer be detected
camera. correctly. In this case, have the
● Do not modify any parts around vehicle inspected by Toyota
the front camera, such as the dealer.
inside rear view mirror or ceil- ● Do not disassemble or modify
ing. the driver monitor camera.
● Do not attach accessories ● Do not attach accessories,
which may obstruct the front stickers (including transparent
camera to the hood, front grille, stickers), etc. to the driver moni-
or front bumper. For details, tor camera or its surrounding
contact your Toyota dealer. area.
● If a surfboard or other long ● Do not allow the driver monitor
object is to be mounted on the camera or its surrounding area
roof, make sure that it will not to get wet.
obstruct the front camera.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 200 5-5. Using the driving support systems

aligned
WARNING
● When a headlight is malfunction-
● Do not cover the driver monitor ing
camera or place anything in
front of it. ● When a the headlights of another
vehicle, sunlight, or reflected light
● Keep the lens of the driver mon- shines directly into the front cam-
itor camera free from damage. era
● When the brightness of the sur-
● Do not touch the lens of the rounding area changes suddenly
driver monitor camera or allow it
to become dirty. ● When driving near a TV tower,
broadcasting station, electric
When there is dirt or fingerprints power plant, radar equipped vehi-
on the camera lens, clean it with a cles, etc., or other location where
dry, soft cloth so as to not mark or strong radio waves or electrical
damage it. noise may be present
● When a wiper blade is blocking
● When cleaning the lens, do not the front camera
use detergents or organic sol-
vents that may damage plastic. ● When in a location or near objects
which strongly reflect radio waves,
such as the following:
■ Situations in which the sensors • Tunnels
and the systems may not oper- • Truss bridges
ate properly • Gravel roads
• Rutted, snow-covered roads
● When the height or inclination of • Walls
the vehicle has been changed due • Large trucks
to modifications • Manhole covers
● When the windshield is dirty, • Guardrail
fogged up, cracked or damaged • Metal plates
● When the ambient temperature is ● When near a step or protrusion
high or low ● When a detectable vehicle is nar-
● When mud, water, snow, dead row, such as a small mobility vehi-
insects, foreign matter, etc., is cle
attached to the front of the sensor ● When a detectable vehicle has a
● When in inclement weather such small front or rear end, such as an
as heavy rain, fog, snow, or a unloaded truck
sandstorm ● When a detectable vehicle has a
● When water, snow, dust, etc. is low front or rear end, such as a
thrown up in front of the vehicle, or low bed trailer
when driving through mist or
smoke
● When the headlights are not illu-
minated while driving in the dark,
such as at night or when in a tun-
nel
● When the lens of a headlight is
dirty and illumination is weak
● When the headlights are mis- ● When a detectable vehicle has

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 201
extremely high ground clearance ● When driving on slick road sur-
faces, such as when it is covered
with ice, snow, gravel, etc.
● When the course of the vehicle
differs from the shape of a curve
● When the vehicle speed is exces-
sively high when entering a curve
● When entering/exiting a parking
lot, garage, car elevator, etc.
● When a detectable vehicle is car- ● When driving in a parking lot
rying a load which protrudes from ● When driving through an area
its cargo area where there are obstructions
● When a detectable vehicle has lit- which may contact your vehicle,
tle exposed metal, such as a vehi- such as tall grass, tree branches,
cle which is partially covered with a curtain, etc.
cloth, etc. ● When driving in strong wind
● When a detectable vehicle is
■ Situations in which the lane
irregularly shaped, such as a trac-
may not be detected
tor, sidecar, etc.
● When the lane is extremely wide
● When the distance between the
or narrow
vehicle and a detectable vehicle
has become extremely short ● Immediately after changing lanes
or passing through an intersection 5
● When a detectable vehicle is at an
angle ● When driving in a temporary lane

Driving
or lane regulated by construction
● When snow, mud, etc. is attached
to a detectable vehicle ● When there are structures, pat-
terns, shadows which are similar
● When driving on the following
to lane lines in the surrounding
kinds of roads:
• Roads with sharp curves or wind- ● When there are multiple white
ing roads lines for a lane line
• Roads with changes in grade, ● When the lane lines are not clear
such as sudden inclines or or driving on a wet road surface
declines
• Roads which is sloped to the left ● When a lane line is on a curb
or right ● When driving on a bright, reflec-
• Roads with deep ruts tive road surface, such as con-
• Roads which are rough and crete
unmaintained
• Roads which frequently undulate ■ Situations in which some or all
or are bumpy of the functions of the system
cannot operate
● When the steering wheel is being
operated frequently or suddenly ● When a malfunction is detected in
this system or a related system,
● When the vehicle is not in a con- such as the brakes, steering, etc.
stant position within a lane
● When the VSC, TRAC, or other
● When parts related to this system, safety related system is operating
the brakes, etc. are cold or
extremely hot, wet, etc. ● When the VSC, TRAC, or other
safety related system is off
● When the wheels are misaligned

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 202 5-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Changes in brake operation leaned forward or when their head

sound and pedal response is outside of the window
● When the brakes have been oper- ● When the driver monitor camera is
ated, brake operation sounds may being blocked by the steering
be heard and the brake pedal wheel, a hand holding the steering
response may change, but this wheel, an arm, etc.
does not indicate a malfunction. ● When the driver is wearing a hat
● When the system is operating, the ● When the driver is wearing an
brake pedal may feel stiffer than eyepatch
expected or sink. In either situa-
tion the brake pedal can be ● When the driver is wearing eye-
depressed further. Further glasses or sunglasses that do not
depress the brake pedal as nec- easily transmit infrared rays
essary. ● When the driver is wearing con-
■ Situations in which the driver tact lenses
monitor may not operate prop- ● When the driver is wearing a face
erly mask
In situations such as the following, ● When the driver is laughing or
the driver monitor camera may not their eyes are only slightly open
be able to detect the driver’s face, ● When the driver’s eyes, nose,
and the function may not operate mouth, or shape of their face is
properly.
blocked
● When the inside of the vehicle is
● When the driver is wearing
hot, such as after the vehicle has
been parked in the sun makeup which makes it difficult to
detect their eyes, nose, mouth, or
● When a very bright light, such as shape of their face
the sun or the headlights of follow-
● When the driver’s eyes are
ing vehicle, shines onto the driver
monitor camera blocked by the frame of eye-
glasses, sunglasses, hair, etc.
● When the brightness inside the
● When there is a device inside the
vehicle changes frequently due to
the shadows of surrounding struc- vehicle that radiates near infrared
rays, such as a non-genuine
tures, etc.
driver monitoring system.
● When a very bright light, such as
the sun or the headlights of an ■ Certification
oncoming vehicle, is shining onto P.536
the driver’s face
● When light, either inside or out-
side of the vehicle, is being
reflected from the lenses of eye-
glasses or sunglasses
● When there are multiple faces in
the detection range of the driver
monitor camera, such as when a
front or rear passenger is leaning
toward the driver’s seat
● When the driver’s face is outside
of the detection range of the driver
monitor camera, such as when

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 203

Driver monitor message will be displayed to

warn the driver.
Basic functions  When the system determines
that the driver is not paying
During controlled driving, the attention to the road or their
driver monitor camera detects eyes are closed.
the position and direction the  When the driver’s face cannot
driver is facing, and whether be detected or the system
their eyes are opened or closed. determines that the driver has
Through this, the system deter- poor driving posture.
mines if the driver is checking
their surroundings and if the When the position of the steer-
driver can perform driving oper- ing wheel/driver’s seat is too
ations. high or too low, the driver moni-
tor camera may not be able to
In order to operate properly, the recognize the whole face of the
driver monitor camera requires driver which can limit feature
an unobstructed view of the functionality and possibly trig-
driver’s face. ger an alarm. Adjust the steering 5
If the steering column or seat wheel/seat position to achieve a
position is either too high or too proper seating position where

Driving
low, or if any other condition is the whole meter is visible. Con-
present that obstructs the driver firm proper seat belt routing,
monitor camera’s view of the head restraint positioning, and
driver’s face, some driving sup- appropriate distance from the
port systems may not operate steering wheel and frontal air-
properly, or a warning message bag as described in this manual.
may be displayed. If the alarm continues even after
making the recommended
adjustments, contact your Toy-
ota dealer.
■ Face identification
The driver monitor is used as a
device to identify faces in order
to identify an individual.
For information about how to
■ Warning function use the face identification func-
In situations such as the follow- tion, priorities among other
ing, a buzzer will sound and a devices of individual identifica-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 204 5-5. Using the driving support systems

tion, and linked vehicle settings, tion fails frequently, the driver
see “My Settings”. (P.145) cameras should be cleaned or
face information should be regis-
tered again.
WARNING • Face information stored in the
■ For safe use vehicle computer cannot be
decoded or moved to another
● The driver monitor is not media. Therefore, it is necessary
designed to prevent the driver to register face information again
from driving carelessly or hav- once it is deleted or relevant parts
ing a poor driving posture. are replaced.
Pay careful attention to the sur- • Once deleted, face information
rounding conditions in order to cannot be restored. It is necessary
ensure safe driving. to register face information again.
● The driver monitor cannot ■ Situations where face identifi-
reduce drowsiness. If you feel cation may not be performed
unable to concentrate or correctly
drowsy, take a break and sleep This system is designed for use to
as necessary in order to ensure identify facial traits. In the following
safe driving. situations, face information may not
be able to be registered or identified
correctly:
■ Warning function
● When a part of the driver’s face
These functions may not operate (eyebrows, eyes, nose, or mouth)
when the vehicle speed is low. is not visible
■ Face identification ● When the driver is wearing
Face identification starts when the glasses/sun glasses, a face mask,
door is opened then closed. muffler, etc.
In face identification, facial traits are ● When the driver is not facing front
digitized and stored in a built-in ● When part of driver’s face is cov-
computer, to be used for identifica- ered with hair, beard, a hand,
tion in My Settings. clothes, jewelry, etc.
● Face image or video are not ● When the driver is closing eyes
stored. Voice is not stored either.
● When a non-registered driver is a
● Digitized face information is not twin, etc. with a registered driver,
used for any purpose other than whose face looks quite alike with
identification in My Settings. Addi- each other
tionally, face information cannot
be decoded and will not be dis- ■ Situations in which the driver
closed or provided to a third party. monitor may not operate prop-
erly
● Face information can be deleted
by yourself. P.202
● For the handling of face informa-
tion, please consent to the follow- Changing Driver monitor
ing before using it:
• Face identification does not guar- settings
antee a complete identity authen-
tication, collation, or identification. The settings of Driver monitor
• When face information registration can be changed through cus-
fails frequently or face identifica- tomize settings. (P.484)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 205

PCS (Pre-Collision Sys- WARNING

tem) ■ For safe use
● Driving safely is solely the
The pre-collision system responsibility of the driver. Pay
careful attention to the sur-
uses sensors to detect rounding conditions in order to
objects (P.205) in the path ensure safe driving.
of the vehicle. When the Never use the pre-collision sys-
tem in place of normal braking
system determines that the operations. This system cannot
possibility of a frontal colli- help avoid or reduce the impact
sion with a detectable of a collision in every situation.
Over-reliance on this system to
object is high, a warning drive the vehicle safely may
operates to urge the driver lead to an accident resulting in
to take evasive action and death or serious injury.
the potential brake pressure ● Although the pre-collision sys-
is increased to help the tem is designed to help avoid or
help reduce the impact of a col-
driver avoid the collision. If lision, its effectiveness may
the system determines that change according to various
the possibility of a collision conditions. Therefore, it may not
always be able to achieve the 5
is extremely high, the same level of performance.
brakes are automatically Read the following items care-

Driving
applied to help avoid the fully. Do not overly rely on this
system and always drive care-
collision or help reduce the fully.
impact of the collision. • For safe use: P.195
The pre-collision system can ■ When to disable the pre-colli-
be disabled/enabled and the sion system
warning timing can be When it is necessary to disable
changed. (P.215) the system: P.195

Detectable objects
The system can detect the fol-
lowing as detectable objects.
(Detectable objects differ
depending on the function.)
 Vehicles
 Bicycles*
 Pedestrians
 Motorcycles*

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 206 5-5. Using the driving support systems

 Walls
*
: Detected as a detectable object
only when being ridden.

System functions
■ Pre-collision warning
When the system determines
that the possibility of a collision
“Accelerator Pedal is
is high, a buzzer will sound and
Pressed”
an icon and warning message
will be displayed on the multi- ■ Pre-collision brake assist
information display to urge the If the system determines that
driver to take evasive action. the possibility of a collision is
If the detectable object is a vehi- high and the brake operation by
cle, there may be cases where the driver is insufficient, the
moderate braking will be per- braking power will be increased.
formed with the warning. ■ Pre-collision brake control
If the system determines that
the possibility of a collision is
extremely high, the brakes are
automatically applied to help
avoid the collision or reduce the
impact of the collision.
■ Emergency steering assist
If the system determines that
“Pre-Collision System” the following conditions are met,
If the system determines that assistance will be provided to
the accelerator pedal is strongly help enhance vehicle stability
depressed, the following icon and prevent lane departure.
and message will be displayed During assistance, in addition to
on the multi-information display. the pre-collision warning, the fol-
lowing icon will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
 The possibility of a collision is
high
 There is sufficient space
within the lane to perform

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 207
evasive steering maneuvers
 The driver is operating the
steering wheel
The brakes and steering are
controlled to help avoid a colli-
sion or reduce the impact of a
collision, regardless of the eva-
sive steering maneuvers per-
formed by the driver.  When turning left/right and a
During assistance, the pre-colli- pedestrian or bicycle is
sion warning will operate and a detected
message will be displayed to
warn the driver.

Driving
■ Intersection collision avoid-
ance support (crossing
■ Intersection collision avoid-
vehicles)
ance support (left/right At an intersection, etc., if the
turn) system determines that the pos-
In situations such as the follow- sibility of a collision with an
ing, if the system determines approaching vehicle or motorcy-
that the possibility of a collision cle is high, the pre-collision
is high, the pre-collision warning warning and pre-collision brak-
and pre-collision braking will ing will operate. Depending on
operate. Depending on the inter- the intersection, assistance may
section, assistance may not not operate correctly.
operate correctly.
 When turning left/right at an
intersection and crossing the
path of an oncoming vehicle

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 208 5-5. Using the driving support systems

● The pre-collision braking func-

tion is not designed to hold the
vehicle stopped. If the vehicle is
stopped by pre-collision brake
control, the driver should oper-
ate the brakes immediately as
necessary.
● The pre-collision braking func-
tion may not operate if certain
operations are performed by the
■ Acceleration Suppression driver. If the accelerator pedal is
being depressed strongly or the
at Low Speed steering wheel is being turned,
When driving at a low speed, if the system may determine that
the driver is taking evasive
the accelerator pedal is strongly action and possibly prevent the
depressed and the system pre-collision braking function
determines that there is a possi- from operating.
bility of a collision, fuel cell sys- ● If the brake pedal is being
tem output will be restrained or depressed, the system may
determine that the driver is tak-
the brakes will be applied ing evasive action and possibly
weakly to restrict acceleration. delay the operation timing of the
During operation, a buzzer will pre-collision brake control.
sound and a warning indicator ■ Acceleration Suppression at
and message will be displayed Low Speed
on the multi-information display. If the steering wheel is being
turned, the system may determine
that the driver is taking evasive
action and possibly prevent the
Acceleration Suppression at Low
Speed function from operating or
possibly causing its operation to
be canceled.
■ Emergency steering assist
● The emergency steering assist
will be canceled when the sys-
tem determines that lane depar-
ture prevention control has
“Accelerator Pedal is completed.
Pressed”
● Depending on operations per-
formed by the driver, emer-
WARNING gency steering assist may not
■ Pre-collision braking operate or operation may be
canceled.
● When the pre-collision braking
function is operating, a large
amount of braking force will be
applied.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 209

WARNING
• If the accelerator pedal is
depressed strongly, the steering
wheel is turned heavily, the
brake pedal is depressed, or the
turn signal lever is operated, the
system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action
and the emergency steering
assist may not operate.
• While the emergency steering
assist is operating, if the accel-
erator pedal is depressed
strongly, the steering wheel is
turned heavily, or the brake
pedal is depressed, the system
may determine that the driver is
taking evasive action and emer-
gency steering assist operation
may be canceled.
• While the emergency steering
assist is operating, if the steer- 5
ing wheel is held or turned in the
opposite direction of system
operation, emergency steering

Driving
assist operation will be can-
celed.

■ Operating conditions of each function of the pre-collision system

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the pos-
sibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high.
However, the system will not operate in the following situations:
● When the vehicle has not been driven a certain amount after a terminal of
the 12-volt battery has been disconnected and reconnected
● When the shift position is in R
● When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning
function will be operational)
The following are the operational speeds and cancelation conditions of each
function:

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 210 5-5. Using the driving support systems

● Pre-collision warning
Relative speed between
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
your vehicle and object
Preceding vehicles, Approximately 3 to 110 Approximately 3 to 110
stopped vehicles mph (5 to 180 km/h) mph (5 to 180 km/h)
Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 50 to 130
Oncoming vehicles
mph (30 to 180 km/h) mph (80 to 220 km/h)
Approximately 3 to 50 Approximately 3 to 50
Bicycles
mph (5 to 80 km/h) mph (5 to 80 km/h)
Approximately 3 to 50 Approximately 3 to 50
Pedestrians
mph (5 to 80 km/h) mph (5 to 80 km/h)
Preceding motorcycles, Approximately 3 to 110 Approximately 3 to 50
stopped motorcycles mph (5 to 180 km/h) mph (5 to 80 km/h)
Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 20 to 110
Oncoming motorcycles
mph (30 to 180 km/h) mph (30 to 180 km/h)

While the pre-collision warning is operating, if the steering wheel is operated

heavily or suddenly, the pre-collision warning may be canceled.
● Pre-collision brake assist
Relative speed between
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
your vehicle and object
Preceding vehicles, Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 7 to 110
stopped vehicles mph (30 to 180 km/h) mph (10 to 180 km/h)
Approximately 20 to 50 Approximately 20 to 50
Bicycles
mph (30 to 80 km/h) mph (30 to 80 km/h)
Approximately 20 to 50 Approximately 20 to 50
Pedestrians
mph (30 to 80 km/h) mph (30 to 80 km/h)
Preceding motorcycles, Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 7 to 50
stopped motorcycles mph (30 to 180 km/h) mph (10 to 80 km/h)

● Pre-collision braking
Relative speed between
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
your vehicle and object
Preceding vehicles, Approximately 3 to 110 Approximately 3 to 110
stopped vehicles mph (5 to 180 km/h) mph (5 to 180 km/h)
Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 50 to 130
Oncoming vehicles
mph (30 to 180 km/h) mph (80 to 220 km/h)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 211

Relative speed between

Detectable objects Vehicle speed
your vehicle and object
Approximately 3 to 50 Approximately 3 to 50
Bicycles
mph (5 to 80 km/h) mph (5 to 80 km/h)
Approximately 3 to 50 Approximately 3 to 50
Pedestrians
mph (5 to 80 km/h) mph (5 to 80 km/h)
Preceding motorcycles, Approximately 3 to 110 Approximately 3 to 50
stopped motorcycles mph (5 to 180 km/h) mph (5 to 80 km/h)
Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 20 to 110
Oncoming motorcycles
mph (30 to 180 km/h) mph (30 to 180 km/h)

If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is oper-
ating, it will be canceled:
• The accelerator pedal is strongly depressed
• The steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly
● Emergency steering assist
The emergency steering assist will not operate when the turn signal lights
are flashing.
5
Relative speed between
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
your vehicle and object

Driving
Preceding vehicles,
stopped vehicles, bicy- Approximately 25 to 50 Approximately 25 to 50
cles, pedestrians, mph (40 to 80 km/h) mph (40 to 80 km/h)
motorcycles
Preceding vehicles, Active steering func- Active steering func-
stopped vehicles, bicy-
cles, pedestrians, tion: to 50 mph ( to 80 tion: * to 50 mph (* to 80
* *

motorcycles km/h) km/h)

*
: Minimum vehicle speed: Vehicle speed at which evasion using pre-colli-
sion brake control is difficult
While the emergency steering assist is operating, if any of the following are
performed, emergency steering assist operation may be canceled:
• The accelerator pedal is strongly depressed
• The steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly
• The brake pedal is depressed
● Intersection collision avoidance support (left/right turn)
The intersection collision avoidance support (for left/right turning vehicles)
will not operate when the turn signal lights are not flashing.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 212 5-5. Using the driving support systems

Relative speed
Detectable Oncoming vehicle
Vehicle speed between your
objects speed
vehicle and object
Approximately 3 Approximately 3 Approximately 7
Oncoming vehi-
to 25 mph (5 to to 45 mph (5 to to 70 mph (10 to
cles
40 km/h) 75 km/h) 115 km/h)
Approximately 3 Approximately 3
Pedestrians to 20 mph (5 to - to 25 mph (5 to
30 km/h) 40 km/h)
Approximately 3 Approximately 3
Bicycles to 20 mph (5 to - to 30 mph (5 to
30 km/h) 50 km/h)
Approximately 3 Approximately 3 Approximately 7
Oncoming motor-
to 25 mph (5 to to 45 mph (5 to to 70 mph (10 to
cycles
40 km/h) 75 km/h) 115 km/h)

● Intersection collision avoidance support (crossing vehicles)

Relative speed
Detectable Crossing vehicle
Vehicle speed between your
objects speed
vehicle and object
Approximately 3 Approximately 31 Approximately 3
Vehicles, Motor-
to 38 mph (5 to mph or less (50 to 38 mph (5 to
cycles (side)
60 km/h) km/h or less) 60 km/h)

When driving at approximately 29 mph (40 km/h) or more, this system will
only operate when the speed of the other vehicle is approximately 29 mph
(40 km/h) or less.
The system operates only when the crossing vehicle speed is same as or
less than the vehicle speed.
● Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed
The Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed function will not operate when
the turn signal lights are flashing.
Relative speed between
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
your vehicle and object
Preceding vehicles,
stopped vehicles, Approximately 0 to 9 Approximately 0 to 9
Pedestrians, Bicycles, mph (0 to 15 km/h) mph (0 to 15 km/h)
Wall

While the Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed function is operating, if

any of the following are performed, the low speed sudden acceleration sup-
pression function operation will be canceled:

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 213
• The accelerator pedal is released
• The steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly
■ Detection of detectable objects painting ahead of the vehicle that
Objects are detected based on their may be mistaken for a detectable
size, shape, and movement. object
Depending on the ambient bright- • When passing a detectable object
ness, movement, posture and direc- that is changing lanes or turning
tion of a detectable object, it may left/right
not be detected and the system may
not operate properly.
The system detects shapes, such as
the following, as detectable objects.

• When passing a detectable object

which is stopped to make a
left/right turn

■ Situations in which the system

may operate even though the 5
possibility of a collision is not
high

Driving
● In certain situations, such as the
following, the system may deter-
mine that the possibility of a colli-
sion is high and operate: • When a detectable object stops
• When passing a detectable object immediately before entering the
• When changing lanes while over- path of the vehicle
taking a detectable object • When passing through a location
• When suddenly approaching a with a structure above the road
detectable object (traffic sign, billboard, etc.)
• When approaching a detectable
object or other object on the road-
side, such as guardrails, utility
poles, trees, walls, etc.
• When there is a detectable object
or other object by the roadside at
the entrance of a curve

• When approaching an electric toll

gate barrier, parking lot barrier, or
other barrier that opens and
closes
• When turning left/right and an
oncoming vehicle, oncoming
motorcycle, pedestrian or bicycle
• When there are patterns or a

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 214 5-5. Using the driving support systems

crosses in front of the vehicle • When suddenly approaching a

• When attempting to turn left/right detectable object
in front of an oncoming vehicle, • When the detectable object is
oncoming motorcycle, pedestrian near a wall, fence, guardrail, man-
or bicycle hole cover, steel plate on the road
• When turning left/right and an surface, or another vehicle
oncoming vehicle, oncoming • When there is a structure above a
motorcycle, pedestrian or bicycle detectable object
stops or changes course immedi- • When part of a detectable object
ately before entering the path of is hidden by another object (large
the vehicle luggage, umbrella, guardrail, etc.)
• When turning left/right and an • When multiple detectable objects
oncoming vehicle turns left/right in are overlapping
front of the vehicle • When a bright light, such as the
sun, is reflecting off of a detect-
able object
• When a detectable object is white
and looks extremely bright
• When the color or brightness of a
detectable object causes it to
blend in with its surroundings
• When a detectable object cuts in
front of or suddenly emerges in
front of your vehicle
• When the steering wheel is oper- • When approaching a vehicle
ated toward the path of an oncom- which is diagonal
ing vehicle • If a bicycle is a child sized bicycle,
• When there is an object moving is carrying a large load, is carrying
above or under the road an extra passenger, is carrying a
forward leaning rider, or has an
unusual shape (bicycles equipped
with a child seat, tandem bicycles,
etc.)
• If a pedestrian or bicycle is shorter
than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or
taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2
m).
• When the silhouette of a pedes-
■ Situations in which the system trian or bicycle is unclear (such as
may not operate properly when they are wearing a raincoat,
long skirt, etc.)
● In certain situations, such as the • When a pedestrian is bending for-
following, a detectable object may ward or squatting
not be detected by the front sen- • When a pedestrian or bicycle is
sors, and the system may not moving at high speed
operate properly: • When a pedestrian is pushing a
• When a detectable object is stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or
approaching your vehicle other vehicle
• When your vehicle or a detectable • When a detectable object blends
object is wandering in with the surrounding area, such
• When a detectable object makes as when it is dim (at dawn or dusk)
an abrupt maneuver (such as sud- or dark (at night or in a tunnel)
den swerving, acceleration or • When the vehicle has not been
deceleration) driven for a certain amount of time

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 215
after the fuel cell system was cle
started ● In addition to the preceding, in
• While turning left/right or a few certain situations, such as the fol-
seconds after turning left/right lowing, walls may not be detected
• While driving around a curve and as a target object and the Acceler-
a few seconds after driving around ation Suppression at Low Speed
a curve function may not operate properly:
• When turning left/right and an • When scenery behind the wall is
oncoming vehicle is driving in a visible, such as a glass door, grid
lane 3 or more lanes from the fence, etc.
vehicle • When the wall is slanted or low
• When turning left/right and the • When the wall is narrow, such as
direction of the vehicle differs a pole, etc.
greatly from the direction traffic • When the wall is made of plants,
flows in the oncoming lane such as a hedge, etc.
• When the road, etc. is reflected on
the wall
• When the vehicle is approaching
the wall at an angle

Changing the pre-colli-

sion setting
5
• When turning left/right, a pedes-  The pre-collision system can
trian or bicycle behind the vehicle
comes in front of it as if it over- be enabled/disabled through

Driving
takes the vehicle a customize setting. (P.484)
The system is enabled each time
the power switch is turned to ON.
 When the system is disabled,
the PCS warning light will illu-
minate and a message will be
displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
• When at an intersection, the
approaching crossing vehicle is  The pre-collision setting can
long in overall length, such as a be changed on the customize
large truck, towing trailer, etc.
settings. (P.484)
● In addition to the preceding, in
certain situations, such as the fol-  When the pre-collision warn-
lowing, the emergency steering ing timing is changed, the
assist may not operate properly:
• When a detectable object is too emergency steering assist
close to the vehicle timing will also be changed.
• When there is insufficient space to
perform evasive steering maneu- When is selected, the emer-
vers or an obstruction exists in the
evasion direction gency steering assist (excluding the
• When there is an oncoming vehi- active steering function) will not

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 216 5-5. Using the driving support systems

operate in most cases. LTA (Lane Tracing

 When the system determines Assist)
that the driver is not facing
forward, the pre-collision LTA functions
warning and emergency
 When driving on a road with
steering assist will operate at
clear lane lines with the
the timing, regardless of dynamic radar cruise control
the user setting. operating, lane lines and pre-
ceding and surrounding vehi-
 When the dynamic radar
cles are detected using the
cruise control is operating, the front camera and radar sen-
pre-collision warning will sor, and the steering wheel is
operate at the timing, operated to maintain the vehi-
regardless of the user setting. cle’s lane position.
Use the this function only on high-
 When the Traffic Jam Assist is
ways and expressways.
operating, the pre-collision
If the dynamic radar cruise control
warning will operate at the is not operating, the function will not
timing, regardless of the operate.
user setting. In situations where the lane lines
are difficult to see or are not visible,
such as when in a traffic jam, sup-
port will be provided using the path
of preceding and surrounding vehi-
cles.
If the system determines that the
steering wheel has not been oper-
ated for a certain amount of time or
the steering wheel is not being
firmly gripped, the driver will be
alerted and this function will be
temporarily canceled.
If the steering wheel is firmly
gripped, the function will begin
operating again.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 217

 When the function is operat- WARNING

ing, if the vehicle is likely to
■ Before using the LTA system 5
depart from its lane, the driver
● Do not overly rely on the LTA
will be alerted via a display system. The LTA system is not a

Driving
and buzzer. system which provides auto-
mated assistance in driving and
When the buzzer sounds, check it is not a system which reduces
the area around the vehicle and the amount of attention neces-
carefully operate the steering wheel sary for safe driving. The driver
to move the vehicle back to the is solely responsible for paying
center of the lane. attention to their surroundings
and operating the steering
wheel as necessary to ensure
safety. Also, the driver is
responsible for taking adequate
breaks when fatigued, such as
when driving for a long time.
● Failure to perform appropriate
driving operations and pay care-
ful attention may lead to an
accident.
● When not using the LTA system,
turn it off using the LTA switch.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 218 5-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Lane departure warning func-

■ Operating conditions of func- tion when the LTA is operating
tion
● Even if the LDA warning method is
This function is operable when all of changed to vibration of the steer-
the following conditions are met: ing wheel, if the vehicle deviates
● The LTA system detects lane lines from the lane while the LTA is
or the path of preceding or sur- operating, the warning buzzer will
rounding vehicles. sound to alert the driver.
● The dynamic radar cruise control ● If steering wheel operation equiv-
is operating. alent to that necessary for a lane
change is detected, the system
● The lane width is approximately will determine the vehicle is not
10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m). deviating from the lane and the
● The turn signal lever is not being warning will not operate.
operated. ■ Hands off steering wheel warn-
● The vehicle is not being driven ing operation
around a sharp curve. ● When the system determines the
● The vehicle is not accelerating or driver is not holding the steering
decelerating more than a certain wheel, a message urging the
amount. driver to grip the steering wheel
● The steering wheel is not being and the icon shown in the illustra-
turned with a large force. tion will be displayed on the multi-
information display to warn the
● The hands off steering wheel driver. If the system detects that
warning (P.218) is not operat- the steering wheel is held, the
ing. warning will be canceled. When
● The vehicle is being driven in the using the system, make sure to
center of a lane. grip the steering wheel firmly,
regardless of whether the warn-
■ Temporary cancelation of func- ing is operating or not.
tions
● When the operating conditions are
no longer met, a function may be
temporarily canceled. However,
when the operation conditions are
met again, operation of the func-
tion will automatically be restored.
(P.218)
● If the operating conditions of a
function are no longer met while ● If no operations are detected for a
the function is operating, a buzzer certain amount of time, the warn-
may sound to indicate that the ing will operate, and the function
function has been temporarily will be temporarily canceled. This
canceled. warning may also operate if the
● The steering assist operation of driver only operates steering
the function can be overridden by wheel a small amount continu-
the steering wheel operation of ously.
the driver. ■ Situations in which the hands
off steering wheel warning may
not operate properly
● Depending on the condition of the

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 219
vehicle, handle control condition
and road surface, the warning WARNING
function may not operate. ■ Situations in which the func-
● In the following situations, the sys- tions may not operate prop-
tem may not be able to detect erly
when the driver’s hands are off In the following situations, the
the steering wheel. functions may not operate prop-
• When a steering wheel cover is erly and the vehicle may depart
installed from its lane. Do not overly rely on
• When the driver is wearing gloves these functions. The driver is
• When foreign matter is attached to solely responsible for paying
the steering wheel attention to their surroundings
• When the driver is gripping the and operating the steering wheel
wood trim, seam of the leather, as necessary to ensure safety.
spokes, or other part of the steer-
ing wheel that does not have sen- ● When a preceding or surround-
sors ing vehicle changes lanes (Your
● In the following situations, the vehicle may follow the preced-
hands off steering wheel warning ing or surrounding vehicle and
may not operate and the LTA func- also change lanes)
tion may continue operating even
though the driver’s hands are off
the steering wheel:
• When something other than a 5
hand is contacting the steering
wheel
• When a wide object or arms are

Driving
held across the steering wheel

Enabling/disabling the
system
The LTA will change between
ON/OFF each time the LTA
switch is pressed.
● When a preceding or surround-
When the LTA is ON, the LTA indi- ing vehicle is swaying (Your
cator will illuminate. vehicle may sway accordingly
and depart from the lane)
● When a preceding or surround-
ing vehicle departs from a lane
(Your vehicle may follow the
preceding or surrounding vehi-
cle and also depart from the
lane)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 220 5-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
● When a preceding or surround-
ing vehicle is being driven
extremely close to the left/right
lane line (Your vehicle may fol-
low the preceding or surround-
ing vehicle accordingly and
depart from the lane)
● When there are moving objects
or structures in the surrounding
area (Depending on the position
of the moving object or structure
relative to your vehicle, your
vehicle may sway)
● When the vehicle is struck by a
crosswind or the turbulence of
other nearby vehicles
● Situations in which the sensors
may not operate properly:
P.200
● Situations in which the lane may
not be detected: P.201
● When it is necessary to disable
the system: P.195

Operation display of steering wheel operation support

The operating state of the LTA system is indicated.
Lane dis- Steering
Indicator Situation
play icon

LTA is on standby
White Gray/White Gray

LTA is operating
Green Green Green

The vehicle is departing the lane

toward the side which the lane dis-
Yellow Yellow play is flashing
Green
Flashing Flashing

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 221

LCA (Lane Change WARNING

Assist) ■ Before using the LCA system
● Do not overly rely on the LCA
LCA functions system.
The LCA system is not a system
which provides automated
This function is linked to the LTA assistance in driving. and it is
and provides assistance in per- not a system which reduces the
forming lane changes through need for checking an adjacent
lane for other vehicles,
steering wheel operations. approaching vehicles, etc. when
Use the this function only on high- changing lanes. The driver is
ways and expressways. solely responsible for paying
attention to their surroundings
The steering assist operation can and operating the steering
be overridden by the steering wheel wheel as necessary to ensure
operation of the driver. safety.
The lane change assist function is Also, do not use the LCA to
not designed to operate when change lanes into which a lane
change should not be per-
changing lanes at a junction. formed (oncoming lanes, road
shoulders, etc.).
● Failure to perform appropriate 5
driving operations and pay care-
ful attention may lead to an

Driving
accident.

■ Operating conditions of func-

tion
This function is operable when all of
the following conditions are met:
● The LTA is operating.
● The lane change assist function is
enabled by a customize setting.
● The vehicle speed is between
approximately 55 and 85 mph (90
and 140 km/h).
● The system detects a broken
white line on the side which the
lane change is to be performed.
● A vehicle is not detected in the
lane toward which the turn signal
is operated.
● The steering wheel is not being
turned with a large force.
● The hands off steering wheel
warning (P.218) is not operat-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 222 5-5. Using the driving support systems

ing.
■ Cancelation of functions
In the following situations, opera-
tion of the LCA may be canceled
with the display and buzzer:
● When the operating conditions
(P.218) are no longer met
● When the system can no longer
■ Situations in which the hands
detect lane lines
off steering wheel warning may
● When the turn signal lever is oper- not operate properly
ated to the second position
● Depending on the condition of the
(P.222)
vehicle, handle control condition
● When the turn signal lever is oper- and road surface, the warning
ated in the opposite direction of function may not operate.
the lane change
● In the following situations, the sys-
● When the system detects opera- tem may not be able to detect
tion of the steering wheel, brake when the driver’s hands are off
pedal or accelerator pedal by the the steering wheel.
driver • When a steering wheel cover is
If the system detects that a vehicle installed
• When the driver is wearing gloves
is quickly approaching in the lane
• When foreign matter is attached to
toward which the turn signal is oper- the steering wheel
ated a buzzer will sound and a mes- • When the driver is gripping the
sage will be displayed to alert the wood trim, seam of the leather,
driver. At the same time the steering spokes, or other part of the steer-
ing wheel that does not have sen-
wheel may be slightly operated to
sors
help keep the vehicle away from the
● In the following situations, the
approaching vehicle.
hands off steering wheel warning
■ Hands off steering wheel warn- may not operate and the LCA
ing operation function may continue operating
even though the driver’s hands
When the system determines the are off the steering wheel:
driver is not holding the steering • When something other than a
wheel, a message urging the driver hand is contacting the steering
to grip the steering wheel and the wheel
icon shown in the illustration will be • When a wide object or arms are
displayed on the multi-information held across the steering wheel
display to warn the driver. If the sys-
tem detects that the steering wheel
is held, the warning will be can- Operating the LCA
celed. When using the system,
make sure to grip the steering wheel If the turn signal lever is held in
firmly, regardless of whether the
warning is operating or not. the first position until a buzzer
sounds, the lane change direc-
tion will be displayed and the
function will operate.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 223
To change lanes by holding the 1 First position: LCA is opera-
turn signal lever in the first posi- tional
tion without using the LCA, turn 2 Second position: LCA is not
the customize setting of the LCA operational
off.
WARNING
■ Situations in which the LCA
should not be used
● When driving on a one lane
road
● When there is no broken white
line between the current lane
and the lane to be changed to

Enabling/disabling the
system
LCA can be enabled/disabled
through a customize setting. 5
(P.484)

Driving
Displays and system operation
The operating state of the LCA system is indicated.
Steering
LCA display Condition
icon

LCA is operating
Blue arrow and white line Green

Approaching vehicle detected while

LCA is operating
Gray

Lane line no longer detected while

Not displayed
LCA is operating
Gray

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 224 5-5. Using the driving support systems

LDA (Lane Departure

Alert)

Basic functions
The LDA system warns the
driver if the vehicle may deviate
from the current lane or course*,
and also can slightly operate the
steering wheel to help avoid
deviation from the lane or
course*.
The front camera is used to
detect lane lines or a course*.
*: Boundary between the asphalt
and grass, soil, etc., or structures, ■ Lane departure prevention
such as a curb, guardrail, etc. function
■ Lane departure alert func- If the system determines that
tion the vehicle is likely to depart
When the system determines from its lane or course*, it pro-
that the vehicle might depart vides assistance through steer-
from its lane or course*, a warn- ing wheel operations to help
ing is displayed on a display, avoid deviation from the lane or
and either a warning buzzer will course.
sound or the steering wheel will If the system determines that the
vibrate to alert the driver. steering wheel has not been oper-
Check the area around your vehicle ated for a certain amount of time or
and carefully operate the steering the steering wheel is not being
wheel to move the vehicle back to firmly gripped, a warning message
may be displayed and a warning
the center of the lane or course*.
buzzer may sound to alert the
If the system determines that the driver.
vehicle may collide with a vehicle in
If the system determines that the
an adjacent lane, the lane depar-
vehicle may collide with a vehicle in
ture alert will operate even if the
an adjacent lane, the lane depar-
turn signals are operating.
ture prevention function will operate
*: Boundary between the asphalt even if the turn signals are operat-
and grass, soil, etc., or structures, ing.
such as a curb, guardrail, etc. *
: Boundary between the asphalt

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 225
and grass, soil, etc., or structures,
WARNING
such as a curb, guardrail, etc.
■ Before using the LDA system
● Do not overly rely on the LDA
system. The LDA system is not
a system which provides auto-
mated assistance in driving.
However, as it is not a system
which reduces the amount of
attention necessary for safe
driving. The driver is solely
responsible for paying attention
to their surroundings and oper-
ating the steering wheel as nec-
essary to ensure safety. Also,
the driver is responsible for tak-
ing adequate breaks when
fatigued, such as when driving
for a long time.
● Failure to perform appropriate
driving operations and pay care-
ful attention may lead to an
accident.
5
■ Break suggestion function
If the vehicle is swaying, a mes- ■ Operating conditions of each

Driving
function
sage will be displayed and a
● Lane departure alert/prevention
buzzer will sound to urge the function
driver to take a break. This function is operable when all of
the following conditions are met:
• The vehicle speed is approxi-
mately 30 mph (50 km/h) or more.
Operation may be possible when
the vehicle speed is approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more if vehi-
cles, motorcycles, bicycles, or
pedestrians are detected near the
lane.
• The system recognizes a lane or
course*. (When recognized on
only one side, the system will
operate only for the recognized
side.)
• The lane width is approximately
9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• The turn signal lever is not being
operated.
(Except when a vehicle is
detected in the direction that the
turn signal lever is operated.)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 226 5-5. Using the driving support systems

• The vehicle is not being driven ● Depending on the driver condition,

around a sharp curve. the lane departure alert function or
• The vehicle is not accelerating or lane departure prevention function
decelerating more than a certain changes the timing of operation.
amount. ● The steering assist operation of
• The steering wheel is not being the lane departure prevention
turned sufficiently to perform a function can be overridden by the
lane change. steering wheel operation of the
• The VSC or TRAC system is not driver.
turned off. *: Boundary between the asphalt
*: Boundary between the asphalt
and grass, soil, etc., or structures,
and grass, soil, etc., or structures,
such as a curb, guardrail, etc.
such as a curb, guardrail, etc.
■ Hands off steering wheel warn-
■ Temporary cancellation of func- ing operation
tions
In the following situations, a mes-
When the operating conditions are sage urging the driver to operate the
no longer met, a function may be steering wheel and an icon will be
temporarily canceled. However, displayed and a buzzer will sound to
when the operation conditions are warn the driver. When using the sys-
met again, operation of the function tem, make sure to grip the steering
will automatically be restored. wheel firmly, regardless of whether
(P.225) the warning is operating or not.
■ Operation of the lane departure
alert function/lane departure
prevention function
● Depending on the vehicle speed,
road conditions, lane departure
angle, etc., operation of the lane
departure prevention function may
not be felt or the function may not
operate.
● Depending on the conditions, the ● When the system determines that
warning buzzer may operate even the driver is not securely holding
if vibration is selected through a the steering wheel, or the steering
customize setting. wheel is not being operated when
the steering assist operation of the
● If a course* is not clear or straight, lane departure prevention function
the lane departure alert function or is operating
lane departure prevention function The length of time that the warning
may not operate. buzzer operates will become longer
● The lane departure alert function as the frequency of the steering
or lane departure prevention func- assist operating increases. If the
tion may not operate if the system system judges that the steering
judges that the vehicle is inten- wheel has been operated, the warn-
tionally being steered to avoid a ing buzzer stop.
pedestrian or parked vehicle.
■ Break suggestion function
● It may not be possible for the sys-
tem to judge if there is danger of a This function is operable when all of
collision with a vehicle in an adja- the following conditions are met:
cent lane. ● The vehicle speed is approxi-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 227
mately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more. ● Situations in which the lane may
● The lane width is approximately not be detected: P.201
9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
● Situations in which the sensors
Depending on the condition of the may not operate properly:
vehicle and road surface, the break P.200
suggestion function may not oper-
ate. ● Situations in which some or all
of the functions of the system
cannot operate: P.201
● When it is necessary to disable
the system: P.195

Changing LDA settings

 The LDA system can be
enabled/disabled through a
customize setting. (P.484)
5
 The settings of the LDA can
be changed on the customize

Driving
settings. (P.484)

WARNING
■ Situations in which the sys-
tem may not operate properly
In the following situations, the
system may not operate properly
and the vehicle may depart from
its lane. Do not overly rely on
these functions. The driver is
solely responsible for paying
attention to their surroundings
and operating the steering wheel
as necessary to ensure safety.
● When the boundary between
the asphalt and grass, soil, etc.,
or structures, such as a curb,
guardrail, etc. is not clear or
straight
● When the vehicle is struck by a
crosswind or the turbulence of
other nearby vehicles

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 228 5-5. Using the driving support systems

Displays and system operation

The operating state of the lane departure alert function and steering
assist operation of the lane departure prevention function are indi-
cated.
Lane dis- Steering
Indicator Condition
play icon
Not illumi- Not illumi- Not illumi-
System disabled
nated nated nated

Not illumi- Lane lines are not detected by the

nated system
White Gray

Not illumi- Lane lines are detected by the sys-

nated tem
White White

Lane departure alert function is

Not illumi-
operating for the side which the lane
Yellow Yellow nated
display is flashing
Flashing Flashing

Lane departure prevention function

is operating for the side which the
Green Green Green lane display is illuminated
Lane departure alert function/lane
departure prevention function is
Yellow Yellow operating for the side which the lane
Green
Flashing Flashing display is flashing

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 229

PDA (Proactive driv- ● Proactive driving assist is not a

system which allows for inatten-
ing assist) tive driving and is not a system
which assists in poor visibility
When a detectable object conditions. The driver is solely
responsible for paying attention
(P.230) is detected, the to their surroundings and driving
proactive driving assist safely.
operates the brakes and ■ When turning proactive driv-
steering wheel to help pre- ing assist off
vent the vehicle from ● Situations in which the sensors
approaching too close to may not operate properly:
P.200
the object.
● When it is necessary to disable
WARNING the system: P.195

■ For safe use

Driving safely is solely the respon-
sibility of the driver.
● The proactive driving assist is
designed to provide some
assistance for regular braking 5
and steering operations, as well
as helping to prevent the vehicle

Driving
from approaching too close to a
detectable object. However, the
scope of this assistance is lim-
ited. The driver should perform
brake and steering operations
as necessary. Read the follow-
ing items carefully. Do not
overly rely on the proactive driv-
ing assist and always drive
carefully. (P.232)
● The proactive driving assist is
not a system which reduces the
amount of attention necessary
for safe driving. Even if the sys-
tem is operating correctly, the
surrounding conditions as rec-
ognized by the driver and
detected by the system may dif-
fer. It is necessary for the driver
to pay attention, assess risks,
and ensure safety. Over-reli-
ance on this system to drive the
vehicle safely may lead to an
accident resulting in death or
serious injury.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 230 5-5. Using the driving support systems

System operating conditions and detectable objects

According to the driving conditions, the operation and detectable
objects of the proactive driving assist will change as follows.
Detectable
Function Conditions Operation
objects
Assistance with
some brake oper-
A detectable ations is pro-
 Pedestrians
object is detected vided in order to
 Bicyclists
crossing the road reduce the possi-
bility of a colli-
sion.
Assistance with
some brake and
steering wheel
operations are
provided accord-
ing to the sur-
Obstacle Antici-
rounding
pation Assist
conditions to help
(OAA)
prevent the vehi-
A detectable cle from  Pedestrians
object is detected approaching too
 Bicyclists
on the side of the close to a  Parked vehicles
road detected object.
Assistance with
steering wheel
operations is pro-
vided within a
range that the
vehicle will not
deviate from its
current lane.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 231

Detectable
Function Conditions Operation
objects
The vehicle is
A preceding vehi- gently deceler-
cle or an adjacent ated so that the  Preceding vehi-
vehicle cutting in vehicle-to-vehi- cles
front of the vehi- cle distance will  Motorcycles
cle is detected not be exces-
Deceleration sively short.
Assist (DA) The vehicle is
gently deceler-
A curve is ated if the vehicle
detected ahead of speed is deter- None
the vehicle mined to be too
high for the curve
ahead.
The system antic-
ipates the driver’s
Steering Assist operation and 5
Lane is detected None
(SA) supports the
operation of the

Driving
steering wheel.

Approximately 5 to 80 mph (10 to

■ Vehicle speeds at which the 140 km/h)
system can operate
● Detectable object crossing the ■ System operation will be can-
road assistance celed when
Approximately 20 to 35 mph (30 to ● In the following situations, system
operation will be canceled:
60 km/h) • When the dynamic radar cruise
● Detectable object on the side of control or cruise control is operat-
the road assistance ing
• When the PCS is off
Approximately 20 to 35 mph (30 to • Situations in which some or all of
60 km/h) the functions of the system cannot
● Preceding vehicle deceleration operate: P.201
assistance • When the P, R or N shift position is
selected
Approximately 15 mph (20 km/h) or
● In the following situations, the
more brake operation assist will be can-
● Curve deceleration assistance celed:
• Approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
Approximately 15 mph (20 km/h) or less
more • When a certain vehicle speed has
● Steering assist within a lane been reached, as judged by the
system, according to the sur-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 232 5-5. Using the driving support systems

rounding conditions ● When there are patterns or a

● In the following situations, system painting ahead of the vehicle
operation may be canceled: that may be mistaken for a
• When the brake control or output detectable object
restriction control of a driving sup-
port system operates ● When passing through a place
(For example: PCS, drive-start with a low structure above the
control) road (tunnel with a low ceiling,
• When the system determines that traffic sign, signboard, etc.)
a detected object has moved
away from the vehicle ● When driving on snowy, icy, or
• When lane lines can no longer be rutted roads
detected ● When a detectable object is
• When the brake pedal has been approaching your vehicle
depressed
• When the accelerator pedal has ● When your vehicle or a detect-
been depressed able object is wandering
• When the steering wheel has
been operated with more than a ● When the movement of a
certain amount of force detectable object changes
• When the turn signal lever is oper- (change in direction, sudden
ated to the left/right turn position acceleration or deceleration,
etc.)
WARNING ● When suddenly approaching a
■ Situations in which the sys- detectable object
tem may not operate properly ● When a preceding vehicle or
● Situations in which the lane may motorcycle is not directly in front
not be detected: P.201 of your vehicle
● When a detectable object stops ● When there is a structure above
immediately before entering the a detectable object
path of the vehicle
● When part of a detectable
● When passing extremely close object is hidden by another
to a detectable object behind a object (large luggage, umbrella,
guardrail, fence, etc. guardrail, etc.)
● When changing lanes while ● When multiple detectable
overtaking a detectable object objects are overlapping
● When passing a detectable ● When a bright light, such as the
object that is changing lanes or sun or headlights of another
turning left/right vehicle, is reflecting off of the
detectable object
● When there are objects (guard-
rails, power poles, trees, walls, ● When the detectable object is
fences, poles, traffic cones, white and looks extremely bright
mailboxes, etc.) in the surround-
ing area ● When the color or brightness of
the detectable object causes it
to blend in with its surroundings

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 233

WARNING ● When the vehicle has not been

driven for a certain amount of
● When a detectable object cuts time after the fuel cell system
in front of or emerges from was started
beside a vehicle
● While turning left or right or a
● When approaching a vehicle few seconds after turning left or
ahead which is perpendicular or right
at an angle to the vehicle, or is
facing the vehicle ● While changing lanes or a few
seconds after changing lanes
● If a parked vehicle is perpendic-
ular or at an angle to the vehicle ● When entering a curve, driving
around a curve and a few sec-
● When a bicycle is a child sized onds after driving around a
bicycle, is carrying a large load, curve
is carrying an extra passenger,
or has an unusual shape (bicy-
cles equipped with a child seat, Changing proactive driv-
tandem bicycles, etc.)
ing assist settings
● When a pedestrian or bicyclist is
shorter than approximately 3.2  The proactive driving assist
ft. (1 m) or taller than approxi-
mately 6.5 ft. (2 m) can be enabled/disabled
through a customize setting. 5
● When the silhouette of a pedes- (P.484)
trian or bicyclist is unclear (such
as when they are wearing a  The following settings of the

Driving
raincoat, long skirt, etc.)
proactive driving assist can be
● When a pedestrian or bicyclist is changed through customize
bending forward or squatting settings. (P.484)
● When a pedestrian or bicyclist is
moving at high speed
● When a pedestrian is pushing a
stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or
other vehicle
● When a detectable object
blends in with the surrounding
area, such as when it is dim (at
dawn or dusk) or dark (at night,
in a tunnel, etc.)
● When the lane width is 13.1 ft.
(4 m) or more
● When the lane width is 8.2 ft.
(2.5 m) or less

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 234 5-5. Using the driving support systems

System operation display

Depending on the situation, the following indicators or icons will be
displayed.
Some icons cannot be displayed unless the display is changed to
the driving safety support function information screen.
Icon Meaning
 White: Monitoring for detectable
objects
 Green: Detectable object crossing
the road or detectable object on
the side of the road assistance
operating
A pedestrian has been detected as
crossing the road or on the side of
the road and brake or steering assis-
tance is operating

A vehicle has been detected on the

side of the road and brake or steer-
ing operation assistance is being
performed

 Steering operation assistance is

being performed to prevent the
vehicle from approaching too close
to a detectable object on the side
of the road
 When the steering assist is operat-
ing

Preceding vehicle deceleration

assistance is being performed

Warning to maintain appropriate

vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Curve deceleration assistance is

being performed

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 235

■ Hands off steering wheel warn-

ing operation
In the following situations, a mes-
sage urging the driver to grip the
steering wheel and the icon shown
in the illustration will be displayed on
the display to warn the driver. If the
system detects that the steering
wheel is held, the warning will be
canceled. When using the system,
make sure to grip the steering wheel
firmly, regardless of whether the
warning is operating or not.

● When assistance to a detectable 5

object crossing the road or assis-
tance to a detectable object on the
side of the road is performed and

Driving
the system determines the driver
is not holding the steering wheel
If no operations are detected for a
certain amount of time, a buzzer will
sound, the warning will operate.
This warning may also operate if the
driver only operates steering wheel
a small amount continuously.
■ Warning operation after preced-
ing vehicle deceleration assis-
tance has ended
After preceding vehicle decelera-
tion assistance has ended, if the
driver does not operate the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal and the
vehicle approaches the preceding
vehicle, the display will flash and a
buzzer will sound to urge the driver
to decelerate. If the system deter-
mines that the driver is operating the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal,
the warning will be canceled.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 236 5-5. Using the driving support systems

FCTA (Front Cross WARNING

Traffic Alert) ■ For safe use
Driving safely is solely the respon-
When approaching an intersec- sibility of the driver. Pay careful
tion, etc., at a low speed, vehi- attention to the surrounding con-
ditions in order to ensure safe
cles approaching from the left driving. The FCTA system is a
and right of the front of the vehi- supplementary system that
cle can be detected and the informs the driver of vehicles
approaching from the left and
driver informed of these vehi- right of the front of the vehicle.
cles. Over-reliance on this system may
lead to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury. The
FCTA system control details of the warning display may
differ from the actual traffic condi-
 When the system detects a tions. Although the warning dis-
vehicle approaching from the play will stop being displayed after
left or right in front of your a certain amount of time, this
does not necessarily indicate that
vehicle when approaching an there are no longer any vehicles
intersection, a notification will or pedestrians around your vehi-
cle.
be displayed.
 When the system determines
■ FCTA system operating condi-
that your vehicle may be tions
about to enter an intersection The system will operate when all of
even though a vehicle is the following conditions are met:
approaching from the left or ● A shift position other than P or R is
right in front of your vehicle, a selected
buzzer will sound and a mes- ● The vehicle speed is approxi-
sage will be displayed to urge mately 10 mph (15 km/h) or less
you to depress the brake ● A vehicle is approaching from the
left or right in front of your vehicle
pedal. at a speed between approximately
• Multi-information display 7 to 37 mph (10 to 60 km/h)
● There are no vehicles in front of
your vehicle
● The accelerator pedal is not being
strongly depressed
● The brake pedal is not being
strongly depressed
■ Situations in which the system
may operate even though no
vehicles are approaching
In certain situations, such as the fol-
lowing, the system may operate

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 237
even though no vehicles are approaches and passes
approaching: ● When being overtaken by another
● When approaching objects on the vehicle
roadside, such as guardrails, traf- ● When driving next to another vehi-
fic signs, utility poles, street lights, cle or a pedestrian
trees, tall grass, walls, etc.
● When a vehicle or pedestrian
● When passing an object on the approaches the side of your vehi-
side of the road, such as a parked cle
vehicle
■ Situations in which the system
● When a vehicle or pedestrian is
may not operate properly
approaching from the left or right
in front of your vehicle in the dis- In situations such as the following, a
tance vehicle may not be detected by a
● When a vehicle or pedestrian is
front side radar sensor and the sys-
moving within a parking spot, etc., tem may not operate properly:
next to the lane your vehicle is in ● If an approaching vehicle moves
suddenly (sudden steering, accel-
● When a pedestrian or bicyclist is
eration, deceleration, etc.)
approaching on a sidewalk
● When a vehicle or pedestrian is
moving away from your vehicle
● When an approaching vehicle is
decelerating or stops 5
● When an approaching vehicle
makes a left/right turn immediately

Driving
in front of your vehicle
● When a pedestrian is approaching
● If a vehicle is approaching from
your vehicle
the left or right of the front of your
● When an oncoming vehicle makes vehicle diagonally
a right/left turn
● When a vehicle is approaching
● When your vehicle enters an inter- from the left or right in front of your
section before a vehicle vehicle in the distance
approaching from the left or right
● When there is an object between
in front of your vehicle
your vehicle and an approaching
● When stopped at traffic light and a vehicle
vehicle approaches from the left
● When several vehicles are
or right in front of your vehicle
approaching with little space
● When making a left/right turn in between them
front of an approaching vehicle
● Situations in which the sensors
may not operate properly: P.200
● Situations in which some or all of
the functions of the system cannot
operate: P.200

● When an oncoming vehicle

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 238 5-5. Using the driving support systems

Changing FCTA settings RSA (Road Sign

Assist)
 The FCTA can be
enabled/disabled through a
The RSA system detects
customize setting. (P.484)
specific road signs using
 The following settings of the the front camera and/or
FCTA can be changed navigation system (when
through customize settings. speed limit information is
(P.484) available) and warns the
driver via displays and
buzzers.

WARNING
■ For safe use
● Driving safely is solely the
responsibility of the driver. Pay
careful attention to the sur-
rounding conditions in order to
ensure safe driving.
● Do not rely solely upon the
RSA. The RSA assists the
driver by providing road sign
information, but it is not a
replacement for the driver’s own
vision and awareness. Driving
safely is solely the responsibility
of the driver. Pay careful atten-
tion to the surrounding condi-
tions in order to ensure safe
driving.
■ Situations in which the RSA
should not be used
When it is necessary to disable
the system: P.195
■ Situations in which the sys-
tem may not operate properly
Situations in which the sensors
may not operate properly: P.200

Display Function
 When the front camera
detects a sign or information

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 239
of a sign is available from the freeway junction or in an adjacent
navigation system, the sign lane just before merging
will be displayed on the dis- ● When stickers are attached to the
rear of a preceding vehicle
play.
● When a sign similar to a system
 Multiple signs can be dis- compatible sign is detected as a
played. system compatible sign
● When a speed limit sign for a
Depending on the specifications of frontage road is within detection
the vehicle, the number of dis- range of the front camera
played signs may be limited. ● When driving around a round-
about
■ Operating conditions of sign ● When a sign intended for trucks,
display etc. is detected
Signs will be displayed when the fol- ● When a sign has a supplemental
lowing conditions are met: sign (end point, day of week, time
● The system has detected a sign of day, etc.)
In the following situations, a dis- ● When there is a sign within a traf-
played sign may stop being dis- fic restricted area, such as a road-
played: works area
● When a new sign has not been ● When the navigation system map
detected for a certain distance data is out of date 5
● When the system determines that ● When the navigation system can-
the road being driven on has not be used

Driving
changed, such as after a left or In this case, the speed limit signs
right turn displayed on the multi-information
■ Situations in which the display display and navigation system dis-
function may not operate prop- play may differ.
erly
In the following situations, the RSA
system may not operate properly Notification function
and may not detect signs or may
display the incorrect sign. However, In the following situations, the
this does not indicate a malfunction. RSA system will output a warn-
● When a sign is dirty, faded, tilted ing to notify the driver.
or bent
● When the contrast of an electronic  If the vehicle speed exceeds
sign is low the speed warning threshold
● When all or part of a sign is hidden of the speed limit sign dis-
by a tree, utility pole, etc. played on the display, the sign
● When a sign is detected by the display will be emphasized
front camera for a short amount of
time and a buzzer will sound.
● When the driving state (turning,  When the RSA system
changing lanes, etc.) is judged detects a do not enter sign
incorrectly
and determines that the vehi-
● When a sign is immediately after a

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 240 5-5. Using the driving support systems

cle has entered a no-entry

area, the do not enter sign No U-turn
displayed on the display will
flash and a buzzer will sound.
No Turn On Red
■ Operating conditions of the
notification functions
● Excess speed notification function
This function will operate when the Stop
following condition is met:
• A speed limit road sign is recog-
nized by the system.
● No entry notification function Yield
This function will operate when all of
the following conditions are met:
• More than one no entry road signs Warning
are recognized by the system
simultaneously.
• The vehicle is passing between no
entry road signs recognized by the
system. Changing RSA settings
The following settings of the
Types of road signs sup- RSA can be changed through
ported customize settings. (P.484)
 The following types of road
signs can be displayed.
However, non-standard or recently
introduced traffic signs may not be
displayed.

Speed limit

Do Not Enter

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 241

Dynamic radar cruise ● The dynamic radar cruise con-

trol provides driving assistance
control to reduce the driver’s burden.
However, there are limitations to
This dynamic radar cruise the assistance provided.
Read the following items care-
control detects the pres- fully. Do not overly rely on this
ence of vehicles ahead, system and always drive care-
fully.
determines the current vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance, and Conditions under which the sys-
tem may not operate correctly:
operates to maintain a suit-
P.247
able distance from the vehi-
cle ahead. The desired ● Set the speed appropriately
according to the speed limit,
vehicle-to-vehicle distance traffic flow, road conditions,
can be set by operating the weather conditions, etc. The
vehicle-to-vehicle distance driver is responsible for confirm-
ing the set speed.
switch.
● Even if the system is operating
Use the dynamic radar correctly, the condition of a pre-
cruise control only on high- ceding vehicle as recognized by
the driver and detected by the
ways and expressways. system may differ. Therefore, it
5
is necessary for the driver to
WARNING pay attention, assess risks, and

Driving
ensure safety. Over-reliance on
■ For safe use this system to drive the vehicle
● Driving safely is solely the safely may lead to an accident
responsibility of the driver. Do resulting in death or serious
not overly rely on this system, injury.
and pay careful attention to the
surrounding conditions in order ■ Precautions for the driving
to ensure safe driving. assist systems
Observe the following precau-
tions, as there are limitations to
the assistance provided by the
system. Over-reliance on this sys-
tem may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 242 5-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING ■ Situations in which the

dynamic radar cruise control
● Details of support provided for should not be used
the driver’s vision
The dynamic radar cruise con- Do not use the dynamic radar
trol is only intended to help the cruise control in the following situ-
driver in determining the dis- ations. As the system will not be
tance between the driver’s own able to provide appropriate con-
vehicle and a designated pre- trol, using it may lead to an acci-
ceding vehicle. It is not a sys- dent resulting in death or serious
tem which allows for careless or injury.
inattentive driving, and is not a ● Roads where there are pedes-
system which assists in poor trians, cyclists, etc.
visibility conditions. The driver
must pay attention to their sur- ● When driving on a highway or
roundings, even when the vehi- expressway entrance or exit
cle stops.
● When the approach warning
● Details of support provided for sounds frequently
the driver’s judgement
The dynamic radar cruise con- ● Situations in which the sensors
trol determines whether the dis- may not operate properly:
tance between the driver’s own P.200
vehicle and a designated pre-
ceding vehicle is within a set ● When it is necessary to disable
range. It is not capable of mak- the system: P.195
ing any other type of judgement.
Therefore, it is absolutely nec-
essary for the driver to remain
vigilant and to determine
whether or not there is a possi-
bility of danger.
● Details of support provided for
the driver’s operation
The dynamic radar cruise con-
trol does not include functions
which will prevent or avoid colli-
sions with vehicles ahead of
your vehicle. Therefore, if there
is ever any possibility of danger,
the driver must take immediate
and direct control of the vehicle
and act appropriately in order to
ensure safety.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 243

Basic functions

Constant speed cruising:

When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle drives at the speed set by the driver.
If the set vehicle speed is exceeded while driving down a hill, the set vehicle 5
speed display will blink and a buzzer will sound.

Driving
Deceleration and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set vehicle
speed is detected
When a vehicle is detected driving ahead of your vehicle, the vehicle auto-
matically decelerates and if a greater reduction in vehicle speed is neces-
sary, the brakes are applied (the stop lights will come on at this time). The
vehicle is controlled to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the
driver, in accordance with changes in the speed of the preceding vehicle. If
vehicle deceleration is not sufficient and the vehicle approaches the vehicle
ahead, the approach warning will sound.
Acceleration
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower
than the set vehicle speed
The vehicle accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached and then
resumes constant speed cruising.
Starting off:
If a preceding vehicle stops, the vehicle will also stop (controlled
stop). After the preceding vehicle starts off, pressing the “RES”
switch or depressing the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up
cruising (start off operation). If a start off operation is not per-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 244 5-5. Using the driving support systems

formed, the controlled stop will continue.

While driving on a highway or expressway, if a preceding vehicle
stops, your vehicle will stop accordingly. On some highways and
expressways, if the system determines that the preceding vehicle
starts off within approximately 3 minutes of stopping, a buzzer will
sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information
display to notify the driver, and your vehicle will start off accord-
ingly following the preceding vehicle. (Extended resume time)

System components Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

switch
■ Meter display
Cancel switch
“-” switch

Using the dynamic radar

cruise control
■ Setting the vehicle speed
1 Press the driving assist mode
select switch to select Adap-
Multi-information display tive Cruise Mode.
Set vehicle speed The dynamic radar cruise control
indicator will illuminate.
Indicators
■ Switches

2 Using the accelerator pedal,

accelerate or decelerate to
the desired vehicle speed
Driving assist switch
(approximately 20 mph [30
“+” switch/“RES” switch km/h] or more), and press the
Driving assist mode select driving assist switch to set
the set vehicle speed.
switch

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 245
The set vehicle speed will be dis-  For U.S.A.
played on the multi-information dis-
play. Short press adjustment: Increases
The vehicle speed at the moment or decreases by 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
the switch is released will be the set each time the switch is pressed
vehicle speed. Long press adjustment: Increases
or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
increments continuously while the
switch is pressed and held
 Except for U.S.A.
Short press adjustment: By 1 km/h
(0.6 mph) or 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each
time the switch is pressed
Long press adjustment: Increases
■ Adjusting the set vehicle or decreases in 5 km/h (3.1 mph) or
5 mph (8 km/h) increments continu-
speed
ously while the switch is pressed
 Adjusting the set vehicle and held
speed using the switches  Increasing the set vehicle
To change the set vehicle speed using the accelerator 5
speed, press the “+” switch or “-” pedal
1 Depress the accelerator

Driving
switch until the desired speed is
displayed. pedal to accelerate the vehi-
cle to the desired vehicle
speed.
2 Press the “+” switch.
■ Canceling/resuming control
1 Press the cancel switch or
driving assist switch to cancel
control.
Control will also be canceled if the
1 Increase set vehicle speed brake pedal is depressed.
2 Decrease set vehicle speed (If the vehicle has been stopped by
system control, depressing the
Short press adjustment: Press the
switch
Long press adjustment: Press and
hold the switch until the desired set
vehicle speed is reached.
The set vehicle speed will
increase or decrease as follows:

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 246 5-5. Using the driving support systems

brake pedal will not cancel control.) Vehicle- Approximate

Illustra-
to-vehi- Distance (Vehi-
tion
cle dis- cle Speed: 60
Number
tance mph [100 km/h])
Approximately
3 Medium
100 ft. (30 m)
Approximately
4 Short
85 ft. (25 m)

The actual vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

2 Press the “RES” switch to tance varies in accordance with the
resume control. vehicle speed. Also, when the vehi-
■ Changing the vehicle-to- cle is stopped by system control, it
will be stopped at a certain distance
vehicle distance
from the preceding vehicle,
Each time the switch is pressed, depending on the situation, regard-
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance less of the setting.
setting will change as follows:
■ Operating conditions
If a preceding vehicle is detected,
● D shift position is selected.
the preceding vehicle mark will
● The desired set speed can be set
be displayed. when the vehicle speed is approx-
imately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.
• If the vehicle speed is set while
driving at below approximately 20
mph (30 km/h), the set vehicle
speed will be approximately 20
mph (30 km/h).
• If the vehicle speed is set while
driving at a speed that exceeds
the system’s upper limit, the set
vehicle speed will be the system’s
upper limit.
■ Accelerating after setting the
Vehicle- Approximate vehicle speed
Illustra-
to-vehi- Distance (Vehi- As with normal driving, acceleration
tion
cle dis- cle Speed: 60 can be performed by depressing the
Number accelerator pedal. After accelerat-
tance mph [100 km/h])
ing, the vehicle will return to the set
Extra Approximately vehicle speed. However, while in
1
long 200 ft. (60 m) vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the vehicle speed may
Approximately decrease to below the set vehicle
2 Long
145 ft. (45 m) speed in order to maintain the dis-
tance from the preceding vehicle.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 247
■ When the vehicle is stopped by ■ Preceding vehicles that the sen-
system control during follow-up sor may not detect correctly
cruising In the following situations, depend-
● When the “RES” switch is pressed ing on the conditions, if the system
while the vehicle is stopped by cannot provide sufficient decelera-
system control, if the preceding tion or acceleration is necessary,
vehicle starts off within approxi- operate the brake pedal or accelera-
mately 3 seconds, follow-up cruis- tor pedal.
ing will resume. As the sensor may not be able to
● If the preceding vehicle starts off correctly detect these types of vehi-
within approximately 3 seconds of cles, the approach warning
the vehicle being stopped by sys- (P.248) may not operate.
tem control, follow-up cruising will ● When a vehicle cuts in front of
resume. your vehicle or changes lanes
■ Automatic cancellation of vehi- away from your vehicle extremely
cle-to-vehicle distance control slowly or quickly
mode ● When changing lanes
In the following situations, vehicle- ● When a preceding vehicle is driv-
to-vehicle distance control mode will ing at a low speed
be canceled automatically:
● When a vehicle is stopped in the
● When the brake control or output same lane as the vehicle
restriction control of a driving sup-
port system operates ● When a motorcycle is traveling in 5
(For example: Pre-Collision Sys- the same lane as the vehicle
tem, drive-start control) ■ Conditions under which the

Driving
● When the shift position is in Br system may not operate cor-
mode rectly
● When the parking brake has been In the following situations, operate
operated the brake pedal (or accelerator
pedal, depending on the situation)
● When the vehicle is stopped by as necessary.
system control on a steep incline
As the sensor may not be able to
● When any of the following are correctly detect a vehicle, the sys-
detected while the vehicle is tem may not operate properly.
stopped by system control:
• The driver’s seat belt is unfas- ● When a preceding vehicle brakes
tened suddenly
• The driver’s door is opened ● When changing lanes at low
• Approximately 3 minutes have speeds, such as in a traffic jam
elapsed since the vehicle was
stopped ■ Conditions for extended
resume time
The parking brake may be actived
automatically. Extended resume time is activated
when all of the following conditions
● Situations in which some or all of are satisfied:
the functions of the system cannot
operate: P.201 ● The connected service that Toyota
provides is subscribed to. Contact
■ Dynamic radar cruise control your Toyota dealer for details.
system warning messages and
buzzers ● The vehicle is driving on a vehicle-
only road, such as an expressway.
For safe use: P.195

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 248 5-5. Using the driving support systems

● There is a preceding vehicle and speed has been set

the system is able to detect it.
 When the accelerator pedal is
● No vehicle interruptions occur.
depressed
● The preceding vehicle has not
been replaced.
● Clearance sonar and FCTA are Curve speed reduction
not detecting the object in front of function
you.
● The driver monitor judges that the When a curve is detected, the
driver is looking forward.
vehicle speed will begin being
● The steering wheel has not been
operated. reduced. When the curve ends,
● The brake pedal has not been
the vehicle speed reduction will
operated. end.
Depending on the situation, the
Approach warning vehicle speed will then return to the
set vehicle speed.
In situations where the vehicle
In situations where vehicle-to-vehi-
approaches a preceding vehicle cle distance control needs to oper-
and the system cannot provide ate, such as when a preceding
sufficient deceleration, such as vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle,
if a vehicle cuts in front of the the curve speed reduction function
vehicle, a warning display will will be canceled.
flash and a buzzer will sound to
alert the driver. Depress the
brake pedal to ensure appropri-
ate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur
when
In the following situations, the
warning may not operate even
though the vehicle-to-vehicle
■ Situations in which the curve
distance is short. speed reduction function may
 When the preceding vehicle is not operate
traveling at the same speed In situations such as the following,
the curve speed reduction function
or faster than your vehicle may not operate:
 When the preceding vehicle is ● When the vehicle is being driven
traveling at an extremely low around a gentle curve
speed ● When the accelerator pedal is
being depressed
 Immediately after the vehicle ● When the vehicle is being driven

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 249
around an extremely short curve If your vehicle is being driven at
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) or
Driver Monitor support more and the lane is changed to
that with a vehicle traveling slower
function
than your vehicle, when the turn
While a warning of the driver signal lever is operated the vehicle
will gradually decelerate to assist in
monitor is being displayed, the
changing lanes.
vehicle acceleration will be
restrained.
Changing Dynamic radar
When the warning of the driver
cruise control settings
monitor disappears, the
restrained acceleration control The settings of Dynamic radar
will end. cruise control can be changed
through customize settings.
Support for lane change (P.484)

If your vehicle is being driven at

approximately 50 mph (80 km/h)
or more and a lane change to 5
the passing lane is performed,
when the turn signal lever is

Driving
operated and the lane is
changed, the vehicle will accel-
erate up to the set speed to
assist in overtaking.
The system’s recognition of which
lane is the passing lane may be
based solely on the location of the
steering wheel in the vehicle (left-
hand drive/right-hand drive). If the
vehicle is driven in a location where
the passing lane is on the opposite
side of that where the vehicle was
originally sold, the vehicle may
accelerate when the turn signal
lever is operated away from the
passing lane. (e.g. The vehicle was
manufactured for a right-hand traf-
fic location, but is being driven in a
left-hand traffic location. The vehi-
cle may accelerate when the turn
signal lever is operated to the right.)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 250 5-5. Using the driving support systems

Display and system operation state

The operating state of Dynamic radar cruise control is indicated.
Indicator Multi-information display Situation

Dynamic
Vehicle-to-vehicle
radar cruise
distance setting:
control being
White Gray
OFF

Vehicle-to-vehicle
distance setting: Constant
Blue speed cruis-
Green Set vehicle speed: ing
Green

Vehicle-to-vehicle
distance setting:
Blue
Follow-up
Set vehicle speed:
cruising
Green Green
Preceding vehicle:
White

Vehicle-to-vehicle
distance setting:
Orange flashing
Approach
Set vehicle speed:
warning
Green Green
Preceding vehicle:
Orange flashing

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 251

Indicator Multi-information display Situation

Vehicle-to-vehicle
distance setting:
Gray Accelerating
with the
Set vehicle speed:
accelerator
Green White
pedal
Preceding vehicle:
Gray

Set vehicle speed: Set vehicle

Green in reverse speed being
Green display exceeded

Vehicle-to-vehicle
distance setting:
Gray Vehicle in
Set vehicle speed: controlled
White stop 5
Green
Preceding vehicle:

Driving
Gray

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 252 5-5. Using the driving support systems

Cruise control ● On steep downhills, or where

there are sudden changes
between sharp up and down
The vehicle can be driven at gradients
a set speed even if the Vehicle speed may exceed the
set speed when driving down a
accelerator pedal is not steep hill.
depressed.
● When it is necessary to disable
Use the cruise control only the system: P.195
on highways and express-
ways. System components
WARNING ■ Meter display
■ For safe use
● Driving safely is solely the
responsibility of the driver.
Therefore, do not overly rely on
this system. The driver is solely
responsible for paying attention
to the vehicle’s surroundings
and driving safely.
● Set the speed appropriately
according to the speed limit,
traffic flow, road conditions,
weather conditions, etc. The Set vehicle speed
driver is responsible for confirm-
ing the set speed. Cruise control indicator
■ Situations in which cruise ■ Switches
control should not be used
Do not use the cruise control in
the following situations. As the
system will not be able to provide
appropriate control, using it may
lead to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as Driving assist switch
those covered with rain, ice or
snow “+” switch/“RES” switch
Driving assist mode select
switch
Cancel switch

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 253

“-” switch ■ Adjusting the set vehicle

speed
Using the cruise control  Adjusting the set vehicle
speed using the switches
■ Setting the vehicle speed
To change the set vehicle
1 Press the driving assist mode speed, press the “+” or “-” switch
select switch to select cruise until the desired speed is dis-
control. played.
The cruise control indicator will illu-
minate.

1 Increase set vehicle speed

5
2 Using the accelerator pedal, 2 Decrease set vehicle speed
accelerate to the desired The set vehicle speed will

Driving
vehicle speed (approxi- increase or decrease as follows:
mately 20 mph [30 km/h] or Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6
more), and press the driving km/h) or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each
assist switch to set the set time the switch is pressed
vehicle speed. Large adjustment: Increases con-
The vehicle speed at the moment tinuously while the switch is
the switch is released will be the set pressed and held
vehicle speed.
 Increasing the set vehicle
speed using the accelerator
pedal
1 Depress the accelerator
pedal to accelerate the vehi-
cle to the desired vehicle
speed.
2 Press the “+” switch.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 254 5-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Canceling/resuming control
1 Press the cancel switch or
driving assist switch to cancel
control.
Control will also be canceled if the
brake pedal is depressed.

2 Press the “RES” switch to

resume control.

■ Automatic cancellation of the

cruise control
In the following situations, the cruise
control will be canceled automati-
cally:
● When the vehicle speed drops
approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
or more below the set vehicle
speed
● When the vehicle speed drops
below approximately 20 mph (30
km/h)
● When the brake control or output
restriction control of a driving sup-
port system operates (For exam-
ple: PCS, drive-start control)
● When the shift position is in Br
mode
● When the parking brake has been
operated
● Situations in which some or all of
the functions of the system cannot
operate: P.201

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 255

Display and system operation state

The operating state of cruise control is indicated.
Indicator Multi-information display Situation

Cruise con-
Blank trol being
White OFF

Constant
Set vehicle speed:
speed cruis-
Green
Green ing

Set vehicle speed: Set vehicle

Green in reverse speed being 5
Green display exceeded

Driving

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 256 5-5. Using the driving support systems

Emergency Driving WARNING

Stop System ■ For safe use
● Driving safely is solely the
The emergency driving stop responsibility of the driver. Pay
careful attention to the sur-
system is a system which rounding conditions in order to
automatically decelerates ensure safe driving. The emer-
and stops the vehicle within gency driving stop system is
designed to provide support in
its lane if the driver an emergency where it is diffi-
becomes unable to con- cult for the driver to continue
tinue driving the vehicle, driving, such as if they have had
a medical emergency. It is not
such as if they have suf- designed to support driving
fered a medical emergency, while drowsy or in poor physical
etc. health, or inattentive driving.
● Although the emergency driv-
During LTA (Lane Tracing ing stop system is designed to
Assist) control, if the sys- decelerate the vehicle within its
tem does not detect driving lane to help avoid or help
reduce the impact of a collision
operations, such as if the if the system determines that it
driver is not holding the is difficult for the driver to con-
steering wheel, and deter- tinue driving, its effectiveness
may change according to vari-
mines the driver is not ous conditions. Therefore, it
responsive, the vehicle will may not always be able to
be decelerated and stopped achieve the same level of per-
formance. Also, if the operating
within its current lane to conditions are not met, this
help avoid a collision or function will not operate.
reduce the impact of a colli- ● After the emergency driving
sion. stop system operates, if driving
becomes possible again, imme-
The vehicle will also decel- diately begin driving again or, if
erate/stop during the Traf- necessary, park the vehicle on
the shoulder of the road and set
fic Jam Assist controls, a warning reflector and flare to
when no driver’s response warn other drivers of your
to the vehicle’s warning to stopped vehicle.
hold the steering wheel is ● After this system operates, pas-
detected. sengers should attend to the
driver as necessary and take
appropriate hazard prevention
measures, such as moving to a
place where safety can be
ensured, such as the shoulder
of the road or behind a guard-
rail.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 257
approximately 30 mph (50 km/h)
WARNING or more
● This system detects the condi- During the Traffic Jam Assist con-
tion of the driver through the trols, the system may operate at
operation of the steering wheel.
This system may operate if the below 30 mph (50 km/h).
driver is aware but intentionally ■ Operation cancelation condi-
and continuously does not oper- tions
ate the vehicle. Also, the system
may not operate if it cannot In the following situations, system
determine that the driver is not operation will be canceled:
responsive, such as if they are ● When LTA control has been can-
leaning on the steering wheel. celed (the LTA switch has been
pressed, etc.)
● Situations in which the driver
monitor may not operate prop- ● When the dynamic radar cruise
erly control has been canceled
P.202 ● When driver operations are
detected (the steering wheel is
held, the brake pedal, accelerator
Summary of the system pedal, parking brake, hazard light
switch, or turn signal lever is oper-
Operation of this system is sep- ated)
arated into 4 control states. ● When the driving assist switch is
pressed while in the stop and hold 5
Through control state “warning phase
phase 1” and “warning phase 2”, ● When the power switch has been

Driving
the system determines if the turned from ON to OFF
driver is aware and responsive ● Situations in which some or all of
while outputting a warning and the functions of the system cannot
operate: P.201
controlling the vehicle speed. If
the system determines the ■ LTA control when operation is
canceled
driver is not responsive, it will
When emergency driving stop sys-
operate in control state “deceler- tem operation is canceled, LTA con-
ation stop phase” and “stop hold trol may also be canceled.
phase” and decelerate and stop
the vehicle. It will then operate Warning phase 1
continuously in “stop hold
phase”. If driving operations are not
detected after the hands off
■ Operating conditions steering wheel warning oper-
This system operates when all of ates, a buzzer will sound inter-
the following conditions are met: mittently and a message will be
● When the LTA is on displayed to warn the driver, and
Or during the Traffic Jam Assist con- the system will judge if the driver
trols is responsive or not. If driving
● When the vehicle speed is operations, such as holding the

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 258 5-5. Using the driving support systems

steering wheel, are not per- Stop hold phase

formed within a certain amount
of time, the system will enter After the vehicle is stopped, the
warning phase 2. parking brake will be applied
Depending on the type of detec- automatically. After entering the
tion of the driver’s unrespon- stop and hold phase, the buzzer
siveness, the system may skip will continue sounding continu-
warning phase 1 and start the ously and the emergency flash-
control of warning phase 2. ers (hazard lights) will flash to
warn other drivers of the emer-
gency.
Warning phase 2
After entering warning phase 2, ■ Restricted functions after the
operation is canceled
a buzzer will sound in short
After shifting to the deceleration
intervals and a message will be stop phase, the following functions
displayed to warn the driver, and will not be available until the fuel cell
the vehicle will slowly deceler- system is re-started even though the
emergency driving stop system is
ate. If driving operations, such canceled:
as holding the steering wheel, ● LTA
are not performed within a cer- ● LCA
tain amount of time, the system ● Traffic Jam Assist
will determine that the driver is
not responsive and enter the
deceleration stop phase.
When the vehicle is decelerating,
the brake lights may illuminate,
depending on the road conditions,
etc.

Deceleration stop phase

After entering the deceleration
stop phase, a buzzer will sound
continuously and a message will
be displayed to warn the driver,
and the vehicle will slowly decel-
erate and stop. After the vehicle
stops, the system will enter the
stop and hold phase.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 259

Traffic Jam Assist Extended resume time of

Dynamic radar cruise
Function Outline control
Traffic Jam Assist is a system P.247
which, through confirmation of
the conditions by the driver, pro- Traffic Jam Assist Func-
vides lane keeping, accelerat- tion
ing/decelerating, stopping, and
starting off support on some The Traffic Jam Assist function,
highways and expressways. through confirmation of the con-
Also, in an emergency, the sys- ditions by the driver, provides
tem can decelerate and stop, to lane keeping, accelerat-
help avoid a collision or help ing/decelerating and stopping
reduce the impact of a collision. support on some highways and
expressways.
Sensors that support the This function is operable when
Traffic Jam Assist all of the operation conditions
5
are met.
 Sensors which detect the sur-
When this function is operating,

Driving
rounding conditions (P.197)
it is possible to take your hands
 Sensors which detect the off of the steering wheel.
driver condition (P.197) (P.262)
Before using the Traffic Jam Assist
■ Situations in which some or all
of the functions of the system function, familiarize yourself with
cannot operate the content of the dynamic radar
P.197 cruise control and the LTA (Lane
Tracing Assist).
■ Changes in brake operation
sound and pedal response Make sure that the driver steers the
P.202 vehicle when entering a service
area/parking area or toll gate, or
■ Situations in which the driver
monitor may not operate prop- when changing lanes.
erly
P.202 Driver monitor camera
recording
Emergency Driving Stop
System When the operation of Traffic
Jam Assist is started, the follow-
P.256 ing message will be displayed:

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 260 5-5. Using the driving support systems

 “Allow Driver Monitor Camera ● As the recognition performance

Recording?” and control performance of the
Traffic Jam Assist function are
When recording is approved, the limited, driver operation is nec-
system records images of the area essary to ensure safety while
around the driver in certain crash or the system is operating. Also,
near crash-like situations, such as the steering assist of this sys-
tem is designed to operate only
an SRS airbag being deployed or for slow steering operations
the vehicle hitting an object on the during a traffic jam. While this
road. (P.7) function is operating, the lane
deviation control function of the
WARNING LDA will not operate. If, for
some reason, the vehicle is
■ For safe use about to deviate the lane, it is
● Driving safely is solely the the driver’s responsibility to
responsibility of the driver. Do drive properly.
not overly rely on this system,
and pay careful attention to the ● Even if Traffic Jam Assist is
surrounding conditions in order operating properly, the sur-
to ensure safe driving. rounding conditions as recog-
nized by the driver and detected
● The Traffic Jam Assist function by the system may differ. There-
is not an automated driving sys- fore, it is necessary for the
tem. driver to pay attention, assess
This function provides the driver risks, and ensure safety. Over-
with information and driving reliance on this system to drive
assistance according to the the vehicle safely may lead to
road shape and conditions, traf- an accident resulting in death or
fic conditions, and the condition serious injury.
of the driver themself. Always
pay careful attention to the sur- ● While the Traffic Jam Assist
rounding conditions as use of function is operating, as driver
the system is the responsibility operation may become neces-
of the driver. sary, the driver must ensure
they have clear visibility of their
● Depending on the condition of surroundings.
the surrounding area, the road,
or the driver, the Traffic Jam ● In certain situations, a message
Assist function may not operate urging the driver to hold the
or operation may be sus- steering wheel may be dis-
pended. Also, it may not always played by the Traffic Jam Assist
be able to achieve the same function. In this case, hold the
level of performance. Read the steering wheel and drive the
operating conditions of the func- vehicle manually to ensure
tion carefully. Do not overly rely safety.
on this function and always
drive carefully.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 261

WARNING ■ Situations in which the func-

tion may not operate properly
● The Traffic Jam Assist function
cannot detect the following In situations such as the following,
objects. Operate the steering the Traffic Jam Assist function
wheel, accelerator pedal, or may not operate properly. Manu-
brake pedal as necessary to ally operate the vehicle as neces-
avoid a collision. As the function sary.
will not be able to provide ● When a sensor is splashed by
appropriate control, using it may water
lead to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury. ● When the ambient temperature
is high or low
• Objects on the road surface
● When a vehicle cuts in front of
• Vehicles outside of a lane (such your vehicle
as on the shoulder of the road)
● When another lane merges into
• Potholes, cracks, ruts, or other the lane in the same traveling
road damage direction as your vehicle
• Road construction zones ● When driving in low visibility
• Vehicles running in parallel with condition
your vehicle or nearby walls ● When the vehicle posture is
changing 5
• Animals
■ Situations in which Traffic ● When the traction on the road
surface differs greatly between

Driving
Jam Assist Function should
not be used the left and right side tires
Do not use Traffic Jam Assist ● When driving on an expressway
Function in situations such as the with no median strips or when
following. As the system will not driving on an expressway
be able to provide appropriate equipped with temporary
control, using it may lead to an median markers, such as poles.
accident resulting in death or seri-
ous injury. ● When there is a significant dif-
ference in speed between your
● When it is necessary to disable vehicle and the other vehicle
the system
● The map data has not been
P.195 updated properly.
● Situations in which the sensors ■ To prevent malfunction of the
may not operate properly radar sensors
P.200 P.197
● Situations in which the lane may ■ To prevent malfunction of the
not be detected front camera
P.201 P.198

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 262 5-5. Using the driving support systems

radar cruise control (re-start time

WARNING extension) is not set to off.
■ Front camera installation area ■ Temporary cancelation of the
on the windshield function
P.199 ● When the operating conditions are
no longer met, a function may be
temporarily canceled. However,
■ Operating conditions of the when the operation conditions are
function met again, operation of the func-
This function is operable when all of tion will automatically be restored.
the following conditions are met: ● If the operating conditions of a
● The system detects lane lines and function are no longer met while
the path of preceding or surround- the function is operating, a buzzer
ing vehicles. may sound with a display to indi-
cate that the function has been
● The dynamic radar cruise control temporarily canceled. If no driver’s
and the lane tracing assist are responses to the indication are
operating. detected, the driver emergency
● The turn signal lever is not being stop assist function may operate.
operated. For types of display and action to
be taken, see the page mentioned
● The vehicle is not being driven below. (P.263)
around a sharp curve.
● The vehicle is being driven in the ■ Driving operations during con-
center of a lane. trolled driving:
● The driver monitor camera is ● Accelerator pedal
detecting that the driver is facing As with normal driving, acceleration
front of the vehicle. can be performed by depressing the
● The vehicle is driving in traffic jam accelerator pedal. When the accel-
on a highway or expressway at erator pedal is depressed at approx-
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) imately 10 km/h (6 mph) or more,
or less. (In some situations, such
as when a traffic jam starts, this this function will be canceled.
function may be operational at ● Brake pedal
approximately 20 mph [30 km/h]
or less.) As with normal driving, deceleration
can be performed by depressing the
● Safety Connect is being sub-
scribed to. brake pedal. However, controlled
driving will be cancelled.
● The driver’s door is closed.
● The driver’s seat belt is fastened. ● Steering wheel
● Customized setting of the Traffic As with normal driving, the steering
Jam Assist is not set to off. wheel can be operated. If the steer-
● Functions and components com- ing wheel is operated more than a
posing the system are in proper certain amount, controlled driving
condition. will be cancelled.
● Customized setting of the PCS ■ When a warning message is
(Pre-Collision System) is not set displayed
to off.
● “Traffic Jam Asst System Malfunc-
● Customized setting of the dynamic tion Visit Your Dealer”

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 263
The Traffic Jam Assist function may
Changing Traffic Jam
not be operating properly.
Assist settings
● “Traffic Jam Asst Unavailable Stop
Assist Activated”  The setting of Traffic Jam
The system temporarily cannot be Assist can be enabled/dis-
used as the driver emergency stop
abled through a customize
assist function has operated.
setting. (P.484)
 The setting of driver monitor
camera recording can be
enabled/disabled through a
customize setting. (P.484)

Displays and system operation

The following displays indicate the operating status of the Traffic
Jam Assist function:
Display Status Action to be taken
5
Traffic Jam Assist function

is operating

Driving
Traffic Jam Assist function
Hold the steering wheel.
is about to end
Gray

Traffic Jam Assist function

Hold the steering wheel.
has ended
Orange
Operation of either or both
Manually operate the
of dynamic radar cruise
steering wheel immedi-
control /LTA (Lane Tracing
Red ately.
Assist) ended

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 264 5-5. Using the driving support systems

Display Status Action to be taken

The driver must operate
Indicates that driving
the steering wheel, accel-
actions are necessary to
erator pedal and brake
cope with cut-in or other
pedal in accordance with
behavior of surrounding
Yellow the surrounding environ-
vehicles
ment.
Indicates that the recording
function of the driver moni-
tor camera is operational
(Blinking of this icon indi-

cates that recording is
undergoing, and constant
illumination indicates ready
for recording.)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 265

BSM (Blind Spot Moni- System components

tor)

The Blind Spot Monitor is a

system that uses rear side
radar sensors installed on
the inner side of the rear
bumper on the left and right
side to assist the driver in
confirming safety when
changing lanes. Meter control switches
Turning the Blind Spot Monitor
WARNING
on/off.
■ Cautions regarding the use of
the system Outside rear view mirror indi-
● The driver is solely responsible cators
for safe driving. Always drive When a vehicle is detected in a
safely, taking care to observe blind spot of the outside rear view
your surroundings. 5
mirrors or approaching rapidly from
● The Blind Spot Monitor is a sup- behind into a blind spot, the outside
plementary function which alerts rear view mirror indicator (P.94)

Driving
the driver that a vehicle is in a on the detected side will illuminate.
blind spot of the outside rear
view mirrors or is approaching If the turn signal lever is operated
rapidly from behind into a blind toward the detected side, the out-
spot. Do not overly rely on the side rear view mirror indicator will
Blind Spot Monitor. As the func- flash and a buzzer will sound.
tion cannot judge if it is safe to
change lanes, over reliance Driving assist information
could lead to an accident result- indicator
ing in death or serious injury.
As the system may not function Illuminates when the Blind Spot
correctly under certain condi- Monitor is turned off. At this time, a
tions, the driver’s own visual message will be displayed on the
confirmation of safety is neces-
sary. multi-information display.

■ Outside rear view mirror indica-

tor visibility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear
view mirror indicator may be difficult
to see.
■ Buzzer
If the volume setting of the audio
system is high or the surrounding
area is loud, it may be difficult to

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 266 5-5. Using the driving support systems

hear the buzzer. ● Do not attach accessories,

■ Customization stickers (including transparent
stickers), aluminum tape, etc.,
Some functions can be customized.
to a sensor or its surrounding
(P.492) area on the rear bumper.
■ Certification
● Do not paint the surrounding
P.537 area of a sensor on the rear
bumper.
WARNING
● Do not subject a sensor or its
■ To ensure the system can surrounding area on the rear
operate properly bumper to a strong impact.
Blind Spot Monitor sensors are If a sensor is moved even
installed behind the left and right slightly off position, the system
sides of the rear bumper respec- may malfunction and vehicles
tively. Observe the following to may not be detected correctly.
ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can In the following situations, have
operate correctly. your vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
● Keep the sensors and the sur-
rounding areas on the rear • A sensor or its surrounding area
bumper clean at all times. is subject to a strong impact.
If a sensor or its surrounding area • If the surrounding area of a sen-
on the rear bumper is dirty or cov- sor is scratched or dented, or
ered with snow, the Blind Spot part of them has become dis-
connected.
Monitor may not operate and a
warning message will be dis- ● Do not disassemble the sensor.
played. In this situation, clear off
● Do not modify the sensor or sur-
the dirt or snow and drive the rounding area on the rear
vehicle with the operation condi- bumper.
tions of the BSM function
(P.268) satisfied for approxi- ● If a sensor or the rear bumper
needs to be removed/installed
mately 10 minutes. If the warning or replaced, contact your Toyota
message does not disappear, dealer.
have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer. ● The sensors are likely to be
affected by paint on the rear
bumper. If the rear bumper is
not repaired correctly, the Blind
Spot Monitor may not operate
with a warning message dis-
played. If any paint repair is
needed, contact your Toyota
dealer.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 267

Turning the Blind Spot off, the driving assist information

indicator (P.94) will illuminate
Monitor on/off
and a message will be displayed
The Blind Spot Monitor can be on the multi-information display.
enabled/disabled through a cus- Each time the power switch is
tomize setting. (P.492) turned to ON, the Blind Spot
When the Blind Spot Monitor is Monitor is enabled.

Blind Spot Monitor operation

■ Objects that can be detected while driving
The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the fol-
lowing vehicles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of
the presence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear
view mirrors.

Driving
Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the
outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that
are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 268 5-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Detection range while driving

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of each detection area is:

Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of
the vehicle*1
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper*2
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 230 ft. (70 m) from the rear
bumper*3
*1
: The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side
of the vehicle cannot be detected.
*2: While the vehicle is to being overtaken, up to approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m)
forward of the rear bumper will be detected.
*3
: The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the
detected vehicle is, the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing
the outside rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash.
■ The Blind Spot Monitor linked function
The LDA (Lane Departure Alert) has a function that uses information
of detected vehicles driving in an adjacent lane. For details about the
function and its operating conditions, P.224.
other than R.
■ The Blind Spot Monitor is oper-
ational when ● The vehicle speed is approxi-
mately 7 mph (10km/h) or more.
The Blind Spot Monitor is opera-
tional when all of the following con- ■ The Blind Spot Monitor will
ditions are met: detect a vehicle when
● The power switch is in ON. The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a
vehicle present in the detection area
● The Blind Spot Monitor is on. in the following situations:
● The shift position is in a position ● A vehicle in an adjacent lane over-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 269
takes your vehicle. ■ Conditions under which the
● You overtake a vehicle in an adja- system may not function cor-
cent lane slowly. rectly
● Another vehicle enters the detec- ● The Blind Spot Monitor may not
tion area when it changes lanes. detect vehicles correctly in the fol-
lowing situations:
■ Situations in which the Blind • When the sensor is misaligned
Spot Monitor cannot detect due to a strong impact to the sen-
vehicles. sor or its surrounding area
The Blind Spot Monitor cannot • When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,
detect the following vehicles and etc., is covering the sensor or sur-
other objects: rounding area on the rear bumper
• When driving on a wet road sur-
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, face, such as in a puddle, while in
pedestrians, etc.* inclement weather, such as heavy
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite rain, snow, fog, etc.
direction • When multiple vehicles are
approaching with only a small gap
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked between each vehicle
vehicles and similar stationary • When the distance between your
objects* vehicle and a following vehicle is
● Following vehicles that are in the short
• When there is a significant differ-
same lane* ence in speed between your vehi-
● Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away cle and the vehicle that enters the 5
from your vehicle* detection area
• When the difference in speed
● Vehicles which are being over-

Driving
between your vehicle and another
taken rapidly by your vehicle* vehicle is changing
*: Depending on the conditions, • When a vehicle enters a detection
area traveling at about the same
detection of a vehicle and/or speed as your vehicle
object may occur. • As your vehicle starts from a stop,
a vehicle remains in the detection
■ Conditions in which a buzzer area
may not sound • When driving up and down con-
In situations such as the following, secutive steep inclines, such as
while the turn signal lever is being hills, dips in the road, etc.
operated, the indicator will flash but • When driving on roads with sharp
a buzzer may not sound. bends, consecutive curves, or
• When a second vehicle is uneven surfaces
detected while the turn signal • When vehicle lanes are wide, or
lever is being held when driving on the edge of a
lane, and the vehicle in an adja-
• When overtaking a vehicle in the cent lane is far away from your
adjacent lane at a much higher vehicle
speed than it* • When an accessory (such as a
*
: Depending on the situations, a bicycle carrier) is installed to the
rear of the vehicle
buzzer may sound. • When there is a significant differ-
ence in height between your vehi-
cle and the vehicle that enters the
detection area
• Immediately after the Blind Spot

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 270 5-5. Using the driving support systems

Monitor is turned on
• When towing with the vehicle Safe Exit Assist
● Instances of the Blind Spot Moni-
tor unnecessarily detecting a vehi- The safe exit assist is a sys-
cle and/or object may increase in tem that uses rear side
the following situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned radar sensors installed on
due to a strong impact to the sen- the inner side of the rear
sor or its surrounding area bumper to help occupants
• When the distance between your
vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc., judge if an approaching
that enters the detection area is vehicle or bicycle may col-
short
• When driving up and down con- lide with a door when exit-
secutive steep inclines, such as ing, to help reduce the
hills, dips in the road, etc. possibility of a collision.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or
when driving on the edge of a
lane, and a vehicle traveling in a WARNING
lane other than the adjacent lanes ■ Cautions regarding the use of
enters the detection area the system
• When driving on roads with sharp
bends, consecutive curves, or ● The driver is solely responsible
uneven surfaces for safe driving. Always drive
• When the tires are slipping or safely, taking care to observe
spinning your surroundings.
• When the distance between your
vehicle and a following vehicle is ● The safe exit assist is a supple-
short mentary system that, when the
• When an accessory (such as a vehicle is stopped, informs
bicycle carrier) is installed to the occupants of the existence of
rear of the vehicle approaching vehicles and bicy-
• When towing with the vehicle cles. As this system alone can-
not be used to judge safety,
over-reliance on this system
may lead to an accident result-
ing in death or serious injury.
In certain situations, this system
may not function to its fullest
extent. Therefore it is necessary
for the occupants to visually
check for safety directly and
using the mirrors.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 271
the notification through voice guid-
System components
ance is made, no more voice guid-
ance notifications will be made
again until the door is fully closed.

■ Outside rear view mirror indica-

tor visibility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear
view mirror indicator may be difficult
to see.
■ Buzzer
If the volume setting of the audio
Multi-information display system is high or the surrounding
area is loud, it may be difficult to
Turning the safe exit assist on/off. hear the buzzer.
If collision with a door is likely and
■ Voice notifications
the door is opened, the door will be
displayed on the multi-information In the following situations, voice
notifications will not be output:
display. Also, if a door is opened
when an outside rear view mirror ● When it is estimated that no occu-
indicator is illuminated, a buzzer pants are on board*
will sound as a warning. ● After opening a door and entering 5
the vehicle, until the fuel cell sys-
Outside rear view mirror indi- tem is started

Driving
cators ● When 3 minutes or more have
When a vehicle or bicycle which elapsed since the fuel cell system
was stopped
may collide with a door when
opened is detected, the outside ● When the language setting of the
multimedia display has been set
rear view mirror indicator (P.94) to a language that does not sup-
on the detected side will illuminate. port voice notifications
If the door on the detected side is ● When all of the doors have been
opened, the outside rear view mir- locked from outside the vehicle
ror indicator will blink. ● When a door remains open for 1
Driving assist information minute or more after the fuel cell
system is stopped
indicator ● When the ACC mode (P.489)
Illuminates when the safe exit has been enabled through a cus-
assist is turned off. At this time, a tomize setting on the multimedia
message will be displayed on the display and the fuel cell system
has been stopped
multi-information display.
● When the parking assist volume
Speakers setting on the multimedia display
has been set to off
When the outside rear view mirror *
indicator blinks, the driver is : For each seating position, judg-
informed through voice guidance ment is made based on the open-
that the system has operated. After ing and closing of a door, before

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 272 5-5. Using the driving support systems

driving for ingress and after driv- be enabled/disabled through a

ing for egress. customize setting. (P.492)
■ Customization When the safe exit assist is off,
Some functions can be customized. the driving assist information
(P.492)
indicator will illuminate and a
message will be displayed on
WARNING
the multi-information display.
■ To ensure the system can
operate properly Each time the power switch is
P.266 turned to ON, the safe exit
assist is enabled*.
Turning the safe exit *
: When the power switch is turned
assist system ON/OFF off and then to ON immediately
after that, the safe exit assist may
The safe exit assist system can not be enabled.

Safe Exit Assist operation

■ Objects that can be detected by the safe exit assist
When the safe exit assist detects the following vehicles or bicycles
behind your vehicle using a rear side radar sensor, the occupants of
the vehicle are informed through an outside rear view mirror indica-
tor, buzzer, multi-information display, and voice notification.

Vehicle or bicycle which has a high possibility of colliding with a

door when opened

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 273
■ The safe exit assist detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

Approximately 145 ft. (45 m) rearward from the front door*

*: The faster a vehicle or bicycle is approaching, the distance at which an
outside rear view mirror indicator will illuminate or blink will become fur-
ther.
■ Conditions under which the
■ The safe exit assist is opera- system will not detect a vehicle
tional when
● Safe exit assist does not detect
The safe exit assist is operational the following objects, vehicles, 5
when all of the following conditions and bicycles:
are met: • Vehicles or bicycles which are

Driving
● When the power switch is ON, approaching slowly*
less than 3 minutes have elapsed • Vehicles or bicycles which are
since the fuel cell system was off determined to have a low possibil-
or less than 3 minutes have ity of colliding with a door when
elapsed since a door was opened opened*
and someone has entered the • Vehicles or bicycles which are
vehicle (the time which operation
is possible may be extended if a approaching from directly behind*
door is opened and closed) • Vehicles or bicycles which are
approaching from the front*
● Safe exit assist is on • Guardrails, walls, signs, parked
● The vehicle is stopped. vehicles, and other stationary
● The shift position is in a position objects*
other than R. • Pedestrians, animals, etc.*
■ The safe exit assist will detect a *: Depending on the conditions,
vehicle when detection of a vehicle and/or
The safe exit assist will detect a object may occur.
vehicle present in the detection area
in the following situations: ● In situations such as the following,
When the vehicle is stopped and a safe exit assist will not operate:
vehicle or bicycle, which is traveling • When 3 minutes or more have
parallel to the vehicle, is approach- elapsed since the fuel cell system
ing within the area that a door opens off (the time which operation is
possible may be extended if a
door is opened and closed)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 274 5-5. Using the driving support systems

• When your vehicle is not com- sor or its surrounding area

pletely stopped • When a vehicle or bicycle
approaches your vehicle from
■ Conditions under which the
directly behind in an offset posi-
system may not function cor-
tion
rectly • When the vehicle is stopped at an
● The safe exit assist may not angle to the road
detect vehicles correctly in the fol- • When a vehicle or bicycle
lowing situations: approaches from behind a parked
• When the sensor is misaligned vehicle at an angle
due to a strong impact to the sen- • When a parked vehicle, wall, sign,
sor or its surrounding area person or other stationary object
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, is behind the vehicle
etc., is covering the sensor or sur- • When an approaching vehicle or
rounding area on the rear bumper bicycle suddenly changes direc-
• When the vehicle is stopped on a tion
wet road surface, such as in a • When an approaching vehicle or
puddle, while in inclement bicycle is traveling along a station-
weather, such as heavy rain, ary object, such a wall or sign
snow, fog, etc. • When the trunk is open
• When a vehicle or bicycle • When a bicycle carrier, ramp, or
approaches from behind a nearby other accessory is installed to the
parked vehicle back of the vehicle
• When an approaching vehicle or • When a vehicle or bicycle is
bicycle suddenly changes direc- approaching at high speed
tion • When towing with the vehicle
• Immediately after a vehicle or • When stopped on a steep slope
bicycle starts moving • When stopped on a curve or at the
• When the trunk is open exit of a curve
• When a bicycle carrier, ramp, or • When a vehicle or bicycle
other accessory is installed to the approaches from behind a vehicle
back of the vehicle stopped in an adjacent lane
• When a parked vehicle, wall, sign,
person or other stationary object
is behind the vehicle
• When the vehicle is stopped at an
angle to the road
• When a vehicle is traveling near
an approaching vehicle or bicycle
• When an approaching vehicle or
bicycle is traveling along a station-
ary object, such a wall or sign
• When a vehicle or bicycle is
approaching at high speed
• When towing with the vehicle
• When stopped on a steep slope
• When stopped on a curve or at the
exit of a curve
● Instances of the safe exit assist
unnecessarily detecting a vehicle
and/or object may increase in the
following situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned
due to a strong impact to the sen-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 275

Intuitive parking play or rear camera: When

assist* detecting a stationary object, the
intuitive parking assist detection
*: If equipped indicator illuminates. (P.94)
The intuitive parking assist  Multimedia display
function detects the approx-
imate distance from the
vehicle and an object such
as a wall using ultrasonic
sensors and informs the
driver with the multimedia
display distance display
and buzzer.

Front corner sensor detection

System components
Front center sensor detection
■ Type of sensors
Rear corner sensor detection
5
Rear center sensor detection

Driving
Turning the intuitive park-
ing assist function
ON/OFF
The intuitive parking assist func-
tion can be enabled/disabled
Front corner sensors through a customize setting.
Front center sensors (P.493)

Rear corner sensors When the intuitive parking assist

function is disabled, the intuitive
Rear center sensors parking assist OFF indicator
■ Display (P.94) illuminates on the multi-
information display.
When the sensors detect an
object, such as a wall, a graphic If the system switches to OFF
is shown on the multimedia dis- (disabled) and the intuitive park-
play depending on the position ing assist is stopped, the intui-
and distance to the object. tive parking assist will not be re-
enabled until ON (enabled) is
Vehicles without multimedia dis-
selected again from the custom-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 276 5-5. Using the driving support systems

ize setting (P.493). ● Do not attach a sticker or install

(It remains off even if the power an electronic component, such
as a backlit license plate (espe-
switch is turned to ON again cially fluorescent type), fog
after the power switch has been lights, fender pole or wireless
turned off.) antenna near a radar sensor.

Vehicles without the multimedia ● Do not subject the surrounding

area of the sensor to a strong
display or rear camera: How- impact. If subjected to an
ever, the system will automati- impact, have the vehicle
cally turn on (enabled) and the inspected by your Toyota
dealer. If the front or rear
intuitive parking assist OFF indi- bumper needs to be
cator will turn off if the shift posi- removed/installed or replaced,
contact your Toyota dealer.
tion is changed to R.
When the shift position is R, the ● Do not modify, disassemble or
paint the sensors.
intuitive parking assist cannot
be turned on or off. ● Do not attach a license plate
cover.
The setting of intuitive parking
● Keep your tires properly
assist itself will not change. inflated.
WARNING ● Do not install a suspension
other than a genuine suspen-
■ Cautions regarding the use of sion.
the system
There is a limit to the degree of ■ Notes when washing the vehi-
recognition accuracy and control cle
performance that this system can ● When using a high pressure
provide, do not overly rely on this washer to wash the vehicle, do
system. The driver is always not spray the sensors directly,
responsible for paying attention to as doing so may cause a sensor
the vehicle’s surroundings and to malfunction.
driving safely.
● When using steam to clean the
■ To ensure the system can vehicle, do not direct steam too
operate properly close to the sensors as doing so
Make sure to observe the follow- may cause a sensor to malfunc-
ing precautions. The system may tion.
not operate properly and may
lead to an unexpected accident.
When these precautions cannot ■ The system can be operated
be observed, turn the system off. when
● The power switch is in ON.
● Do not damage the sensors,
and always keep them clean. ● The intuitive parking assist is on.
● The vehicle speed is less than
about 6 mph (10 km/h).
● A shift position other than P is
selected.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 277
Vehicles without the multimedia dis- ● Tall objects with upper sections
play or rear camera: The system will projecting outwards in the direc-
automatically turn on (enabled) and tion of your vehicle
the intuitive parking assist OFF indi- People may not be detected if they
cator will turn off if the shift position are wearing certain types of cloth-
is changed to R. ing.
The setting of intuitive parking assist ■ Situations in which the system
itself will not change. may not operate properly
Certain vehicle conditions and the
■ Sensor detection information surrounding environment may affect
● The sensor’s detection areas are the ability of a sensor to correctly
limited to the areas around the detect objects. Particular instances
vehicle’ s front and rear bumpers. where this may occur are listed
● Certain vehicle conditions and the below.
surrounding environment may ● There is dirt, snow, water drops or
affect the ability of a sensor to cor- ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the
rectly detect an object. sensors will resolve this problem.)
● Objects may not be detected if ● A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the
they are too close to the sensor. area will resolve this problem.)
● There will be a short delay In especially cold weather, if a
between object detection and dis- sensor is frozen the sensor dis-
play. play may be displayed abnormally,
or objects, such as a wall, may not 5
Even at low speeds, there is a
possibility that the object will come be detected.
● When a sensor or the area around

Driving
within the sensor’s detection
areas before the display is shown a sensor is extremely hot or cold.
and the warning beep sounds.
● It might be difficult to hear the
buzzer due to the volume of the
audio system or air flow noise of
the air conditioning system.
● It may be difficult to hear the
sound of this system due to the
buzzers of other systems.
● If the meter malfunctions, the ● On an extremely bumpy road, on
buzzer may not sound. an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
■ Objects which the system may ● When vehicle horns, vehicle
not be properly detected detectors, motorcycle engines, air
The shape of the object may pre- brakes of large vehicles, the clear-
vent the sensor from detecting it. ance sonar of other vehicles or
Pay particular attention to the follow- other devices which produce ultra-
ing objects: sonic waves are near the vehicle
● Wires, fences, ropes, etc. ● A sensor is coated with a sheet of
spray or heavy rain.
● Cotton, snow and other materials
that absorb sound waves ● If objects draw too close to the
sensor.
● Sharply-angled objects
● When a pedestrian is wearing
● Low objects
clothing that does not reflect ultra-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 278 5-5. Using the driving support systems

sonic waves (ex. skirts with gath-

ers or frills).
● When objects that are not perpen-
dicular to the ground, not perpen-
dicular to the vehicle traveling
direction, uneven, or waving are in
the detection range.
● When strong winds are blowing
● When driving in inclement weather ● When driving toward a banner,
such as fog, snow or a sandstorm flag, low-hanging branch or boom
● When an object that cannot be barrier (such as those used at rail-
detected is between the vehicle road crossings, toll gates and
and a detected object parking lots)
● If an object such as a vehicle, ● When there is a rut or hole in the
motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian surface of the road
cuts in front of the vehicle or runs ● When driving on a metal cover
out from the side of the vehicle (grating), such as those used for
● If the orientation of a sensor has drainage ditches
been changed due to a collision or ● When driving up or down a steep
other impact slope
● When equipment such as a towing ● If a sensor is hit by a large amount
eyelet, transport hook, bumper of water, such as when driving on
protector, bumper trim, bicycle a flooded road
carrier or snow-removal device ● There is dirt, snow, water drops or
(snow plow) is installed near the ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the
sensor sensors will resolve this problem.)
● If the front of the vehicle is raised ● A sensor is coated with a sheet of
or lowered due to the carried load spray or heavy rain
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a ● When driving in inclement weather
stable manner, such as when the such as fog, snow or a sandstorm
vehicle has been in an accident or
is malfunctioning ● When strong winds are blowing
● When tire chains, compact spare
tire or an emergency tire puncture
repair kit are used
● When towing with the vehicle
■ Situations in which the system
may operate even if there is no
possibility of a collision
In some situations, such as the fol-
lowing, the system may operate ● When vehicle horns, vehicle
even though there is no possibility of detectors, motorcycle engines, air
a collision. brakes of large vehicles, the clear-
ance sonar of other vehicles or
● When driving on a narrow road other devices which produce ultra-
sonic waves are near the vehicle
● If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 279
● If the orientation of a sensor has
been changed due to a collision or Sensor detection display,
other impact object distance
● The vehicle is approaching a tall
or curved curb ■ Detection range of the sen-
● Driving close to columns (H- sors
shaped steel beams, etc.) in multi-
story parking garages, construc-
tion sites, etc.
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a
stable manner, such as when the
vehicle has been in an accident or
is malfunctioning
● On an extremely bumpy road, on
an incline, on gravel, or on grass

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 5

● When tire chains, compact spare cm)

Driving
tire or an emergency tire puncture
repair kit are used Approximately 4.9 ft. (150
● When towing with the vehicle cm)
■ Certification Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
P.539 The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect objects that
are extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object, etc.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 280 5-5. Using the driving support systems

■ The distance and buzzer

Approximate distance to obstacle Buzzer

Front center sensor:
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.0
ft. (60 cm)*
Slow
Rear center sensor:
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0
ft. (60 cm)*
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5
Medium
ft. (45 cm)*
Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0
Fast
ft. (30 cm)*
Approximately less than 1.0 ft. (30
Continuous
cm)
*
: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (P.280)

Intuitive parking assist static object does not become

shorter, the buzzer will be
buzzer
muted automatically. (auto-
A buzzer sounds when the sen- matic buzzer mute function)
sors are operating.
■ Adjusting the buzzer volume
 The buzzer beeps faster as
The buzzer volume of the intuitive
the vehicle approaches a parking assist, RCTA, and RCD can
static object. all be changed at once from the cus-
When the vehicle comes tomize settings. (P.493)
within the approximately 1.0 ■ Muting a buzzer
ft. (30 cm) of the object, the When the temporary mute switch is
buzzer will sound continu- displayed on the multimedia display,
this switch can be pressed to tem-
ously. porarily mute the buzzer.
 When 2 or more sensors Select the switch to mute a buzzer
simultaneously detect a static of the intuitive parking assist, RCTA,
and RCD all together.
object, the buzzer sounds for
● Mute will be automatically can-
the nearest object. celed in the following situations:
 After a buzzer begins sound- • When the shift position is
changed.
ing, if the distance between • When the vehicle speed exceeds
the vehicle and the detected a a certain speed.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 281
• When there is a malfunction in a
sensor or the system is temporar- RCTA (Rear Cross Traf-
ily unavailable. fic Alert) function
• When the operating function is
disabled manually.
• When the power switch is turned The RCTA function uses the
off. BSM rear side radar sen-
sors installed behind the
rear bumper. This function
is intended to assist the
driver in checking areas
that are not easily visible
when backing up.

WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of
the system
The driver is solely responsible for
safe driving. Always drive safely,
taking care to observe your sur-
roundings. 5
The RCTA function is only a sup-
plementary function which alerts
the driver that a vehicle is

Driving
approaching from the right or left
at the rear of the vehicle.
As the RCTA function may not
function correctly under certain
conditions, the driver’s own visual
confirmation of safety is neces-
sary.
Over reliance on this function may
lead to an accident resulting
death or serious injury.
■ To ensure the system can
operate properly
P.266

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 282 5-5. Using the driving support systems

System components Driving assist information

indicator
Illuminates when the RCTA is
turned off. At this time, a message
will be displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.

Turning the RCTA func-

tion on/off
The RCTA can be enabled/dis-
abled through a customize set-
ting. (P.493)
When the RCTA function is off,
the driving assist information
Meter control switches
indicator (P.94) will illuminate
Operate the meter control switches
and a message will be displayed
to enable/disable the RCTA func-
tion on the multi-information dis-
on the multi-information display.
play. Each time the power switch is
turned to ON, the RCTA function
Outside rear view mirror indi- is enabled.
cators
If a vehicle is detected as ■ Outside rear view mirror indica-
approaching from the left or right tor visibility
behind the vehicle, both outside In strong sunlight, the outside rear
rear view mirror indicators (P.94) view mirror indicator may be difficult
will blink and a buzzer will sound. to see.
■ Hearing the RCTA buzzer
Multimedia display
The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to
If a vehicle approaching from the hear over loud noises, such as if the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle audio system volume is high.
is detected, the RCTA icon ■ Rear side radar sensors
(P.283) for the detected side will
P.266
be displayed on the multimedia dis-
play. This illustration* shows an
example of a vehicle approaching RCTA function
from both sides of the vehicle.
■ Operation of the RCTA
*
: Depending on the vehicle grade function
and equipped options, the actual
screen may be different from this The RCTA function uses rear
illustration. side radar sensors to detect
vehicles approaching from the

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 283
right or left at the rear of the ■ RCTA function detection
vehicle and alerts the driver of areas
the presence of such vehicles The areas that vehicles can be
by flashing the outside rear view detected in are outlined below.
mirror indicators and sounding a
buzzer.

The buzzer can alert the driver

of faster vehicles approaching
Approaching vehicles from farther away.
Detection areas of approach- Example:
ing vehicles 5
Approaching Approximate
■ RCTA icon display vehicle speed alert distance

Driving
When a vehicle approaching
34mph(56km/h)
from the right or left at the rear 98 ft. (30m)
of the vehicle is detected, the (fast)
following will be displayed on 5mph(8km/h)
13 ft. (4m)
the multimedia display. (slow)
Example: Vehicles are
approaching from both sides of ■ The RCTA function is opera-
the vehicle. tional when
The RCTA function operates when
all of the following conditions are
met:
● The power switch is in ON.
● The RCTA function is on.
● The shift position is in R.
● The vehicle speed is less than
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
● The approaching vehicle speed is
between approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) and 34 mph (56 km/h).
■ Setting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume of the RCTA,

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 284 5-5. Using the driving support systems

intuitive parking assist (if equipped), ● Small motorcycles, bicycles,

and RCD (if equipped) can be pedestrians, etc.*
adjusted all together through a cus-
tomize setting. (P.493) ● Vehicles moving away from your
vehicle
■ Muting a buzzer temporarily
● Vehicles approaching from the
When an object is detected, the parking spaces next to your vehi-
temporary mute switch is displayed cle*
on the multimedia display.
● The distance between the sensor
Select the switch to mute the buzzer and approaching vehicle gets too
of the intuitive parking assist (if close
equipped), RCTA, and RCD (if *: Depending on the conditions,
equipped) all together.
Mute will be canceled automatically detection of a vehicle and/or
in the following situations: object may occur.
● When the shift lever is changed. ■ Situations in which the system
● When the vehicle speed exceeds may not operate properly
a certain speed. The RCTA function may not detect
● When there is a malfunction in a vehicles correctly in the following
sensor or the system is temporar- situations:
ily unavailable. ● When the sensor is misaligned
● When the operating function is due to a strong impact to the sen-
disabled manually. sor or its surrounding area
● When the power switch is turned ● When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,
off etc., is covering the sensor or sur-
rounding area on the position
■ Conditions under which the above the rear bumper
system will not detect a vehicle
● When driving on a wet road sur-
The RCTA function is not designed face, such as in a puddle, while in
to detect the following types of vehi- inclement weather, such as heavy
cles and/or objects: rain, snow, fog, etc.
● Vehicles approaching from directly ● When multiple vehicles are
behind approaching with only a small gap
● Vehicles backing up in a parking between each vehicle
space next to your vehicle ● When a vehicle is approaching at
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot high speed
detect due to obstructions ● When equipment that may
obstruct a sensor is installed, such
as a towing eyelet, bumper pro-
tector (an additional trim strip,
etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
● When backing up on a slope with
a sharp change in grade

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked

vehicles and similar stationary
objects*

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 285

● When a vehicle turns into the

detection area

● When backing out of a sharp

angle parking spot

■ Situations in which the system

may operate even if there is no
possibility of a collision
Instances of the RCTA function 5
unnecessary detecting a vehicle
and/or object may increase in the

Driving
following situations:
● Immediately after the RCTA func- ● When the parking space faces a
tion is turned on street and vehicles are being
● Immediately after the fuel cell sys- driven on the street
tem is on with the RCTA function
on
● When the sensors cannot detect a
vehicle due to obstructions
● When towing with the vehicle
● When there is a significant differ-
ence in height between your vehi-
cle and the vehicle that enters the
detection area ● When the distance between your
● When a sensor or the area around vehicle and metal objects, such as
a sensor is extremely hot or cold a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked
vehicle, which may reflect electri-
● If the suspension has been modi- cal waves toward the rear of the
fied or tires of a size other than vehicle, is short
specified are installed
● If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load
● When turning while backing up

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 286 5-5. Using the driving support systems

● When a sensor or the area around

a sensor is extremely hot or cold
● If the suspension has been modi-
fied or tires of a size other than
specified are installed
● If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load
● When towing with the vehicle.
● When equipment that may
obstruct a sensor is installed, such
as a towing eyelet, bumper pro-
tector (an additional trim strip,
etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
● When a vehicle passes by the
side of your vehicle

● When a detected vehicle turns

while approaching the vehicle

● When there are spinning objects

near your vehicle such as the fan
of an air conditioning unit
● When water is splashed or
sprayed toward the rear bumper,
such as from a sprinkler
● Moving objects (flags, exhaust
fumes, large rain droplets or
snowflakes, rain water on the road
surface, etc.)
● When the distance between your
vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.,
that enters the detection area is
short
● Gratings and gutters

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 287

RCD (Rear Camera ● Do not disassemble, remodel or

paint the camera.
Detection)*
● Do not attach accessories or
*: If equipped stickers to the camera.
When the vehicle is backing ● Do not install market protection
up, the rear camera detec- parts (bumper trim, etc.) to the
rear bumper.
tion function can detect
pedestrians in the detec- ● Maintain suitable tire air pres-
sure.
tion area behind the vehicle.
If a pedestrian is detected, a ● Make sure the trunk is com-
pletely closed.
buzzer will sound and an
icon will be displayed on ■ RCD function is turned off
the multimedia display to In the following situations the sys-
inform the driver of the tem turns off. The RCD function
may not operate properly and
pedestrian. thus there is the danger that an
accident may occur.
WARNING ● The contents mentioned above
are not observed.
■ Cautions regarding the use of
the system 5
● Suspensions other than Toyota
The recognition and control capa- genuine parts are installed.
bilities for this system are limited.

Driving
The driver should always drive
safely by always being responsi- System component
ble without over relying on the
system and have a understanding Location of the rear camera
of the surrounding situations.
■ To ensure the system can
operate properly
Observe the following, otherwise
there is the danger that could lead
to an accident.
● Always clean the camera with-
out damaging it.
● Do not install market electronic
parts (such as Illuminated
license plate, fog lamps, etc.) in
the camera vicinity.
● Do not subject the camera vicin-
ity to strong impacts. If the vicin-
ity is subjected to a strong
impact, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota
dealer.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 288 5-5. Using the driving support systems

RCD display from behind, the system urges

caution from the driver by
sounding the buzzer and dis-
playing the detection of a pedes-
trian on the multimedia display
as follows:

Pedestrian detection icon

Displayed automatically when a
pedestrian is detected behind the
vehicle.

Turning the RCD function

on/off
The RCD function can be
If a pedestrian is detected in
enabled/disabled through a cus-
tomize setting. (P.493) area
Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly
When the RCD function is dis-
Pedestrian detection icon:
abled, the driving assist informa-
Blinks
tion indicator (P.94)
illuminates, and a message is If a pedestrian is detected in
displayed on the multi-informa- area
tion display. Buzzer (When the vehicle is
Each time the power switch is stationary): Sounds 3 times
turned off then changed to ON, Buzzer (When the vehicle is
the RCD function will be backing up, when a pedes-
enabled automatically. trian approaches the rear of
the vehicle): Sounds repeat-
When a pedestrian is edly
detected Pedestrian detection icon:
Blinks
If a pedestrian is in the area
If the system determines that
behind the vehicle or if the rear
your vehicle may collide with
camera detected that a pedes-
trian is approaching the vehicle a pedestrian in area

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 289
Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly from the shadow of the vehicle or
Pedestrian detection icon: a building
• Pedestrians who are riding mov-
Blinks ing objects such as a bicycle or
skateboard
■ The rear camera detection func- • Pedestrians wearing oversized
tion is operational when clothing such as a rain coat, long
skirt, etc., making their silhouette
● The power switch is in ON. obscure
● RCD function is on. • Pedestrians whose body is par-
tially hidden by an object, such as
● The shift position is in R. a cart or umbrella
■ Setting the buzzer volume • Pedestrians which are obscured
by darkness, such as at night
The buzzer volume of the intuitive
parking assist, RCTA, and RCD can ● In some situations, such as the
all be changed at once from the cus- following, pedestrians may not be
tomize settings. (P.493) detected by the rear camera
detection function, preventing the
■ Muting a buzzer temporarily function from operating properly:
When an object is detected, the • When backing up in inclement
temporary mute switch is displayed weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
on the multimedia display. Select • The lens is dirty (by dirt or snow-
the switch to mute a buzzer of the melting agent, etc.) or scratched
intuitive parking assist, RCTA and • When a very bright light, such as
RCD all together. the sun, or the headlights of 5
Mute will be automatically canceled another vehicle, shines directly
in the following situations: into the rear camera

Driving
• When backing up in a place where
● When the shift position is the surrounding brightness
changed. changes suddenly, such as at the
● When the vehicle speed exceeds entrance or exit of a garage or
a certain speed. underground parking lot
• When backing up in a dim envi-
● When there is a malfunction in a ronment such as during dusk or in
sensor or the system is temporar- an underground parking lot
ily unavailable. • When the camera position and
● When the operating function is direction are deviated
disabled manually. • When a towing hook is attached
● When the power switch is turned • When water droplets are flowing
off. on the camera lens
• When the vehicle height is
■ Situations in which the system extremely changed (nose up,
may not operate properly nose down, etc.)
● Some pedestrians, such as the • When tire chains or an emergency
following, may not be detected by tire puncture repair kit are used
the rear camera detection func- • When the suspension has been
tion, preventing the function from lowered or tires that have a differ-
operating properly: ent size than the genuine tires are
• Pedestrians who are bending for- installed
ward or squatting • When an aftermarket electronic
• Pedestrians who are lying down part (backlit license plate, fog
• Pedestrians who are running light, etc.) is installed near the rear
• Pedestrians who suddenly appear camera
• If a bumper protector, such as an

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 290 5-5. Using the driving support systems

additional trim strip, is installed to • If a towing eyelet is installed to the

the rear bumper rear of the vehicle
• When towing with the vehicle • When water is flowing over the
rear camera lens
■ Situations in which the system
• The lens is dirty (by dirt or snow-
may operate unexpectedly melting agent, etc.)
● Even though there are no pedes- • If there is a flashing light in the
trians in the detection area, some detection area, such as the emer-
objects, such as the following, gency flashers of another vehicle
may be detected, possibly caus- • When tire chains or an emergency
ing the rear camera detection tire puncture repair kit are used
function to operate. • When towing with the vehicle
• Three dimensional objects, such
● Situations in which the rear cam-
as a pole, traffic cone, fence, or
era detection function may be diffi-
parked vehicle
• Moving objects, such as a car or cult to notice
motorcycle • The buzzer may be difficult to hear
if the surrounding area is noisy or
• Objects moving toward your vehi-
cle when backing up, such as the audio system volume is high.
flags or puddles (or airborne mat- • If the temperature in the cabin is
extremely high or low, the multi-
ter, such as smoke, steam, rain, or
snow) media display may not operate
• Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram correctly.
rails, road repairs, white lines,
pedestrian crossings or fallen
leaves on the road
• Metal covers (gratings), such as
those used for drainage ditches
• Objects reflected in a puddle or on
a wet road surface
• Shadows on the road
● In some situations, such as the
following, the rear camera detec-
tion function may operate even
though there are no pedestrians in
the detection area.
• When backing up toward the road-
side or a bump on the road
• When backing up toward an
incline/decline
• When the vehicle height is
extremely changed (nose up,
nose down, etc.)
• When an aftermarket electronic
part (backlit license plate, fog
light, etc.) is installed near the rear
camera
• If a bumper protector, such as an
additional trim strip, is installed to
the rear bumper
• If the orientation of the rear cam-
era has been changed due to a
collision or other impact, or
removal and installation

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 291

PKSB (Parking Sup- WARNING

port Brake)* ■ Cautions regarding the use of
the system
*: If equipped Do not overly rely on the system,
The PKSB (Parking Sup- as doing so may lead to an acci-
dent.
port Brake) is a system that
Always drive while checking the
issues warnings and auto- safety of the surroundings of the
matically performs braking vehicle.
to help reduce collision Depending on the vehicle and
damage with operation tar- road conditions, weather, etc., the
system may not operate.
gets that were detected
The detection capabilities of sen-
when traveling at a low sors and radars are limited.
speed such as when park- Always drive while checking the
ing. safety of the surroundings of the
vehicle.
● The driver is solely responsible
PKSB (Parking Support for safe driving. Always drive
Brake) system carefully, taking care to observe
your surroundings. The Parking
Support Brake system is 5
The system has detected the designed to provide support to
following as operation targets. lessen the severity of collisions.

Driving
(The operation targets vary However, it may not operate in
some situations.
depending on the function.)
● The Parking Support Brake sys-
 Parking Support Brake func- tem is not designed to stop the
tion (static objects front and vehicle completely. Additionally,
rear of the vehicle): even if the system has stopped
the vehicle, it is necessary to
P.295 depress the brake pedal imme-
 Parking Support Brake func- diately as brake control will be
canceled after approximately 2
tion (moving vehicles rear of seconds.
the vehicle):
● It is extremely dangerous to
P.298 check the system operations by
 Parking Support Brake func- intentionally driving the vehicle
into the direction of a wall, etc.
tion (pedestrians rear of the Never attempt such actions.
vehicle):
■ When to disable the Parking
P.299 Support Brake
In the following situations, disable
the Parking Support Brake as the
system may operate even though
there is no possibility of a colli-
sion.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 292 5-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING ● When towing with the vehicle

● When inspecting the vehicle ■ Precautions for the suspen-
using a chassis roller, chassis sion
dynamo or free roller Do not modify the suspension of
● When loading the vehicle onto a the vehicle. If the height or tilt of
boat, truck or other transport the vehicle is changed, the sen-
vessel sors may not be able to detect
detectable objects and the system
● If the suspension has been may not operate correctly, possi-
modified or tires of a size other bly leading to an accident.
than specified are installed
● If the front of the vehicle is Enabling/Disabling the
raised or lowered due to the
carried load Parking Support Brake
● When equipment such as a tow- The Parking Support Brake
ing hook, transport hook, function can be enabled/dis-
bumper protector, bumper trim,
bicycle carrier or snow-removal abled through a customize set-
device (snow plow) is installed ting. (P.494)
near the sensor
When the PKSB (Parking Sup-
● When using automatic car port Brake) is disabled, the driv-
washing devices
ing assist information indicator
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in (P.94) illuminates, and a mes-
a stable manner, such as when
the vehicle has been in an acci- sage is displayed on the multi-
dent or is malfunctioning information display.
● When the vehicle is driven in a If the system switches to OFF
sporty manner or off-road (disabled) and the PKSB (Park-
● When the tires are not properly ing Support Brake) is stopped,
inflated the PKSB (Parking Support
● When the tires are very worn Brake) will not be re-enabled
until ON (enabled) is selected
● When tire chains, a compact
spare tire or an emergency tire again from the customize setting
puncture repair kit are used. (P.494).
(It remains off even if the power
switch is turned to ON again
after the power switch has been
turned off.)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 293
Buzzer: Short beep
Display and buzzer for
fuel cell system output  Brake control is operating
restriction control and The system determined that emer-
brake control gency braking is necessary.
Multimedia display (vehicles with
If the fuel cell system output restric- panoramic view monitor): “BRAKE!”
tion control or brake control oper-
Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”
ates, a buzzer will sound and a
message will be displayed on the Driving assist information indicator:
multimedia display and multi-infor- Not illuminated
mation display, to alert the driver. Buzzer: Short beep
Depending on the situation, output  Vehicle stopped by system
restriction control operates to either
operation
limit acceleration or restrict output
as much as possible. The vehicle has been stopped by
brake control operation.
 Fuel cell system output
restriction control is operating Multimedia display (vehicles with
panoramic view monitor): “Switch to
(acceleration restriction)
Brake”
Acceleration greater than a certain 5
Multi-information display: “Acceler-
amount is restricted by the system.
ator Pedal is Pressed Press Brake

Driving
Multimedia display: No warning dis- Pedal”
played
If the accelerator pedal is not
Multi-information display: “Object depressed, “Press Brake Pedal” will
Detected Acceleration Reduced” be displayed.
Driving assist information indicator: Driving assist information indicator:
Not illuminated Illuminated
Buzzer: Does not sound Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly
 Fuel cell system output
restriction control is operating System overview
(output restricted as much as
possible) If the Parking Support Brake
determines that a collision with a
The system has determined that
detected object or pedestrian is
stronger-than-normal brake opera-
tion is necessary. possible, the fuel cell system
output will be restricted to
Multimedia display (vehicles with
panoramic view monitor): “BRAKE!”
restrain any increase in the vehi-
cle speed. (Fuel cell system out-
Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”
put restriction control: See figure
Driving assist information indicator: 2 below.)
Not illuminated Additionally, if the accelerator

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 294 5-5. Using the driving support systems

pedal continues to be operating (System deter-

depressed, the brakes will be mines that possibility of colli-
applied automatically to reduce sion with detected object is
the vehicle speed. (Brake con- high)
trol: See figure 3.)  Figure 3: When fuel cell sys-
 Figure 1: When the PKSB tem output restriction control
(Parking Support Brake) is not and brake control operates
operating

Fuel cell system output

Fuel cell system output
Braking force
Braking force
Time
Time
Fuel cell system output
 Figure 2: When fuel cell sys- restriction control begins
tem output restriction control operating (System deter-
operates mines that possibility of colli-
sion with detected object is
high)
Brake control begins operat-
ing (System determines that
possibility of collision with
detected object is extremely
high)

■ If the Parking Support Brake

Fuel cell system output has operated
Braking force If the vehicle is stopped due to oper-
ation of the Parking Support Brake,
Time the Parking Support Brake will be
disabled and the driving assist infor-
Fuel cell system output mation indicator will illuminate.
restriction control begins In addition, even when the PKSB

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 295
(Parking Support Brake) operates,
the brake control is canceled after Parking Support Brake
approximately 2 seconds to start off. function (static
Furthermore, the brake control also objects front and rear
can be canceled by depressing the of the vehicle)*
brake pedal. Depressing the accel-
erator pedal again after that allows *
the vehicle to start off. : If equipped
■ Re-enabling the Parking Sup- If the sensors detect a static
port Brake object, such as a wall, in the
To re-enable the Parking Support traveling direction of the
Brake when it is disabled due to
operation of the PKSB (Parking vehicle and the system
Support Brake), either enable the determines that a collision
system again, or turn the power may occur due to the vehi-
switch off and then back to ON.
cle suddenly moving for-
Additionally, if any of the following
conditions are met, the system will ward due to an accidental
be re-enabled automatically and the accelerator pedal operation,
driving assist information indicator the vehicle moving the
will turn off (P.94):
unintended direction due to
● The P shift position is selected
the wrong shift position
● Drive with no operation targets in 5
the traveling direction of the vehi- being selected, or while
cle parking or traveling at low

Driving
● Change the traveling direction of speeds, the system will
the vehicle operate to lessen the impact
■ Buzzer with the detected static
Regardless of whether the intuitive object and reduce the
parking assist sensor is enabled or resulting damage.
not (P.275), if the PKSB (Parking
Support Brake) system is enabled
(P.292), the buzzer will sound to
notify the driver of the approximate Examples of function
distance to the object when the operation (static objects
brake control and the fuel cell sys-
tem output restriction control are front and rear of the vehi-
operated. cle)
This function will operate in situ-
ations such as the following if an
object is detected in the travel-
ing direction of the vehicle.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 296 5-5. Using the driving support systems

■ When traveling at a low ■ When the vehicle moves

speed and the brake pedal forward due to the incorrect
is not depressed, or is shift position being
depressed late selected

■ When the accelerator pedal

is depressed excessively Types of sensors
P.275

WARNING
■ To ensure the system can
operate properly
P.276
■ If the Parking Support Brake
function operates unneces-
sarily, such as at a railroad
crossing
P.294
■ Notes when washing the vehi-
cle
P.276

■ The Parking Support Brake

function (static objects front
and rear of the vehicle) will
operate when
The function will operate when the
driving assist information indicator is
not illuminated (P.92, 94) and all
of the following conditions are met:

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 297
● Fuel cell system output restriction ■ Detection range of the Parking
control Support Brake function (static
• The Parking Support Brake is objects front and rear of the
enabled. vehicle)
• The vehicle speed is approxi- The detection range of the Parking
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less. Support Brake function (static
• There is a static object in the trav- objects front and rear of the vehicle)
eling direction of the vehicle and differs from the detection range of
approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) the intuitive parking assist (P.277).
away. Therefore, even if the intuitive park-
• The Parking Support Brake deter- ing assist detects an object and pro-
mines that a stronger-than-nor- vides a warning, the Parking
mal brake operation is necessary Support Brake function (static
to avoid a collision. objects front and rear of the vehicle)
● Brake control may not start operating.
• Fuel cell system output restriction
■ Situations in which the system
control is operating.
• The Parking Support Brake deter- may not operate properly
mines that an immediate brake P.277
operation is necessary to avoid a ■ Situations in which the system
collision. may operate even if there is no
■ The Parking Support Brake possibility of a collision
function (static objects front P.278
and rear of the vehicle) will stop 5
operating when
The function will stop operating if

Driving
any of the following conditions are
met:
● Fuel cell system output restriction
control
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-
abled.
• The system determines that the
collision has become avoidable
with normal brake operation.
• The static object is no longer
approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)
away from the vehicle or in the
traveling direction of the vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-
abled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have
elapsed since the vehicle was
stopped by brake control.
• The brake pedal is depressed
after the vehicle is stopped by
brake control.
• The static object is no longer
approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)
away from the vehicle or in the
traveling direction of the vehicle.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 298 5-5. Using the driving support systems

Parking Support Brake Types of sensors

function (moving vehi-
P.266
cles rear of the vehi-
cle)* WARNING
* ■ To ensure the system can
: If equipped operate properly
If a rear radar sensor P.266
detects a vehicle approach-
ing from the right or left at
■ The Parking Support Brake
the rear of the vehicle and function (moving vehicles rear
the system determines that of the vehicle) will operate
the possibility of a collision when
is high, this function will The function will operate when the
driving assist information indicator is
perform brake control to not illuminated (P.92, 94) and all
reduce the likelihood of an of the following conditions are met:
impact with the approach- ● Fuel cell system output restriction
ing vehicle. control
• The Parking Support Brake is
enabled.
• The vehicle speed is approxi-
Examples of the function mately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.
operation • Vehicles are approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehi-
This function will operate in situ- cle at a traveling speed of approx-
imately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.
ations such as the following if a • The shift position is in R.
vehicle is detected in the travel- • The Parking Support Brake deter-
ing direction of the vehicle. mines that a stronger than normal
brake operation is necessary to
■ When reversing, a vehicle is avoid a collision with an approach-
ing vehicle.
approaching and the brake
● Brake control
pedal is not depressed, or • Fuel cell system output restriction
is depressed late control is operating.
• The Parking Support Brake deter-
mined that an emergency brake
operation was necessary to avoid
a collision with a vehicle
approaching from the rear.
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (moving vehicles rear
of the vehicle) will stop operat-
ing when
The function will stop operating if
any of the following conditions are
met:

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 299
● Fuel cell system output restriction
control Parking Support Brake
• The Parking Support Brake is dis- function (pedestrians
abled. rear of the vehicle)*
• The collision becomes avoidable
with normal brake operation. *
• A vehicle is no longer approaching : If equipped
from the right or left at the rear of If the rear camera sensor
the vehicle.
detects a pedestrian behind
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is dis- the vehicle while backing
abled. up and the system deter-
• Approximately 2 seconds have mines that the possibility of
elapsed since the vehicle was
stopped by brake control. colliding with the detected
• The brake pedal is depressed pedestrian is high, a buzzer
after the vehicle is stopped by
brake control. will sound. If the system
determines that the possi-
■ Situations in which the system
may not operate properly bility of colliding with the
P.284 detected pedestrian is
■ Situations in which the system
extremely high, the brakes
may operate even if there is no will be applied automati-
5
possibility of a collision cally to help reduce the
P.285 impact of the collision.

Driving
Examples of system oper-
ation
The system operates when an
approaching pedestrian is
detected behind the vehicle
while backing up, and when the
brake pedal is not depressed or
is depressed late.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 300 5-5. Using the driving support systems

of the following conditions are met:

Screen display of pedes-
● Fuel cell system output restriction
trians rear of the vehicle control
• The Parking Support Brake is
Displays a message to urge the enabled.
driver to take evasive action • The vehicle speed is 9 mph (15
km/h) or less.
when a pedestrian is detected in • The shift position is in R.
the detection area behind the • When a pedestrian is to the rear of
vehicle. the vehicle
• The PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) determines that a stronger
than-normal-brake operation is
necessary to avoid a collision.
● Brake control
• Fuel cell system output restriction
control is operating.
• The Parking Support Brake deter-
mines that an emergency brake
operation is necessary to avoid a
collision with a pedestrian.
■ The Parking Support Brake
Pedestrian detection icon function (pedestrians rear of
the vehicle) will stop operating
“BRAKE!” when
The function will stop operating if
WARNING any of the following conditions are
■ If the Parking Support Brake met:
function (pedestrians rear of ● Fuel cell system output restriction
the vehicle) operates unnec- control
essarily • The Parking Support Brake is dis-
Depress the brake pedal immedi- abled.
ately after the Parking Support • The collision becomes avoidable
Brake function (pedestrians rear with normal brake operation.
of the vehicle) operates. (Opera- • The pedestrian is no longer
tion of the function is canceled by detected behind your vehicle.
depressing the brake pedal.) ● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-
■ Correct use of the Parking abled.
Support Brake function • Approximately 2 seconds have
(pedestrians rear of the vehi- elapsed since the vehicle was
cle) stopped by brake control.
P.287 • The brake pedal is depressed
after the vehicle is stopped by
brake control.
■ The Parking Support Brake ■ Re-enabling the Parking Sup-
function (pedestrians rear of port Brake function (pedestri-
the vehicle) will operate when ans rear of the vehicle)
The function will operate when the P.295
driving assist information indicator is
not illuminated (P.92, 94) and all

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 301
■ Detection area of the Parking
Support Brake function (pedes- Driving mode select
trians rear of the vehicle) switch
The detection area of the Parking
Support Brake function (pedestrians The driving modes can be
rear of the vehicle) differs from the
detection area of the RCD function selected to suit driving con-
(P.288). Therefore, even if the dition.
RCD function detects a pedestrian
and provides an alert, the Parking
Support Brake function (pedestrians Selecting a drive mode
rear of the vehicle) may not start
operating.
■ Situations in which the system
may not operate properly
P.289
■ Situations in which the system
may operate unexpectedly
P.290

Driving
Multi-information display
Driving mode select switch
Driving mode changes if the switch
is pressed.
1 Normal mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel
economy, quietness, and dynamic
performance. Suitable for normal
driving.
2 Sport mode
Controls the transmission and fuel
cell system to provide quick, power-
ful acceleration. Making it suitable
for when agile driving response is
desired, such as when driving on
roads with many curves.
When the sport mode is selected,
sport mode indicator comes on.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 302 5-5. Using the driving support systems

3 Eco drive mode Snow mode

Helps the driver accelerate in an
eco friendly manner and improve
fuel economy through moderate Snow mode can be selected
throttle characteristics and by con- to suit the conditions when
trolling the operation of the air con- driving on slippery road sur-
ditioning system (heating/ cooling). faces, such as on snow.
When the Eco drive mode is
selected, Eco drive mode indicator
comes on.
System operation
Press the snow mode switch
■ Operation of the air condition-
ing system in Eco drive mode When the switch is pressed, snow
Eco drive mode controls the heat- mode turns on and the snow mode
ing/ cooling operations and fan indicator illuminates on the multi-
speed of the air conditioning system information display. When the
to enhance fuel efficiency. To switch is pressed again, the snow
improve air conditioning perfor- mode indicator turns off.
mance, perform the following opera-
tions:
● Turn off eco air conditioning mode
(P.314)
● Adjust the fan speed (P.314)
● Turn off Eco drive mode
■ Automatic deactivation of sport
mode
If the power switch is turned off after
driving in sport mode, the drive
mode will be changed to normal
mode. ■ Snow mode automatic deactiva-
tion
Snow mode is automatically deacti-
vated if the power switch is turned
off after driving in snow mode.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 303

Driving assist systems ■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Con-

trol)
To keep driving safety and Helps the driver to control skid-
performance, the following ding when swerving suddenly or
systems operate automati- turning on slippery road sur-
cally in response to various faces.
driving situations. Be ■ TRAC (Traction Control)
aware, however, that these Helps to maintain drive power
systems are supplementary and prevent the drive wheels
and should not be relied from spinning when starting the
upon too heavily when oper- vehicle or accelerating on slip-
ating the vehicle. pery roads
■ Active Cornering Assist
Summary of the driving (ACA)
assist systems
Helps to prevent the vehicle
■ ECB (Electronically Con- from drifting to the outer side by
trolled Brake System) performing inner wheel brake
5
control when attempting to
The electronically controlled
accelerate while turning
system generates braking force

Driving
corresponding to the brake ■ Hill-start assist control
operation Helps to reduce the backward
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- movement of the vehicle when
tem) starting on an uphill
Helps to prevent wheel lock ■ EPS (Electric Power Steer-
when the brakes are applied ing)
suddenly, or if the brakes are Employs an electric motor to
applied while driving on a slip- reduce the amount of effort
pery road surface needed to turn the steering
■ Brake assist wheel.
Generates an increased level of ■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics
braking force after the brake Integrated Management)
pedal is depressed when the Provides integrated control of
system detects a panic stop sit- the ABS, brake assist, TRAC,
uation VSC, hill-start assist control and
EPS systems
Helps to maintain vehicle stabil-
ity when swerving on slippery

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 304 5-5. Using the driving support systems

road surfaces by controlling the

Press again to turn the system
brakes, fuel cell system output,
steering assist. back on.

■ The Secondary Collision

Brake
When the SRS airbag sensor
detects a collision and the sys-
tem operates, the brakes and
brake lights are automatically
controlled to reduce the vehicle
“Traction Control Turned OFF”
speed and help reduce the pos-
sibility of further damage due to ■ Turning off both TRAC and VSC
systems
a secondary collision.
To turn the TRAC and VSC systems
■ When the TRAC/VSC/ABS sys- off, press and hold for more
tems are operating
than 3 seconds while the vehicle is
The slip indicator light will flash stopped.
while the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems
are operating. The VSC OFF indicator light will
come on and the “Traction Control
Turned OFF” will be shown on the
multi-information display.*

Press again to turn the system

back on.
*
: PCS will also be disabled (only
■ Disabling the TRAC system Pre-Collision warning is avail-
able). The PCS warning light will
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt come on and a message will be
or snow, the TRAC system may displayed on the multi-information
reduce power from the fuel cell sys-
display. (P.209, 424)
tem to the wheels. Pressing to
■ When the message is dis-
turn the system off may make it eas- played on the multi-information
ier for you to rock the vehicle in display showing that TRAC has
order to free it.
been disabled even if has
To turn the TRAC system off, quickly
not been pressed
press and release .
TRAC is temporary deactivated. If
The “Traction Control Turned OFF” the information continues to show,
will be shown on the multi-informa- contact your Toyota dealer.
tion display.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 305
■ Operating conditions of hill- • The brake pedal may pulsate
start assist control slightly after the ABS is activated.
When the following five conditions • The brake pedal may move down
are met, the hill-start assist control slightly after the ABS is activated.
will operate: ■ ECB operating sound
● The shift position is in a position ECB operating sound may be heard
other than P or N (when stating off in the following cases, but it does
forward/backward on an upward not indicate that a malfunction has
incline) occurred.
● The vehicle is stopped ● Operating sound heard from the
● The accelerator pedal is not fuel cell unit compartment when
depressed the brake pedal is operated.
● The parking brake is not engaged ● Motor sound of the brake system
heard from the front part of the
● Power switch is turned to ON vehicle when the driver’s door is
■ Automatic system cancelation opened.
of hill-start assist control ● Operating sound heard from the
The hill-start assist control will turn fuel cell unit compartment when
off in any of the following situations: one or two minutes passed after
the stop of the fuel cell system.
● Shift the shift position to P or N
■ Active Cornering Assist opera-
● The accelerator pedal is
tion sounds and vibrations
depressed 5
● The parking brake is engaged
When the Active Cornering Assist is
operated, operation sounds and
● 2 seconds at maximum elapsed vibrations may be generated from

Driving
after the brake pedal is released the brake system, but this is not a
● Power switch is turned to OFF malfunction.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused ■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC
by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, and VSC systems
TRAC and hill-start assist con- After turning the TRAC and VSC
trol systems systems off, the systems will be
● A sound may be heard from the automatically re-enabled in the fol-
fuel cell unit compartment when lowing situations:
the brake pedal is depressed ● When the power switch is turned
repeatedly, when the fuel cell sys- off
tem is started or just after the vehi-
● If only the TRAC system is turned
cle begins to move. This sound
off, the TRAC will turn on when
does not indicate that a malfunc-
tion has occurred in any of these vehicle speed increases
systems. If both the TRAC and VSC sys-
tems are turned off, automatic re-
● Any of the following conditions enabling will not occur when vehi-
may occur when the above sys- cle speed increases.
tems are operating. None of these
indicates that a malfunction has ■ Operating conditions of Active
occurred. Cornering Assist
• Vibrations may be felt through the The system operates when the fol-
vehicle body and steering. lowing occurs.
• A motor sound may be heard also ● TRAC/VSC can operate
after the vehicle comes to a stop.
● The driver is attempting to accel-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 306 5-5. Using the driving support systems

erate while turning ● The vehicle hydroplanes while

● The system detects that the vehi- driving at high speed on wet or
cle is drifting to the outer side slick roads.
● The brake pedal is released ■ Stopping distance when the
■ Reduced effectiveness of the ABS is operating may exceed
EPS system that of normal conditions
The effectiveness of the EPS sys- The ABS is not designed to
tem is reduced to prevent the sys- shorten the vehicle’s stopping dis-
tem from overheating when there is tance. Always maintain a safe dis-
frequent steering input over an tance from the vehicle in front of
extended period of time. The steer- you, especially in the following sit-
ing wheel may feel heavy as a uations:
result. Should this occur, refrain
from excessive steering input or ● When driving on dirt, gravel or
stop the vehicle and turn the fuel snow-covered roads
cell system off. The EPS system
● When driving with tire chains
should return to normal within 10
minutes. ● When driving over bumps in the
■ Secondary Collision Brake road
operating conditions
● When driving over roads with
The system operates when the SRS potholes or uneven surfaces
airbag sensor detects a collision
while the vehicle is in motion. How- ■ TRAC/VSC may not operate
ever, the system does not operate in effectively when
any of the following situations. Directional control and power may
● When driving at a low speed not be achievable while driving on
● Components are damaged slippery road surfaces, even if the
TRAC/VSC system is operating.
■ Secondary Collision Brake Drive the vehicle carefully in con-
automatic cancelation ditions where stability and power
The system is automatically can- may be lost.
celed in any of the following situa- ■ Active Cornering Assist does
tions.
not operate effectively when
● The vehicle speed has decreased
● Do not overly rely on Active
to a certain speed
Cornering Assist. Active Corner-
● A certain amount of time elapses ing Assist may not operate
during operation effectively when accelerating
● The accelerator pedal is down slopes or driving on slip-
depressed a large amount pery road surfaces.
● When Active Cornering Assist
WARNING frequently operates, Active Cor-
nering Assist may temporarily
■ The ABS does not operate stop operating to ensure proper
effectively when operation of the brakes, TRAC
● The limits of tire gripping perfor- and VSC.
mance have been exceeded
(such as excessively worn tires
on a snow covered road).

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-5. Using the driving support systems 307

WARNING ■ Replacing tires

■ Hill-start assist control does Make sure that all tires are of the
not operate effectively when specified size, brand, tread pat-
tern and total load capacity. In
● Do not overly rely on hill-start addition, make sure that the tires
assist control. Hill-start assist are inflated to the recommended
control may not operate effec- tire inflation pressure level.
tively on steep inclines and
roads covered with ice. The ABS, TRAC and VSC sys-
tems will not function correctly if
● Unlike the parking brake, hill- different tires are installed on the
start assist control is not vehicle.
intended to hold the vehicle sta- Contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
tionary for an extended period ther information when replacing
of time. Do not attempt to use tires or wheels.
hill-start assist control to hold
the vehicle on an incline, as ■ Handling of tires and the sus-
doing so may lead to an acci- pension
dent. Using tires with any kind of prob-
lem or modifying the suspension
■ When the TRAC/ABS/VSC is will affect the driving assist sys-
activated tems, and may cause a system to
The slip indicator light flashes. malfunction.
Always drive carefully. Reckless
driving may cause an accident. 5
Exercise particular care when the
indicator light flashes.

Driving
■ When the TRAC/VSC systems
are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at
a speed appropriate to the road
conditions. As these are the sys-
tems to help ensure vehicle stabil-
ity and driving force, do not turn
the TRAC/VSC systems off
unless necessary.
■ Secondary Collision Brake
Do not rely solely upon the Sec-
ondary Collision Brake. This sys-
tem is designed to help reduce
the possibility of further damage
due to a secondary collision, how-
ever, that effect changes accord-
ing to various conditions. Overly
relying on the system may result
in death or serious injury.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 308 5-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips

[Link] tips

● Use snow tires on all, not just

some wheels.

Carry out the necessary ■ Driving with tire chains

preparations and inspec- Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of accidents.
tions before driving the Failure to do so may result in the
vehicle in winter. Always vehicle being unable to be driven
drive the vehicle in a man- safely, and may cause death or
serious injury.
ner appropriate to the pre-
vailing weather conditions. ● Do not drive in excess of the
speed limit specified for the tire
chains being used, or 30 mph
Preparation for winter (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road
 Use washer fluid that is surfaces or over potholes.
appropriate to the prevailing
● Avoid sudden acceleration,
outside temperatures. abrupt steering, sudden brak-
ing, and sudden deceleration
 Have a service technician using Br mode.
inspect the condition of the
12-volt battery. ● Slow down sufficiently before
entering a curve to ensure that
 Have the vehicle fitted with vehicle control is maintained.
four snow tires or purchase a ● Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing
set of tire chains for the rear Assist) system.
tires.
Ensure that all tires are the speci- NOTICE
fied size and brand, and that chains
■ Repairing or replacing snow
match the size of the tires. tires
WARNING Request repairs or replacement of
snow tires from Toyota dealers or
■ Driving with snow tires legitimate tire retailers.
Observe the following precautions This is because the removal and
to reduce the risk of accidents. attachment of snow tires affects
Failure to do so may result in a the operation of the tire pressure
loss of vehicle control and cause warning valves and transmitters.
death or serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size. Before driving the vehicle
● Maintain the recommended Perform the following according
level of air pressure.
to the driving conditions:
● Do not drive in excess of 75  Do not try to forcibly open a
mph (120 km/h), regardless of
the type of snow tires being window or move a wiper that
used. is frozen. Pour warm water

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 5-6. Driving tips 309
over the frozen area to melt When parking the vehicle
the ice. Wipe away the water
immediately to prevent it from  Turn automatic mode of the
freezing. parking brake off. Otherwise,
 To ensure proper operation of the parking brake may freeze
the climate control system and not be able to be
fan, remove any snow that released automatically.
has accumulated on the air Also, avoid using the following
inlet vents in front of the wind- as the parking brake may
shield. operate automatically, even if
automatic mode is off.
 Check for and remove any
excess ice or snow that may • Brake hold system
have accumulated on the  Park the vehicle and shift the
exterior lights, outside rear shift position to P without set-
view mirrors, windows, vehi- ting the parking brake. The
cle’s roof, chassis, around the parking brake may freeze up,
tires or on the brakes. preventing it from being
 Remove any snow or mud released. If the vehicle is
5
from the bottom of your shoes parked without setting the
before getting in the vehicle. parking brake, make sure to

Driving
block the wheels.
■ When using the door mirrors in
Failure to do so may be dan-
automatic mode in cold weather gerous because it may cause
When automatic mode is used in the vehicle to move unexpect-
cold weather, the door mirror could edly, possibly leading to an
freeze up and automatic stowing
and return may not be possible. In accident.
this case, remove any ice and snow  When the parking brake is in
from the door mirror, then either
operate the mirror using manual automatic mode, release the
mode or move the mirror by hand. parking brake after shifting
the shift position to P.
When driving the vehicle (P.172)
 If the vehicle is parked without
Accelerate the vehicle slowly,
setting the parking brake,
keep a safe distance between
confirm that the shift position
you and the vehicle ahead, and
cannot be moved out of P.
drive at a reduced speed suit-
able to road conditions.  If the vehicle is left parked
with the brakes damp in cold
temperatures, there is a pos-
sibility of the brakes freezing.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 310 5-6. Driving tips

(0.51.0 km).
Selecting tire chains
● Install tire chains following the
Use the correct tire chain size instructions provided with the tire
chains.
when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each NOTICE
tire size.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters may not function
correctly when tire chains are fit-
ted.

Windshield wipers
To enable the windshield wipers
to be lifted when heavy snow or
Side chain (0.12 in. [3 mm] in icy conditions are expected,
change the rest position of the
diameter)
windshield wipers from the
Cross chain (0.16 in. [4 mm] retracted position below the
in diameter) hood to the service position
using the wiper lever. (P.187)
Regulations on the use of
tire chains
Regulations regarding the use
of tire chains vary depending on
location and type of road.
Always check local regulations
before installing chains.

■ Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions
when installing and removing
chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a
safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires.
Do not install tire chains on the
front tires.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires
as tightly as possible. Retighten
chains after driving 1/41/2 mile

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 311

Interior features
6
6-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
ALL AUTO control ....... 312
Automatic air conditioning
system....................... 313
Heated steering wheel/seat
heaters ...................... 321
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list .......... 323
6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features 326
Trunk features ............. 328
6-4. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features . 330
6
Garage door opener.... 350

Interior features

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 312 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

ALL AUTO control temperature of the air condition-

[Link] the air conditioning system and defogger

ing system, the outside tem-

perature, etc.
The seat heaters and heated
steering wheel (if equipped) ■ Heated steering wheel (if
are each automatically con- equipped) (P.321)
trolled according to the set Heated steering wheel operates
temperature of the air condi- automatically according to the
tioning system, the outside set temperature of the air condi-
and cabin temperature, etc. tioning system, the outside tem-
ALL AUTO control allows a perature, etc.
comfortable condition to be
maintained without adjust- ■ Passenger detection functions
ing each system. When a passenger is detected in
the front passenger seat, the seat
heater will operate automatically.
Turning on ALL AUTO ■ Seat heater operation (if
control equipped)
When automatic mode is selected
Touch “All auto” on the air condi- using the seat heater switch, pas-
tioning control screen.(P.318) senger detection is not performed.

The indicator on the “All auto” con-

trol screen illuminates, and the
automatic air conditioning system,
seat heaters and heated steering
wheel operate in automatic mode.
If any of the system is operated
manually, the indicator turns off.
However, all other functions con-
tinue to operate in automatic mode.

Operation of each system

■ Automatic air conditioning
system (P.313)
The temperature can be
adjusted independently for each
seat.
■ Seat heaters (P.321)
Heating is automatically
selected according to the set

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 313

Automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted accord-

ing to the temperature setting.
The air conditioning system can be operated using the air
conditioning control panel and air conditioning control
screen.

Air conditioning controls

Multimedia display Interior features

“AUTO” switch
Windshield defogger switch
Fan speed increase switch
“CLIMATE” switch
Right-hand side temperature control switches
“COMFORT” switch
Fan speed decrease switch
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch
“OFF” switch
Left-hand side temperature control switches

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 314 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Adjusting the temperature

: Air flows to the upper body
setting
: Air flows to the upper body
Press of the temperature and feet
control switches on the air con-
: Air flows to the feet
ditioning control panel to
increase the temperature. : Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates
Press of the temperature
■ Switching between outside
control switches on the air con- air and recirculated air
ditioning control panel to modes
decrease the temperature. Select the outside/recirculated
If the switch is pressed and held or air mode switch on the air condi-
selected and held, the temperature tioning control screen.
will continuously change.
The mode switches between out-
If the “A/C” indicator is turned off, side air mode and recirculated air
the system will blow ambient tem- mode each time the switch is
perature air or heated air. (P.319) selected.
■ Setting the fan speed When recirculated air mode is
Press the fan speed increase selected, the indicator illuminates
on the outside/recirculated air
switch on the air conditioning
mode switch.
control panel to increase the fan
speed. ■ Set cooling and dehumidifi-
cation function
Press the fan speed decrease
switch on the air conditioning Select the “A/C” switch on the
control panel to decrease the air conditioning control screen.
fan speed. When the function is on, the indica-
tor illuminates on the “A/C” switch.
Press the “OFF” switch on the air
conditioning control panel to turn ■ Eco air conditioning mode
the fan off. The air conditioning is controlled
■ Change the airflow mode with low fuel consumption priori-
Select the airflow mode control tized such as reducing fan
switch on the air conditioning speed, etc.
control screen. Select the eco air conditioning
The airflow mode changes each mode switch on the air condi-
time the switch is selected. tioning control screen.
When the eco air conditioning

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 315
mode is on, the indicator illumi- rear view mirror defoggers switch is
nates on the eco air conditioning on, the indicator illuminates on the
mode switch. rear window and outside rear view
■ Defogging the windshield mirror defoggers switch.

Defoggers are used to defog the ■ When the outside temperature

windshield and front side win- exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air
dows. conditioning system is on
● In order to reduce the air condi-
Press the windshield defogger tioning power consumption, the air
switch on the air conditioning conditioning system may switch to
control panel. recirculated air mode automati-
cally.
Set the outside/recirculated air This may also reduce fuel con-
mode switch to outside air mode if sumption.
the recirculated air mode is used. (It ● Recirculated air mode is selected
may switch automatically.) as a default mode when the power
switch is turned to ON.
To defog the windshield and the
● It is possible to switch to outside
side windows quickly, turn the air air mode at any time by selecting
flow and temperature up. the outside/recirculated air mode
switch.
To return to the previous mode,
press the windshield defogger ■ Fogging up of the windows
switch again when the windshield is ● The windows will easily fog up
defogged. when the humidity in the vehicle is
high. Turning the cooling and 6
When the windshield defogger dehumidification function on will
switch is on, the indicator illumi- dehumidify the air from the outlets
Interior features
nates on the windshield defogger and defog the windshield effec-
switch. tively.
● If you turn the cooling and dehu-
■ Defogging the rear window midification function off, the win-
and outside rear view mir- dows may fog up more easily.
rors ● The windows may fog up if the
recirculated air mode is used.
Defoggers are used to defog the
■ When driving on dusty roads
rear window and to remove rain-
Close all windows. If dust thrown up
drops, dew and frost from the by the vehicle is still drawn into the
outside rear view mirrors. vehicle after closing the windows, it
is recommended that the air intake
Press the rear window and out- mode be set to outside air mode and
side rear view mirror defoggers the fan speed to any setting except
switch on the air conditioning off.
control panel. ■ Outside/recirculated air mode
The defoggers will automatically ● Setting to the recirculated air
mode temporarily is recom-
turn off after 15 minutes. mended in preventing dirty air
When the rear window and outside from entering the vehicle interior

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 316 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

and helping to cool the vehicle air conditioning system. This may
when the outside air temperature then cause odor to be emitted
is high. from the vents.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may ● In order to suppress odors that
automatically switch depending on occur when the air conditioning
the temperature setting or the system starts, the air flow mode
inside temperature. may change to blow air to the feet
or air may stop blowing for a short
■ When the outside temperature
period of time immediately after
falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
the air conditioning system is
The dehumidification function may started in automatic mode.
not operate even when “A/C” switch
● When parking, the system auto-
is selected. matically switches to outside air
■ Operation of the air condition- mode to encourage better air cir-
ing system in Eco drive mode culation throughout the vehicle,
● In Eco drive mode, the air condi- helping to reduce odors that occur
tioning system is controlled as fol- when starting the vehicle.
lows to prioritize fuel efficiency: ■ Air conditioning filter
• Fuel cell system and compressor
P.401
operation controlled to restrict
heating/cooling capacity ■ Air conditioning system refrig-
• Fan speed restricted when auto- erant
matic mode is selected ● A label regarding the refrigerant of
● To improve air conditioning perfor- the air conditioning system is
mance, perform the following attached to the hood at the loca-
operations: tion shown in the following illustra-
• Adjust the fan speed tion.
• Turn off Eco drive mode (P.301)
• Turn off Eco air conditioning mode
● When the driving mode is set to
Eco drive mode, the Eco air condi-
tioning mode will be turned on
automatically. Even in this case,
the Eco air conditioning mode can
be turned off by selecting the Eco
air conditioning mode switch.
■ When cleaning the air condi-
tioning control panel
Touch switches may respond when ● The meaning of each symbol on
cleaning. Turn the power switch to the label are as follows:
OFF before proceeding with clean-
ing. Caution
■ Ventilation and air conditioning
odors Air conditioning sys-
● To let fresh air in, set the air condi- tem
tioning system to the outside air
mode. Air conditioning sys-
● During use, various odors from tem lubricant type
inside and outside the vehicle may
enter into and accumulate in the

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 317

Requires registered 2 Adjust the temperature set-

technician to service ting.
air conditioning sys- 3 To stop the operation, press
tem
the “OFF” switch on the air
conditioning control panel.
Flammable refrigerant
If the fan speed setting or air
■ Customization flow modes are operated, the
Some functions can be customized. automatic mode indicator goes
(Customizable features: P.494) off. However, automatic mode
for functions other than that
WARNING operated is maintained.
■ To prevent the windshield
from fogging up ■ Using automatic mode
Do not use the windshield defog- Fan speed is adjusted automati-
ger switch during cool air opera- cally according to the temperature
tion in extremely humid weather. setting and the ambient conditions.
The difference between the tem-
perature of the outside air and Therefore, the fan may stop for a
that of the windshield can cause while until warm or cool air is ready
the outer surface of the wind- to flow immediately after the auto-
shield to fog up, blocking your matic mode switch is pressed.
vision.
■ When the outside rear view
Adjusting the temperature
6
mirror defoggers are operat- for driver and passenger
ing seats simultaneously
Interior features
Do not touch the rear view mirror (“SYNC” mode)
surfaces when the outside rear
view mirror defoggers are on.
To turn on the “SYNC” mode,
select the “SYNC” switch on the
NOTICE air conditioning control screen.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- The driver’s side temperature con-
charge
trol switches can be used to adjust
Do not leave the air conditioning the temperature for the driver’s and
system on longer than necessary
passenger’s side. To enter individ-
when the fuel cell system is off.
ual mode, operate the passenger’s
side temperature control switches
Using automatic mode or select the “SYNC” switch again.

1 Press the “AUTO” switch on When the “SYNC” mode is on, the
indicator illuminates on the “SYNC”
the air conditioning control
switch.
panel.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 318 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Front seat concentrated  Indicator off: Airflow to the all

seats
airflow mode (S-FLOW)
This function automatically con- ■ Operation of automatic airflow
control
trols the air conditioning airflow
so that priority is given to the ● In order to maintain a comfortable
interior, airflow may be directed to
front seats. seats without passengers immedi-
ately after the fuel cell system is
Unnecessary air conditioning is started and at other times depend-
suppressed, contributing to ing on the outside temperature.
increased fuel efficiency. ● After the fuel cell system is
started, if passengers move
Front seat concentrated airflow around inside or enter/exit the
mode operates in the following vehicle, the system cannot accu-
situations. rately detect the presence of pas-
sengers and automatic airflow
 No passengers are detected control will not operate.
in the rear seats ■ Operation of manual airflow
control
 The windshield defogger is
Even if the function is manually
not operating switched to directing airflow to only
the front seats, when a rear seat is
While operating, illumi- occupied, it may automatically direct
airflow to all seats.
nates. ■ To return to automatic airflow
control
■ Manually turning front seat
1 With the indicator off, turn the
concentrated airflow mode power switch to OFF.
on/off 2 After 60 minutes or more elapse,
turn the power switch to ON.
In front seat concentrated air-
flow mode, directing airflow to
Air conditioning control
the front seats only and to all
seats can be switched via switch screen
operation. When the mode has ■ Display procedure
been switched manually, auto-
matic airflow control stops oper- 1 Touch on the main menu
ating. on the multimedia display.
2 Touch “Climate” on the sub
Touch on the air condition- menu.
ing airflow control screen of the
multimedia display.
 Indicator illuminated: Airflow
to the front seats only

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 319
3 Select any screen.
: Air flows to the feet

: Air flows to the feet and the

windshield defogger operates
Turns each function on/off
Each time the switch is touched,
the function turns on/off.
When the function is on, the indica-
tor on the switch illuminates.
Displays the front air condi-
“A/C”: Cooling and dehumidification
tioning control screen.
function (P.314)
Displays the option control “SYNC”: “SYNC” mode (P.317)
screen.
■ Air conditioning control : Front seat concentrated air-
screen flow mode (S-FLOW) (P.318)
When the “CLIMATE” switch on
the air conditioner control panel : Outside/recirculated air
is pressed, the screen switches mode (P.312)
as shown below. Fan speed display 6
Setting of the fan speed is dis-
played.
■ Option control screen Interior features

The functions can be switched

(ON) and (OFF).

Select the air flow mode LV

Each time the switch is touched,

the air flow mode changes.

: Air flows to the upper body

: Air flows to the upper body ALL AUTO mode* (P.312)

and feet
Eco air conditioning mode
(P.316)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 320 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Windshield wiper de-icer* Air outlet layout and oper-

(P.320) ations
*
: If equipped
■ Location of air outlets

Windshield wiper de-icer The air outlets and air volume

change according to the
(if equipped)
selected air flow mode.
This feature is used to prevent
ice from building up on the wind-
shield and wiper blades.
The functions can be switched
(ON) and (OFF).
Touch Windshield wiper de-icer
on the multimedia display.
The indicator comes on when the ■ Adjusting the air flow direc-
system is on.
tion and opening/closing
The windshield wiper de-icer will the air outlets
automatically turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.  Front

LV

1 Direct air flow to the left or

Windshield wiper de-icer
right, up or down
WARNING 2 Open the vent
■ To prevent burns 3 Close the vent
Do not touch the glass at lower
part of the windshield or to the
side of the front pillars when the
windshield wiper deicer is on.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 321
 Rear Heated steering
wheel*/seat heaters
*: If equipped
 Heated steering wheel
Warms up the grip of the
steering wheel
 Front seat heaters
Warm up the seat upholstery
1 Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down WARNING
2 Open the vent
■ To prevent minor burn inju-
3 Close the vent ries
Care should be taken if anyone in
WARNING the following categories comes in
■ To not interrupt the wind- contact with the steering wheel or
shield defogger from operat- seats when the heater is on:
ing ● Babies, small children, the
Do not place anything on the elderly, the sick and the physi-
instrument panel which may cover cally challenged
the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow
may be obstructed, preventing the ● Persons with sensitive skin 6
windshield defoggers from defog-
ging. ● Persons who are fatigued

Interior features
● Persons who have taken alco-
hol or drugs that induce sleep
(sleeping drugs, cold remedies,
etc.)

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
seat heaters
Do not put heavy objects that
have an uneven surface on the
seat and do not stick sharp
objects (needles, nails, etc.) into
the seat.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
Do not use the functions when the
fuel cell system is off.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 322 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Customization
Operating instructions
Some functions can be customized.
■ Front air conditioner con- (P.494)
trols
WARNING
Press the “COMFORT” switch
■ To prevent overheating and
on the air conditioner control minor burn injuries
panel. Observe the following precautions
when using the seat heaters.
● Do not cover the seat with a
blanket or cushion when using
the seat heater.
● Do not use seat heater more
than necessary.

Adjust the seat heater tem-

perature level
The seat heater can be adjusted in
3 levels. (Low, Mid or Hi)
Adjust the heated steering
wheel temperature level
The heated steering wheel can be
adjusted in 2 levels. (Low or Hi)
AUTO control switch
When the AUTO control is on, the
indicator illuminates on the screen.
(P.312)

■ The heated steering wheel, seat

heaters can be used when
The power switch is in ON.
■ When the air conditioning sys-
tem is operating in S-FLOW
mode
If a passenger is not detected in the
passenger seat, the seat heater of
the passenger’s seat will be turned
off if on. (P.318)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-2. Using the interior lights 323

Interior lights list

[Link] the interior lights

Location of the interior lights

Door trim ornament lights (P.324) 6

Rear personal lights (P.324)

Inside door handle lights (P.324) Interior features

Front personal lights (P.324)

Shift lever lights
Interior lights (P.324)
Outer foot lights
Front footwell lights
Instrument panel ornament lights (P.324)
Cup holder lights (P.324)
Rear footwell lights (if equipped)
Door courtesy lights

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 324 6-2. Using the interior lights

Operating the interior

lights
■ Turning the door position
on
Press the door-linked interior
light switch
The lights are turned on and off
according to whether the doors are
opened/closed. Operating the rear per-
sonal lights
■ Turning the lights on/off
Press the switch
The rear personal lights turn on/off
along with the interior lights.

■ Turning the lights on/off

Touch the light
The rear personal lights turn on/off
along with the interior lights.

Changing the illumina-

tion color
Using the multimedia display,
the color and brightness of the
interior lights in the vehicle can
be changed.
Operating the front per-  Inside door handle lights
sonal lights  Door trim ornament lights
■ Turning the lights on/off  Cup holder lights
Touch the light  Instrument panel ornament
lights
1 Select .

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-2. Using the interior lights 325
2 Select “Illumination”. depending on the force of the
impact and conditions of the colli-
3 Select the desired color. sion.)
■ Using the voice control system
■ Illuminated entry system Interior lights can be operated using
The lights automatically turn on/off the voice control system. For details
according to the power switch regarding the voice control system,
mode, the presence of the elec- refer to the “MULTIMEDIA
tronic key, whether the doors are OWNER’S MANUAL”.
locked/unlocked, and whether the
doors are open/closed. ■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
■ Power saving function (Customizable features: P.484)
Under the following situations,
unlocking the vehicle with the smart
key system may take some time. In NOTICE
addition, the illumination lights may ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
not turn on. charge
● The electronic key was left within Do not leave the lights on longer
approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) out- than necessary when the fuel cell
side the vehicle for more than 20 system is off.
seconds.
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery ■ Removing light lenses
from being discharged Never remove the lens for the
If the interior lights remain on when interior lights and front personal
the power switch is turned off, the lights. Otherwise, the lights will be
lights will go off automatically after damaged. If a lens needs to be
removed, contact your Toyota 6
20 minutes.
dealer.
■ When the interior lights or front
Interior features
personal lights do not respond
as normal
● When water, dirt, etc., have
adhered to the lens surface
● When operated with a wet hand
● When wearing gloves, etc.
■ Automatic illumination of the
interior lights
If any of the SRS airbags deploy
(inflate) or in the event of a strong
rear impact, the interior lights will
turn on automatically. The interior
lights will turn off automatically after
approximately 20 minutes.
The interior lights can be turned off
manually. However, in order to help
prevent further collisions, it is rec-
ommended that they be left on until
safety can be ensured. (The interior
lights may not turn on automatically

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 326 6-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features

[Link] the storage features

Location of the storage features

Auxiliary box (P.328)

Cup holders (P.327)
Console box (P.327)
Glove box (P.326)

WARNING ● Lighters or spray cans may

explode. If they come into con-
■ Items that should not be left tact with other stored items, the
in the storage spaces lighter may catch fire or the
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray can may release gas,
spray cans in the storage spaces, causing a fire hazard.
as this may cause the following
when cabin temperature becomes
high: Glove box
● Glasses may be deformed by Pull up the lever to open.
heat or cracked if they come
into contact with other stored
items.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-3. Using the storage features 327
 Rear
Press in and release the button.

1 Unlock with the mechanical

key
2 Lock with the mechanical key
WARNING
■ Glove box light ■ Items unsuitable for the cup
The glove box light turns on when holder
the tail lights are on. Do not place anything other than
■ Trunk opener main switch cups or beverage cans in the cup
holders. Inappropriate items must
The trunk opener main switch is not be stored in the cup holders
located in the glove box. (P.128) even if the lid is closed.
Other items may be thrown out of
WARNING the holders in the event of an
accident or sudden braking and
■ Caution while driving cause injury. If possible, cover hot
drinks to prevent burns. 6
Keep the glove box closed. In the
event of sudden braking or sud- ■ When not in use
den swerving, an accident may
occur due to an occupant being Keep the cup holders closed. Interior features
struck by the open glove box or Injuries may result in the event of
the items stored inside. an accident or sudden braking.

Cup holders Console box

 Front Press a button to open the con-

sole box.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 328 6-3. Using the storage features

WARNING Trunk features

■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed. Luggage mats
Injuries may result in the event of
an accident or sudden braking.  Side covers
Lift the side covers and remove it.
Auxiliary box  Type A
Push in and release the auxiliary
box.
This box is useful for temporarily
storing the small items.

 Type B

WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not leave the auxiliary box
open while driving.
Items may fall out and cause
death or serious injury in case of
an accident or sudden stop.  Luggage mat
■ Items unsuitable for storing 1 Pull the strap upwards and lift
Do not store items heavier than up the luggage mat.
0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary
box to open and the items inside
may fall out, resulting in an acci-
dent.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-3. Using the storage features 329
2 Lift the luggage mat until it
engages with the hook.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
hook for the luggage mat
Do not hang a grocery bag or any
other object from the hook.

Warning reflector
 Type A
The warning reflector can be
stowed underneath the luggage 6
mat.

Interior features

 Type B
Using a belt to hold a warning
reflector on the luggage mat.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 330 6-4. Using the other interior features

Other interior features

[Link] the other interior features

USB Type-C charging

ports
The USB Type-C charging ports
are used to supply 3 A of elec-
tricity at 5 V to external devices.
The USB Type-C charging ports
are for charging only. They are ■ The USB Type-C charging ports
can be used when
not designed for data transfer or
The power switch is in ACC or ON,
other purposes. or the multimedia system is on.
Depending on the external
■ Situations in which the USB
device, it may not charge prop- Type-C charging ports may not
erly. Refer to the manual operate correctly
included with the device before ● If a device which consumes more
using a USB charging port. than 3 A at 5 V is connected
● If a device designed to communi-
■ Using the USB Type-C cate with a personal computer,
charging ports such as a USB memory device, is
connected
 In the console box ● If the connected external device is
Open the console box. turned off (depending on device)
● If the temperature inside the vehi-
cle is high, such as after the vehi-
cle has been parked in the sun
■ About connected external
devices
Depending on the connected exter-
nal device, charging may occasion-
ally be suspended and then start
again. This is not a malfunction.

NOTICE
 Rear of the console box
■ To prevent damage to the
Open the lid. USB Type-C charging ports
● Do not insert foreign objects into
the ports.
● Do not spill water or other liq-
uids into the ports.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 331

NOTICE website.
● When the USB Type-C charging [Link]
ports are not in use, close the [Link]/
lids. If a foreign object or liquid
enters a port may cause a short This function cannot be used
circuit. with portable devices that can-
● Do not apply excessive force to not be placed on the wireless
or impact the USB Type-C charger. Also, depending on the
charging ports. portable device, it may not oper-
● Do not disassemble or modify ate as normal. Please read the
the USB Type-C charging ports. operation manual for portable
■ To prevent damage to exter- devices to be used.
nal devices
■ The “Qi” logo
● Do not leave external devices in
the vehicle. The temperature The “Qi” logo is a trademark of
inside the vehicle may become the Wireless Power Consortium.
high, resulting in damage to an
external device.
● Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary force to an exter-
nal device or the cable of an
external device while it is con-
nected.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- 6
charge
■ Name for all parts
Do not use the USB Type-C
charging ports for a long period of Interior features
time with the fuel cell system
stopped.

Wireless charger
A portable device can be
charged by just placing Qi stan-
dard wireless charge compatible
portable devices according to
the Wireless Power Consortium,
such as smartphones and
mobile batteries, etc., on the
charge area. Operation indicator light
The compatible portable devices Charge area*
can be found on the following
Wireless Power Consortium Charging tray

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 332 6-4. Using the other interior features

Approximately 3.9 in. (10 cm)

Approximately 1.0 in. (2.5
cm)
*
: Portable devices and wireless
chargers contain charging coils.
The charging coil in the wireless
charger can be moved within the
charge area up to the position of
the charging coil inside a portable ■ Recharging function
device. Charging is possible if the
 When charging is complete
center of the coil of the portable
device is placed within the charge and after a fixed time in the
area. If 2 or more portable charge suspension state,
devices are placed on the wire- charging restarts.
less charger, their charging coils  When a portable device is
may not be properly detected and
moved significantly in the
they may not be charged.
charge area, the charging coil
■ Using the wireless charger is disconnected and charging
Place the portable device on the is stopped momentarily. How-
wireless charger. ever, if there is a charging coil
Place the charging side of the por- in the charge area, the
table device against the wireless charging coil inside the wire-
charger with the center of the less charger will move toward
device in the center of the wireless it and then charging restarts.
charger. When charging, the opera- If the portable device is
tion indicator light (orange) on the moved to somewhere outside
wireless charger comes on. If
of the charge area, charging
charging is not occurring, refer to
“Situations in which the function
will stop. Place the portable
may not operate normally” device near the center of the
(P.337). When charging is com- charge area.
plete, the operation indicator light ■ Rapid charging function
(green) on the wireless charger
comes on.  The following portable
devices support rapid
charging.
• Portable devices compliant with
WPC Ver.1.3.2 and compatible
with rapid charging
• iPhone’s with an iOS version that
supports 7.5 W charging (iPhone

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 333
8 and later models)  When a portable device that
• Portable devices compatible with supports rapid charging is
Galaxy original rapid charging charged, charging automati-
standard cally switches to the rapid
charging function.
■ Lighting conditions of operation indicator light

Operation indicator light

Wireless char- Multimedia Dis- Conditions
ger side play side

Green (comes On Standby (charging possible state)*1

Gray
on)
When charging is complete*2
Orange (comes
Blue Charging
on)
*1
: Charging power will not be output during standby. A metallic object will
not be heated, if it is placed on the wireless charger in this state.
*2
: Depending on the portable device, there are cases where the operation
indicator light will continue being lit up orange even after the charging is
complete.
6

Interior features

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 334 6-4. Using the other interior features

■ When the wireless charger does not operate properly

When the wireless charger does not operate properly, handle the
probable cause based on the following tables.
Operation indicator light
Wireless char- Multimedia Dis- Suspected causes/Handling method
ger side play side
Vehicle to wireless charger communica-
tion failure
Orange (Flash-
 If the fuel cell system is operating,
ing repeatedly
Gray stop and then restart the fuel cell
once every
system.
second)
If the power switch is in ACC, start the
fuel cell system. (P.160)
Wireless charger and multimedia system
communication failure
Green (Flash-
 If the fuel cell system is operating,
ing repeatedly
Disappear stop and then restart the fuel cell
once every
system.
second)
If the power switch is in ACC, start the
fuel cell system. (P.160)
AM radio stations are being automatically
selected
 Wait until the system has completed
the automatic selection of AM radio
stations. In the case that automatic
Green (comes selection cannot be completed, stop
Blue
on) automatic selection.
The smart key system is detecting the
electronic key.
 Wait until electronic key detection
has completed.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 335

Operation indicator light

Wireless char- Multimedia Dis- Suspected causes/Handling method
ger side play side
Foreign substance detection:
The abnormal heating prevention func-
tion for foreign substances operated due
to the presence of a metallic foreign sub-
stance in the charge area
 Remove the foreign substance from
the charge area.
Portable device misaligned/distanced
from charging surface:
The center of charging coil in the portable
device moved outside of the charging
area, or lens convex is large, or case is
thick so the abnormal heating prevention
function operated
 Remove the portable device from
the wireless charger, after 5 sec-
Green (comes onds, then place the portable device
Gray so that it is near the center of the
on)
wireless charger. Also, if a case or 6
cover is installed to the portable
device, remove it.
Battery protection function of portable Interior features
device:
Before full charging, battery protection
function of portable device operated
 Confirm the setting of portable
device.
Continued detection of an electronic key:
When a Multimedia function is used
through vehicle customization, the elec-
tronic key is continually detected without
being confirmed
 In this case, turn the power switch
in ACC or ON to confirm the key.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 336 6-4. Using the other interior features

Operation indicator light

Wireless char- Multimedia Dis- Suspected causes/Handling method
ger side play side
Safety shutdown resulting when the tem-
perature within the wireless charger
Orange
exceeded the set value
(Repeatedly
flashes 4 times
Gray  Stop charging, remove the portable
continuously) device from the wireless charger,
wait for the temperature to drop,
and then start charging again.

the electronic key is detected,

■ The wireless charger can be charging will automatically start
operated when again.
The power switch is in ACC or ON, ■ When covers and accessories
or the multimedia system is on. are attached to portable devices
■ Usable portable devices Do not charge in situations where
● Qi standard wireless charge stan- cover and accessories not able to
dard can be used on compatible handle Qi are attached to the porta-
devices. However, compatibility ble device. Depending on the type
with portable devices that comply of cover (including for certain genu-
with Qi Ver. 1.0, 1.3.2 and later ine manufacturer parts) and acces-
versions is not guaranteed. sory, it may not be possible to
charge. When charging is not per-
● Starting with mobile phones and formed even with the portable
smartphones, it is aimed for low device placed on the charge area,
power electrically supplied porta- remove the cover and accessories.
ble devices of no more than 5W.
■ Operation when AM radio is
● However, charging exceeding 5 W being received
is supported by the following por-
table devices. ● During charging, if noise occurs
• Charging at 10 W or less is sup- when listening to the AM radio,
ported by Galaxy device that sup- the charging frequency is auto-
port 10 W charging of original matically changed to reduce the
standard. noise.
• Charging at 7.5 W or less is sup- ● Rapid charging may not be per-
ported by iPhone’s that support formed as AM radio reception is
7.5 W charging. prioritized during rapid charging.
• Charging at 15 W or less is sup-
ported by portable devices compli- ● When automatically seeking AM
ant with EPP output as defined by radio stations, charging will be
WPC standard Ver.1.3.2. suspended to prevent charging
noise from being detected as a
■ Using the smart key system radio station. Charging will
Charging will be suspended for the resume automatically when seek
smart key system to detect the elec- tuning is stopped.
tronic key during charging such as ■ Important points of the wire-
when the electronic key has been less charger
brought outside the vehicle. When
● If the electronic key cannot be

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 337
detected within the vehicle inte- foldable type is placed in an area
rior, charging cannot be done. misaligned from the charge area
When the door is opened and ● The portable device is larger than
closed, charging may be tempo- the charging tray
rarily suspended.
● The vehicle is in an area where
● When charging, the wireless strong electrical waves or noise
charging device and portable are emitted, such as near a televi-
device will get warmer, however sion tower, power plant, gasoline
this is not a malfunction. station, broadcasting station, large
When a portable device gets display, airport, etc.
warm while charging, charging
may stop due to the protection ● The electronic key is not inside the
function on the portable device vehicle
side. In this case, when the tem- ● Any of the following objects is
perature of the portable device stuck or installed between the
drops significantly, charge again. charging side of the portable
The fan may start operating to lower device and the charge area.
the temperature inside the wireless • Thick cases or covers
charger, however this is not a mal- • A case or cover attached with an
function. uneven or tilted surface, so that
the charging side is not flat
■ Operation sounds • Thick decorations
A buzzing noise may be heard when • Accessories, such as finger rings,
pressing the power switch to turn to straps, etc.
ACC or ON or when detecting a por- ● When there is a gap between the
table device. However, this is not a charging side of the portable
malfunction. device and the charge area due to
■ Cleaning the wireless charger a protrusion such as a camera on 6
the charging side of the portable
P.362 device.
■ Situations in which the function
Interior features
● When the portable device is in
may not operate normally contact with, or is covered by any
Devices may not be charged nor- of the following metallic objects:
mally in the following situations. • A card that has metal on it, such
as aluminum foil, etc.
● The portable device is fully
• A pack of cigarettes that includes
charged aluminum foil
● The portable device is being • A wallet or bag that is made of
charged with a cable connected metal
● There is foreign matter between • Coins
the charge area and portable • A heating pad
device • CDs, DVDs or other media
• A metal accessory
● Charging has caused the portable • A case or cover made of metal
device to heat up • A flip type case with a magnet on
● The temperature around the wire- the charging side of the portable
less charger is 95°F (35°C) or device
higher, such as in extreme heat ● Electric wave type wireless
● The portable device is placed with remote controls are being used
its charging side away from the nearby
wireless charger ● 2 or more portable devices are
● The small portable device such as placed on the wireless charger at

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 338 6-4. Using the other interior features

the same time ■ Caution regarding interfer-

● If you use a device with a built-in ence with electronic devices
S-Pen (Galaxy Note series, etc.) People with implantable cardiac
and the device with the S-Pen pacemakers, cardiac resynchroni-
inserted is on the tray. zation therapy-pacemakers or
If charging is abnormal or the opera- implantable cardioverters, as well
tion indicator light continues to flash as any other electrical medical
for any other reason, the wireless device, should consult their physi-
charger may be malfunctioning. cian about the usage of the wire-
Contact your Toyota dealer. less charger.
■ If the smartphone OS has been ■ To prevent malfunctions or
updated burns
If the smartphone OS has been Observe the following precau-
updated to a newer version, its tions.
charging specifications may have Failure to do so may result in a
changed significantly. For details, equipment failure and damage,
check the information on the manu- catch fire, burns due to overheat
facturer’s website. or electric shock.
■ Trademark information ● Do not insert any metallic
objects between the charge
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., area and the portable device
registered in the U.S.A. and other while charging
countries.
Galaxy is a trademark or registered ● Do not store items on the wire-
trademark of Samsung Electronics less charger instead of in an
Co.,Ltd. auxiliary box
■ Certification ● Do not perform charging if the
P.539 charging area is dirty
● Do not attach an aluminum
WARNING sticker or other metallic object to
the charge area
■ Caution while driving
When charging a portable device, ● Do not attach an aluminum
for safety reasons, the driver sticker or other metallic object to
should not operate the main part the side of the portable device
of the portable device while driv- (or to its case or cover) that
ing. touches the charge area

■ Precautions for when driving ● Do not subject to a strong force

or impact
Do not charge small, lightweight
portable devices, such as wireless ● Do not disassemble, modify or
earbuds, while driving. Light- remove
weight devices may fly off of the
charging tray, possibly leading to ● Do not charge devices other
an accident. than specified portable devices
● Keep away from magnetic items
● Do not cover with a cloth or sim-
ilar material

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 339

NOTICE
■ To prevent malfunctions and
data corruptions
● When charging, bringing a
credit, or other magnetic card,
or magnetic storage media
close to the charge area may
clear any stored data due to
magnetic influence. Also, do not
bring a wristwatch or other pre-
cision instrument close to the NOTICE
charge area since doing so may
cause it to malfunction. ■ To prevent damage to the
armrest
● Do not charge with a non-con-
tact IC card such as a transpor- Do not place too much strain on
tation system IC card inserted the armrest.
between the charging side of a
portable device and the charge
area. The IC chip may become Assist grips
extremely hot and damage the
portable device or IC card. Be An assist grip installed on the
especially careful not to charge ceiling can be used to support
a portable device inside a case
or cover with a non-contact IC your body while sitting on the
card attached. seat.
● Do not leave portable devices 6
inside the vehicle. The inside of
the vehicle can become hot in
extreme heat, which could
cause a malfunction. Interior features
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
Do not use the wireless charger
for a long period of time when the
fuel cell system is stopped.
WARNING
Armrest ■ Assist grip
Do not use the assist grip when
Pull the armrest down for use. getting in or out of the vehicle or
rising from your seat.
Doing so could damage the assist
grip, or could cause you to injure
yourself by falling over.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 340 6-4. Using the other interior features

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or
put a heavy load on the assist
grip.

Coat hooks

■ The power outlet can be used

when
The power switch is in ACC or ON,
or the multimedia system is on.
■ When stopping the fuel cell sys-
tem
Disconnect electrical devices with
charging functions, such as mobile
battery packs. If such devices are
left connected, the fuel cell system
WARNING may not stop normally.
■ Items that must not be hung
on the hook NOTICE
Do not hang a coat hanger or ■ To avoid damaging the power
other hard or sharp object on the outlet
hook. If the SRS curtain shield air- Close the power outlet lid when
bags deploy, these items may the power outlet is not in use.
become projectiles that cause Foreign objects or liquids that
death or serious injury. enter the power outlet may cause
a short circuit.
Power outlet (12 VDC) ■ To prevent the fuse from
being blown
The power outlet can be used Do not use an accessory that
for 12 V accessories that run on uses more than 12 V 10 A.
less than 10 A.
Open the console box and open
the lid.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 341

NOTICE
region in advance. Also, be
careful not to drag electrical
■ To prevent incorrect opera-
tion of the vehicle devices and cords when moving
When turning the power switch
the vehicle.
off, make sure to disconnect
accessories designed for
charging, such as portable char- Precautions for using the
gers, power banks, etc., from the power outlet while parked
power outlet.
If such an accessory is left con- Observe the following precau-
nected, the following may occur: tions before starting the power
● The doors cannot be locked supply:
using the smart key system or
wireless remote control.  Park the vehicle in a well-ven-
tilated area, avoiding loca-
● The opening screen will be dis-
played on the multi-information tions with poor ventilation
display. such as garages, as the fuel
● The interior lights, instrument cell system may start while
panel lights, etc., will illuminate. the system is operating.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-  Park the vehicle on a solid
charge and level place.
Do not use the power outlet lon-
ger than necessary when the fuel Block the wheels as needed.
cell system is off.  Check that the hood is closed. 6

 Check that the fuel door is

Power outlets (120 closed. Interior features
VAC/1500W) (if equipped)  Check that the parking brake
This system allows the use of is engaged.
electrical devices with a total  Check that the shift position is
power consumption of 1500W at in P.
120 VAC in the vehicle. Supply-  Check that the power switch
ing power to electrical devices is off.
outside the vehicle is not recom-
mended, as it may violate the  Note that the alarm system
laws and regulations of the cannot be enabled during the
country or region where it is power supply. For theft pre-
used. When supplying power to vention, do not leave valuable
electrical devices outside the items, etc. in the cabin or lug-
vehicle, check the laws and reg- gage compartment.
ulations with the relevant local
government of each country or

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 342 6-4. Using the other interior features

Names of parts Power outlet (luggage com-

partment)

Using the power outlet

(1500 W)
■ When turning the power
outlet on
1 Check that the parking brake
is engaged, securely depress
the brake pedal and press
the power switch (P.160).
2 Check that the READY indi-
cator is illuminated, and
press the AC 120 V switch.
The power outlet can be used when
the indicator on the AC 120 V
switch is illuminated.
The power outlet is turned off/on
each time the AC 120 V switch is
pressed.

3 Open the lid, and fully and

securely insert the plug of the
device into the power outlet.
(P.343)
■ Stopping the use of the
power outlets (1500 W)
AC 120 V switch Follow the procedure described
below:
Power switch (P.160)
1 Turn the connected devices
Power outlet (rear console) off.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 343
2 Press the AC 120 V switch to version adapter.
turn the power outlet off.
3 Disconnect each plug from
the power outlet.
4 Close the lid of the power
outlet.

Connecting a device
■ When connecting a device
■ Power outlet
Make sure to read the instruc-
● With these power outlet, use
tion manual which came with a devices which operate on 120
device and observe warnings on VAC and have a combined maxi-
the device. mum power consumption of 1500
W or less. If a device is connected
Before connecting a device to and the power consumption is
the power outlet, make sure that exceeded, a protection circuit may
be activated and the power supply
the device is turned off. function may be stopped.
1 Open the lid, and fully and ● Some of the devices that con-
securely insert the plug of the sume a large amount of power,
device into the power outlet. such as an electric grille, may
require the exclusive use of the 6
Do not leave the plug halfway power outlet. When such a device
inserted. is connected, do not connect other
device(s) to the power outlet.
Interior features
In the following situations, use
● When multiple devices are con-
cable extension, etc. and con- nected, depending on the device,
nect the plug securely to the a connected device may not oper-
power outlet: ate properly. For such a device,
use exclusively the power outlets.
• When the plug of a device is
● When a power outlet is being
too large to allow it to be used, depending on the device to
inserted fully and securely be used, the current flow may be
into the power outlet. high and the initial peak wattage
may exceed 1500 W.
• When the plug of a device is
● When a power outlet is being
heavy, possibly causing it to used, depending on the device to
come off the power outlet. be used, it may cause interference
with TV and radio broadcasts.
If the device to be used has a
● While a power outlet is being
ground wire, use a conversion used, a cooling fan sound may be
adapter available on the market heard from near a rear seat. This
and connect the ground wire to does not indicate a malfunction.
the ground terminal of the con-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 344 6-4. Using the other interior features

■ Devices which may not operate

properly WARNING
The following devices may not oper- ■ For safe use
ate properly even if the combined Observe the following precau-
power consumption is 1500 W or tions. Failure to do so may lead to
less: an accident, resulting in death or
● Devices with high initial peak watt- serious injury.
age
● Do not allow children or other
● Devices requiring larger amount of people not used to the opera-
power supply than the power con- tion to perform the power supply
sumption specified in its instruc- by themselves.
tion manual
● Measuring devices that process ● Do not disconnect the plug of a
precise data device while your hands are wet
or insert a pin or other object
● Devices that require an extremely into the power outlet. Also, if a
stable power supply liquid or snow is on the power
● Devices that require a constant outlet, dry the outlet before
power supply from the power out- using it.
let, such as a device with a timer.
● Do not attempt to modify, disas-
■ When the power outlet is used semble or repair a power outlet.
while the vehicle is parked or For information on repairs, con-
stopped tact your Toyota dealer.
● The doors cannot be
● Keep the power outlets free of
locked/unlocked using the smart
entry & start system. dust and foreign matter. Also,
make sure to clean the power
● The doors cannot be outlets periodically.
locked/unlocked using an elec-
tronic key. The doors can only be ● Hold the plug body to plug in/out
locked/unlocked using a mechani- of a power outlet. Do not touch
cal key. the plug blades. Do not pull on a
● When a door is opened/closed, a
cord for unplugging, as other-
buzzer may sound or “Key Not wise the plug or cord may be
Detected Check Key Location” damaged.
may be displayed on the multi- ● Stop the use immediately if
information display. Check that an abnormal heat is observed on a
electronic key is carried with you. cord or power outlet. To prevent
● When the vehicle’s surroundings the cord or power outlet from
become dark while supplying becoming hot, observe the fol-
power, the headlights etc. turn on lowing precautions:
automatically. Refer to P.322 for
information about turning off the
lights.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 345

WARNING ● Otherwise, the device may be

further malfunctioning, espe-
• Do not connect 2 or more multi- cially when the outside tem-
point outlet adapters, such as perature is high or low.
dual adapters.
● Devices requiring to be installed
on a level place may not oper-
ate properly.
● Do not use devices, other than
waterproof devices, in a place
where water, such as rain, is
splashed over or where it is
humid.
● Do not use a device that has
been or likely to have been
merged in water or absorbed
water within.
● Do not connect a medical
device, as depending on the
vehicle condition, the power
• When an extension cord reel is supply function may be tempo-
used, make sure to draw the rarily stopped.
whole cord out of the reel.
■ When the power outlets are
● If the device to be used has a used while the vehicle is
ground wire, use a conversion parked or stopped
adapter available on the market 6
● The outlets are designed to be
and connect the ground wire to connected to electric devices,
the ground terminal of the con- such as lighting devices. Do not
version adapter. use them as a generator that Interior features
supplies power to a house, etc.
● If the plug of a device fits Also, when they are to be used
loosely in a power outlet, even on an emergency power supply
though it is fully inserted, device for homes, such as an
replace the power outlet. For exclusive device having con-
information on replacement, nection to an external power
contact your Toyota dealer. source, or a device whose
■ Devices to be connected power supply circuit for external
power source is separate from
● Make sure to read any instruc- electric wiring of power compa-
tion manual which came with a nies, consult with the manufac-
device and observe any warn- turer or a retailer of the device.
ings on the device.
● When using a power outlet,
● Do not connect a device to a make sure to securely engage
power outlet if the device is mal- the parking brake and shift the
functioning or its plug is dam- shift position to P. Otherwise,
aged. the vehicle may move, possibly
leading to an accident.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 346 6-4. Using the other interior features

WARNING ● Make sure that the hood is

closed.
● When using a power outlet, do
not move away from the vehicle. Do not get near or place luggage
near the vicinity of the tailpipe.
● Do not perform charging during
weather when lightning may Also, do not put your head or
occur. Stop supplying power if hands anywhere inside the fuel
lightning is observed during cell unit room, as the cooling fan
power supply. may operate suddenly. Keep
● Do not use the power outlets if hands and clothing (especially a
the vehicle has a vehicle cover tie, scarf, etc.) away from the fan
installed. as they may get caught in a fan.
● Do not use a power outlet when ● Do not stop the vehicle near
the vehicle is parked on a objects which burn easily.
slanted place or a slope. When
a power outlet is being used, do ● Do not use in places where cor-
not move the vehicle or cause it rosive gases or fluids are gener-
to be inclined. ated.

● Observe the following precau- ● Do not use in places where ven-

tions when a connected cord is tilation is poor, such as within
to be brought outside the vehi- garages where there are no air
cle: supply and exhaust ventilation
devices, and places where the
• Take due care for not allowing vehicle is surrounded (places
rain to enter. If the power outlet where snow accumulates, etc.).
is wet with raindrops, dry them
before use. ■ Use of a power outlet while
driving
• Prevent the cord from being ● In situations such as the follow-
caught in the window or door ing, do not use an electric
• Allow slack in a connected cord. device while driving. Also, do
Do not cause it to be extraordi- not use a device if it cannot be
nary tense. secured within the vehicle.
• When a device is likely to dis-
tract the driver and be a hin-
drance to safe driving, such as
a TV, video/DVD player, etc.
• When an inadequately secured
device is likely to fall over in
case of sudden braking or an
accident
• Do not start off the vehicle by • When a device is likely to cause
mistake. fire if it falls or generates heat
● Do not refuel or wash the vehi- • When a device is likely to cause
cle when using a power outlet. burns, such as a toaster, micro-
wave, electric heater, electric
kettle, coffee maker, etc.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 347

WARNING ■ Using the power outlet while

parked or stopped
• When a device is likely to fall
under the pedals and prevent ● Water may leak from the tailpipe
the brake pedal from being while charging. However, this is
depressed, such as a hair dryer, not a malfunction.
AC adapter, mouse, etc.
● Do not use devices which pro- When the power outlet
duce steam while the windows (1500W) cannot be used
are closed. Doing so may cause
the windows to fog up, reducing properly
visibility and making it difficult to
drive safely. Also, the steam When power supply does not
may damage or negatively start, even though the normal
affect other devices. If the
device must be used, stop the procedure is followed, check
vehicle and open the windows each of the following items.
before use.
Correction pro-
Likely cause
cedure
NOTICE
After refueling,
■ To avoid short circuit or mal- drive for a while
function Quantity of fuel
to restore the
Observe the following precau- remaining is low
remaining
tions. Failure to do so may lead to and the remain-
the power outlets not operating charge of the
ing charge of the
correctly or damage to the vehicle traction battery. 6
traction battery is
or a connected device. Then, press the
insufficient
AC 120 V switch
● Do not set a toaster or other
device which generates heat again. Interior features
near the interior components or Move the vehi-
on a seat. Heat may cause
these parts to melt or burn. cle to the shade
or other cooler
● Do not use devices which are location, or use
sensitive to vibration or heat in The traction bat-
the air condition-
the vehicle. These devices may tery becomes
malfunction due to vibration ing to lower the
hot when the
while driving or heat while the temperature
outside tempera-
vehicle is parked in the sun. inside the vehi-
ture is especially
cle. Then, after
● When not using a power outlet, high
make sure to close the lid. If for- waiting for a
eign matter or a liquid enters the while, press the
power outlet, it may cause a AC 120 V switch
malfunction or short circuit. again.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 348 6-4. Using the other interior features

Correction pro- Correction pro-

Likely cause Likely cause
cedure cedure
Drive for a while Disconnect the
or use the air power source
conditioning to plug of the elec-
The traction bat-
raise the tem- trical device and
tery becomes
perature inside Total power con- check that the
cold when the
the vehicle. sumption total power con-
outside tempera-
Then, after wait- exceeds 1500 W sumption does
ture is especially
ing for a while, not exceed 1500
low
press the AC W. Then, press
120 V switch the AC 120 V
again. switch again.
Disconnect the Disconnect the
power source power source
plug of the elec- plug of the elec-
trical device and trical device and
check that the check the follow-
device is not ing items. Then,
Electrical device
malfunctioning. press the AC
does not operate
Then, press the 120 V switch
AC 120 V switch again.
again. Check the • No foreign
Short circuit in
instruction man- matter such as
the power outlet
ual of the electri- a pin has been
cal device. inserted
• No sub-
stances such
as drinking
water, rain, or
snow are
adhered
• No dirt or dust
is adhered

If the power outlet cannot be

used even after performing the
procedures above, have the
vehicle inspected by your Toy-
ota dealer.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 349

Sun visors NOTICE

■ To prevent the 12-volt battery
from being discharged
Do not leave the vanity lights on
for extended periods while the
fuel cell system is off.

1 To set the visor in the forward

position, flip it down.
2 To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
3 To use the side extender,
place the visor in the side
position, then slide it back-
ward.

Vanity mirrors 6

Slide the cover to open.

The vanity light turns on. Interior features

■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-

charge
If the vanity lights remain on when
the power switch is turned off, the
lights will go off automatically after
20 minutes.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 350 6-4. Using the other interior features

Garage door opener

The garage door opener can

be programmed using the
HomeLink® to operate
garage doors, gates, entry
doors, door locks, home
lighting systems, security
systems, and other devices. HomeLink® indicator light
Garage door operation indi-
■ HomeLink® programming pro- cators
cedure
The programming procedures can HomeLink® icon
also be found at the following URL.
Website: [Link]/toyota Illuminates while HomeLink® is
operating.
Buttons

■ Codes stored in the Home-

Link® memory
● The registered codes are not
erased even if the 12-volt battery
cable is disconnected.
● If learning failed when registering
For support, contact customer sup- a different code to a HomeLink®
port at the following. button that already has a code
registered to it, the already regis-
Help Line: 1-800-355-3515 tered code will not be erased.
■ Certification
System components P.540
The HomeLink® wireless control
WARNING
system in your vehicle has 3
buttons which can be pro- ■ When programming a garage
door or other remote control
grammed to operate 3 different device
devices. Refer to the program- The garage door or other device
ming methods on the following may operate, so ensure people
pages to determine the method and objects are out of danger to
prevent potential harm.
which is appropriate for the
device.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 351

WARNING
protection. If this is the case,
you may need a stepladder or
■ Conforming to federal safety
standards other sturdy, safe device to
reach the “Learn” or “Smart”
Do not use the HomeLink® com-
patible transceiver with any button on the garage door
garage door opener or device that opener motor.
lacks safety stop and reverse fea-
tures as required by federal safety ■ Programming HomeLink®
standards.
Steps 1 through 3 must be per-
This includes any garage door
that cannot detect an interfering formed within 60 seconds, oth-
object. A door or device without erwise the indicator light will
these features increases the risk stop flashing and programming
of death or serious injury.
will not be successfully com-
■ When operating or program- pleted.
ming HomeLink®
1 Press and release the Home-
Never allow a child to operate or
play with the HomeLink® buttons. Link® button you want to pro-
gram and check that the
HomeLink® indicator light
Programming the Home-
flashes (orange).
Link®
2 Point the remote control
■ Before programming Home- transmitter for the device at 6
Link® the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in.
(25 to 75 mm) from the
Interior features
 During programming, it is pos-
HomeLink® buttons.
sible that garage doors,
gates, or other devices may Keep the HomeLink® indicator light
operate. For this reason, in view while programming.
make sure that people and
objects are clear of the
garage door or other devices
to prevent injury or other
potential harm.
 It is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the
remote control transmitter for
more accurate programming.
 Garage door opener motors
manufactured after 1995 may
be equipped with rolling code

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 352 6-4. Using the other interior features

3 Program a device. other device should operate

when a HomeLink® button is
pressed and released.
 HomeLink® indicator light
flashes rapidly: The garage
door opener motor or other
device is equipped with a roll-
ing code. To complete pro-
gramming, firmly press and
 Programming a device other hold the HomeLink® button
than an entry gate (for U.S.A. for 2 seconds then release it.
owners)
 If the garage door or other
Press and hold the remote control device does not operate, pro-
transmitter button until the Home- ceed to “Programming a roll-
Link® indicator light changes from ing code system”.
slowly flashing orange to rapidly
flashing green (rolling code) or con- 5 Repeat the steps above to
tinuously lit green (fixed code), then program another device for
release the button. any of the remaining Home-
 Programming an entry gate Link® buttons.
(for U.S.A. owners)/Program- ■ Programming a rolling code
ming a device in the Cana- system
dian market
Two or more people may be
Press and release the remote con- necessary to complete rolling
trol transmitter button at 2 second
code programming.
intervals, repeatedly, until the
1 Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
HomeLink® indicator light changes
from slowly flashing (orange) to button on the garage door
rapidly flashing (green) (rolling opener motor in the garage.
code) or continuously lit (green) This button can usually be found
(fixed code). where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the unit. The name and
4 Test the HomeLink® opera- color of the button may vary by
tion by pressing the newly manufacturer. Refer to the owner’s
manual supplied with the garage
programmed button and
observing the indicator light:
 HomeLink® indicator light illu-
minates: Programming of a
fixed code device has com-
pleted. The garage door or

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 353
door opener motor for details. opener motor recognizes the
HomeLink® signal.

2 Press and release the

“Learn” or “Smart” button.
■ Enabling 2-way communi-
Perform 3 within 30 seconds after cation with a garage door
performing 2.
(only available for compati-
ble devices)
When enabled, 2-way communi-
cation allows you to check the
status of the opening and clos-
ing of a garage door through
indicators in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only 6
available if the garage door
3 Press and hold the desired
opener motor used is a compati-
HomeLink® button (inside the ble device. (To check device Interior features
vehicle) for 2 seconds and compatibility, refer to
release it. Repeat this [Link].)
sequence
1 Within 5 seconds after pro-
(press/hold/release) up to 3
gramming the garage door
times to complete program-
opener has been completed,
ming.
if the garage door opener
If the garage door opener
motor is trained to Home-
motor operates when the
Link®, both garage door
HomeLink® button is
operation indicators will flash
pressed, the garage door
rapidly (green) and the light
on the garage door opener
motor will blink twice, indicat-
ing that 2-way communica-
tion is enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, per-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 354 6-4. Using the other interior features

form 2 and 3 within the first 10 Link® indicator to start flash-

presses of the HomeLink® button ing).
after programming has been com-
pleted.
2 Press a programmed Home- ■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the trans-
Link® button to operate a mitter.
garage door. ● The battery side of the transmitter
3 Within 1 minute of pressing must be pointed away from the
HomeLink® buttons.
the HomeLink® button, after
the garage door operation
has stopped, press the Operating HomeLink®
“Learn” or “Smart” button on Press the appropriate Home-
the garage door opener
motor. Within 5 seconds of Link® button. The HomeLink®
the establishment of 2-way indicator light should turn on.
communication with the The status of the opening and
garage door opener, both closing of a garage door is
garage door operation indica- shown by the indicators.
tors in the vehicle will flash
rapidly (green) and the light
on the garage door opener
motor will blink twice, indicat-
ing that 2-way communica-
tion is enabled.
■ Reprogramming a single
HomeLink® button
When the following procedure is Opening
performed, buttons which
already have devices registered Closing
to them can be overwritten: This function is only available if the
1 Press and hold the desired garage door opener motor used is a
compatible device. (To check
HomeLink® button. device compatibility, refer to
[Link].)
2 When the HomeLink® indica-
tor starts flashing orange,
release the HomeLink® but-
ton and perform “Program-
ming HomeLink®” 1 (it takes
20 seconds for the Home-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 6-4. Using the other interior features 355

Color Status HomeLink® memory.

Orange (flash- Currently open-
ing) ing/closing
Opening/closing
Green
has completed
Feedback sig-
Red (flashing) nals cannot be
received

The indicators can operate

within approximately 820 ft. (250
m) of the garage door. However,
if there are obstructions
between the garage door and
the vehicle, such as houses and
trees, feedback signals from the
garage door may not be
received.
To recall the previous door oper-
ation status, press and release
6
either HomeLink® buttons
and or and simultane-
ously. The last recorded status Interior features
will be displayed for 3 seconds.

Erasing the entire Home-

Link® memory (all three
codes)
Press and hold the 2 outside
buttons for 10 seconds until the
HomeLink® indicator light
changes from continuously lit
(orange) to rapidly flashing
(green).
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 356 6-4. Using the other interior features

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 357

Maintenance and care

7
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle exterior .......... 358
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle interior ........... 362
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
.................................. 365
General maintenance.. 366
7-3. Do-it-yourself mainte-
nance
Do-it-yourself service pre-
cautions..................... 369
Hood ........................... 371
Positioning a floor jack 371
Fuel cell unit compartment
.................................. 373
12-volt battery ............. 378
7
Tires ............................ 381
Replacing the tire ........ 394
Maintenance and care

Tire inflation pressure.. 397

Wheels ........................ 399
Air conditioning filter.... 401
Cleaning the traction battery
air intake vents .......... 402
Electronic key battery.. 405
Checking and replacing
fuses.......................... 407
Headlight aim .............. 411
Light bulbs................... 412

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 358 7-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protect- The restoration time may become

[Link] and care

shorter when the coating is

ing the vehicle exte- warmed by applying warm water.
rior ● Deep scratches caused by keys,
coins, etc. cannot be restored.
Perform cleaning in a man- ● Do not use wax that contains
abrasives.
ner appropriate to each
■ Automatic car washes
component and its material.
● Before washing the vehicle:
• Fold the mirrors
Cleaning instructions Start washing from the front of the
vehicle. Extend the mirrors before
 Working from top to bottom, driving.
liberally apply water to the ● Brushes used in automatic car
vehicle body, wheel wells and washes may scratch the vehicle
underside of the vehicle to surface, parts (wheel, etc.) and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
remove any dirt and dust.
● When the shift position needs to
 Wash the vehicle body using be held in N, refer to P.169.
a sponge or soft cloth, such ● If you need to release the parking
as a chamois. brake, turn off the brake hold sys-
tem, release the parking brake,
 For hard-to-remove marks, and set the power switch to ACC
while holding the N position.
use car wash soap and rinse (P.169)
thoroughly with water.
■ High pressure car washes
 Wipe away any water. ● As water may enter the cabin, do
 Wax the vehicle when the not bring the nozzle tip near the
gaps around the doors or perime-
waterproof coating deterio- ter of the windows, or spray these
rates. areas continuously.
If water does not bead on a clean ● Turn the power switch off.
surface, apply wax when the vehi- ■ When using a car wash
cle body is cool. If the door handle becomes wet
while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock
■ Self-restoring coat
and unlock repeatedly. In that case,
The vehicle body has a self-restor- follow the following correction pro-
ing coating that is resistant to small cedures to wash the vehicle:
surface scratches caused in a car
● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2
wash etc. m) or more separate from the
● The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years vehicle while the vehicle is being
from when the vehicle is delivered washed. (Take care to ensure that
from the plant. the key is not stolen.)
● The restoration time differs ● Set the electronic key to battery-
depending on the depth of the saving mode to disable the Smart
scratch and outside temperature. key system. (P.130)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-1. Maintenance and care 359
■ Wheels and wheel ornaments ● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft
● Remove any dirt immediately by cloth to remove any remaining
using a neutral detergent. moisture.
● Wash detergent off with water ● To remove oily deposits, use alco-
immediately after use. hol wet wipes or a similar product.
● To protect the paint from damage,
make sure to observe the follow- WARNING
ing precautions. ■ When washing the vehicle
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or
abrasive detergent Do not apply water to the inside of
• Do not use hard brushes the fuel cell unit compartment.
• Do not use detergent on the Doing so may cause the electrical
wheels when they are hot, such components, etc. to catch fire.
as after driving or parking in hot
weather ■ When cleaning the windshield
(vehicles with rain-sensing
■ Brake pads and calipers windshield wipers)
Rust may form if the vehicle is Set the wiper switch to off.
parked with wet brake pads or disc If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”,
rotors, causing them to stick. Before the wipers may operate unexpect-
parking the vehicle after it is edly in the following situations,
washed, drive slowly and apply the and may result in hands being
brakes several times to dry the caught or other serious injuries
parts. and cause damage to the wiper
■ Bumpers blades.
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■ Front side windows water-
repellent coating
● The following precautions can
extend the effectiveness of the 7
water-repellent coating.
• Remove any dirt, etc. from the
front side windows regularly.
Maintenance and care

• Do not allow dirt and dust to accu-

mulate on the windows for a long Off
period.
Clean the windows with a soft, AUTO
damp cloth as soon as possible.
• Do not use wax or glass cleaners ● When the upper part of the
that contain abrasives when windshield where the raindrop
cleaning the windows. sensor is located is touched by
• Do not use any metallic objects to hand
remove condensation build up.
● When a wet rag or similar is
■ Plated portions held close to the raindrop sen-
If dirt cannot be removed, clean the sor
parts as follows:
● If something bumps against the
● Use a soft cloth dampened with an windshield
approximately 5% solution of neu-
tral detergent and water to clean
the dirt off.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 360 7-1. Maintenance and care

WARNING • After driving in an area contami-

nated with soot, oily smoke,
● If you directly touch the raindrop mine dust, iron powder or chem-
sensor body or if something ical substances
bumps into the raindrop sensor
• If the vehicle becomes heavily
■ Precaution regarding the soiled with dust or mud
front bumper
If the paint of the front bumper is • If liquids such as benzene and
chipped or scratched, the Toyota gasoline are spilled on the paint
Safety Sense may not function surface
correctly. If this occurs, consult ● If the paint is chipped or
your Toyota dealer. scratched, have it repaired
■ Precaution regarding the immediately.
front and rear bumpers ● To prevent the wheels from cor-
If the paint of the front or rear roding, remove any dirt and
bumper is chipped or scratched, store in a place with low humid-
the following systems may not ity when storing the wheels.
function correctly. If this occurs,
consult your Toyota dealer. ■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use
● BSM organic substances or scrub
● RCTA with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces
● SEA of the lights.

● PKSB (if equipped) ● Do not apply wax to the sur-

faces of the lights.
● Intuitive parking assist (if Wax may cause damage to the
equipped) lenses.
● Toyota Safety Sense ■ When washing the car
Do not remove the vehicle recep-
tacle cap and directly pour water
NOTICE over the vehicle receptacle. If
water enters the vehicle recepta-
■ To prevent paint deteriora- cle, damage may occur.
tion and corrosion on the
body and components (alumi- ■ When using an automatic car
num wheels, etc.) wash
● Wash the vehicle immediately in Set the wiper switch to the off
the following cases: position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”,
• After driving near the sea coast the wipers may operate and the
• After driving on salted roads wiper blades may be damaged.

• If coal tar or tree sap is present

on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings
or bird droppings are present on
the paint surface

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-1. Maintenance and care 361

NOTICE ● Do not wash the underside of

the vehicle using a high pres-
■ When using a high pressure sure car washer.
car wash
● When washing the vehicle, do
not spray the camera or its sur-
rounding area directly with a
high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure
water may cause the device to
not operate normally.
● Do not spray water directly on
the radar sensor which is
equipped behind the emblem.
Otherwise it may cause the
device to be damaged.
● Do not bring the nozzle tip close
to boots (rubber or resin manu-
factured cover), connectors or
the following parts. The parts
may be damaged if they come
into contact with high-pressure
water.
• Fuel cell stack
• Traction related parts
• Steering parts
• Suspension parts
7
• Brake parts
● Keep the cleaning nozzle at
Maintenance and care

least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from

the vehicle body. Otherwise
resin section, such as moldings
and bumpers, may be deformed
and damaged.
Also, do not continuously hold the
nozzle in the same place.
● Do not spray the lower part of
the windshield continuously.
If water enters the air conditioning
system intake located near the
lower part of the windshield, the
air conditioning system may not
operate correctly.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 362 7-1. Maintenance and care

there is a possibility that the surface

Cleaning and protect- of the carpet could be damaged.
ing the vehicle interior ■ Front side windows with IR pro-
tective coating (vehicles with IR
Perform cleaning in a man- protective coating)
ner appropriate to each The front side windows have IR pro-
tective coating. To prevent any dam-
component and its material. age to the IR protective coating,
observe the following:
● If the windows are dirty, gently
Protecting the vehicle wipe them with a cloth soaked in
interior water or lukewarm water as soon
as possible.
 Remove dirt and dust using a ● If the windows are very dirty, do
vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty not open and close them repeat-
edly.
surfaces with a cloth damp-
ened with lukewarm water.
WARNING
 If dirt cannot be removed,
■ Water in the vehicle
wipe it off with a soft cloth
● Do not splash or spill liquid in
dampened with neutral deter- the vehicle, such as on the floor,
gent diluted to approximately in the traction battery air vents,
1%. and in the trunk. (P.86)
Doing so may cause the traction
Wring out any excess water battery, electrical components,
from the cloth and thoroughly etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
wipe off remaining traces of ● Do not get any of the SRS com-
detergent and water. ponents or wiring in the vehicle
interior wet. (P.33)
An electrical malfunction may
■ Shampooing the carpets cause the airbags to deploy or
There are several commercial foam- not function properly, resulting
ing-type cleaners available. Use a in death or serious injury.
sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles. Do not ■ Cleaning the interior (espe-
use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and cially instrument panel)
let them dry. Excellent results are Do not use polish wax or polish
obtained by keeping the carpet as cleaner. The instrument panel
dry as possible. may reflect off the windshield,
■ Handling the seat belts obstructing the driver’s view and
leading to an accident, resulting in
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm death or serious injury.
water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for
excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
■ When cleaning the carpeted
portions of the glove box, con-
sole box, etc.
If a strong adhesive tape is used,

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-1. Maintenance and care 363

NOTICE ■ Water on the floor

■ Cleaning detergents Do not wash the vehicle floor with
water.
● Do not use the following types Vehicle systems such as the
of detergent, as they may dis- audio system may be damaged if
color the vehicle interior or water comes into contact with
cause streaks or damage to electrical components such as the
painted surfaces: audio system above or under the
floor of the vehicle. Water may
• Areas other than the seats and also cause the body to rust.
steering wheel: Organic sub-
stances such as benzene or ■ When cleaning the inside of
gasoline, alkaline or acidic solu- the windshield
tions, dye, and bleach
Do not allow glass cleaner to con-
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solu- tact the lens. Also, do not touch
tions, such as thinner, benzene, the lens. (P.196)
and alcohol
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear
• Steering wheel: Organic sub- window
stances, such as thinner, and ● Do not use glass cleaner to
cleaner that contains alcohol clean the rear window, as this
may cause damage to the rear
● Do not use polish wax or polish window defogger heater wires
cleaner. The instrument panel’s or antenna. Use a cloth damp-
or other interior part’s painted ened with lukewarm water to
surface may be damaged. gently wipe the window clean.
■ Preventing damage to leather Wipe the window in strokes run-
surfaces ning parallel to the heater wires
or antenna.
Observe the following precautions
to avoid damage to and deteriora- ● Be careful not to scratch or
tion of leather surfaces: damage the heater wires or 7
● Remove any dust or dirt from antenna.
leather surfaces immediately. ■ Cleaning the front side win-
Maintenance and care

● Do not expose the vehicle to dows

direct sunlight for extended peri- Do not use any compound or
ods of time. Park the vehicle in abrasive product (e.g., glass
the shade, especially during cleaner, detergent, wax) to clean
summer. the windows. It may damage the
coating.
● Do not place items made of
vinyl, plastic, or containing wax
on the upholstery, as they may Cleaning the areas with
stick to the leather surface if the
vehicle interior heats up signifi- satin-finish metal accents
cantly.
 Remove dirt using a water-
dampened soft cloth or syn-
thetic chamois.
 Wipe the surface with a dry,

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 364 7-1. Maintenance and care

soft cloth to remove any vacuum cleaner.

remaining moisture.  Wipe it off with a soft cloth
dampened with neutral deter-
■ Cleaning the areas with satin- gent diluted to approximately
finish metal accents
1%.
The metal areas use a layer of real
metal for the surface. It is necessary  Wring out any excess water
to clean them regularly. If dirty areas
are left uncleaned for long periods from the cloth and thoroughly
of time, they may be difficult to wipe off remaining traces of
clean. detergent and water.

Cleaning the leather areas

 Remove dirt and dust using a
vacuum cleaner.
 Wipe off any excess dirt and
dust with a soft cloth damp-
ened with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of
approximately 5% neutral wool
detergent.
 Wring out any excess water
from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces
of detergent.
 Wipe the surface with a dry,
soft cloth to remove any
remaining moisture. Allow the
leather to dry in a shaded and
ventilated area.

■ Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the
interior of the vehicle at least twice a
year to maintain the quality of the
vehicle’s interior.

Cleaning the synthetic

leather areas
 Remove dirt and dust using a

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-2. Maintenance 365

Maintenance require-
[Link]

■ Handling of the 12-volt bat-

tery
ments
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained
in vehicles as well as waste pro-
To ensure safe and econom- duced by component wear con-
ical driving, day-to-day care tain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
and regular maintenance cancer and birth defects or
are essential. It is the other reproductive harm. Avoid
owner’s responsibility to exposure and wash any
affected area immediately.
perform regular checks.
Toyota recommends the ● 12-volt battery posts, terminals
and related accessories con-
maintenance below. tain lead and lead compounds
which are known to cause brain
damage. Wash your hands after
■ Repair and replacement handling. (P.378)
It is recommended that genuine
Toyota parts be used for repairs to
ensure performance of each sys- General maintenance
tem. If non-Toyota parts are used in
replacement or if a repair shop other General maintenance should be
than a Toyota dealer performs
repairs, confirm the warranty cover- performed on a daily basis. This
age. can be done by yourself or by a
■ Allow inspection and repairs to Toyota dealer.
be performed by a Toyota
dealer
● Toyota technicians are well- Scheduled maintenance
trained specialists and are kept up
to date with the latest service Scheduled maintenance should 7
information. They are well be performed at specified inter-
informed about the operation of all vals according to the mainte-
Maintenance and care

systems on your vehicle.

nance schedule.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It
proves that the maintenance that For details about maintenance
has been performed is under war- items and schedules, refer to the
ranty coverage. If any problem
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
should arise while your vehicle is
under warranty, your Toyota “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
dealer will promptly take care of it.
Do-it-yourself mainte-
WARNING
nance
■ If your vehicle is not properly
maintained You can perform some mainte-
Improper maintenance could nance procedures by yourself.
result in serious damage to the Please be aware that do-it-your-
vehicle and possible death or seri-
ous injury. self maintenance may affect

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 366 7-2. Maintenance

warranty coverage. General maintenance

The use of Toyota repair manuals is
recommended.
Listed below are the general
For details about warranty cover- maintenance items that
age, refer to the separate “Owner’s should be performed at the
Warranty Information Booklet” or
intervals specified in the
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
“Owner’s Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement/Sched-
uled Maintenance Guide”. It
is recommended that any
problem you notice should
be brought to the attention
of your Toyota dealer or
qualified service shop for
advice.

WARNING
■ If the fuel cell system is oper-
ating
Turn the fuel cell system off and
ensure that there is adequate
ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.

Fuel cell unit compart-

ment

Items Check points

Is the brake fluid at
Brake fluid the correct level?
(P.377)
Is the coolant at
Coolant the correct level?
(P.375)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-2. Maintenance 367

Items Check points Items Check points

The radiator and • Does the brake
condenser should pedal move
Radiator/con-
be free from for- smoothly?
denser
eign objects. • Does the brake
(P.376) pedal have
appropriate
Is there sufficient Brake pedal
clearance from
Washer fluid washer fluid?
the floor?
(P.377)
• Does the brake
pedal have the
Trunk correct amount
of free play?
Items Check points • The vehicle
Check the connec- should not pull to
12-volt battery one side when
tions. (P.378)
the brakes are
applied.
Vehicle interior • The brakes
should work
Items Check points effectively.
Brakes • The brake pedal
• The accelerator
should not feel
pedal should
spongy.
Accelerator move smoothly
• The brake pedal
pedal (without uneven
should not get 7
pedal effort or
too close to the
catching).
floor when the
Maintenance and care

• When parked on brakes are

a slope and the applied.
Transmission
shift position is in
“Park” mecha- • Do the head
P, is the vehicle
nism Head restraints move
securely
restraints smoothly and
stopped?
lock securely?
• Do the indica-
Indica- tors and buzzers
tors/buzzers function prop-
erly?
• Do all the lights
Lights
come on?

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 368 7-2. Maintenance

Items Check points Vehicle exterior

• Does the park-
ing brake oper- Items Check points
ate normally? • Do the
• When parked on Doors/trunk doors/trunk oper-
Parking brake a slope and the ate smoothly?
parking brake is
on, is the vehicle • Does the hood
securely Hood lock system work
stopped? properly?

• Do the seat belts • There should not

operate be any signs of
smoothly? Fluid leaks fluid leakage
Seat belts after the vehicle
• The seat belts
should not be has been parked.
damaged. • Is the tire infla-
• Do the seat con- tion pressure
Seats trols operate correct?
properly? • The tires should
not be damaged
• Does the steer- or excessively
ing wheel rotate worn.
smoothly? Tires • Have the tires
• Does the steer- been rotated
ing wheel have according to the
the correct maintenance
Steering wheel amount of free schedule?
play? • The wheel nuts
• There should not should not be
be any strange loose.
sounds coming
from the steer- • The wiper blades
ing wheel. should not show
any signs of
cracking, split-
ting, wear, con-
Windshield tamination or
wipers deformation.
• The wiper blades
should clear the
windshield with-
out streaking or
skipping.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 369

Do-it-yourself service
[Link]-it-yourself maintenance

Items Parts and tools

precautions • “Toyota Super
Long Life Cool-
If you perform maintenance ant” or a similar
by yourself, be sure to fol- high quality eth-
ylene glycol-
low the correct procedure
based non-sili-
as given in these sections. cate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and
Maintenance non-borate cool-
ant with long-life
hybrid organic
Items Parts and tools
acid technology
• Grease For the U.S.A.:
12-volt battery • Conventional Inverter cool- “Toyota Super
condition wrench (for ter- ant level Long Life Cool-
(P.378) minal clamp (P.375) ant” is pre-mixed
bolts) with 50% cool-
ant and 50%
• FMVSS No.116
deionized water.
DOT 3 or SAE
For Canada:
J1703 brake fluid
“Toyota Super
FMVSS No.116
Long Life Cool-
DOT 4 or SAE
Brake fluid ant” is pre-mixed
J1704 brake fluid
level (P.377) with 55% cool-
• Rag or paper
ant and 45%
towel
deionized water. 7
• Funnel (used
• Funnel (used
only for adding
only for adding
Maintenance and care

brake fluid)
coolant)
• Fuse with same
amperage rating
Fuses
as original
(P.407)
• Flathead screw-
driver
Headlight aim • Phillips-head
(P.411) screwdriver
Radiator and
condenser 
(P.376)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 370 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Items Parts and tools ● Do not smoke, cause sparks or

expose an open flame to the 12-
• Tire pressure volt battery. 12-volt battery
Tire inflation
gauge fumes are flammable.
pressure
• Compressed air
(P.397) ● Be extremely cautious when
source working on the 12-volt battery. It
• Water or washer contains poisonous and corro-
sive sulfuric acid.
fluid containing
antifreeze (for ● Never touch, disassemble,
Washer fluid winter use) remove or replace the high-volt-
(P.377) • Funnel (used age parts, cables and their con-
nectors. It can cause severe
only for adding burns or electric shock that may
water or washer result in death or serious injury.
fluid)
■ When working near the elec-
tric cooling fan or radiator
WARNING grille
The fuel cell unit compartment Be sure the power switch is off.
contains many mechanisms and With the power switch in ON, the
fluids that may move suddenly, electric cooling fan may automati-
become hot, or become electri- cally start to run if the air condi-
cally energized. To avoid death or tioning is on and/or the coolant
serious injury, observe the follow- temperature is high. (P.376)
ing precautions.
■ Safety glasses
■ When working on the fuel cell Wear safety glasses to prevent
unit compartment flying or falling material, fluid
● Be careful not to touch the high- spray, etc. from getting in your
voltage parts or hydrogen- eyes.
related parts.
● Make sure that the “READY” NOTICE
indicator is off.
■ If you remove the air cleaner
● Keep hands, clothing and tools filter
away from the moving fan.
Driving with the air cleaner filter
● Be careful not to touch the removed may cause excessive
motor, inverter, radiator, etc. motor wear due to dirt in the air.
right after driving as they may
be hot. Coolant and other fluids
may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may
burn easily, such as paper and
rags, in the fuel cell unit com-
partment.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 371

Hood Positioning a floor

jack
Opening the hood
When using a floor jack, fol-
1 Pull the hood lock release low the instructions in the
lever. manual provided with the
The hood will pop up slightly. jack and perform the opera-
tion safely.
When raising your vehicle
with a floor jack, position
the jack correctly. Improper
placement may damage
your vehicle or cause injury.

Location of the jack point

2 Pull up the auxiliary catch
■ Front
lever and lift the hood.

7
Maintenance and care

WARNING
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed
and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly,
it may open while the vehicle is in
motion and cause an accident,
which may result in death or seri-
ous injury.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 372 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear ● Do not jack up on the hydrogen

tanks nor the rear suspension.

Front

Suspension

Hydrogen tanks

WARNING
■ When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the follow-
ing precautions to reduce the pos-
sibility of death or serious injury:
● Make sure to set the floor jack
properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an
improperly positioned floor jack
will damage the vehicle and may
cause the vehicle to fall off the
floor jack.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 373

Fuel cell unit compartment

Components

Inverter coolant reservoir (P.376)

Fuel cell stack coolant reservoir (P.376)
Fuse boxes (P.407) 7

Brake fluid reservoir (P.377)

Maintenance and care

Washer fluid tank (P.377)

Inverter coolant radiator (P.376)
Electric cooling fan
Condenser (P.376)
Fuel cell stack coolant radiator (P.376)

■ 12-volt battery
P.378

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 374 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuel cell unit compartment cover

■ Removing the fuel cell unit compartment cover
 Outside

 Front

■ Installing the clips

NOTICE
■ Checking the fuel cell unit
compartment cover after
installation
Make sure that the cover is
securely installed in its original
position.

Fuel cell stack cover

■ Removing the fuel cell
1 Push up center portion stack cover
2 Insert Remove the fuel cell stack
3 Press cover.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 375
when the fuel cell system is
cold.

■ Installing the fuel cell stack

cover
Install the fuel cell stack cover. Fuel cell stack reservoir cap
“MAX” line
“MIN” line
If the level is on or below the “MIN”
line, add coolant up to the “MAX”
line. (P.462)

NOTICE
■ Fuel cell stack coolant
1 Attach the hooks on the rear An exclusive coolant for the fuel
side of the fuel cell stack cell system is filled in the fuel cell
cover. stack coolant reservoir. Do not
use any substitute. It may dam-
2 Insert the front side of the age your vehicle. 7
fuel cell stack cover on the
pins. Checking the inverter
Maintenance and care

NOTICE
coolant
■ Checking the fuel cell stack The coolant level is satisfactory
cover after installation if it is between the “MAX” and
Make sure that the cover is “MIN” lines on the reservoir
securely installed in its original
position. when the fuel cell system is
cold.
Checking the fuel cell
stack coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory
if it is between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the reservoir

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 376 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

tem.

WARNING
■ When the cell system is hot
Do not remove the coolant reser-
voir caps. (P.465)
The cooling system may be under
pressure and may spray hot cool-
ant if the cap is removed, causing
serious injuries, such as burns.
Inverter coolant reservoir cap
“MAX” line NOTICE
“MIN” line ■ When adding coolant
If the level is on or below the “MIN” Coolant is neither plain water nor
line, add coolant up to the “MAX” straight antifreeze. The correct
mixture of water and antifreeze
line. (P.462) must be used to provide proper
lubrication, corrosion protection
■ Inverter coolant selection and cooling. Be sure to read the
antifreeze or coolant label.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or a similar high quality ■ If you spill coolant
ethylene glycol based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and non- Be sure to wash it off with water to
borate coolant with long-life hybrid prevent it from damaging parts or
organic acid technology. paint.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is Checking the radiator and
a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% condenser
deionized water. (Minimum tem-
perature: -31°F [-35°C]) Check the radiator and con-
Canada: denser and clear away any for-
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is eign objects. If either of the
a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Minimum tem- above parts is extremely dirty or
perature: -44°F [-42°C]) you are not sure of their condi-
For more details about coolant, con- tion, have your vehicle
tact your Toyota dealer. inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ If the inverter coolant level
drops within a short time of WARNING
replenishing
■ When the fuel cell system is
Visually check the radiators, hoses, hot
inverter coolant reservoir cap, drain
cock and water pump. Do not touch the radiator or con-
If you cannot find a leak, have your denser as they may be hot and
Toyota dealer test the cap and cause serious injuries, such as
check for leaks in the cooling sys- burns.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 377

Checking and adding the WARNING

brake fluid ■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm
■ Checking fluid level your hands and eyes and damage
The brake fluid level should be painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in
between the “MAX” and “MIN” your eyes, flush the affected area
lines on the tank. with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort,
see a doctor.

NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level
to go down slightly as the brake
pads wear out or when the fluid
level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent
Brake fluid reservoir cap refilling, there may be a serious
problem.
“MAX” line
“MIN” line Adding the washer fluid
■ Adding fluid If any washer does not work or
Make sure to check the fluid the warning message appears
type and prepare the necessary on the multi-information display,
item. the washer tank may be empty. 7

 Fluid type Add washer fluid.

Maintenance and care

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE

J1703 brake fluid
FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE
J1704 brake fluid
 Item
Clean funnel

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture

from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid
can cause a dangerous loss of brak-
ing efficiency. Use only newly
opened brake fluid.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 378 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING 12-volt battery

■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the Location
fuel cell system is hot or operating
as washer fluid contains alcohol The 12-volt battery is located in
and may catch fire if spilled on the the right-hand side of the trunk.
fuel cell system, etc.

NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other
than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or anti-
freeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on
the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as
well as damaging the pump lead-
ing to problems of the washer
fluid not spraying. Remove the luggage mat: P.328

■ Diluting washer fluid ■ Before recharging

Dilute washer fluid with water as When recharging, the 12-volt bat-
necessary. tery produces hydrogen gas which
Refer to the freezing tempera- is flammable and explosive. There-
tures listed on the label of the fore, observe the following precau-
washer fluid bottle. tions before recharging:
● If recharging with the 12-volt bat-
tery installed on the vehicle, be
sure to disconnect the ground
cable.
● Make sure the power switch on
the charger is off when connecting
and disconnecting the charger
cables to the 12-volt battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting
the 12-volt battery
● Unlocking the doors using the
smart key system may not be pos-
sible immediately after reconnect-
ing the 12-volt battery. If this
happens, use the wireless remote
control or the mechanical key to
lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the fuel cell system with the
power switch in ACC*. The fuel
cell system may not start with the
power switch turned off. However,
the fuel cell system will operate

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 379
normally from the second attempt. ● Wear protective safety glasses
● The power switch mode is when working near the 12-volt
recorded by the vehicle. If the 12- battery.
volt battery is reconnected, the
vehicle will return the power ● Keep children away from the
switch mode to the status it was in 12-volt battery.
before the 12-volt battery was dis-
connected. Make sure to turn off ■ Where to safely charge the
the power switch before discon- 12-volt battery
necting the 12-volt battery. Take Always charge the 12-volt battery
extra care when connecting the in an open area. Do not charge
12-volt battery if the power switch the 12-volt battery in a garage or
mode prior to discharge is closed room where there is insuf-
unknown. ficient ventilation.
● When the 12-volt battery is recon- ■ Emergency measures regard-
nected, start the fuel cell system, ing electrolyte
depress the brake pedal, and con-
firm that it is possible to shift into ● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
each shift position. Flush your eyes with clean
water for at least 15 minutes
If the system will not start even after and get immediate medical
multiple attempts, contact your Toy- attention. If possible, continue
ota dealer. to apply water with a sponge or
*: ACC mode can be enabled/dis- cloth while traveling to the near-
abled on the customize menu. est medical facility.
(P.484) ● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thor-
WARNING oughly. If you feel pain or burn-
ing, get medical attention
■ Chemicals in the 12-volt bat- immediately.
tery
● If electrolyte gets on your 7
The 12-volt battery contains poi- clothes
sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid It can soak through clothing on
and may produce hydrogen gas to your skin. Immediately take
Maintenance and care

which is flammable and explosive. off the clothing and follow the
To reduce the risk of death or seri- procedure above if necessary.
ous injury, take the following pre-
cautions while working on or near ● If you accidentally swallow elec-
the 12-volt battery: trolyte
Drink a large quantity of water
● Do not cause sparks by touch- or milk. Get emergency medical
ing the 12-volt battery terminals attention immediately.
with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match
near the 12-volt battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin
and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electro-
lyte.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 380 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING Checking the 12-volt bat-

■ When replacing the 12-volt tery condition
battery
Use a 12-volt battery designed for Check the 12-volt battery condi-
this vehicle. Failure to do so may tion by indicator color.
cause gas (hydrogen) to enter the
passenger compartment, causing
a fire or explosion.
For replacement of the 12-volt
battery, contact your Toyota
dealer.

NOTICE
■ When recharging the 12-volt
battery
Never recharge the 12-volt bat- Blue: Good condition
tery while the fuel cell system is
operating. Also, be sure all acces- Red: Charging is necessary.
sories are turned off. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
Exterior Clear: Replacement is nec-
Make sure that the 12-volt bat- essary.
tery terminals are not corroded Have the 12-volt battery
and that there are no loose con- checked by your Toyota
nections, cracks, or loose dealer.
clamps.

Terminals
Hold-down clamp

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 381

Tires Replace the tires if the treadwear

indicators are showing on a tire.
Replace or rotate tires in ■ When to replace your vehicle’s
accordance with mainte- tires
nance schedules and tread- Tires should be replaced if:
wear. ● The treadwear indicators are
showing on a tire.
● You have tire damage such as
Checking tires cuts, splits, cracks deep enough
to expose the fabric, and bulges
Check if the treadwear indica- indicating internal damage
tors are showing on the tires. ● A tire goes flat repeatedly or can-
Also check the tires for uneven not be properly repaired due to the
wear, such as excessive wear size or location of a cut or other
damage
on one side of the tread.
If you are not sure, consult with your
Toyota dealer.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be
checked by a qualified technician
even if it has seldom or never been
used or damage is not obvious.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the
replacement tire is greater than 1/2
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) of either the front axle or 7
the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Maintenance and care

Label.
For the maximum load of the tire,
see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on
the sidewall of the tire. (P.474)

New tread
Worn tread
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators
is shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark, ■ Tire types
● Summer tires
etc., molded into the sidewall of
each tire. Summer tires are high-speed perfor-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 382 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

mance tires best suited to highway

WARNING
driving under dry conditions. Since
summer tires do not have the same ■ When inspecting or replacing
traction performance as snow tires, tires
summer tires are inadequate for Observe the following precautions
driving on snow-covered or icy to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause dam-
roads. For driving on snow-covered age to parts of the drive train as
roads or icy roads, the use of snow well as dangerous handling char-
tires is recommended. When install- acteristics, which may lead to an
ing snow tires, be sure to replace all accident resulting in death or seri-
four tires. ous injury.
● All season tires ● Do not mix tires of different
makes, models or tread pat-
All season tires are designed to pro- terns.
vide better traction in snow and to Also, do not mix tires of remark-
be adequate for driving in most win- ably different treadwear.
ter conditions as well as for use
● Do not use tire sizes other than
year-round. All season tires, how- those recommended by Toyota.
ever, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow ● Do not mix differently con-
tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, structed tires (radial, bias-belted
or bias-ply tires).
all season tires fall short in accelera-
tion and handling performance com- ● Do not mix summer, all season
pared with summer tires in highway and snow tires.
driving. ● Do not use tires that have been
● Snow tires used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not
For driving on snow-covered roads know how they were used previ-
or icy roads, we recommend using ously.
snow tires. If you need snow tires,
select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the NOTICE
originally installed tires. Since your ■ Driving on rough roads
vehicle has radial tires as original Take particular care when driving
equipment, make sure your snow on roads with loose surfaces or
tires also have radial construction. potholes.
Do not install studded tires without These conditions may cause
first checking local regulations for losses in tire inflation pressure,
reducing the cushioning ability of
possible restrictions. Snow tires the tires. In addition, driving on
should be installed on all wheels. rough roads may cause damage
(P.308) to the tires themselves, as well as
the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ If the tread on snow tires wears
down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as
snow tires is lost.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 383

Tire rotation tire when Safe” is displayed

(Emergency Warning)
Rotate the tires in the order The tire pressure warning light
shown. comes on and a buzzer sounds
when the tire inflation pressure
becomes low suddenly due to a
blowout. (Ways of coping: P.472)
However, the system may not be
able to detect sudden tire ruptures
(bursting, etc.).
 The tire pressure detected by
the tire pressure warning sys-
tem can be displayed on the
Front multi-information display.
To equalize tire wear and extend (P.102)
tire life, Toyota recommends that The illustration used is intended as
tire rotation is carried out at the an example, and may differ from
same interval as tire inspection. the image that is actually displayed
on the multi-information display.
Tire pressure warning
system
Your vehicle is equipped with a
tire pressure warning system
that uses tire pressure warning 7
valves and transmitters to detect
Maintenance and care

low tire inflation pressure before

serious problems arise.
The tire pressure warning sys- ■ Routine tire inflation pressure
tem of this vehicle adopts a 2- checks
type warning system. The tire pressure warning system
does not replace routine tire inflation
 When “Adjust Pressure” is pressure checks. Make sure to
displayed (Normal Warning) check tire inflation pressure as part
of your routine of daily vehicle
The tire pressure warning light checks.
comes on and a buzzer sounds ■ Tire inflation pressure
when the tire inflation pressure ● It may take a few minutes to dis-
becomes low due to natural air play the tire inflation pressure
leakage or outside temperature. after the power switch is turned to
(Ways of coping: P.428) ON. It may also take a few min-
utes to display the tire inflation
 When “Immediately Check

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 384 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

pressure after inflation pressure of the vehicle as the radio wave

has been adjusted. conditions.
● Tire inflation pressure changes ● When the vehicle is parked, the
with temperature. time taken for the warning to start
The displayed values may also be or go off could be extended.
different from the values mea-
sured using a tire pressure gauge. ● When tire inflation pressure
declines rapidly for example when
■ Situations in which the tire a tire has burst, the warning may
pressure warning system may not function.
not operate properly
■ Warning performance of the tire
● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system
pressure warning system may not
operate properly. The warning of the tire pressure
• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are warning system will change in
used. accordance with driving conditions.
• A tire has been replaced with a For this reason, the system may
tire that is not an OE (Original give a warning even if the tire pres-
Equipment) tire. sure does not reach a low enough
• A tire has been replaced with a level, or if the pressure is higher
tire that is not of the specified size. than the pressure that was adjusted
• Tire chains etc. are equipped. to when the system was initialized.
• If a window tint that affects the
radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on Installing tire pressure
the vehicle, particularly around the warning valves and trans-
wheels or wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is mitters
extremely higher than the speci-
fied level. When replacing tires or wheels,
• If wheels without tire pressure tire pressure warning valves and
warning valves and transmitters
are used. transmitters must also be
• If the ID code on the tire pressure installed.
warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure When new tire pressure warning
warning computer. valves and transmitters are
● Performance may be affected in installed, new ID codes must be
the following situations. registered in the tire pressure warn-
• Near a TV tower, electric power ing computer. (P.389)
plant, gas station, radio station,
large display, airport or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio ■ When replacing the tires and
waves or electrical noise wheels
• When carrying a portable radio, If the ID code of the tire pressure
cellular phone, cordless phone or warning valve and transmitter is not
other wireless communication registered, the tire pressure warning
device system will not work properly. In this
If tire position information is not cor- case, after driving for about 20 min-
rectly displayed due to the radio utes, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute and stays on to
wave conditions, the display may be indicate a system malfunction.
corrected by changing the location

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 385

NOTICE position registration is per-

formed by driving forward with
■ Repairing or replacing tires,
wheels, tire pressure warn- moderate left and right turns.
ing valves, transmitters and However, depending on the driv-
tire valve caps ing conditions and driving envi-
● When removing or fitting the ronment, registration may take
wheels, tires or the tire pressure
warning valves and transmit- some time to complete.
ters, contact your Toyota dealer 1 Park the vehicle in a safe
as the tire pressure warning place, turn the power switch
valves and transmitters may be
damaged if not handled cor- off and wait 15 minutes or
rectly. more.
● Make sure to install the tire 2 Start the fuel cell system.
valve caps. If the tire valve caps
are not installed, water could The wheel position registration pro-
enter the tire pressure warning cedure cannot be performed while
valves, corrode the valve, and the vehicle is moving.
cause sticking and air leaks.
3 Press and hold to display
● When replacing tire valve caps,
do not use tire valve caps other the cursor on the content dis-
than those specified. The cap play area (center) of the
may become stuck.
multi-information display.
■ To avoid damage to the tire
pressure warning valves and 4 Press / of the meter
transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid control switches to select
sealants, the tire pressure warn-
ing valve and transmitter may not and then press . 7
operate properly. If a liquid seal-
ant is used, contact your Toyota
5 Press / of the meter
Maintenance and care

dealer as soon as possible. After

use of liquid sealant, make sure to control switches, select
replace the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter when repair- “Vehicle Settings”, and then
ing or replacing the tire. (P.384)
press and hold .

Registration of the posi- 6 Press / of the meter

tion of each wheel after
control switches, select
performing a tire rotation
“TPWS setting” and then
It is necessary to register the press .
position of each wheel after per-
forming a tire rotation. 7 Press / of the meter
Wheel position registration can control switches to select
be performed by oneself. Wheel

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 386 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

“Tire Rotation”, then press ■ Wheel position registration pro-

cedure
. ● If the power switch is turned off
while registering the wheel posi-
8 Press / of the meter tion, the next time the power
switch is turned to ON, the wheel
control switches and select position registration will resume
and it will not be necessary to
“Yes”, and then press . restart the procedure.
● While the position of each wheel is
A message indicating that wheel being determined and the inflation
position registration is being per- pressures are not being dis-
formed will be displayed on the played, if the inflation pressure of
multi-information display. “---” will a tire drops, the tire pressure
be displayed for the tire inflation warning light will come on.
pressure of each tire and wheel
position registration will begin. ■ If the wheel position cannot be
registered easily
9 Drive straight (with occa-
sional left and right turns) at ● In the following situations, wheel
position registration may take lon-
approximately 40 km/h or ger than usual to be completed or
more for approximately 10 to may not be possible.
• Vehicle is not driven at approxi-
30 minutes. mately 40 km/h or more
When wheel position registration is • Vehicle is driven on unpaved
complete, a message indicating roads
that registration has been com- ● If wheel position registration does
pleted and the inflation pressure of not complete after driving for 1
each tire will be displayed on the hour or more, park the vehicle in a
multi-information display. safe place for approximately 15
Even if it is not possible to drive minutes and then drive the vehicle
continuously at approximately 40 again.
km/h or more, registration can be ● If the vehicle is reversed during
completed by driving for a long wheel position registration, all
time. However, if registration does data collected until then will be
not complete after driving for 1 hour cleared. Perform driving again.
or more, park the vehicle in a safe
place and leave it with the power
switch in ON for approximately 15 Setting the tire pressure
minutes or more, and then perform
the driving procedure again. In the following situations, it will
be necessary to perform the tire
■ When performing wheel posi-
tion registration inflation pressure setting proce-
● Normally, wheel position registra-
dure of the tire pressure warning
tion can be completed within system.
approximately 30 minutes.
 When the specified tire infla-
● Wheel position registration is per-
formed while driving at a vehicle tion pressure has changed,
speed of approximately 40 km/h such as due to carried load,
or more. etc.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 387
 When the tire inflation pres- 4 Press / of the meter
sure is changed such as
when the tire size is changed. control switches, select
“Vehicle Settings”, and then
If the tire inflation pressure has
been adjusted to the specified press and hold .
level, perform the tire inflation
setting procedure by selecting 5 Press / of the meter
specified inflation pressure on control switches, select
the multi-information display. “TPWS setting” and then
When the tire inflation pressure press .
is to be other than specified,
such as when tires other than 6 Press / of the meter
the specified size are used, etc.,
control switches to select
set the tire inflation pressure
“Tire Pressure Setting”, then
using the current pressure.
Make sure to adjust the tire press .
inflation pressure of each tire to
the appropriate level before per- 7 Press / of the meter
forming tire pressure setting. control switches and select
The tire pressure warning sys- “Setting by Specified Pres-
tem operates based on this tire
inflation pressure. sure”, and then press .

■ Setting by selecting a spec- Select the desired front and rear

tire pressures. 7
ified tire inflation pressure
1 Start the fuel cell system. 8 Press / of the meter
Maintenance and care

The tire inflation pressure cannot control switches and select

be set while the vehicle is moving.
“Yes”, and then press .
2 Press and hold to display The tire pressure warning light will
the cursor on the content dis- slowly blink 3 times.
play area (center) of the After setting the tire inflation pres-
sure, a message indicating that set-
multi-information display. ting has been completed will be
displayed on the multi-information
3 Press / of the meter
control switches to select

and then press .

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 388 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

display.
4 Press / of the meter
control switches to select

and then press .

5 Press / of the meter

control switches, select
“Vehicle Settings”, and then
press and hold .
■ If the tire inflation pressure can-
not be set easily 6 Press / of the meter
● If the tire pressure warning light
does not blink 3 times when start- control switches, select
ing the tire inflation pressure set- “TPWS setting” and then
ting procedure, the procedure
may not have started. press .
Perform the procedure again from
the beginning. 7 Press / of the meter
● If tire inflation pressure setting
procedure cannot be completed control switches to select
after performing the above proce- “Tire Pressure Setting”, then
dure, contact your Toyota dealer.
press .
■ Setting using the current
tire inflation pressure 8 Press / of the meter
1 Adjust the tire inflation pres- control switches to select
sure of each tire to the appro-
“Setting by Current Pressure”
priate level.
Make sure to adjust the tire inflation and then press .
pressure with the tires cold.
2 Start the fuel cell system. 9 Press / of the meter
The tire inflation pressure cannot control switches and select
be set while the vehicle is moving.
“Yes”, and then press .
3 Press and hold to display The tire pressure warning light will
slowly blink 3 times and a message
the cursor on the content dis- indicating that tire inflation pressure
play area (center) of the is being set will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
multi-information display.
After setting the tire inflation pres-
sure, a message indicating that set-
ting has been completed will be
displayed on the multi-information

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 389
display. inflation pressure setting proce-
dure with the current tire inflation
pressure.
■ If the tire inflation pressure can-
not be set easily
● Normally, the tire inflation pres-
sure setting procedure can be
completed in 2 or 3 minutes.
● If the tire pressure warning light
does not blink 3 times when start-
ing the tire inflation pressure set-
ting procedure, the procedure
■ Warning performance of the tire may not have started. Perform the
pressure warning system procedure again from the begin-
ning.
● When performing the tire pressure
setting using the current tire infla- ● If tire inflation pressure setting
tion pressure, the warning timing procedure cannot be completed
of the tire pressure warning sys- after performing the above proce-
tem will vary according to the con- dure, contact your Toyota dealer.
ditions under which tire pressure
setting was performed. Therefore, WARNING
a warning may be output even if
the tire inflation pressure drops ■ Before performing tire pres-
slightly or if the tire inflation pres- sure setting
sure increases above that when Make sure to adjust the tire infla-
the tire inflation pressure was set. tion pressure of each tire to the
● Make sure to perform the tire appropriate level. Otherwise, the
pressure setting procedure after tire pressure warning light may
adjusting the tire inflation pres- not illuminate even if the tire infla-
sure. Also, make sure the tires are tion pressure drops or may illumi-
cold before performing the tire nate even though the tire inflation 7
pressure setting procedure or pressure is normal.
adjusting the tire inflation pres-
Maintenance and care

sure.
Registering ID codes
■ Tire inflation pressure setting
procedure The tire pressure warning valve
● If the power switch is turned off and transmitter is equipped with
while setting the tire inflation pres-
sure, the next time the power a unique ID code.
switch is turned to ON, the setting
procedure will resume and it will When new tire pressure warning
not be necessary to restart the valves and transmitters are
procedure. installed, new ID codes must be
● If the tire inflation pressure setting registered in the tire pressure
procedure is started unnecessar-
ily, adjust the tire inflation pres- warning computer.
sure to the specified level with the • ID codes can be registered by
tires cold and then perform setting yourself, but depending on
by selecting a specified tire infla-
tion pressure, or perform the tire the driving conditions and

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 390 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

driving environment, registra- “TPWS setting” and then

tion may take some time to
complete. press .
• When using a wheel set
7 Press / of the meter
which all of the ID codes have
already been registered, the control switches to select
wheel set can be changed in “Tire Set Switching”, then
a short amount of time. press .
Before performing ID code registra-
tion, make sure that no wheels with 8 Press / of the meter
tire pressure warning valve and
control switches and select
transmitters installed are near the
vehicle. “Register New Valve / ID”,
1 Park the vehicle in a safe then press .
place, turn the power switch
off and wait 15 minutes or 9 Press / of the meter
more. control switches to select
2 Start the fuel cell system. “Tire Set 1” or “Tire Set 2”,
The ID code registration procedure then press .
cannot be performed while the
vehicle is moving. If ID codes have already been reg-
istered for that wheel set, the tire
3 Press and hold to display pressure warning light will slowly
blink 3 times, and a message indi-
the cursor on the content dis- cating that change is occurring will
play area (center) of the be displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display.
multi-information display.
4 Press / of the meter
control switches to select

and then press .

5 Press / of the meter

control switches, select
“Vehicle Settings”, and then
10Press / of the meter
press and hold . control switches and select
6 Press / of the meter “Yes” and then press .
control switches, select The tire pressure warning light will
slowly blink 3 times and a message

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 391
indicating that ID code registration sure setting procedure of the
is being performed will be displayed tire pressure warning system.
on the multi-information display.
Wheel set changing will be can- If the specified tire inflation pres-
celed and registration will begin. sure is the same, it will not be nec-
When registration is being per- essary to perform the tire inflation
formed, the tire pressure warning pressure setting procedure.
light will blink for approximately 1
minute then illuminate and “---” will ■ When registering ID codes
be displayed for the inflation pres- ● Normally, ID codes registration
sure of each tire on the multi-infor- can be completed within approxi-
mation display. mately 30 minutes.
● ID code registration is performed
while driving at a vehicle speed of
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph)
or more.
■ If ID codes are not registered
easily
● In the following situations, ID code
registration may take longer than
usual to be completed or may not
be possible.
11Drive straight (with occa- • When the vehicle has not been
parked for approximately 15 min-
sional left and right turns) at utes or more before being driven
approximately 40 km/h (25 • Vehicle is not driven at approxi-
mph) or more for approxi- mately 40 km/h (25 mph) or more
• Vehicle is driven on unpaved
mately 10 to 30 minutes. roads
When registration is complete, the • Vehicle is driven near other vehi-
tire pressure warning light will turn cles and system cannot recog- 7
off and a message indicating that nize tire pressure warning valve
registration has been completed and transmitters of your vehicle
Maintenance and care

will be displayed on the multi-infor- over those of other vehicles

mation display. • Wheel with tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter installed is
Registration may take longer than inside or near the vehicle
normal to complete if the vehicle
speed cannot be maintained at ● If the vehicle is reversed during
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph) or registration, all data collected until
more. If registration cannot be com- then will be cleared. Perform driv-
pleted after driving for 1 hour or ing again.
more, perform the registration pro- ● If registration does not complete
cedure again from the beginning. after driving for 1 hour or more,
12If the tire inflation pressure of perform the ID code registration
procedure again from the begin-
the wheel set installed differs ning.
from that of the previous set, ● If the tire pressure warning light
it will be necessary to per- does not blink 3 times when per-
form the tire inflation pres- forming ID code registration pro-
cedure, the procedure may not
have started. Perform the proce-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 392 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

dure again from the beginning. yourself.

● If the ID codes cannot be regis-  Only a change between both
tered even when performing the
above procedure, contact your registered wheel set is possi-
Toyota dealer. ble, mixing between these
wheel sets is not supported.
■ Canceling ID code registra-
tion  While registering ID codes, it
may not be possible to
To cancel ID code registration
change between wheel sets
after it has been started, select
normally. Cancel registration
“Register New Valve / ID” again
before changing between
on the multi-information display.
wheel sets.
If ID code registration has been 1 Install the desired wheel set.
canceled, the tire pressure
warning light will turn off. 2 Start the fuel cell system.
If the warning light does not turn 3 Press and hold to display
off, ID code registration may not
the cursor on the content dis-
have been canceled correctly.
To cancel registration, select play area (center) of the
“Register New Valve / ID” on the multi-information display.
multi-information display. 4 Press / of the meter
control switches to select
Selecting wheel set
and then press .
Your vehicle is equipped with a
tire pressure warning system
5 Press / of the meter
with a function to register two
sets of ID codes. This allows for control switches, select
registration of a second wheel “Vehicle Settings”, and then
set, for example a winter set. press and hold .
 The wheel set can be
changed only if a second 6 Press / of the meter
wheel set has been registered control switches, select
to the system. If a second “TPWS setting” and then
wheel set has not been regis-
tered, message will be dis- press .
played and it will not be
7 Press / of the meter
possible to change to the
selected wheel set. control switches to select
ID codes can be registered by

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 393

“Tire Set Switching”, then Check which wheel set is installed

and perform the change procedure
press . again from the beginning.

8 Press / of the meter

control switches to select
“Register Valve / ID”, then
press .

9 Press / of the meter

control switches and wheel
11If the specified tire inflation
set (“Tire Set 1” or “Tire Set
pressure of the wheel set
2”) displayed for the set installed differs from that of
selection setting, the press the previous set, it will be
. necessary to perform the tire
inflation pressure setting pro-
10Press / of the meter cedure of the tire pressure
control switches and select warning system. (P.386)
If the specified tire inflation pres-
“Yes” and then press . sure is the same, it will not be nec-
essary to perform the tire inflation
The tire pressure warning light will pressure setting procedure.
slowly blink 3 times, a message
indicating that change is occurring 12Register the position of each
will be displayed, and the wheel set wheel. 7
change will begin.
Wheel set change will begin and
■ Certifications for the tire pres-
Maintenance and care

the tire pressure warning light will

blink for 1 minute and then illumi- sure warning system
nate. Also, while the change is P.541
being performed, and “---” will be
displayed for the tire inflation pres-
sure of each tire on the multi-infor-
mation display.
After approximately 2 minutes, the
wheel set change will complete, the
tire pressure warning light will turn
off, and a completion message will
be displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display.
If changing does not complete after
approximately 4 minutes, a mes-
sage indicating that the change
could not be completed will be dis-
played.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 394 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Replacing the tire ● Do not use other tire jacks for

replacing tires on this vehicle.

When replacing the tires ● Put the jack properly in its jack
point.
yourself, prepare the neces-
sary tools and a jack. ● Do not put any part of your body
under the vehicle while it is sup-
If necessary tire replace- ported by the jack.
ment seems difficult to per-
form, contact your Toyota ● Do not start the fuel cell system
or drive the vehicle while the
dealer. vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while
Before jacking up the someone is inside.
vehicle ● When raising the vehicle, do not
put an object on or under the
 Stop the vehicle in a safe jack.
place on a hard, flat surface. ● Do not raise the vehicle to a
 Set the parking brake. height greater than that required
to replace the tire.
 Shift the shift position to P.
● Use a jack stand if it is neces-
 Stop the fuel cell system. sary to get under the vehicle.
● When lowering the vehicle,
■ Jack and tools make sure that there is no-one
As your vehicle is not installed spare near the vehicle. If there are
tire, the following tools for replacing people nearby, warn them
a tire are not included with your vocally before lowering.
vehicle. They can be purchased at
your Toyota dealer.
Removing a tire
● Wheel nut wrench
● Jack 1 Chock the tires.
● Jack handle

WARNING
■ Using the tire jack
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Improper use of the tire jack may
cause the vehicle to suddenly fall
off the jack, leading to death or
serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any
purpose other than replacing
tires or installing and removing
tire chains.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 395
cate the jack point positions.
Wheel chock
Tire
positions
Behind the rear
Front left-hand
right-hand side
side
tire
Front right-hand Behind the rear
side left-hand side tire
In front of the
Rear left-hand
front right-hand
side
side tire
In front of the
Rear right-hand
front left-hand
side
side tire
4 Raise the vehicle until the tire
2 Slightly loosen the wheel is slightly raised off the
nuts (one turn). ground.

5 Remove all the wheel nuts

3 Turn the tire jack portion
Maintenance and care

and the tire.

by hand until the notch of the
When resting the tire on the
jack is in contact with the jack ground, place the tire so that the
point. wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
The jack point guides are located
under the rocker panel. They indi-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 396 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING NOTICE
■ Replacing a tire ■ Repairing or replacing tires,
● Do not touch the disc wheels or wheels, tire pressure warn-
the area around the brakes ing valves, transmitters and
immediately after the vehicle tire valve caps
has been driven. After the vehi- P.385
cle has been driven the disc
wheels and the area around the
brakes will be extremely hot. Installing the tire
Touching these areas with
hands, feet or other body parts 1 Remove any dirt or foreign
while changing a tire, etc. may
result in burns. matter from the wheel con-
tact surface.
● Failure to follow these precau-
tions could cause the wheel If foreign matter is on the wheel
nuts to loosen and the tire to fall contact surface, the wheel nuts
off, resulting in death or serious may loosen while the vehicle is in
injury. motion, causing the tire to come off.

• Never use oil or grease on the

wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the
wheel nuts to be excessively
tightened, leading to bolt or disc
wheel damage. Remove any oil
or grease that has adhered
when installing the wheel nuts.
• After replacing a tire, check the
tightening torque as soon as
possible. If you cannot confirm 2 Install the tire and loosely
the tightening torque yourself, tighten each wheel nut by
have the vehicle inspected at
your Toyota dealer. hand by approximately the
same amount.
• Do not attach a heavily dam-
aged wheel ornament, as it may Turn the wheel nuts until the wash-
fly off the wheel while the vehi- ers come into contact with the disc
cle is moving. wheel.
• When installing a tire, only use
wheel nuts that have been spe-
cifically designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or defor-
mations in the bolt screws, nut
threads or bolt holes of the
wheel, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota
dealer.

Washer

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 397

Disc wheel Tire inflation pressure

3 Lower the vehicle.
Checking the specified
tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure and tire size
are displayed on the tire and
loading information label.
(P.472)

4 Securely tighten the wheel

nuts two or three times in the
order shown in the illustration
using a wheel nut wrench.
Tightening torque:
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3
kgf•m)

7
Maintenance and care

Inspection and adjust-

ment procedure

Tire valve

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 398 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire pressure gauge ■ Instructions for checking tire

inflation pressure
1 Remove the tire valve cap. When checking tire inflation pres-
2 Press the tip of the tire pres- sure, observe the following:
sure gauge onto the tire ● Check only when the tires are
cold.
valve. If your vehicle has been parked for
3 Read the pressure using the at least 3 hours or has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5
gauge gradations. km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
4 If the tire inflation pressure is
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
not at the recommended It is difficult to judge if a tire is
level, adjust the pressure. properly inflated based only on its
If you add too much air, press appearance.
the center of the valve to ● It is normal for the tire inflation
deflate. pressure to be higher after driving
as heat is generated in the tire. Do
5 After completing the tire infla- not reduce tire inflation pressure
after driving.
tion pressure measurement
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity
and adjustment, apply soapy weight.
water to the valve and check Passengers and luggage weight
for leakage. should be placed so that the vehi-
cle is balanced.
6 Put the tire valve cap back
on. WARNING
■ Proper inflation is critical to
■ Tire inflation pressure check save tire performance
interval
Keep your tires properly inflated.
You should check tire inflation pres- If the tires are not properly
sure every two weeks, or at least inflated, the following conditions
once a month. Do not forget to may occur which could lead to an
check the spare. accident resulting in death or seri-
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation ous injury:
pressure
● Excessive wear
Driving with incorrect tire inflation
pressure may result in the following: ● Uneven wear
● Reduced fuel economy ● Poor handling
● Reduced driving comfort and poor
handling ● Possibility of blowouts resulting
from overheated tires
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety ● Air leaking from between tire
and wheel
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, ● Wheel deformation and/or tire
have it checked by your Toyota damage
dealer.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 399

WARNING Wheels
● Greater possibility of tire dam-
age while driving (due to road If a wheel is bent, cracked or
hazards, expansion joints,
sharp edges in the road, etc.) heavily corroded, it should
be replaced. Otherwise, the
tire may separate from the
NOTICE wheel or cause a loss of
■ When inspecting and adjust- handling control.
ing tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps
back on. Wheel selection
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt
or moisture may get into the valve When replacing wheels, care
and cause an air leak, resulting in
decreased tire inflation pressure. should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those
removed in load capacity, diam-
eter, rim width and inset*.
Replacement wheels are avail-
able at your Toyota dealer.
*
: Conventionally referred to as off-
set.
Toyota does not recommend
using the following:
 Wheels of different sizes or 7
types
 Used wheels
Maintenance and care

 Bent wheels that have been

straightened

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are
equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow
the tire pressure warning system to
provide advance warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pres-
sure. Whenever wheels are
replaced, the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters must be
installed. (P.384)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 400 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING ● Ensure that only genuine Toyota

wheels are used on your vehi-
■ When replacing wheels cle.
● Do not use wheels that are a dif- Tire pressure warning valves
ferent size from those recom- and transmitters may not work
mended in the Owner’s Manual, properly with non-genuine
as this may result in a loss of wheels.
handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a Aluminum wheel precau-
leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire. tions
Doing so may result in an acci-
dent, causing death or serious  Use only Toyota wheel nuts
injury. and wheel nut wrenches
■ When installing the wheel designed for use with your
nuts aluminum wheels.
Never use oil or grease on the  When rotating, repairing or
wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and
grease may cause the wheel nuts changing your tires, check
to be excessively tightened, lead- that the wheel nuts are still
ing to bolt or disc wheel damage. tight after driving 1000 miles
In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen (1600 km).
and the wheel may fall off, caus-
ing an accident and resulting in  Be careful not to damage the
death or serious injury. Remove aluminum wheels when using
any oil or grease from the wheel tire chains.
bolts or wheel nuts.
 Use only Toyota genuine bal-
■ Use of defective wheels pro-
hibited ance weights or equivalent
Do not use cracked or deformed
and a plastic or rubber ham-
wheels. Doing so could cause the mer when balancing your
tire to leak air during driving, pos- wheels.
sibly causing an accident.

NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replace-
ment may affect the tire pres-
sure warning valves and
transmitters, make sure to have
tires serviced by your Toyota
dealer or other qualified service
shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmit-
ters at your Toyota dealer.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 401

Air conditioning filter claws ( ), and remove the

filter cover.
The air conditioning filter
must be changed regularly
to maintain air conditioning
efficiency.

Removing the air condi-

tioning filter
1 Turn the power switch off.
5 Remove the filter case.
2 Open the glove box.

6 Remove the air conditioning

3 Remove the panel. filter from the filter case and
replace it with a new one.
7
The “ UP” marks shown on the
filter and the filter case should be
Maintenance and care

pointing up.

4 Unlock the filter cover ( ),

pull the filter cover out of the

■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air condi-
tioning filter according to the mainte-
nance schedule. In dusty areas or

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 402 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

areas with heavy traffic flow, early

replacement may be required. (For Cleaning the traction
scheduled maintenance information, battery air intake
please refer to the “Scheduled vents
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.)
■ If air flow from the vents To prevent the fuel economy
decreases dramatically from being affected, visually
The filter may be clogged. Check inspect the traction battery
the filter and replace if necessary. air intake vents periodically
■ Air conditioning filter with for clogs. If it is dusty or
deodorizing function
clogged or if “Maintenance
When fragrances are placed in your
vehicle, the deodorizing effect may Required for Traction Bat-
become significantly weakened in a tery Cooling Parts See
short period. Owner’s Manual” is shown
When an air conditioning odor
comes out continuously, replace the on the multi-information
air conditioning filter. display, clean the air intake
vents using the following
NOTICE procedures:
■ When using the air condition-
ing system ■ Scheduled maintenance of the
Make sure that a filter is always air intake vents is necessary
installed. when
Using the air conditioning system In some situations such as when the
without a filter may cause damage vehicle is used frequently or in
to the system. heavy traffic or dusty areas, the air
■ To prevent damage to the fil- intake vents may need to be
ter cover cleaned more regularly.
For details, refer to the “Owner’s
When moving the filter cover in Warranty Information Booklet” or
the direction of arrow to release “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
the fitting, pay attention not to
apply excessive force to the ■ Cleaning the air intake vents
claws. Otherwise, the claws may Improper handling of the air intake
be damaged. vent covers and filters may result in
damage to them. If you have any
concerns about cleaning the filter,
contact your Toyota dealer.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 403
Using a vacuum cleaner, etc.,
NOTICE absorb dust and sand from the filter
■ If “Maintenance Required for by profiling the nozzle lightly along
Traction Battery Cooling the fold.
Parts See Owner’s Manual” is
shown on the multi-informa-
tion display
Clean the air intake vents immedi-
ately.
If the vehicle is continuously
driven with the warning message
displayed, it may cause a mal-
function or output restriction of the
traction battery.

5 Hold the filter to the light and

Cleaning procedure
check if it is not clogged.
1 Turn the power switch off. If the dust or sand cannot be
removed completely, contact your
2 Remove the grille. Toyota dealer.

7
3 Remove the filter from the air 6 Reinstall the filter to the grille.
intake vent grille.
Maintenance and care

If dust has accumulated on the air

intake vent grille, remove the dust
with a vacuum cleaner, etc.

4 Remove the dust and sand

from the filter.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 404 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

7 Install the grille. ● Before cleaning the air intake

vents, make sure to turn the
power switch off to stop the fuel
cell system.
● Do not put a hand or leg in the
air intake vent. If it is caught in a
cooling fan, or if it touches a
high voltage part that results in
an electric shock, death or seri-
ous injuries may result.
■ When removing the air intake
 If “Maintenance Required for vent covers
Traction Battery Cooling Parts Do not touch the service plug
located near the air intake vents.
See Owner’s Manual” was (P.77)
displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
NOTICE
8 Start the fuel cell system and
check that the warning mes- ■ When cleaning the air intake
vents
sage is no longer displayed.
Do not use an air blow gun, etc.
It may be necessary to drive the Dust may be blown out, possibly
vehicle for approximately 20 min- causing a malfunction or output
utes before the warning message is restriction of the traction battery.
displayed again then disappears.
If the warning message does not
disappear after some time, have
the vehicle inspected by your Toy-
ota dealer.

■ If the dust or sand on the filter

cannot be removed
It is recommended to use a vacuum
cleaner with plastic brushes. ■ To prevent damage to the
vehicle
WARNING Observe the following precau-
tions:
■ When cleaning the air intake ● Do not allow water or foreign
vents matter to enter the air intake
● Do not use water or other liq- vent.
uids to clean the air intake
vents. If water is applied to the ● Make sure to reinstall the filter
traction battery or other compo- and cover to their original posi-
nents, a malfunction or fire may tions after cleaning.
occur.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 405

NOTICE Electronic key battery

● Do not install anything to the air
intake vent other than the exclu- Replace the battery with a
sive filter for this vehicle or use
the vehicle without the filter new one if it is depleted.
installed. As the key may be damaged
■ To prevent damage to the fil-
if the following procedure is
ter not performed properly, it is
Observe the following precau- recommended that key bat-
tions. tery replacement be per-
If the filter is damaged, have it formed by your Toyota
replaced with a new filter by your
Toyota dealer. dealer.
● Do not use an air blow gun, etc.
■ If the electronic key battery is
● Do not press hard a vacuum depleted
cleaner, etc. against the filter.
The following symptoms may occur:
● Do not use a hard brush, such ● The smart key system and wire-
as a metal brush. less remote control will not func-
tion properly.
● Do not break the fold of the fil-
ter. ● The operational range will be
reduced.

Items to prepare
 Flathead screwdriver
 Small flathead screwdriver 7
 Lithium battery CR2450
Maintenance and care

■ Use a CR2450 lithium battery

● Batteries can be purchased at
your Toyota dealer, local electrical
appliance shops or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries accord-
ing to local laws.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 406 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

minal facing up.

Replacing the battery
1 Release the lock and remove
the mechanical key.

4 When installing, reverse the

steps listed.

WARNING
2 Remove the key cover.
■ Battery precautions
To prevent damage to the key, wrap
the tip of the screwdriver with tape Observe the following precau-
or a tape. tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Do not swallow the battery.
Doing so may cause chemical
burns.
● A coin battery or button battery
is used in the electronic key. If a
battery is swallowed, it may
cause severe chemical burns in
as little as 2 hours and may
result in death or serious injury.
3 Remove the depleted battery
using a small flathead screw- ● Keep away new and removed
batteries from children.
driver.
● If the cover cannot be firmly
When removing the cover, the elec- closed, stop using the electronic
tronic key module may stick to the key and stow the key in the
cover and the battery may not be place where children cannot
visible. In this case, remove the reach, and then contact your
electronic key module in order to Toyota dealer.
remove the battery.
When removing the battery, use a ● If you accidentally swallow a
screwdriver of an appropriate size. battery or put a battery into a
part of your body, get emer-
Insert a new battery with the “+” ter- gency medical attention imme-
diately.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 407

WARNING Checking and replac-

■ To prevent battery explosion ing fuses
or leakage of flammable liq-
uid or gas
If any of the electrical com-
● Replace the battery with a new
battery of the same type. If a ponents do not operate, a
wrong type of battery is used, it fuse may have blown. If this
may explode. happens, check and replace
● Do not expose batteries to the fuses as necessary.
extremely low pressure due to
high altitude or extremely high
temperatures. Checking and replacing
● Do not burn, break or cut a bat- fuses
tery.
1 Turn the power switch off.

NOTICE
2 Open the fuse box cover.
■ When replacing the battery  Fuel cell unit compartment:
Use a flathead screwdriver of type A fuse box
appropriate size. Applying exces- Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.
sive force may deform or damage
the cover.
■ For normal operation after
replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions
to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands. 7
Moisture may cause the battery
to rust.
Maintenance and care

● Do not touch or move any other

component inside the remote  Fuel cell unit compartment:
control.
type B fuse box
● Do not bend either of the battery
Remove the fuel cell unit compart-
terminals.
ment cover (P.374) and push the
tabs in and lift the lid off.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 408 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

 Driver’s side instrument panel

Push the tab in and remove the lid.
Make sure to push the tab in during
removal or installation.
Remove the footwell lights connec-
tor.

 Passenger’ side instrument

panel
Remove the lid.
Remove the cover.
Make sure to push the claw when
removing/installing the lid.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 409

3 Remove the fuse with the

pullout tool.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout
 Trunk tool.
Remove the luggage mat
(P.328), and while lifting up the
luggage under tray, use a flathead
screw driver and remove the clip.

4 Check if the fuse is blown.

Type A and B: 7
Replace the blown fuse with a new
fuse of an appropriate amperage
rating. The amperage rating can be
Maintenance and care

found on the fuse box lid.

Type C and D:
Contact your Toyota dealer.
 Type A

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Normal fuse

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 410 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Blown fuse ■ After a fuse is replaced

 Type B ● When installing the lid, make sure
that the tab is installed securely.
● If the lights do not turn on even
after the fuse has been replaced,
a bulb may need replacement.
● If the replaced fuse blows again,
have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a cir-
cuit
The fuses are designed to blow, pro-
tecting the wiring harness from
Normal fuse damage.
Blown fuse
WARNING
 Type C
■ To prevent system break-
downs and vehicle fire
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause dam-
age to the vehicle, and possibly a
fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher
amperage rating than that indi-
cated, or use any other object in
place of a fuse.
Normal fuse ● Always use a genuine Toyota
fuse or equivalent.
Blown fuse Never replace a fuse with a
wire, even as a temporary fix.
 Type D
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse
boxes.

NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical over-
load determined and repaired by
your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.

Normal fuse
Blown fuse

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 411

Headlight aim Adjusting the headlight

aim
Vertical movement adjust-
1 Using a Phillips-head screw-
ing bolts driver, turn bolt A in either
direction.
Remember the turning direc-
tion and the number of turns.

Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
2 Turn bolt B the same number
Before checking the head- of turns and in the same
light aim direction as step 1.
If the headlight cannot be adjusted
 Make sure the vehicle has a using this procedure, take the vehi-
full tank of fuel and the area cle to your Toyota dealer to adjust
around the headlight is not the headlight aim.
deformed. 7
 Park the vehicle on level
ground.
Maintenance and care

 Make sure the tire inflation

pressure is at the specified
level.
 Have someone sit in the
driver’s seat.
 Bounce the vehicle several
times.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 412 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs

If any lights burn out, have it

replaced by your Toyota
dealer.

■ LED Lights
The lights consist of a number of
LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out,
take your vehicle to your Toyota
dealer to have the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the
inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up
on the inside of the headlight lens
does not indicate a malfunction.
Contact your Toyota dealer for more
information in the following situa-
tions:
● Large drops of water have built up
on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the
headlight.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 413

When trouble arises

8
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .... 414
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency
.................................. 414
If the vehicle is submerged
or water on the road is ris-
ing ............................. 415
8-2. Steps to take in an emer-
gency
If your vehicle needs to be
towed......................... 417
If you think something is
wrong ........................ 421
If a warning light turns on or
a warning buzzer sounds
.................................. 422
If a warning message is dis-
played........................ 432
If you have a flat tire.... 438
If the fuel cell system will not
start ........................... 451 8
If you lose your keys ... 453
When trouble arises

If the fuel door cannot be

opened ...................... 453
If the electronic key does
not operate properly .. 454
If the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged ..................... 456
If your vehicle overheats
.................................. 462
If the vehicle becomes stuck
.................................. 466

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 414 8-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers If your vehicle has to

[Link] information

be stopped in an emer-
The emergency flashers are gency
used to warn other drivers
when the vehicle has to be Only in an emergency, such
stopped on the road due to as if it becomes impossible
a breakdown, etc. to stop the vehicle in the
normal way, stop the vehicle
Operating instructions using the following proce-
dure:
Press the switch to flash all of
the turn signal lights.
Stopping the vehicle
To turn them off, press the switch
once again. 1 Steadily step on the brake
pedal with both feet and
firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal
repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
2 Shift the shift position to N.
 If the shift position is shifted to
N
3 After slowing down, stop the
■ Emergency flashers vehicle in a safe place by the
● If the emergency flashers are road.
used for a long time while the fuel
cell system is not operating (while 4 Stop the fuel cell system.
the “READY” indicator is not illu-  If the shift position cannot be
minated), the 12-volt battery may
discharge. shifted to N
● If any of the SRS airbags deploy 3 Keep depressing the brake
(inflate) or in the event of a strong pedal with both feet to reduce
rear impact, the emergency flash- vehicle speed as much as
ers will turn on automatically.
The emergency flashers will turn possible.
off automatically after operating
for approximately 20 minutes. To 4 To stop the fuel cell system,
manually turn the emergency press and hold the power
flashers off, press the switch switch for 2 consecutive sec-
twice.
(The emergency flashers may not onds or more, or press it
turn on automatically depending
on the force of the impact and
conditions of the collision.)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-1. Essential information 415
briefly 3 times or more in suc- If the vehicle is sub-
cession. merged or water on
the road is rising

This vehicle is not designed

to be able to drive on roads
that are deeply flooded with
water. Do not drive on roads
where the roads may be
submerged or the water
5 Stop the vehicle in a safe may be rising. It is danger-
place by the road. ous to remain in the vehicle,
if it is anticipated that the
■ If emergency stopped vehicle will be flooded or
The functions of the air conditioning, set adrift. Remain calm and
etc., may be partially limited in order follow the following.
to reduce the power consumption of
the 12-volt battery.
 If the door can be opened,
WARNING
open the door and exit the
vehicle.
■ If the fuel cell system has to
be turned off while driving  If the door cannot be opened,
Turning the fuel cell system off open the window using the
while driving will not cause a loss power window switch and
of steering or braking control.
However, power assist for the ensure an escape route.
steering wheel may be lost mak-  If the window can be opened,
ing it difficult to steer smoothly
before stopping the vehicle exit the vehicle through the
8
depending on the remaining window.
charge in the 12-volt battery or
usage conditions.  If the door and window cannot
When trouble arises

Decelerate as much as possible be opened due to the rising

before turning off the fuel cell sys- water, remain calm, wait until
tem.
the water level inside the
vehicle rises to the point that
the water pressure inside of
the vehicle equals the water
pressure outside of the vehi-
cle and then open the door
after waiting for the rising
water to enter the vehicle, and
exit the vehicle.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 416 8-1. Essential information

When the outside water level

exceeds half the height of the door,
the door cannot be opened from the
inside due to water pressure.

■ Water level exceeds the floor

When the water level exceeds the
floor and time has passed, the elec-
trical equipment will get damaged,
the power windows will not operate,
the motor stop, and the vehicle may
not be able to get moving.
■ Using an emergency escape
hammer*
Laminated glass is used in the wind-
shield on this vehicle.
Laminated glass cannot be shat-
tered with an emergency hammer*.
Tempered glass is used in the win-
dows on this vehicle.
*
: Contact your Toyota dealer or
aftermarket accessory manufac-
turer for further information about
an emergency hammer.

WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not drive on roads where the
roads may be submerged or the
water may be rising. Otherwise
the vehicle may be damaged and
cannot move, as well as become
flooded and set adrift, which may
lead to death.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 417

If your vehicle needs

[Link] to take in an emergency

Situations when it is nec-

to be towed essary to contact dealers
before towing
If towing is necessary, we
The following may indicate a
recommend having your
problem with your transmission.
vehicle towed by your Toy-
Contact your Toyota dealer or
ota dealer or commercial
commercial towing service
towing service, using a
before towing.
wheel-lift type truck or flat-
bed truck.  The fuel cell system warning
message is shown on the
Use a safety chain system
multi-information display and
for all towing, and abide by
the vehicle does not move.
all state/provincial and local
laws.  The vehicle makes an abnor-
mal sound.

Situations when it is not

Towing with a wheel-lift
possible to be towed by
type truck
another vehicle
 From the front
In the following situations, it is
not possible to be towed by
another vehicle using cables or
chains, as the rear wheels may
be locked due to the parking
lock. Contact your Toyota dealer
or commercial towing service.
8
 There is a malfunction in the
shift control system. (P.432)
When trouble arises

 There is a malfunction in the Use a towing dolly under the

immobilizer system. (P.67) rear wheels.
 There is a malfunction in the
smart key system. (P.454)
 The 12-volt battery is dis-
charged. (P.456)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 418 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

 From the rear NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the
vehicle when towing using a
wheel-lift type truck
When raising the vehicle, ensure
adequate ground clearance for
towing at the opposite end of the
raised vehicle. Without adequate
clearance, the vehicle could be
damaged while being towed.
■ Towing with a sling-type truck
Use a towing dolly under the Do not tow with a sling-type truck
front wheels. to prevent body damage.

WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
Be sure to transport the vehicle
with all four wheels raised off the
ground. If the vehicle is towed Using a flatbed truck
with the tires contacting the
ground, the drivetrain and related When using a flatbed truck to
parts may be damaged, an acci-
dent may occur due to a change transport the vehicle, use tire
in direction of the vehicle or elec- strapping belts. Refer to the
tricity generated by the operation owner’s manual of the flatbed
of the motor may cause a fire to
occur depending on the nature of truck for the tire strapping
the damage or malfunction. method.
In order to suppress vehicle
movement during transporta-
tion, set the parking brake and
turn the power switch off.

Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in
an emergency, your vehicle may
be temporarily towed using
cables or chains secured to the
emergency towing eyelets. This

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 419
should only be attempted on  Type B
hard surfaced roads for short
distances at under 18 mph (30
km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer and operate the brakes.
The vehicle’s wheels, drive train,
axles, steering and brakes must
be in good condition.

Emergency towing proce- Phillips-head screwdriver

dure Towing eyelet
To have your vehicle towed by 2 Remove the eyelet cover
another vehicle, the towing eye- using a flathead screwdriver.
let must be installed to your If the driver is a Phillips-head,
vehicle. Install the towing eyelet replace it with flathead.
using the following procedure. To protect the bodywork, place a
rag between the screwdriver and
1 Take out the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the
towing eyelet. illustration.
 Type A

3 Insert the towing eyelet into

When trouble arises

the hole and tighten partially

Screwdriver by hand.
Towing eyelet

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 420 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

4 Tighten down the towing eye- WARNING

let securely using a screw-
Observe the following precau-
driver or hard metal bar. tions. Failure to do so may result
in death or serious injury.
■ While towing
● When towing using cables or
chains, avoid sudden starts, etc.
which place excessive stress on
the towing eyelets, cables or
chains. The towing eyelets,
cables or chains may become
damaged, broken debris may hit
people, and cause serious dam-
age.
5 Securely attach cables or
chains to the towing eyelet. ● Do not perform any of the fol-
lowing as doing so may cause
Take care not to damage the vehi- the parking lock mechanism to
cle body. engage, locking the rear wheels
6 Enter the vehicle being towed and possibly leading to an acci-
dent resulting in death or seri-
and start the fuel cell system. ous injury:
If the fuel cell system does not • Unfasten the driver’s seat belt
start, turn the power switch to ON. and open the driver’s door.
7 Shift the shift position to N
• Turn the power switch off.
and release the parking
brake. ■ Installing towing eyelets to
the vehicle
Turn automatic mode off. (P.172)
Make sure that towing eyelets are
installed securely.
■ While towing If not securely installed, towing
If the fuel cell system is off, the eyelets may come loose during
power assist for the brakes and towing.
steering will not function, making
steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■ Wheel nut wrench
Wheel nut wrench can be pur- ■ To prevent damage to the
chased at your Toyota dealer. vehicle during emergency
towing
■ Before transporting or towing in
frozen areas Do not secure cables or chains to
the suspension components.
Operate the water release function.
Otherwise, the fuel cell system may
freeze and the vehicle may not be
able to be started. (P.176)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 421

If you think something side when braking

is wrong  Vehicle pulls heavily to one
side when driving on a level
If you notice any of the fol- road
lowing symptoms, your  Loss of brake effectiveness,
vehicle probably needs spongy feeling, pedal almost
adjustment or repair. Con- touches the floor
tact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

Visible symptoms
 Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air
conditioning after use is nor-
mal.)
 Flat-looking tires or uneven
tire wear
 The high coolant temperature
gauge needle continually
points higher than normal.

Audible symptoms
 Hydrogen gas leakage noises
can be heard. (P.83)
8
 Excessive tire squeal when
cornering
When trouble arises

 Strange noises related to the

suspension system
 Other noises related to the
fuel cell system

Operational symptoms
 Stumbling or running roughly
 Appreciable loss of power
 Vehicle pulls heavily to one

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 422 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer

sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning

lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but
then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunc-
tion in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers

■ Hydrogen leak warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

When a hydrogen gas leak is detected, a buzzer sounds, a
light comes on, and a warning message is displayed on the
multi-information display.
 P.86

■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that:
(U.S.A.)  The brake fluid level is low; or
or  The brake system is malfunctioning
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehi-
(Red) cle may be dangerous.
(Canada)

■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:
 The regenerative braking system;
 The electronically controlled brake system; or
 The parking brake system
(Yellow)
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 423
■ High coolant temperature warning light

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the coolant temperature is too high
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
(Red) Handling method (P.462)

■ Fuel cell system overheat warning light* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates the fuel cell system has overheated
 Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (P.462)
*: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
■ Charging system warning light* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
■ SRS warning light

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:
 The SRS airbag system;
 The front passenger occupant classification system; or 8
 The seat belt pretensioner system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
When trouble arises

immediately.

■ Pop Up Hood warning light

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the Pop Up Hood system has operated
 The Pop Up Hood system cannot be reused once it
has operated. Have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in the Pop Up Hood system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 424 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ ABS warning light

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:

(U.S.A.)  The ABS; or
or  The brake assist system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(Canada)

■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning

buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions

(Red) Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steer-

ing) system
or
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.

(Yellow)

■ PCS warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System).
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability
Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illu-
minate.

■ LDA indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the LDA (Lane Departure Alert).
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
(Yellow) mation display.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 425
■ LTA indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
(Yellow) mation display.

■ PDA indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the PDA (Proactive Driving
Assist).
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
(Yellow)
mation display.

■ Driving assist information indicator

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates either of the following systems may be malfunc-
tioning.
 PCS (Pre-Collision System)
 LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
Indicates one of the following systems is malfunctioning or
disabled.
 PKSB (Parking Support Brake) (if equipped)
 RCD (Rear Camera Detection) (if equipped)
 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) 8
 Safe Exit Assist
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
When trouble arises

mation display.

■ Dynamic radar cruise control indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the dynamic radar cruise control.
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
(Yellow) mation display.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 426 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Cruise control indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control.
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
(Yellow) mation display.

■ Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist func-
tion
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
When a buzzer does not sounds:
(If equipped)
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possi-
bly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. (P.433)

■ Slip indicator light

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:
 The VSC system;
 The TRAC system; or
 The hill-start assist control system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 427
■ Inappropriate pedal operation warning light* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

When a buzzer sounds:
 Brake Override System is malfunctioning
 Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning
 Drive-Start Control is operating
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Brake Override System is operating.
 Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake
pedal.
*: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
■ Brake hold operated indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
(Flashes) immediately.

■ Parking brake indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

It is possible that the parking brake is not fully engaged or

(Flashes)
released.
(U.S.A.) 8
 Operate the parking brake switch once again.
or
This light comes on when the parking brake is not released.
When trouble arises

If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released,
the system is operating normally.
(Flashes)
(Canada)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 428 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Tire pressure warning light

Warning light Details/Actions

When the light comes on after blinking for approximately 1
minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
 Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
 Natural causes
 Flat tire
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (P.429)

■ Low fuel level warning light

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicated the remain fuel is approximately 12% or less
 Refuel the vehicle.

■ Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warn-

ing buzzer)*
Warning light Details/Actions
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat
belts
 Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front
passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to
make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.
*
: Driver’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or
her seat belt is not fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON, the
buzzer sounds. If the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain
speed.
Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front
passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is
unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time
after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 429
■ Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights (warning buzzer)*

Warning light Details/Actions

Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts
 Fasten the seat belt.
*
: Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:
The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear
passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is
unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time,
after the seat belt is fastened and unfastened and the vehicle reaches a
certain speed.
● “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
■ Warning buzzer
● SRS airbags
In some cases, the buzzer may not
be heard due to being in a noisy ● SRS system related wiring har-
location or audio sound. nesses and power sources
(P.33)
■ Front passenger detection sen-
sor, seat belt reminder and ■ Electric power steering system
warning buzzer warning light (warning buzzer)
● If luggage is placed on the front When the 12-volt battery charge
passenger seat, the front passen- becomes insufficient or the voltage
ger detection sensor may cause temporarily drops, the electric power
the warning light to flash and the steering system warning light may
warning buzzer to sound even if a come on and the warning buzzer
passenger is not sitting in the may sound.
seat. ■ When the tire pressure warning
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, light comes on
the sensor may not detect a pas- Inspect the tires to check if a tire is
senger, and the warning light may punctured.
not operate properly. If a tire is punctured: P.438
■ SRS warning light 8
If none of the tires are punctured:
This warning light indicates prob- Turn the power switch off then turn it
lems with the following: to ON. Check if the tire pressure
When trouble arises

● Airbag sensor assembly warning light comes on or blinks.

 If the tire pressure warning light
● Front impact sensors
blinks for approximately 1 minute
● Side impact sensors (front door) then stays on
● Side impact sensors (rear) There may be a malfunction in the
● Driver’s seat position sensor tire pressure warning system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
● Driver’s seat belt buckle switch dealer immediately.
● Front passenger’s seat belt buckle  If the tire pressure warning light
switch comes on
● SRS warning light 1 After the temperature of the tires
● “AIR BAG ON” indicator light has lowered sufficiently, check
the inflation pressure of each tire

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 430 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

and adjust them to the specified ■ If the tire pressure warning

level. light comes on
2 If the warning light does not turn
off even after several minutes Be sure to observe the following
have elapsed, check that the precautions.
inflation pressure of each tire is Failure to do so could cause a
at the specified level and perform loss of vehicle control and result
initialization. (P.386) in death or serious injury.
■ The tire pressure warning light ● Check and adjust the tire infla-
may come on due to natural tion pressure immediately.
causes
● If the tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure warning light may comes on even after tire infla-
come on due to natural causes such tion pressure adjustment, it is
as natural air leaks and tire inflation probable that you have a flat
pressure changes caused by tem- tire. Have the flat tire replaced
perature. In this case, adjusting the by the nearest Toyota dealer.
tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes). ● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and
■ Conditions that the tire pres- braking.
sure warning system may not If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
function properly you could lose control of the
steering wheel or the brakes.
P.384
■ If a blowout or sudden air
leakage should occur
WARNING
The tire pressure warning system
■ If both the ABS and the brake may not activate immediately.
system warning lights remain
on ■ Maintenance of the tires
Stop your vehicle in a safe place Each tire, including the spare (if
immediately and contact your Toy- provided), should be checked
ota dealer. monthly when cold and inflated to
The vehicle will become the inflation pressure recom-
extremely unstable during brak- mended by the vehicle manufac-
ing, and the ABS system may fail, turer on the vehicle placard or tire
which could cause an accident inflation pressure label (tire and
resulting in death or serious injury. load information label). (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size
■ When the electric power than the size indicated on the
steering system warning light vehicle placard or tire inflation
comes on pressure label [tire and load infor-
When the light comes on yellow, mation label], you should deter-
the assist to the power steering is mine the proper tire inflation
restricted. When the light comes pressure for those tires.)
on red, the assist to the power
steering is lost and handling oper-
ations of the steering wheel
become extremely heavy.
When steering wheel operations
are heavier than usual, grip the
steering wheel firmly and operate
it using more force than usual.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 431

WARNING Your vehicle has also been

equipped with a TPMS (tire pres-
As an added safety feature, your sure warning system) malfunc-
vehicle has been equipped with a tion indicator to indicate when the
tire pressure monitoring system system is not operating properly.
(TPMS-tire pressure warning sys- The TPMS (tire pressure warning
tem) that illuminates a low tire system) malfunction indicator is
pressure telltale (tire pressure combined with the low tire pres-
warning light) when one or more sure telltale (tire pressure warning
of your tires is significantly under- light). When the system detects a
inflated. Accordingly, when the malfunction, the telltale will flash
low tire pressure telltale (tire pres- for approximately one minute and
sure warning light) illuminates, then remain continuously illumi-
you should stop and check your nated. This sequence will con-
tires as soon as possible, and tinue upon subsequent vehicle
inflate them to the proper pres- start-ups as long as the malfunc-
sure. Driving on a significantly tion exists. When the malfunction
under-inflated tire causes the tire indicator is illuminated, the sys-
to overheat and can lead to tire tem may not be able to detect or
failure. Under-inflation also signal low tire pressure as
reduces fuel efficiency and tire intended.
tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle’s handling and stopping ability. TPMS (tire pressure warning sys-
tem) malfunctions may occur for a
Please note that the TPMS (tire variety of reasons, including the
pressure warning system) is not a installation of replacement or
substitute for proper tire mainte- alternate tires or wheels on the
nance, and it is the driver’s vehicle that prevent the TPMS
responsibility to maintain correct (tire pressure warning system)
tire pressure, even if under-infla- from functioning properly. Always
tion has not reached the level to check the TPMS (tire pressure
trigger illumination of the TPMS warning system) malfunction tell-
low tire pressure telltale (tire pres- tale after replacing one or more
sure warning light). tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS (tire pressure warning 8
system) to continue to function
properly.
When trouble arises

NOTICE
■ To ensure the tire pressure
warning system operates
properly
Do not install tires with different
specifications or makers, as the
tire pressure warning system may
not operate properly.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 432 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ If “FCV System Stopped Steer-

If a warning message ing Power Low” is displayed
is displayed This message is displayed if the fuel
cell system is stopped while driving.
The multi-information dis- When steering wheel operations are
play shows warnings for heavier than usual, grip the steering
wheel firmly and operate it using
system malfunctions and more force than usual.
incorrectly performed oper- ■ If “FCV System High Temp. FCV
ations, and messages that Power Reduced” or “FCV
indicate a need for mainte- Power Reduced Due to Exces-
sive Acceleration” is displayed
nance. When a message is 1 Lower the speed while check the
displayed, perform the safety, and run the vehicle like
appropriate corrective this for several minutes.
action for the message. 2 If the message goes off, the vehi-
cle can be driven as is, since it
If a warning message is dis- temporarily overheated.
played again after the This message may be displayed
when driving under severe operat-
appropriate actions have ing conditions. (For example, when
been performed, contact driving up a long steep hill.)
your Toyota dealer. ■ If “FCV Power Significantly
Reduced” is displayed
Additionally, if a warning
The output power of the fuel cell
light comes on or flashes at system is greatly restrained. If it is
the same time that a warn- displayed frequently, contact your
ing message is displayed, Toyota dealer.
take the appropriate correc- ■ If “FCV System Shutdown Due
tive action for the warning to Freezing Stop in a Safe Place
See Owner’s Manual” is dis-
light. (P.422) played
The fuel cell system is frozen and
■ Warning messages can not be started. Contact your
Toyota dealer.
The warning messages explained
below may differ from the actual ■ If “Stop Vehicle in a Safe Place
messages according to operation Push P Switch” is displayed
conditions and vehicle specifica- There may be a malfunction in the
tions. fuel cell system or the shift position
■ Warning buzzer may be shifted to N for a long time.
Immediately stop the vehicle and
A buzzer may sound when a mes- contact your Toyota dealer.
sage is displayed.
■ If “Shift is in N Release Acceler-
In some cases, the buzzer may not ator Before Shifting” is dis-
be heard due to being in a noisy played
location or audio sound.
The accelerator pedal has been
depressed when the shift position is
in N.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 433
Release the accelerator pedal and though there are no water drops,
shift the shift position to D or R. ice, snow or dirt, the sensor may be
operating abnormally. Have the
■ If “Press brake when vehicle is
stopped FCV system may over- vehicle inspected by your Toyota
heat” is displayed dealer.
The message may be displayed ■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable
when the accelerator pedal is Low Visibility See Owner’s Man-
depressed to hold the vehicle while ual” is displayed
the vehicle is stopped on an incline, Indicates one of the following sys-
etc. The fuel cell system may over- tems is disabled.
heat. Release the accelerator pedal
and depress the brake pedal. ● RCD (Rear Camera Detec-
■ If “Auto Power OFF to Conserve tion) (if equipped)
Battery” is displayed
● PKSB (Parking Support
Power was turned off due to the
automatic power off function. Next Brake) (if equipped)
time when starting the fuel cell sys- Remove any dirt or foreign matter
tem, operate the fuel cell system for from the rear camera.
approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the 12-volt battery. ■ If “System Malfunction Visit
Your Dealer” is displayed
■ If “Headlight System Malfunc-
tion Visit Your Dealer” is dis- Indicates one of the following sys-
played tems is disabled.
The following systems may be mal- ● PCS (Pre-Collision System)
functioning. Have the vehicle ● LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately. ● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
● The LED headlight system ● LCA (Lane Change Assist)
● The automatic headlight leveling ● AHB (Automatic High Beam)
system
● Dynamic radar cruise control
● AHB (Automatic High Beam)
■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable ● RSA (Road Sign Assist)
Sensor Blocked” is displayed 8
A sensor may be covered with water ● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist)
drops, ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove
When trouble arises

the water drops, ice, snow, dirt, etc., ● BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
from the sensor to return the system
to normal. ● RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Also, due to ice forming on a sensor Alert)
at low temperatures, a warning
message may be displayed or the ● Safe Exit Assist
sensor may not be able to detect an
object. Once the ice melts, the sys- ● Intuitive Parking Assist (if
tem will return to normal. equipped)
If a sensor is dirty, the position of the
dirty sensor will be shown on the ● PKSB (Parking Support
display. Brake) (if equipped)
If an abnormality is displayed even

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 434 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

them if any. (P.196)

● RCD (Rear Camera Detec-
• Check situations in which the sen-
tion) (if equipped) sors may not operate properly and
Have the vehicle inspected by your implement improvements where
Toyota dealer. applicable. (P.277, 284, 289)
■ If “System Stopped See • Vehicle with RCD (Rear Camera
Owner’s Manual” is displayed Detection): Check if the trunk is
open.
Indicates one of the following sys-
tems is disabled. Indicates the sensors may not be
operating properly.(P.200, 269,
Check the icon displayed on the
screen and follow the following cor- 277, 284, 289, 297, 299, 301)
rection methods. • Check if there is any foreign mat-
● PCS (Pre-Collision System) ter attached to the rear bumper
near the radar sensor and remove
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert) it if there is. (P.275)
● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) • Check the sensors including cam-
era sensors used by the Intuitive
● LCA (Lane Change Assist) Parking Assist (if equipped) and
● AHB (Automatic High Beam) PKSB (if equipped) for foreign
matter covering them. Remove
● Dynamic radar cruise control them if any.
● RSA (Road Sign Assist) When problems are solved and the
sensors are operational, this indica-
● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) tion may disappear by itself.

● BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ■ If “System Stopped Front Cam-

era Low Visibility See Owner’s
● RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Manual” is displayed
Alert) Indicates one of the following sys-
tems is disabled.
● Safe Exit Assist ● PCS (Pre-Collision System)
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
● Intuitive Parking Assist (if
● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
equipped)
● LCA (Lane Change Assist)
● PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) (if equipped) ● AHB (Automatic High Beam)
● Dynamic radar cruise control
● RCD (Rear Camera Detec-
tion) (if equipped) ● RSA (Road Sign Assist)
Follow the following correction
● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist)
methods.
Follow the following correction
• Check the voltage of the 12-volt
battery. methods.
• Check the sensors that the Toyota • Using the windshield wipers,
Safety Sense 3.0 uses for foreign remove the dirt or foreign matter
matter covering them. Remove from the windshield.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 435
• Using the air conditioning system, ● PCS (Pre-Collision System)
defog the windshield. ● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
• Close the hood, remove any stick-
ers, etc. to clear the obstruction in ● LCA (Lane Change Assist)
front of the front camera.
● AHB (Automatic High Beam)
■ If “System Stopped Front Cam- ● Dynamic radar cruise control
era Out of Temperature Range
Wait until Normal Temperature” ● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist)
is displayed
Indicates one of the following sys- Follow the following correction
tems is disabled. methods.
● PCS (Pre-Collision System) • Check if there is any foreign mat-
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ter attached to the radar sensor or
radar sensor cover and clean
● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) them if necessary (P.197)
● LCA (Lane Change Assist) • This message may be displayed
when driving in an open area with
● AHB (Automatic High Beam) few nearby vehicles or structures,
● Dynamic radar cruise control such as a desert, grasslands, sub-
urbs, etc.
● RSA (Road Sign Assist) The message may be cleared by
driving the vehicle in an area with
● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) structures, vehicles, etc., nearby.
Follow the following correction ■ If “System Stopped Front Radar
methods. Sensor Out of Temperature
• If the front camera is hot, such as Range Wait until Normal Tem-
after the vehicle is parked in the perature” is displayed
sun, use the air conditioning sys- Indicates one of the following sys-
tem to decrease the temperature tems is disabled.
around the front camera ● PCS (Pre-Collision System)
• If a sunshade was used when the ● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
vehicle was parked, depending on
its type, the sunlight reflected from 8
● LCA (Lane Change Assist)
the surface of the sunshade may
cause the temperature of the front ● AHB (Automatic High Beam)
When trouble arises

camera to become excessively ● Dynamic radar cruise control

high
• If the front camera is cold, such ● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist)
after the vehicle is parked in an
extremely cold environment, use The temperature of the radar sensor
the air conditioning system to is outside of the operating range.
increase the temperature around Wait for the temperature to become
the front camera appropriate.
■ If “System Stopped Front Radar ■ If “System Stopped Front Radar
Sensor Blocked Clean Radar In Self Calibration See Owner’s
Sensor” is displayed Manual” is displayed
Indicates one of the following sys- Indicates one of the following sys-
tems is disabled. tems is disabled.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 436 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

● PCS (Pre-Collision System) ● Driver monitor

● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ● Traffic Jam Assist
The temperature of the driver moni-
● LCA (Lane Change Assist) tor camera is outside of the operat-
● AHB (Automatic High Beam) ing range. Wait for the temperature
to become appropriate.
● Dynamic radar cruise control
■ If “Driver Monitor Unavailable
● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) See Owner’s Manual” is dis-
played
Follow the following correction
methods. The lens of the driver monitor cam-
era may be dirty.
• Check if there is any foreign mat- When there is dirt on the camera
ter attached to the radar sensor or lens, clean it with a dry, soft cloth so
radar sensor cover and clean as to not damage it.
them if necessary (P.197)
■ If a message about an operation
• The radar sensor may be mis- is shown
aligned and will be adjusted auto-
matically while driving. Continue ● If a message about an operation
driving for a while. of the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal is shown
■ If “Unavailable Activation Con-
dition not Satisfied See Owner’s A message about an operation of
Manual” is displayed the brake pedal may be shown while
the driving assist systems such as
The LCA function cannot be PCS (Pre-Collision System) or the
used as the operating conditions dynamic radar cruise control is
have not been met. (P.221) operating. If a warning message is
Operate the turn signal lever again shown, be sure to decelerate the
after all of the operating conditions vehicle or follow the instruction
are met. shown on the multi-information dis-
■ If “Cruise Control Unavailable play.
See Owner’s Manual” is dis-
played ● A warning message is shown
when Brake Override System
Indicates one of the following sys- operates. (P.150)
tems is disabled.
● A warning message is shown
● Dynamic radar cruise control when Drive-Start Control oper-
● Cruise control ates (P.155). Follow the instruc-
A message is displayed when the tions on the multi-information
display.
driving assist switch is pushed
repeatedly. ■ If “Shift System Malfunction
Shifting Unavailable Drive to a
Press the driving assist switch Safe Place and Stop” or “Shift
quickly and firmly. System Malfunction Driving
Unavailable” is displayed
■ If “Driver Monitor Out of Tem-
perature Range Wait until Nor- There is a malfunction in the shift
mal Temperature” is displayed control system. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
Indicates one of the following sys- immediately.
tems is disabled.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 437
■ If a message that indicates the tion display, it may indicate a mal-
need for the shift lever opera- function. Immediately stop the
tion is displayed vehicle and contact your Toyota
To prevent the shift lever from being dealer.
operated incorrectly or the vehicle • “Braking Power Low Stop in a
from moving unexpectedly, a mes- Safe Place See Owner’s Manual”
sage that requires shifting the shift • “FCV System Shutdown Due to
position may be displayed on the Hydrogen Leakage Stop in a Safe
multi-information display. In that Place See Owner’s Manual”
case, follow the instruction of the ● If “FCV system stopped” is shown
message and shift the shift position. on the multi-information display,
the vehicle may have run out of
■ If a message that indicates the
fuel. Stop the vehicle in a safe
need for visiting your Toyota place and, if the fuel level is low,
dealer is displayed refuel the vehicle. (P.79)
The system or part shown on the ● If “Low Auxiliary Battery See
multi-information display is malfunc- Owner’s Manual” is shown,
tioning. Have the vehicle inspected
• When the display goes off after
by your Toyota dealer immediately. several seconds (displays for
■ If a message that indicates the about 6 seconds): Maintain the
need for referring to Owner’s fuel cell system operation for more
Manual is displayed than 15 minutes and charge the
● If any of the following messages 12-volt battery.
are shown on the multi-informa- • When the display does not go off:
tion display, it may indicate a mal- Start up the fuel cell system using
function. Have the vehicle the procedures: P.456
inspected by your Toyota dealer ● If “Maintenance Required for Trac-
immediately. tion Battery Cooling Parts See
• “Smart Key System Malfunction Owner’s Manual” is shown, the fil-
See Owner’s Manual” ters may be clogged, the air intake
• “P Switch Malfunction Apply Park- vents may be blocked, or there
ing Brake Securely When Parking may be a gap in the duct. There-
See Owner’s Manual” fore, perform the following correc-
• “Shift System Malfunction Apply tion procedure.
Parking Brake Securely When • Cleaning the traction battery air
Parking See Owner’s Manual” intake vents (P.402) 8
• “Shift System Unavailable Apply If the warning message is shown
Parking Brake Securely When even if the vents are cleaned,
When trouble arises

Parking See Owner’s Manual” have the vehicle inspected by

• “Shift System Malfunction See your Toyota dealer.
Owner’s Manual”
■ If “Ion Filter Maintenance
• “Shift System Malfunction Stop in
a Safe Place See Owner’s Man- Required Visit Your Dealer” is
displayed
ual”
• “Battery Low Shifting Unavailable Ion filter replacement is necessary.
See Owner’s Manual” Contact your Toyota dealer.
• “FCV system malfunction”
• “Traction battery system malfunc-
tion”
• “Accelerator System Malfunction”
● If any of the following messages
are shown on the multi-informa-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 438 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE If you have a flat tire

■ If “Low Auxiliary Battery See
Owner’s Manual” is displayed Your vehicle is not equipped
frequently
with a spare tire, but instead
The 12-volt battery may have
deteriorated. As the battery may is equipped with an emer-
discharge in this state when left gency tire puncture repair
unattended, have the battery kit.
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
A puncture caused by a nail
■ If “Maintenance Required For
Traction Battery At Your or screw passing through
Dealer” is displayed the tire tread can be
This message indicates that the repaired temporarily using
traction battery may require the emergency tire puncture
inspection or replacement. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toy- repair kit. (The kit contains a
ota dealer immediately. bottle of sealant. The seal-
Do not continue driving the vehi- ant can be used only once
cle, as the fuel cell system may
become not able to be started to temporarily repair one
again. tire without removing the
nail or screw from the tire.)
Depending on the damage,
this kit cannot be used to
repair the tire. (P.439)
After temporarily repairing
the tire with the kit, have the
tire repaired or replaced by
your Toyota dealer. Repairs
conducted using the emer-
gency tire puncture repair
kit are only a temporary
measure. Have the tire
repaired and replaced as
soon as possible.

WARNING
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat
tire.
Driving even a short distance with
a flat tire can damage the tire and
the wheel beyond repair, which
could result in an accident.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 439
● When the cut or damage to the
Before repairing the tire tread is 0.16 in. (4 mm) long or
more
 Stop the vehicle in a safe
● When the wheel is damaged
place on a hard, flat surface.
● When two or more tires have been
 Set the parking brake. punctured
 Shift the shift position to P. ● When more than 2 sharp objects
such as nails or screws have
 Stop the fuel cell system. passed through the tread on a sin-
gle tire
 Turn on the emergency flash- ● When the sealant has expired
ers. (P.414)
 Check the degree of the tire
damage.
Do not remove the nail or screw
from the tire. Removing the
object may widen the opening
and make emergency repair
with the repair kit impossible.

8
■ A flat tire that cannot be
repaired with the emergency
tire puncture repair kit
When trouble arises

In the following cases, the tire can-

not be repaired with the emergency
tire puncture repair kit. Contact your
Toyota dealer.
● When the tire is damaged due to
driving without sufficient air pres-
sure
● When there are any cracks or
damage at any location on the
tire, such as on the side wall,
except the tread
● When the tire is visibly separated
from the wheel

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 440 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Location of the emergency tire puncture repair kit and

tools
 Type A

Emergency tire puncture repair kit

Towing eyelet

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 441
 Type B

Emergency tire puncture repair kit

Towing eyelet

Emergency tire puncture  Compressor

repair kit components
 Bottle

8
When trouble arises

Sticker

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 442 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Air pressure gauge ● If the sealant adheres to a wheel

or the surface of the vehicle body,
Compressor switch the stain may not be removable if
it is not cleaned at once. Immedi-
Power plug ately wipe away the sealant with a
wet cloth.
Hose ● During operation of the repair kit,
a loud operation noise is pro-
Air release cap duced. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
■ Note for checking the emer- ● Do not use to check or to adjust
gency tire puncture repair kit the tire pressure.
Check the sealant expiry date occa-
sionally. WARNING
The expiry date is shown on the bot-
tle. Do not use sealant whose expiry ■ Caution while driving
date has already passed. Other- ● Store the repair kit in the lug-
wise, repairs conducted using the gage compartment.
emergency tire puncture repair kit Injuries may result in the event
may not be performed properly. of an accident or sudden brak-
■ Emergency tire puncture repair
ing.
kit ● The repair kit is exclusively only
● The emergency tire puncture for your vehicle.
repair kit is for filling the car tire Do not use repair kit on other
with air. vehicles, which could lead to an
accident causing death or seri-
● The sealant has a limited life
span. The expiry date is marked ous injury.
on the bottle. The sealant should ● Do not use repair kit for tires
be replaced before the expiry that are different size than the
date. Contact your Toyota dealer original ones, or for any other
for replacement. purpose. If the tires have not
● The sealant stored in the emer- been completely repaired, it
gency tire puncture repair kit can could lead to an accident caus-
be used only once to temporarily ing death or serious injury.
repair a single tire. If the sealant
has been used and needs to be ■ Precautions for use of the
replaced, purchase a new bottle at sealant
your Toyota dealer. The compres- ● Ingesting the sealant is hazard-
sor is reusable. ous to your health. If you ingest
● The sealant can be used when the sealant, consume as much
outside temperature is from -40°F water as possible, and then
(-40°C) to 140°F (60°C). immediately consult a doctor.
● The kit is exclusively designed for ● If sealant gets in eyes or
size and type of tires originally adheres to skin, immediately
installed on your vehicle. Do not wash it off with water. If discom-
use it for tires that a different size fort persists, consult a doctor.
than the original ones, or for any
other purposes.
● If the sealant gets on your clothes,
it may stain.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 443

Taking out the emer- Emergency repair method

gency tire puncture repair
1 Remove the hose and take
kit
out the power plug from the
1 Remove the luggage mat. compressor.
(P.328)
2 Remove the band.

2 Connect the bottle to the

compressor.
3 Take out the emergency tire Insert and connect the bottle
straight into the compressor as
puncture repair kit. (P.440) shown in the illustration, and check
that the claws of the bottle are con-
cealed in the holes.

8
When trouble arises

3 Connect the hose to the bot-

tle.
As shown in the illustration, make

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 444 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

sure the hose is connected place.

securely to the bottle.

6 Connect the hose to the

valve.
Screw the end of the hose clock-
wise as far as possible.

4 Remove the valve cap from

the valve of the punctured
tire.

7 Make sure that the compres-

sor switch is off.

5 Extend the hose. Remove

the air release cap from the
hose.
You will use the air release cap
again. Therefore keep it in a safe

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 445
8 Connect the power plug to 12To inject the sealant and
the power outlet socket. inflate the tire, turn the com-
(P.340) pressor switch on.

9 Attach the sticker provided 13Inflate the tire until the speci-
with the tire puncture repair fied air pressure is reached.
kit to a position easily seen
from the driver’s seat.

10Check the specified tire infla-

tion pressure.
Tire inflation pressure is specified 8
on the label on the driver’s side
door frame as shown. (P.472)
When trouble arises

The sealant will be injected

and the pressure will spike to
300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2 or bar,
44 psi) or 400 kPa (4.0
kgf/cm2 or bar, 58 psi), then
gradually decrease.
11Start the fuel cell system. The air pressure gauge will
(P.160) display the actual tire inflation

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 446 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

pressure about 1 to 5 min- If the air release cap is not

utes after the switch is turned attached, the sealant may leak and
the vehicle may get dirty.
on.
 Turn the compressor switch
off and then check the tire
inflation pressure. Being care-
ful not to over inflate, check
and repeat the inflation proce-
dure until the specified tire
inflation pressure is reached.
 The tire can be inflated for
17Temporarily store the bottle
about 5 to 20 minutes
in the luggage compartment
(depending on the outside
while it is connected to the
temperature). If the tire infla-
compressor.
tion pressure is still lower than
the specified point after infla- 18To spread the liquid sealant
tion for 25 minutes, the tire is evenly within the tire, imme-
too damaged to be repaired. diately drive safely for about
Turn the compressor switch 5 km (3 miles) below 80 km/h
off and contact your Toyota (50 mph).
dealer. 19After driving, stop your vehi-
 If the tire inflation pressure cle in a safe place on a hard,
exceeds the specified air flat surface and reconnect
pressure, let out some air to the repair kit.
adjust the tire inflation pres- Remove the air release cap from
sure. (P.447, 472) the hose before reconnecting the
hose.
14With the compressor switch
off, pull out the power plug
from the power outlet socket
and then disconnect the hose
from the valve on the tire.
Some sealant may leak when the
hose is removed.
15Install the valve cap onto the
valve of the emergency
repaired tire. 20Turn the compressor switch
on and wait for several sec-
16Attach the air release cap to
the end of the hose.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 447
onds, then turn it off. Check the vehicle may get dirty.
the tire inflation pressure.

23Store the bottle in the lug-

gage compartment while it is
If the tire inflation pressure is
connected to the compres-
under 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm2 sor.
or bar, 19 psi): The puncture
24Taking precautions to avoid
cannot be repaired. Contact
sudden braking, sudden
your Toyota dealer.
acceleration and sharp turns,
If the tire inflation pressure is drive carefully at under 80
130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, km/h (50 mph) to the nearest
19 psi) or higher, but less Toyota dealer that is less
than the specified air pres- than 100 km (62 miles) away
sure: Proceed to step 21. for tire repair or replacement.
If the tire inflation pressure is When having the tire repaired or
replaced, make sure to tell your
the specified air pressure Toyota dealer that the sealant is
(P.472): Proceed to step injected.
22.
■ If the tire is inflated to more
21Turn the compressor switch than the specified air pressure 8
on to inflate the tire until the 1 Disconnect the hose from the
specified air pressure is valve.
When trouble arises

2 Install the air release cap to the

reached. Drive for about 5 end of the hose and push the
km (3 miles) and then per- protrusion on the air release cap
form step 19. into the tire valve to let some air
out.
22Attach the air release cap to
the end of the hose.
If the air release cap is not
attached, the sealant may leak and

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 448 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

3 Disconnect the hose from the date. Contact your Toyota dealer
valve, remove the air release cap for replacement.
from the hose and then recon- ● The sealant stored in the emer-
nect the hose. gency tire puncture repair kit can
4 Turn the compressor switch on be used only once to temporarily
and wait for several seconds, repair a single tire. If the sealant in
and then turn it off. Check that the bottle and other parts of the kit
the air pressure indicator shows have been used and need to be
the specified air pressure. replaced, contact your Toyota
(P.472) dealer.
If the air pressure is under the des- ● The compressor can be used
ignated pressure, turn the compres- repeatedly.
sor switch on again and repeat the
inflation procedure until the speci- ● The sealant can be used when the
fied air pressure is reached. outside temperature is from -40°F
(-40°C) to 140°F (60°C).
■ The valve of a tire that has been
● The kit is exclusively designed for
repaired
size and type of tires originally
After a tire is repaired with the emer- installed on your vehicle. Do not
gency tire puncture repair kit, the use it for tires that a different size
valve should be replaced. than the original ones, or for any
■ After a tire is repaired with the other purposes.
emergency tire puncture repair ● If the sealant gets on your clothes,
kit it may stain.
● The tire pressure warning valve ● If the sealant adheres to a wheel
and transmitter should be or the surface of the vehicle body,
replaced. the stain may not be removable if
● Even if the tire inflation pressure is it is not cleaned at once. Immedi-
at the recommended level, the tire ately wipe away the sealant with a
pressure warning light may come wet cloth.
on/flash. ● During operation of the repair kit,
a loud operation noise is pro-
■ Note for checking the emer-
duced. This does not indicate a
gency tire puncture repair kit malfunction.
Check the sealant expiry date occa- ● Do not use to check or to adjust
sionally. the tire pressure.
The expiry date is shown on the bot-
tle. Do not use sealant whose expiry
date has already passed. Other- WARNING
wise, repairs conducted using the ■ Do not drive the vehicle with
emergency tire puncture repair kit a flat tire
may not be performed properly.
Do not continue driving with a flat
■ Emergency tire puncture repair tire.
kit
Driving even a short distance with
● The emergency tire puncture a flat tire can damage the tire and
repair kit is for filling the car tire the wheel beyond repair.
with air.
Driving with a flat tire may cause a
● The sealant has a limited life circumferential groove on the side
span. The expiry date is marked wall. In such a case, the tire may
on the bottle. The sealant should explode when using a repair kit.
be replaced before the expiry

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 449

WARNING ● The repair kit may overheat if

operated for a long period of
■ When fixing the flat tire time. Do not operate the repair
● Stop your vehicle in a safe and kit continuously for more than
flat area. 40 minutes.

● Do not touch the wheels or the ● Parts of the repair kit become
area around the brakes immedi- hot during operation. Be careful
ately after the vehicle has been handling the repair kit during
driven. and after operation. Do not
After the vehicle has been touch the metal part connecting
driven, the wheels and the area the bottle and the compressor. It
around the brakes may be will be extremely hot.
extremely hot. Touching these
areas with hands, feet or other ● Do not attach the vehicle speed
body parts may result in burns. warning sticker to an area other
than the one indicated. If the
● Connect the valve and hose sticker is attached to an area
securely with the tire installed where an SRS airbag is located,
on the vehicle. If the hose is not such as the pad of the steering
properly connected to the valve, wheel, it may prevent the SRS
air leakage may occur as seal- airbag from operating properly.
ant may be sprayed out.
■ Driving to spread the liquid
● If the hose comes off the valve sealant evenly
while inflating the tire, there is a Observe the following precautions
risk that the hose will move to reduce the risk of accidents.
abruptly due to air pressure.
Failing to do so may result in a
● After inflation of the tire has loss of vehicle control and cause
completed, the sealant may death or serious injury.
splatter when the hose is dis-
connected or some air is let out ● Drive the vehicle carefully at a
of the tire. low speed. Be especially careful
when turning and cornering.
● Follow the operation procedure
to repair the tire. If the proce- ● If the vehicle does not drive
straight or you feel a pull 8
dures not followed, the sealant
may spray out. through the steering wheel, stop
the vehicle and check the fol-
When trouble arises

● Keep back from the tire while it lowing.

is being repaired, as there is a
chance of it bursting while the • Tire condition. The tire may
repair operation is being per- have separated from the wheel.
formed. If you notice any cracks • Tire inflation pressure. If the tire
or deformation of the tire, turn inflation pressure is 19 psi (130
off the compressor switch and
stop the repair operation imme- kPa, 1.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) or less,
diately. the tire may be severely dam-
aged.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 450 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE ● Do not disassemble or modify

the repair kit. Do not subject
■ When performing an emer- parts such as the air pressure
gency repair indicator to impacts. This may
● A tire should only be repaired cause a malfunction.
with the emergency tire punc-
ture repair kit if the damage is ■ To avoid damage to the tire
caused by a sharp object such pressure warning valves and
as nail or screw passing through transmitters
the tire tread. When a tire is repaired with liquid
Do not remove the sharp object sealants, the tire pressure warn-
from the tire. Removing the ing valve and transmitter may not
object may widen the opening operate properly. If a liquid seal-
and disenable emergency repair ant is used, contact your Toyota
with the repair kit. dealer or other qualified service
shop as soon as possible. After
● The repair kit is not waterproof. use of liquid sealant, make sure to
Make sure that the repair kit is replace the tire pressure warning
not exposed to water, such as valve and transmitter when repair-
when it is being used in the rain. ing or replacing the tire. (P.384)
● Do not put the repair kit directly
onto dusty ground such as sand
at the side of the road. If the
repair kit vacuums up dust etc.,
a malfunction may occur.
■ Precautions for the emer-
gency tire puncture repair kit
● The repair kit power source
should be 12 V DC suitable for
vehicle use. Do not connect the
repair kit to any other source.
● If fuel splatters on the repair kit,
the repair kit may deteriorate.
Take care not to allow fuel to
contact it.
● Place the repair kit in a storage
to prevent it from being exposed
to dirt or water.
● Store the repair kit in the lug-
gage compartment out of reach
of children.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 451

If the fuel cell system depending on the type of mal-

will not start function, an interim measure
is available to start the fuel
cell system. (P.452)
Reasons for the fuel cell
system not starting vary  There is a possibility that the
depending on the situation. temperature of the traction
Check the following and battery is extremely low
perform the appropriate (approximately below -22˚F [-
procedure: 30˚C]). (P.81, 160)
 It is possible the fuel cell sys-
The fuel cell system will tem is frozen. (P.160)
*
not start even though the : It may not be possible to shift the
shift position from P.
correct starting procedure
is being followed.
(P.160) The interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the
One of the following may be the horn does not sound or
cause of the problem: sounds at a low volume.
 The electronic key may not be
One of the following may be the
functioning properly.
cause of the problem:
(P.454)
 The 12-volt battery may be
 There may not be sufficient
discharged. (P.456)
fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.  The 12-volt battery terminal
connections may be loose or
 The fuel door may be open.
corroded. (P.378) 8
(P.191)
 There may be a malfunction
The interior lights and
When trouble arises

in the immobilizer system.

(P.67)
headlights do not turn on,
or the horn does not
 There may be a malfunction
sound.
in the shift control system.*
(P.163, 436) One of the following may be the
cause of the problem:
 The fuel cell system may be
malfunctioning due to an elec-  One or both of the 12-volt bat-
trical problem such as elec- tery terminals may be discon-
tronic key battery depletion or nected. (P.378)
a blown fuse. However,  The 12-volt battery may be

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 452 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

discharged. (P.456) and perform the following step

within 5 seconds.
Contact your Toyota dealer if the
problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.

Starting the fuel cell sys-

tem in an emergency
When the fuel cell system does
not start, the following steps can
be used as an interim measure
to start the fuel cell system if the
power switch is functioning nor-
mally.
Do not use this starting proce-
dure except in cases of emer-
gency.
1 Pull the parking brake switch
to check that the parking
brake is set. (P.171)
Parking brake indicator will come
on.
2 Shift the shift position to P.
3 Turn the power switch to
ACC.*1, 2
4 Press and hold the power
switch for about 15 seconds
while depressing the brake
pedal firmly.
Even if the fuel cell system can
be started using the above
steps, the system may be mal-
functioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*1
: ACC mode can be enabled/dis-
abled on the customize menu.
(P.489)
*2
: When ACC is disabled, turn the
power switch to ON then OFF,

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 453

If you lose your keys If the fuel door cannot

be opened
New genuine mechanical
keys can be made by your If the fuel door opener
Toyota dealer using another switch cannot be operated,
mechanical key and the key the following procedure can
number stamped on your be used to open the fuel
key number plate. door.
Keep the plate in a safe
place such as your wallet, Opening the fuel door
not in the vehicle.
1 Remove the cover inside the
NOTICE trunk.
■ When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost,
the risk of vehicle theft increases
significantly. Visit your Toyota
dealer immediately with all
remaining electronic keys that
were provided with your vehicle.

2 After removing the cover, pull

the lever to unlock the fuel
door and it will be ready to
open as usual.
8
When trouble arises

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 454 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the electronic key Locking and unlocking

does not operate prop- the doors, unlocking the
erly trunk
Use the mechanical key
If communication between
(P.118) in order to perform the
the electronic key and vehi-
following operations:
cle is interrupted (P.131)
or the electronic key cannot ■ Locking and unlocking the
be used because the battery door
is depleted, the smart key
system and wireless remote
control cannot be used. In
such cases, the doors and
trunk can be opened and
the fuel cell system can be
started by following the pro-
cedure below.

1 Locks all the doors

■ When the electronic key does
not work properly 2 Unlocks all the doors
● Make sure that the smart key sys- ■ Locking the door
tem has not been deactivated in
the customization setting. If it is 1 With the door open, push
off, turn the function on. (Custom- down the inside lock button.
izable features: P.484)
● Check if battery-saving mode is
set. If it is set, cancel the function.
(P.131)
● The electronic key function may
have stopped. (P.131)

NOTICE
■ In case of a smart key system
malfunction or other key-
related problems 2 Close the door.
Take your vehicle with all the elec-
tronic keys provided with your ■ Trunk
vehicle to your Toyota dealer. Turn the mechanical key clock-
wise to open. (P.68)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 455

Starting the fuel cell sys-

tem
1 With the P shift position
selected, firmly depress the
brake pedal.
2 Touch the area behind the
buttons on the electronic key
to the power switch.
■ Key linked functions
When the electronic key is
detected, a buzzer sounds and the
power switch will turn to ON.
When the smart key system is
deactivated in customization setting
and ACC customization is in on, the
power switch will turn to ACC.

1 Closes the windows (turn and

hold)*
2 Opens the windows (turn and
hold)*
*
: These settings must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.

3 Firmly depress the brake

WARNING
■ When using the mechanical pedal and check that is
key and operating the power shown on the multi-informa- 8
windows
Operate the power window after
tion display.
When trouble arises

checking to make sure that there 4 Press the power switch

is no possibility of any passenger shortly and firmly.
having any of their body parts
caught in the window. In the event that the fuel cell
Also, do not allow children to
operate the mechanical key. It is system still cannot be started,
possible for children and other contact your Toyota dealer.
passengers to get caught in the
power window.
■ Stopping the fuel cell system
Set the parking brake, shift the shift
position to P and press the power
switch as you normally do when
stopping the fuel cell system.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 456 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Electronic key battery

If the 12-volt battery is
As the above procedure is a tempo-
rary measure, it is recommended discharged
that the electronic key battery be
replaced immediately when the bat- The following procedures
tery is depleted. (P.405)
may be used to start the fuel
■ Alarm
cell system if the 12-volt
Using the mechanical key to lock
the doors will not set the alarm sys- battery is discharged.
tem. If a door is unlocked using the You can also call your Toy-
mechanical key when the alarm sys- ota dealer or a qualified
tem is set, the alarm may be trig-
gered. (P.68) repair shop.
■ Changing power switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press Restarting the fuel cell
the power switch in step 3 above. system
The fuel cell system does not start
and modes will be changed each
time the switch is pressed. (P.164) If you have a set of jumper (or
booster) cables and a second
vehicle with a 12-volt battery,
you can jump start your vehicle
by following the steps below.
1 Open the hood. Remove the
fuse box cover. (P.371)
Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 457
2 Open the exclusive jump
starting terminal cover.

3 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to on your vehicle and

connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to on
the second vehicle. Then, connect a negative cable clamp to
on the second vehicle and connect the clamp at the other end of
the negative cable to .
When connecting to an unpainted metallic point , make the connection
after checking the surrounding area. Also, do not make any connections
where parts nearby may interfere.
Use jumper cables that can reach the specified terminals and connecting
point.

8
When trouble arises

Exclusive jump starting terminal (your vehicle)

Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 458 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Metallic point shown in the illustration

4 Start the engine of the sec- ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
ond vehicle. Increase the charge
engine speed slightly and ● Turn off the headlights and the
audio system while the fuel cell
maintain at that level for system is off.
approximately 5 minutes to ● Turn off any unnecessary electri-
recharge the 12-volt battery cal components when the vehicle
of your vehicle. is running at a low speed for an
extended period, such as in heavy
5 Open and close any of the traffic.
doors of your vehicle with the ● When ACC customization is in off,
power switch off. power is still provided to the multi-
media system even though the
6 Maintain the engine speed of power switch is off. To turn off the
multimedia system, use the multi-
the second vehicle and start media system power switch. For
the fuel cell system of your details, refer to the “MULTIMEDIA
vehicle by turning the power OWNER’S MANUAL”.
switch to ON. ■ When the 12-volt battery is
removed or discharged
7 Make sure the “READY” indi-
● Information stored in the ECU is
cator comes on. If the indica- cleared. When the 12-volt battery
tor does not come on, contact is depleted, have the vehicle
your Toyota dealer. inspected at your Toyota dealer.
● Some systems may require initial-
8 Once the fuel cell system has ization. (P.497)
started, remove the jumper ■ When removing the 12-volt bat-
cables in the exact reverse tery terminals
order from which they were When the 12-volt battery terminals
connected. are removed, the information stored
in the ECU is cleared. Before
9 Close the exclusive jump removing the 12-volt battery termi-
starting terminal cover and nals, contact your Toyota dealer.
install the fuse box cover. ■ Charging the 12-volt battery
The electricity stored in the 12-volt
Once the fuel cell system starts, battery will discharge gradually even
have the vehicle inspected at when the vehicle is not in use, due
your Toyota dealer as soon as to natural discharge and the drain-
ing effects of certain electrical appli-
possible. ances. If the vehicle is left for a long
time, the 12-volt battery may dis-
■ Starting the fuel cell system charge, and the fuel cell system
when the 12-volt battery is dis- may be unable to start. (The 12-volt
charged battery recharges automatically
while the fuel cell system is operat-
The fuel cell system cannot be ing.)
started by push-starting.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 459
■ When recharging or replacing ■ When replacing the 12-volt bat-
the 12-volt battery tery
● In some cases, it may not be pos- ● Use a Central Degassing type 12-
sible to unlock the doors using the volt battery (European Regula-
smart key system when the 12- tions).
volt battery is discharged. Use the ● Use a battery that the case size is
wireless remote control or the same as the previous one (LN2),
mechanical key to lock or unlock 20 hour rate capacity (20HR) is
the doors. equivalent (55Ah) or greater, and
● The fuel cell system may not start performance rating (CCA) is
on the first attempt after the 12- equivalent (345A) or greater.
volt battery has recharged but will • If the sizes differ, the 12-volt bat-
start normally after the second tery cannot be properly secured.
attempt. This is not a malfunction. • If the 20 hour rate capacity is low,
● The power switch mode is memo- even if the time period where the
rized by the vehicle. When the 12- vehicle is not used is a short time,
volt battery is reconnected, the the 12-volt battery may discharge
system will return to the mode it and the fuel cell system may not
was in before the 12-volt battery be able to start.
was discharged. Before discon- ● Use a 12-volt battery with a han-
necting the 12-volt battery, turn dle. If a 12-volt battery without a
the power switch off. handle is used, removal is more
If you are unsure what mode the difficult.
power switch was in before the ● After replacing, firmly attach the
12-volt battery discharged, be following items to the exhaust hole
especially careful when recon- of the 12-volt battery.
necting the 12-volt battery. • Use the exhaust hose that was
● When the 12-volt battery is recon- attached to the 12-volt battery
nected, start the fuel cell system, before replacing and confirm that
depress the brake pedal, and con- it is firmly connected to the hole
firm that it is possible to shift into section of the vehicle.
each shift position. • Use the exhaust hole plug
● If the battery is removed or the ter- included with the 12-volt battery
minals disconnected without oper- replaced or the one installed on
ating the water release function the 12-volt battery prior to the 8
during cold weather, the vehicle replacement. (Depending on the
may not start due to the fuel cell 12-volt battery to be replaced, the
exhaust hole may be plugged.)
When trouble arises

system being frozen. To prevent

this, operate the water release
function before removing the bat-
tery or disconnecting the termi-
nals. (P.176)
● If the 12-volt battery discharges, it
may not be possible to shift the
shift position to other positions.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be
towed without lifting both rear
wheels because the rear wheels Exhaust hole plug
will be locked.
Exhaust hole

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 460 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Exhaust hose ■ 12-volt battery precautions

For details, consult your Toyota The 12-volt battery contains poi-
sonous and corrosive acidic elec-
dealer. trolyte, while related parts contain
lead and lead compounds.
WARNING Observe the following precautions
when handling the 12-volt battery:
■ When removing the 12-volt
battery terminals ● When working with the 12-volt
battery, always wear safety
Always remove the negative (-) glasses and take care not to
terminal first. If the positive (+) ter- allow any battery fluids (acid) to
minal contacts any metal in the come into contact with skin,
surrounding area when the posi- clothing or the vehicle body.
tive (+) terminal is removed, a
spark may occur, leading to a fire ● Do not lean over the 12-volt bat-
in addition to electrical shocks tery.
and death or serious injury.
● In the event that battery fluid
■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires comes into contact with the skin
or explosions or eyes, immediately wash the
Observe the following precautions affected area with water and
to prevent accidentally igniting the seek medical attention. Place a
flammable gas that may be emit- wet sponge or cloth over the
ted from the 12-volt battery: affected area until medical
attention can be received.
● Make sure each jumper cable is
connected to the correct termi- ● Always wash your hands after
nal and that it is not unintention- handling the 12-volt battery sup-
ally in contact with any other port, terminals, and other bat-
than the intended terminal. tery-related parts.

● Do not allow the other end of ● Do not allow children near the
the jumper cable connected to 12-volt battery.
the “+” terminal to come into
■ After recharging the 12-volt
contact with any other parts or
metal surfaces in the area, such battery
as brackets or unpainted metal. Have the 12-volt battery
inspected at your Toyota dealer
● Do not allow the + and - clamps as soon as possible.
of the jumper cables to come If the 12-volt battery is deteriorat-
into contact with each other. ing, continued use may cause the
12-volt battery to emit a malodor-
● Do not smoke, use matches, ous gas, which may be detrimen-
cigarette lighters or allow open tal to the health of passengers.
flame near the 12-volt battery.
■ When replacing the 12-volt
battery
● When the vent plug and indica-
tor are close to the hold down
clamp, the battery fluid (sulfuric
acid) may leak.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 461

WARNING
● For information regarding 12-
volt battery replacement, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
● After replacing, securely attach
the exhaust hose and exhaust
hole plug to the exhaust hole of
the replaced 12-volt battery. If
not properly installed, gases
(hydrogen) may leak into the
vehicle interior, and there is the
possible danger of the gas ignit-
ing and exploding.

NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper
cables, ensure that they do not
become entangled in the cooling
fan.
■ When connecting jumper
cables
Make sure to connect jumper
cables to the specified terminals
and connecting point. Failure to
do so may adversely affect the
electronic devices or damage to
them.
■ To prevent damaging the
vehicle
8
The exclusive jump starting termi-
nal is to be used when charging
the 12-volt battery from another
When trouble arises

vehicle in an emergency. It cannot

be used to jump start another
vehicle.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 462 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

 The high coolant temperature warning light (P.423) comes on
or flashes, or a loss of fuel cell system power is experienced.
(For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
 The fuel cell system overheat warning light (P.423) comes on
 Steam comes out from under the hood.

Parts name for cooling components

Label
Fuel cell stack coolant reservoir
Inverter coolant reservoir

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 463

NOTICE tor core (radiator) for any

leaks.
■ Fuel cell stack coolant
The fuel cell stack coolant is
exclusive for fuel cell stack usage.
Damage may occur when water
or any other type of coolant is
used, so never use any other
fluid. If the fuel cell stack coolant
is low, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer.

Electric cooling fan

Fuel cell stack coolant radia-
tor
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Toyota
Correction procedures dealer.
4 The fuel cell stack coolant
 If the high coolant tempera-
level is satisfactory if it is
ture warning light comes on or
between the “MAX” and
flashes
“MIN” lines on the reservoir.
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and turn off the air con-
ditioning system, and then
stop the fuel cell system.
2 If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after 8
the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
When trouble arises

Carefully lift the hood.

3 After the fuel cell system has Fuel cell stack coolant reser-
cooled down sufficiently, voir
inspect the hoses and radia- “MAX” line
“MIN” line
If the amount of fuel cell stack
coolant is low:
Immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 464 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the amount of fuel cell stack hoses and radiator core (radi-
coolant is not low: ator) for any leaks.
Have the vehicle inspected at
the nearest Toyota dealer.
Even if the fuel cell stack cool-
ant is low, do not refill it.

Electric cooling fan

Inverter coolant radiator
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Toyota
 If the fuel cell system over-
dealer.
heat warning light comes on
4 The inverter coolant level is
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe
satisfactory if it is between
place and turn off the air con-
the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on
ditioning system, and then
the reservoir.
stop the fuel cell system.
2 If you see steam or coolant
leaks:
Carefully lift the hood after
the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam or
coolant leaks:
Carefully lift the hood.
3 After the fuel cell system has
cooled down, inspect the Inverter coolant reservoir
“MAX” line
“MIN” line
5 Add inverter coolant if neces-
sary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if inverter coolant is unavail-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 465
able. ● If steam is seen coming from
under the hood, do not open the
hood until the steam has sub-
sided. The fuel cell unit com-
partment may be very hot.
● Even if fuel cell system has
stopped, the cooling fan may
begin to move suddenly.
Do not touch or approach the
rotating parts of the fan. Doing
so may lead to fingers, clothes
or tools getting caught, resulting
6 Start the fuel cell system and in injury.
turn the air conditioning sys-
● Do not loosen the coolant reser-
tem on to check that the radi- voir caps or radiator cap, while
ator cooling fan operate and the fuel cell system and radiator
to check for coolant leaks are hot.
High temperature steam or
from the radiator or hoses. coolant could spray out.
The fan operate when the air condi-
tioning system is turned on immedi-
ately after a cold start. Confirm that NOTICE
the fan is operating by checking the
fan sound and air flow. If it is diffi- ■ When inverter coolant
cult to check these, turn the air con- Add coolant slowly after the fuel
ditioning system on and off cell system has cooled down suffi-
repeatedly. ciently. Adding inverter cool cool-
(The fan may not operate in freez- ant to a hot fuel cell system too
ing temperatures.) quickly can cause damage to the
fuel cell system.
7 If the fan is not operating:
Stop the fuel cell system ■ To prevent damage to the
cooling system
immediately and contact your
Observe the following precau- 8
Toyota dealer. tions:
If the fan is operating: ● Avoid contaminating the coolant
Have the vehicle inspected at with foreign matter (such as
When trouble arises

the nearest Toyota dealer. sand or dust etc.).

● Do not use any coolant additive
WARNING with inverter coolant.
■ When inspecting under the ● For replacement of the fuel cell
hood of your vehicle stack coolant, contact your Toy-
Observe the following precau- ota dealer.
tions.
Failure to do so may result in seri- ● Do not use water or any other
ous injury such as burns. coolant when refilling the fuel
cell stack coolant. Also, do not
use any additive agents for the
coolant.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 466 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes WARNING

stuck ■ When attempting to free a
stuck vehicle
Carry out the following pro- If you choose to push the vehicle
back and forth to free it, make
cedures if the tires spin or sure the surrounding area is clear
the vehicle becomes stuck to avoid striking other vehicles,
in mud, dirt or snow: objects or people. The vehicle
may also lunge forward or lunge
back suddenly as it becomes free.
Use extreme caution.
Recovering procedure
■ When shifting the shift posi-
1 Set the parking brake and tion
stop the fuel cell system. Be careful not to shift the shift
position with the accelerator pedal
2 Remove the mud, snow or depressed.
sand from around the rear This may lead to unexpected
wheels. rapid acceleration of the vehicle
that may cause an accident
3 Place wood, stones or some resulting in death or serious injury.
other material under the rear
wheels to help provide trac- NOTICE
tion. ■ To avoid damaging the trans-
4 Restart the fuel cell system. mission and other compo-
nents
5 Shift the shift position to D or ● Avoid spinning the rear wheels
R and release the parking and depressing the accelerator
brake. Then, while exercising pedal more than necessary.
caution, depress the acceler- ● If the vehicle remains stuck
ator pedal. even after these procedures are
performed, the vehicle may
require towing to be freed.
■ When it is difficult to free the
vehicle

Press the switch to turn off

TRAC.

“Traction Control Turned Off”

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 467

Vehicle specifications
9
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, fluid
level, etc.).................. 468
Tire information ........... 474
9-2. Customization
Customizable features 484
9-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ......... 497

9
Vehicle specifications

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 468 9-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, fluid level, etc.)

[Link]

Dimensions and weight

Overall length 195.9 in. (4975 mm)

Overall width 74.2 in. (1885 mm)

Overall height* 57.9 in. (1470 mm)

Wheelbase 115.0 in. (2920 mm)
Front 63.4 in. (1610 mm)
Tread*1
Rear 63.2 in. (1605 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
835 lb. (380 kg)
(Occupants + luggage)
*
: Unladen vehicles

Seating capacity

Seating capacity 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification num-
ber
The vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) is the legal identifier
for your vehicle. This is the pri-
mary identification number for
your Toyota. It is used in regis- This number is also stamped
tering the ownership of your under the right-hand front seat.
vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-1. Specifications 469
This number is also on the Certi-
fication Label.

Fuel

Fuel type Compressed hydrogen gas*1

Nominal working pressure 10150 psi (70 MPa, 714 kgf/cm2, 700
bar)
Hydrogen tanks’ fuel capacity (Refer- 37.5 gal. (142.2 L, 31.2 [Link].)
ence) (Approximately 12.6 lb. [5.7 kg.]*2)
*1: H2 quality standard:
EN 17124 (European standard for EU27 countries)
ISO 14687 Grade D (European standard)
SAE J2719 (US standard)
*2
: This is the maximum possible fill amount. The actual fuel amount
achieved at hydrogen stations may be different due to station capacity or
station settings.

Electric motor (traction motor)

Permanent magnet synchronous

Type
motor
Maximum output 134 kW 9

Maximum torque 221.3 ft•lbf (300 N•m, 30.6 kgf•m)

Vehicle specifications

Traction battery

Type Lithium-ion battery

Voltage 3.7 V/cell
Capacity 4.0 Ah

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 470 9-1. Specifications

Quantity 84 cells
Nominal voltage 310.8 V

Cooling system

Fuel cell
17.3 qt. (16.4 L, 14.4 Imp. qt.)
Capacity * stack
Inverter 4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp. qt.)
“Toyota Genuine FC Stack Coolant”
 In order to safely cool the fuel cell stack, which
is at high voltages, the fuel cell stack coolant is
an exclusive high insulation product.
 Never use water or other kinds of coolants as
Fuel cell they will cause damage.
stack  Coolant changes are unnecessary.
 Do not reuse coolant that has been removed
from the radiator.
Coolant  Coolant is colorless.
type  Consult your Toyota dealer about replenishing
or changing the fuel cell stack coolant.
Use either of the following:
 “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
 Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-
Inverter silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
Do not use plain water alone.
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-1. Specifications 471

NOTICE
■ Fuel cell stack coolant
The fuel cell stack coolant is exclusive for fuel cell stack usage. Damage
may occur when water or any other type of coolant is used, so never use
any other fluid.
If the fuel cell stack coolant is low, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

Electrical system (12-volt battery)

12.0 V or higher
Open voltage at 68°F (20°C): (Turn the power switch off and turn on the
high beam headlights for 30 seconds.)
Charging rates 5 A max.

Transmission

Fluid capacity* 5.9 qt. (5.6 L, 4.9 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*
: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE
■ Transmission fluid type
9
Using transmission fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal
noise or vibration, or damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Vehicle specifications

Brakes

Pedal clearance*1 4.0 in. (102 mm) Min.

Pedal free play 0.04  0.24 in. (1  6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1 mm)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 472 9-1. Specifications

Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1 mm)

When pulling the parking brake switch for
1 to 2 seconds: comes on
Parking brake indicator*2
When pushing the parking brake switch for
1 to 2 seconds: turns off
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
Fluid type
FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N,
51 kgf) while the fuel cell system is operating.
When performing the brake pedal inspection, also be sure to check that
the brake system warning light is not illuminated when the fuel cell sys-
tem is operating. (If the brake system warning light is illuminated, refer to
P.422.)
*2
: Make sure to confirm that the brake warning light (yellow) does not illumi-
nate. (If the brake warning light illuminates, refer to P.422.)

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Tires and wheels

 19-inch tires
Tire size 235/55R19 101V
Tire inflation pressure Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure) Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 19  8J
Wheel nut torque 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)

 20-inch tires
Tire size 245/45ZR20 103Y
Tire inflation pressure Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure) Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-1. Specifications 473

Wheel size 20  8 1/2J

Wheel nut torque 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)

9
Vehicle specifications

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 474 9-1. Specifications

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

Tire size (P.475)

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P.475)
Location of treadwear indicators (P.381)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a
bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pres-
sure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P.381)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P.472)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Summer tires or all season tires (P.381)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-1. Specifications 475
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.

Typical DOT and Tire  Type B

Identification Number
(TIN)
 Type A

DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
DOT symbol* Tire manufacturer’s identifi-
cation mark
Tire Identification Number
(TIN) Manufacturer’s code

Tire manufacturer’s identifi- Manufacturing week

cation mark Manufacturing year
Tire size code *: The DOT symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Fed-
Manufacturer’s optional tire eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
type code (3 or 4 letters) dards.
Manufacturing week
Tire size
Manufacturing year
*: ■ Typical tire size information 9
The DOT symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Fed- The illustration indicates typical
Vehicle specifications

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

tire size.
dards.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 476 9-1. Specifications

Tire section names

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio (tire height to
Bead
section width)
Sidewall
Speed category (alphabet
with one letter) Shoulder
Tire construction code (R = Tread
Radial, D = Diagonal) Belt
Wheel diameter (inches)
Inner liner
Load index (2 digits or 3 dig-
Reinforcing rubber
its)
Carcass
Speed symbol (alphabet with
one letter) Rim lines
■ Tire dimensions Bead wires
Chafer

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading
This information has been pre-
pared in accordance with regu-
lations issued by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
Section width
tration of the U.S. Department of
Tire height Transportation.
Wheel diameter It provides the purchasers
and/or prospective purchasers
of Toyota vehicles with informa-

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-1. Specifications 477
tion on uniform tire quality grad- as measured under controlled
ing. conditions on specified govern-
Your Toyota dealer will help answer ment test surfaces of asphalt
any questions you may have as you and concrete.
read this information. A tire marked C may have poor
■ DOT quality grades traction performance.
All passenger vehicle tires must Warning: The traction grade
conform to Federal Safety assigned to this tire is based on
braking (straight ahead) traction
Requirements in addition to
tests and does not include corner-
these grades. Quality grades ing (turning) traction.
can be found where applicable
■ Temperature A, B, C
on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum The temperature grades are A
section width. (the highest), B, and C, repre-
For example: Treadwear 200 Trac-
senting the tire’s resistance to
tion AA Temperature A the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
■ Treadwear
tested under controlled condi-
The treadwear grade is a com- tions on a specified indoor labo-
parative rating based on the ratory test wheel.
wear rate of the tire when tested
Sustained high temperature can
under controlled conditions on a cause the material of the tire to
specified government test degenerate and reduce tire life, and
course. excessive temperature can lead to
For example, a tire graded 150 sudden tire failure.
would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) Grade C corresponds to a level of
times as well on the government performance which all passenger
course as a tire graded 100. car tires must meet under the Fed-
The relative performance of tires eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
depends upon the actual conditions No. 109.
of their use. Performance may differ 9
Grades B and A represent higher
significantly from the norm due to levels of performance on the labo-
variations in driving habits, service
Vehicle specifications

ratory test wheel than the minimum

practices and differences in road required by law.
characteristics and climate.
Warning: The temperature grades
■ Traction AA, A, B, C of a tire assume that it is properly
The traction grades, from high- inflated and not overloaded.
est to lowest, are AA, A, B and Excessive speed, underinflation, or
C, and they represent the tire’s excessive loading, either sepa-
ability to stop on wet pavement rately or in combination, can cause

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 478 9-1. Specifications

heat buildup and possible tire fail- ure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
Cold tire inflation pressure
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km
under that condition
The maximum cold inflated pressure to
Maximum inflation pressure which a tire may be inflated, shown on the
sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation pres- Cold tire inflation pressure recommended
sure by a manufacturer
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
transmission, power steering, power
Accessory weight brakes, power windows, power seats,
radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed
equipment (whether installed or not)
The weight of a motor vehicle with stan-
dard equipment, including the maximum
Curb weight capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
weight optional engine
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
Maximum loaded vehicle
(b) Accessory weight
weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occu-
Normal occupant weight pants specified in the second column of
Table 1* that follows
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as
Occupant distribution specified in the third column of Table 1*
below

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-1. Specifications 479

Tire related term Meaning

The combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3
kg) in excess of the standard items which
Production options weight they replace, not previously considered in
curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
Rim assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diame-
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
ter)
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
The industry manufacturer’s designation
Rim type designation
for a rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150
Vehicle capacity weight (Total
lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated
load capacity)
seating capacity
The load on an individual tire that is deter-
Vehicle maximum load on the mined by distributing to each axle its share
tire of the maximum loaded vehicle weight,
and dividing by two
The load on an individual tire that is deter-
mined by distributing to each axle its share
of curb weight, accessory weight, and nor-
Vehicle normal load on the tire mal occupant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1* below), and dividing by 9
two
The surface area of the rim not covered by
Vehicle specifications

Weather side
the inflated tire
The part of the tire that is made of steel
Bead wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords
and that is shaped to fit the rim
A breakdown of the bond between compo-
Bead separation
nents in the bead

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 480 9-1. Specifications

Tire related term Meaning

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate
Bias ply tire
angles substantially less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread
The tire structure, except tread and side-
Carcass wall rubber which, when inflated, bears the
load
The breaking away of pieces of the tread
Chunking
or sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber
Cord separation
compounds
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or
Cracking innerliner of the tire extending to cord
material
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange
tire and rim system in which the rim is
designed with rim flanges pointed radially
CT inward and the tire is designed to fit on the
underside of the rim in a manner that
encloses the rim flanges inside the air cav-
ity of the tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads
Extra load tire and at higher inflation pressures than the
corresponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
Innerliner tubeless tire that contains the inflating
medium within the tire
The parting of the innerliner from cord
Innerliner separation
material in the carcass

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-1. Specifications 481

Tire related term Meaning

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufac-
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
Intended outboard sidewall molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle
A tire designated by its manufacturer as
Light truck (LT) tire primarily intended for use on lightweight
trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
The maximum load that a tire is rated to
Load rating
carry for a given inflation pressure
The load rating for a tire at the maximum
Maximum load rating
permissible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible inflation The maximum cold inflation pressure to
pressure which a tire may be inflated
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
Measuring rim
dimension requirements
Any parting at any junction of tread, side-
Open splice wall, or innerliner that extends to cord
material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
The linear distance between the exteriors
of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including
Overall width
elevations due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs 9
A tire intended for use on passenger cars,
Vehicle specifications

multipurpose passenger vehicles, and

Passenger car tire
trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight
rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
A parting of rubber compound between
Ply separation
adjacent plies

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 482 9-1. Specifications

Tire related term Meaning

A mechanical device made of rubber,
chemicals, fabric and steel or other materi-
Pneumatic tire als, that, when mounted on an automotive
wheel, provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the load
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substan-
Radial ply tire
tially 90 degrees to the centerline of the
tread
A tire designed to operate at higher loads
Reinforced tire and at higher inflation pressures than the
corresponding standard tire
The linear distance between the exteriors
of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, exclud-
Section width
ing elevations due to labeling, decoration,
or protective bands
That portion of a tire between the tread
Sidewall
and bead
The parting of the rubber compound from
Sidewall separation
the cord material in the sidewall

A tire that attains a traction index equal to

or greater than 110, compared to the
ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test
Tire, when using the snow traction test as
described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard
Snow tire Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Trac-
tion in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-
Covered Surfaces, and which is marked

with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least

one sidewall
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing,
Test rim and may be any rim listed as appropriate
for use with that tire
That portion of a tire that comes into con-
Tread
tact with the road

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-1. Specifications 483

Tire related term Meaning

A tread section running circumferentially
Tread rib
around a tire
Pulling away of the tread from the tire car-
Tread separation
cass
The projections within the principal
Treadwear indicators (TWI) grooves designed to give a visual indica-
tion of the degrees of wear of the tread
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
Wheel-holding fixture
assembly securely during testing
*
: Table 1 -Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for var-
ious designated seating capacities

Designated seating Occupant distribution in

Vehicle normal load,
capacity, Number of a normally loaded vehi-
Number of occupants
occupants cle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
2 in front, 1 in second
5 through 10 3
seat
2 in front, 1 in second
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
2 in front, 2 in second
16 through 20 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat

9
Vehicle specifications

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 484 9-2. Customization

Customizable features
[Link]

hold and display the set-

ting screen.
Your vehicle includes a vari-
The method of performing detailed
ety of electronic features
setting differs for each screen.
that can be personalized to
Please refer to the advice sentence
your preferences. The set-
displayed on the screen.
tings of these features can
be changed by using the ■ Changing by using the mul-
multi-information display, timedia system
the multimedia system or at 1 Select on the main menu
your Toyota dealer.
screen.
2 Select “Vehicle customize”.
Customizing vehicle fea-
3 Select the item to change the
tures
settings of from the list.
■ Changing by using the Various setting can be changed.
multi-information display Refer to the list of settings that can
be changed for details.
1 Press and hold to display NOTICE
the cursor on the content dis- ■ During customization
play area (center) of the To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
multi-information display. charge, ensure that the fuel cell
system is operating while custom-
2 Press / of the meter izing features.

control switches to select

and press .

3 Press / of the meter

control switches, select the
item.
4 To switch the function on and
off, press to switch to the
desired setting.
5 To perform detailed setting of
functions that support
detailed settings, press and

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-2. Customization 485

Customizable features
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other func-
tions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further
details.
Settings that can be changed using the multimedia system
Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display
Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display (P.96, 102)

Customized
Function*1 Default setting
setting
Except
Language*2 English O O –
English*3
km (kg/100
Units*2 miles (MPGe)
km)
O O –

*4
Meter Type – O –
*4

“Casual”
Meter Style “Smart” “Tough” – O –
“Sporty”
Fuel cell sys-
Dial Type*5 tem indicator
Speedometer – O –

The average
The average
fuel economy 9
Fuel Economy fuel economy – O –
since the func-
after starting
tion was reset
Vehicle specifications

ECO Accelerator Guidance On Off – O –

Average vehi-
Drive and trip information cle speed
Distance – O –
items (first item)
Elapsed time

Drive and trip information Average vehi- Distance

– O –
items (second item) cle speed Elapsed time

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 486 9-2. Customization

Customized
Function*1 Default setting
setting
Pop-up display On Off – O –
On (when the
vehicle is
Suggestion function On stopped) O – O

Off
*1
: For details about each function: P.108
*2
: The default setting varies according to country.
*3: Available languages may differ depending on the target region.
*4
: The on/off operation of the widget can be changed.
*5
: The setting may not be changed depending on currently selected meter
type.
■ Door lock (P.121, 127, 454)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Driver’s door
unlocked in
All doors
Unlocking using a mechani- one step, all
unlocked in — — O
cal key doors
one step
unlocked in
two step

Shift position Off

Automatic door locking func- linked door Speed linked O — O
tion locking opera- door locking
tion operation
Off
Shift position
Automatic door unlocking linked door Driver’s door
linked door O — O
function unlocking
operation unlocking
operation
Locking/unlocking of the
trunk when all doors are On Off — — O
locked/unlocked

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-2. Customization 487
■ Smart key system and wireless remote control (P.121, 127,
129)
Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Off
Operating signal (Buzzers) 5 O — O
1 to 7
Operation signal (Emergency
On Off O — O
flashers)
Time elapsed before auto- Off
matic door lock function is
60 seconds 30 seconds O — O
activated if door is not
opened after being unlocked 120 seconds
Open door warning buzzer On Off — — O

■ Smart key system (P.121, 127, 129)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Smart key system On Off O — O
Smart door unlocking Driver’s door All the doors O — O
Time elapsed before unlock- Off
ing all the door when gripping
2 seconds 1.5 seconds — — O
and holding the driver’s door
handle 2.5 seconds
Number of consecutive door As many as
2 times — — O
lock operations desired
Power switch illumination On Off — — O

■ Wireless remote control (P.118, 121, 127) 9

Customized
Function Default setting
Vehicle specifications

setting
Wireless remote control On Off — — O
Driver’s door
unlocked in
All doors
one step, all
Unlocking operation unlocked in O — O
doors
one step
unlocked in
two step

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 488 9-2. Customization

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
One short
press

Press and hold Push twice

Trunk unlocking operation — — O
(short) Press and hold
(long)
Off
Theft deterrent panic mode On Off — — O
Locking operation when door
On Off O — O
opened

■ Rear seat reminder (P.123)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Indication to prevent mis-
On Off — O —
placement in the rear seat

■ Automatic tilt-away & returning function (P.138)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Off
Telescopic
Steering wheel movement Tilt only only O — O
Tilt and tele-
scopic

■ Outside rear view mirrors (P.140)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting

Linked to the Off

Automatic mirror folding and locking/ Linked to oper- — — O
extending operation unlocking of ation of the
the doors power switch

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-2. Customization 489
■ Power switch (P.164)

Function Customized setting

ACC customization
Enabling/Disabling ACC On/Off O  O
mode

■ Power windows (P.142)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Mechanical key linked opera-
Off On — — O
tion
Wireless remote control
Off On (open only) — — O
linked operation
Wireless remote control
linked operation signal On Off — — O
(buzzer)

■ Reverse warning buzzer (P.165)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Signal (buzzer) when the
Single Intermittent — — O
shift position is in R

■ Automatic light control system (P.178)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Brighter
Bright 9
Light sensor sensitivity* Normal O — O
Dark
Vehicle specifications

Darker

Time elapsed before head- Off

lights automatically turn off 30 seconds 60 seconds O — O
after doors are closed* 90 seconds
Windshield wiper linked
On Off — — O
headlight illumination

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 490 9-2. Customization
*
: The default setting is changed in conjunction with the settings of My Set-
tings.
■ Lights (P.178)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting

Daytime running lights* On Off O — O

*: Except for Canada
■ Driver monitor (P.203)

Function Customized setting

Warning function* ON/OFF  O 

*
: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings.
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (P.205)

Function Customized setting

Pre-Collision System ON/OFF — O —

Warning timing* Later/Default/Earlier — O —

*: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings.
■ LCA (Lane Change Assist) (P.221)

Function Customized setting

Lane Change Assist* ON/OFF — O —

*
: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings.
■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert system) (P.224)

Function Customized setting

Lane Departure Alert system

ON/OFF — O —
(LDA)*

Alert timing* Default/Earlier — O —

Alert options* Vibration/Audible — O —

*
: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-2. Customization 491
■ Driver break suggestion (P.224)

Function Customized setting

Driver break suggestion ON/OFF  O 

■ PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) (P.229)

Function Customized setting

Proactive Driving Assist
ON/OFF — O —
(PDA)*

Support sensitivity* Low/Mid/High — O —

Steering Assist (SA)* ON/OFF — O —

Deceleration Assist (DA)* ON/OFF — O —

Obstacle Anticipation Assist
ON/OFF — O —
(OAA)*
*
: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings.
■ FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) (P.236)

Function Customized setting

Front Cross Traffic Alert ON/OFF — O —

Alert timing* Later/Default/Earlier — O —

*: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings.
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist) (P.238)

Function Customized setting

Road Sign Assist* ON/OFF  O  9

Excess speed notification
None/Visual/Visual & Audible  O 
Vehicle specifications

method*

Other notifications method* None/Visual/Visual & Audible  O 

Excess speed notification 5 mph (10 km/h)/3 mph (5
 O 
level* km/h)/1 mph (2 km/h)
*
: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 492 9-2. Customization

■ Dynamic Radar Cruise Control (DRCC) (P.241)

Function Customized setting

Extended Resume Time* ON/OFF  O 

Acceleration setting* Low/Mid/High  O 

Guide message* ON/OFF  O 

Curve speed reduction* OFF/Low/Mid/High  O 

*
: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings.
■ Traffic Jam Assist (P.259)

Function Customized setting

Traffic Jam Assist* ON/OFF  O 

Driver Monitor Camera
ON/OFF  O 
Recording*
*
: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings.
■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (P.265)

Function Customized setting

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) On/Off — O —

Outside rear view mirror indi-
Dim/Bright — O —
cator brightness*
Alert timing for presence of
approaching vehicle (sensi- Later/Default/Earlier — O —
tivity)*

Buzzer warning* On/Off — O —

*: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings
■ Safe Exit Assist (P.270)

Function Customized setting

Safe Exit Assist On/Off – O –

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-2. Customization 493

Function Customized setting

Outside rear view mirrors dis-
On/Off – O –
play*

Detection sensitivity* Low/Mid/High – O –

*
: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings
■ Intuitive parking assist*1 (P.275)

Function Customized setting

Intuitive parking assist*2 On/Off — O —

Buzzer volume of intuitive
parking assist when operat- Level 1/Level 2/Level 3 — O —
ing*2, 3
*1
: If equipped
*2: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings
*3
: The sound volume is linked among the intuitive parking assist, RCTA,
and RCD.
■ RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function (P.281)

Function Customized setting

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
On/Off — O —
Alert)
Buzzer volume of RCTA
Level 1/Level 2/Level 3 — O —
when operating*1, 2
*1: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings
*2
: The sound volume is linked among the Intuitive parking assist, RCTA, 9
and RCD (if equipped).
■ RCD (Rear Camera Detection)* (P.287)
Vehicle specifications

Function Customized setting

RCD (Rear Camera Detec-

On/Off — O —
tion)
*
: If equipped

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 494 9-2. Customization

■ PKSB (Parking Support Brake)*1 (P.291)

Function Customized setting

PKSB (Parking Support

On/Off — O —
Brake)*2
*1
: If equipped
*2: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings
■ Automatic air conditioning system (P.313)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Switching between outside
air and recirculated air mode
linked to “AUTO” switch On Off O — O
operation*

A/C auto switch operation* On Off O — O

*: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings
■ Seat heater (P.321)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Driver’s seat temperature
preference in automatic -2 (cooler) to 2
Standard O — O
(warmer)
mode*
Passenger’s seat tempera-
ture preference in automatic -2 (cooler) to 2
Standard O — O
(warmer)
mode*
*: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings
■ Heated steering wheel*1 (P.321)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Steering wheel heating pref- -2 (low) to 2
Standard O — O
erence in automatic mode*2 (high)
*1
: If equipped
*2: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-2. Customization 495
■ Illumination (P.323)

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Off
Time elapsed before the inte-
15 seconds 7.5 seconds O — O
rior lights turn off*1
30 seconds
Operation of the interior
lights after the power switch On Off — — O
is turned off
Operation of the interior
lights when the doors are On Off — — O
unlocked
Operation of the interior
lights when you approach the
On Off — — O
vehicle with the electronic
key on your person
Door trim ornament lights,
inside door handle lights,
front footwell lights, instru-
ment panel ornament lights, On Off — — O
cup holder lights and rear
footwell lights*2
Off
Time elapsed before the
15 seconds 7.5 seconds O — O
outer foot lights turn off
30 seconds
Operation of the outer foot
lights when you approach the
On Off — — O 9
vehicle with the electronic
key on your person
Vehicle specifications

Operation of the outer foot

lights when the doors are On Off — — O
unlocked
Operation of the outer foot
On Off — — O
lights when a door is opened

Illumination notification*2, 3 On Off O  

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 496 9-2. Customization

Customized
Function Default setting
setting
Illumination color changes
when the set temperature
changes and differs with the
interior temperature by Off On O  
approximately 41°F (5°C) or
more.*2, 4

Drive mode*2 On Off O  

Illumination changes color
each hour. Multi-Information
display will change to Off On O  
match.*2
Illumination display when
entering or exiting the vehi-
cle.
On Off O  
Also the illumination changes
when the vehicle is in the
“READY” state.*2

Color selection*1, 2 Beige Custom O  O

9 to 1
Brightness control*1, 2 9 O  O
Off
*1
: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings
*2
: If equipped
*3: If the ambient lights is set to Off, this setting will also be set to Off.
*4
: Illumination color will also change when the temperature control switches
are operated.
flashers) function settings.
■ Vehicle customization
● Some settings can be changed
● When the smart key system is off, using a switch or the multimedia
the entry unlock function cannot system. If a setting is changed
be customized. using a switch, the changed set-
● When the doors remain closed ting will not be reflected on the
after unlocking the doors and the multimedia system until the power
timer activated automatic door switch is turned off and then to
lock function activates, signals will ON.
be generated in accordance with
the operation buzzer volume and
operational signal (Emergency

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 9-3. Initialization 497

Items to initialize
[Link]

The following items must be initialized for normal system

operation after such cases as the 12-volt battery being recon-
nected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:

List of items to initialize

Item When to initialize Reference

Power windows • When functioning abnormally P.142
• When the tire inflation pressure
is changed, such as when
changing traveling speed or load
weight.
Tire pressure warn- • When the tire inflation pressure
P.384
ing system is changed, such as when the
tire size is changed.
• When rotating the tires.
• After performing the transmitter
ID code registration procedure.

9
Vehicle specifications

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 498 9-3. Initialization

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 499

For owners
10
[Link] owners
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners............... 500
Reporting safety defects for
Canadian owners ...... 500
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners (in
French)...................... 501
SRS airbag instructions for
Canadian owners ...... 502
Headlight aim instructions
for Canadian owners (in
French)...................... 508

10
For owners

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 500 10-1. For owners

Reporting safety Reporting safety

[Link] owners

defects for U.S. own- defects for Canadian

ers owners

If you believe that your vehicle Canadian customers who

has a defect which could wish to report a safety-related
cause a crash or could cause defect to Transport Canada,
injury or death, you should Defects Investigations and
immediately inform the Recalls, may telephone the
National Highway Traffic toll-free hotline 1-800-333-
Safety Administration 0510, mail Transport Canada -
(NHTSA) in addition to notify- ASFAD, 330 Sparks Street,
ing Toyota Motor Sales, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5, or
U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800- complete the online form at
331-4331). [Link]
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy cam-
paign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in
individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota
Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
[Link] or
write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Ave. SE., Washington, DC
20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from
[Link]

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 10-1. For owners 501

Seat belt instructions Entretien et nettoyage

for Canadian owners
■ Manipulation des ceintures
(in French)
de sécurité
The following is a French Avec un chiffon ou une éponge,
explanation of seat belt nettoyez à l’aide d’un savon
instructions extracted from doux et de l’eau tiède. Vérifiez
the seat belt section in this aussi les ceintures régulière-
manual. ment pour vous assurer qu’elles
ne présentent pas d’usure
See the seat belt section for excessive, d’effilochage ou de
more detailed seat belt coupures.
instructions in English.
AVERTISSEMENT
Utilisation adéquate des ■ Dommages et usure de la
ceinture de sécurité
ceintures de sécurité
Vérifiez périodiquement le sys-
tème de ceintures de sécurité.
Vérifiez qu’il n’y a pas de cou-
pures, d’effilochures ni de pièces
desserrées. N’utilisez pas une
ceinture de sécurité endommagée
avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée.
Les ceintures de sécurité endom-
magées ne peuvent pas protéger
les occupants contre les bless-
ures graves, voire mortelles.

 Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière

jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre
entièrement l’épaule; elle ne
doit cependant pas toucher le
cou ni glisser de l’épaule.
 Placez la ceinture abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
10
hanches.
 Réglez la position du dossier.
For owners

Tenez-vous assis bien au

fond du siège, le dos droit.
 Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 502 10-1. For owners

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instruc-

tions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instruc-
tions in English.

Système de coussins gonflables SRS

■ Emplacement des coussins gonflables SRS

Coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur/coussin gonflable SRS du

passager avant
Permettent de réduire les blessures par choc à la tête et à la
poitrine du conducteur et du passager avant
Coussins gonflables SRS de protection des genoux
Permettent de réduire les blessures par choc du conducteur et du
passager avant
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux
Permettent de réduire les blessures par choc à la poitrine des
occupants des sièges avant
Coussins gonflables SRS en rideau

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 10-1. For owners 503
• Permettent de réduire les blessures par choc à la tête des occupants des
sièges avant et latéraux arrière
• Peuvent permettre d’éviter que les occupants soient éjectés du véhicule
en cas de tonneaux
Votre véhicule est doté de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS
dont la conception s’appuie sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules
à moteur américains (FMVSS208). Le module de capteur de coussin
gonflable (ECU) contrôle le déploiement des coussins gonflables en
fonction des informations obtenues des capteurs et d’autres élé-
ments affichés dans le diagramme des composants du système ci-
dessus. Ces informations comprennent des données relatives à la
gravité de l’accident et aux occupants. Au moment du déploiement
des coussins gonflables, une réaction chimique se produit dans les
gonfleurs de coussin gonflable et les coussins gonflables se remplis-
sent rapidement d’un gaz non toxique pour aider à limiter le mouve-
ment des occupants.

AVERTISSEMENT ● Le coussin gonflable SRS du

conducteur se déploie avec une
■ Précautions relatives aux force considérable et peut occa-
coussins gonflables SRS sionner des blessures graves,
Observez les précautions suiva- voire mortelles, notamment lor-
ntes. Négliger de le faire pourrait sque le conducteur se trouve
occasionner des blessures très près du coussin gonflable.
graves, voire mortelles. La National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA),
● La personne au volant et tous aux États-Unis, fait les recom-
les passagers à bord du mandations suivantes :
véhicule doivent porter correcte- La zone à risque du coussin
ment leur ceinture de sécurité. gonflable du conducteur couvre
Les coussins gonflables SRS 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de la
sont des dispositifs de protec- zone de déploiement du cous-
tion complémentaires aux cein- sin gonflable. Pour assurer une
tures de sécurité. marge de sécurité suffisante,
restez à 10 in. (250 mm) du
coussin gonflable. Cette dis-
tance est mesurée du centre du
volant à votre sternum. Si votre
position de conduite actuelle
vous place à moins de 10 in. 10
(250 mm) du coussin gonflable
du conducteur, vous pouvez
For owners

changer votre position de plu-

sieurs manières :

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 504 10-1. For owners

AVERTISSEMENT ● Si la rallonge de ceinture de

sécurité a été reliée à la boucle
• Reculez votre siège à la posi- de la ceinture de sécurité du
tion maximale vous permettant siège avant, mais que la plaque
d’atteindre encore aisément les de blocage de la ceinture de
pédales. sécurité du siège n’a pas été
bloquée sur la rallonge de cein-
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier ture de sécurité, le système de
du siège vers l’arrière. Bien que coussins gonflables SRS con-
les véhicules soient conçus dif- sidérera que l’occupant porte
féremment, la plupart des con- tout de même sa ceinture de
ducteurs peuvent maintenir une sécurité même si la ceinture de
distance de 10 in. (250 mm), sécurité n’est pas bouclée. Les
même si leur siège est avancé coussins gonflables SRS avant
au maximum, simplement en peuvent alors ne pas se
inclinant légèrement le dossier déployer correctement lors
du siège vers l’arrière. Si la visi- d’une collision, ce qui pourrait
bilité avant est compromise occasionner des blessures
après avoir incliné le dossier du graves, voire mortelles.
siège, utilisez un coussin ferme Assurez-vous de toujours porter
et non glissant pour être assis la ceinture de sécurité correcte-
plus haut ou relevez le siège si ment lors de l’usage d’une ral-
cette option est disponible sur longe de ceinture de sécurité.
votre véhicule.
• Si votre volant est réglable en
hauteur, inclinez-le vers le bas.
Cela vous permet d’orienter le
coussin gonflable vers votre
buste plutôt que vers votre tête
et vers votre cou. Le siège doit
être réglé de la manière recom-
mandée par la NHTSA, tout en
vous permettant de conserver le ● Le coussin gonflable SRS du
contrôle des pédales et du passager avant se déploie avec
volant du véhicule, ainsi que la une force considérable et peut
vue sur les commandes du tab- occasionner des blessures
leau de bord. graves, voire mortelles, notam-
ment lorsque le passager avant
se trouve très près du coussin
gonflable. Le siège du passager
avant doit être positionné le plus
loin possible du coussin gon-
flable avec le dossier de siège
réglé de façon à ce que le pas-
sager soit assis bien droit sur
son siège.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 10-1. For owners 505

AVERTISSEMENT ● Ne laissez pas un enfant se

tenir face au coussin gonflable
● Le déploiement d’un coussin SRS du passager avant ni
gonflable risque d’infliger des s’asseoir sur les genoux d’un
blessures graves, voire mor- passager avant.
telles, aux bébés et aux enfants
mal assis et/ou mal attachés.
Un bébé ou un enfant trop petit
pour utiliser une ceinture de
sécurité doit être correctement
retenu à l’aide d’un dispositif de
retenue pour enfants. Toyota
recommande vivement de
placer et d’attacher correcte-
ment tous les bébés et tous les
enfants sur les sièges arrière du ● Les occupants des sièges avant
véhicule à l’aide de dispositifs ne doivent jamais placer
de retenue adaptés. Les sièges d’objets sur leurs genoux.
arrière sont plus sécuritaires
pour les bébés et les enfants ● Ne vous appuyez pas sur la
que le siège du passager avant. portière ou sur un brancard de
pavillon, ni sur un montant
● N’installez jamais un dispositif avant, latéral ou arrière.
de retenue pour enfants de type
dos à la route sur le siège du
passager avant, même si le
voyant “AIRBAG OFF” est
allumé. En cas d’accident, la
force et la vitesse de déploie-
ment du coussin gonflable du
passager avant pourraient
infliger à l’enfant des blessures
graves, voire mortelles, si le dis-
positif de retenue pour enfants ● Ne laissez personne s’age-
de type dos à la route était nouiller face à la portière, ni sor-
installé sur le siège du passager tir la tête ou les mains à
avant. l’extérieur du véhicule.
● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le
bord du siège et ne vous
appuyez pas sur la planche de
bord.

10
For owners

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 506 10-1. For owners

AVERTISSEMENT ● N’utilisez pas d’accessoires de

sièges recouvrant les parties
● Ne fixez et n’appuyez rien sur d’où les coussins gonflables
des zones telles que la planche SRS se déploient, car ils pour-
de bord, le tampon de volant ou raient entraver le gonflage des
encore la partie inférieure du coussins gonflables SRS. De
tableau de bord. tels accessoires peuvent
empêcher les coussins gonfla-
bles SRS de se déployer cor-
rectement, rendre le système
inopérant ou provoquer acci-
dentellement le déploiement
des coussins gonflables SRS,
ce qui serait susceptible d’occa-
sionner des blessures graves,
voire mortelles.
● Ne fixez rien sur des zones ● Ne frappez jamais et n’exercez
telles que les portières, le pare- aucune pression excessive sur
brise, les glaces latérales, les les composants du système de
montants avant ou arrière, les coussins gonflables SRS, les
brancards de pavillon et les poi- portières avant, ni au niveau
gnées de maintien. (À l’excep- des zones environnantes.
tion de l’étiquette de limitation Cela peut provoquer un mau-
de vitesse) vais fonctionnement des couss-
ins gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez à aucun composant
des coussins gonflables SRS
immédiatement après leur
déploiement (gonflage), car ils
pourraient être chauds.
● Si vous avez de la difficulté à
respirer après le déploiement
● N’accrochez pas de cintres ni des coussins gonflables SRS,
d’autres objets rigides sur les ouvrez une portière ou une
crochets porte-vêtements. Ces glace pour laisser entrer l’air
objets pourraient se transformer frais, ou quittez le véhicule si
en projectiles en cas de déploie- vous pouvez le faire en toute
ment des coussins gonflables sécurité. Dès que possible, net-
SRS en rideau, susceptibles toyez tous les résidus afin
d’occasionner des blessures d’éviter les irritations cutanées.
graves, voire mortelles.
● Si une pièce abritant un coussin
● Si un recouvrement de vinyle gonflable SRS est endom-
est fixé sur la zone de déploie- magée ou fissurée, faites-la
ment du coussin gonflable SRS remplacer par votre concession-
de protection des genoux, naire Toyota.
veillez à le retirer.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 10-1. For owners 507

AVERTISSEMENT • Garnitures des portières avant

● Ne placez aucun objet, par • Haut-parleurs des portières
exemple un coussin, sur le avant
siège du passager avant. Cela
disperserait le poids du pas- ● Modifications des panneaux des
sager, ce qui empêcherait le portières avant (comme les per-
capteur de le détecter correcte- forer)
ment. Ceci pourrait empêcher le
déploiement des coussins gon- ● Réparation ou modification des
flables SRS du siège du pas- pièces suivantes ou de leurs
sager avant en cas de collision. parties environnantes

■ Modification et mise au rebut • Aile avant

des composants du système • Pare-chocs avant
de coussins gonflables SRS
Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au • Parties latérales de l’intérieur du
rebut et n’effectuez aucune des véhicule
modifications suivantes sans
d’abord consulter votre conces- ● Installation des parties ou
sionnaire Toyota. Les coussins accessoires suivants
gonflables SRS pourraient • Barres safari ou barres kangou-
fonctionner de manière incor- rou
recte ou se déployer accidentelle-
ment, ce qui serait susceptible • Lames de déneigement
d’occasionner des blessures
graves, voire mortelles. • Treuils
● Retrait, installation, démontage • Porte-bagages de toit
ou réparation des coussins gon-
flables SRS ● Modifications de la suspension
du véhicule
● Réparation, retrait ou modifica-
tion des pièces suivantes ou de ● Installation d’appareils électro-
leurs parties environnantes niques tels qu’un émetteur-
récepteur radio (RF-transmit-
• Volant ter) ou un lecteur de CD
• Tableau de bord ● Modifications à votre véhicule
pour des personnes aux capac-
• Planche de bord ités physiques réduites
• Sièges
• Capitonnage des sièges
10
• Montants avant
• Montants latéraux
For owners

• Montants arrière
• Brancards de pavillon
• Panneaux des portières avant

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 508 10-1. For owners

Headlight aim instruc- Réglage de la portée des

tions for Canadian phares
owners (in French)
1 Tournez le boulon A vers la
droite ou vers la gauche à
Boulons de réglage verti- l’aide d’un tournevis cruci-
cal forme.
Retenez le sens de rotation
et le nombre de tours.

Boulon de réglage A
Boulon de réglage B 2 Tournez le boulon B du
même nombre de tours et
Avant de vérifier la portée dans le même sens qu’à
des phares l’étape 1.
Si vous n’arrivez pas à régler vos
 Assurez-vous que le réservoir phares en suivant cette procédure,
de carburant du véhicule est apportez le véhicule chez votre
plein et que la partie de car- concessionnaire Toyota afin qu’il
règle la portée des phares.
rosserie située autour des
phares n’est pas déformée.
 Garez le véhicule sur un sol
parfaitement horizontal.
 Assurez-vous que la pression
de gonflage des pneus est au
niveau prescrit.
 Demandez à quelqu’un de
s’asseoir sur le siège du con-
ducteur.
 Faites rebondir le véhicule à
plusieurs reprises.

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 509

Index

What to do if... (Trouble-

shooting) ................... 510
Alphabetical Index....... 513

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 510 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

[Link] to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you have a problem, properly due to the condition

check the following before of the radio wave. (P.131)
contacting your Toyota
The rear door cannot be
dealer.
opened

The doors cannot be  Is the child-protector lock set?

locked, unlocked, opened The rear door cannot be opened
or closed from inside the vehicle when the
lock is set. Open the rear door from
outside and then unlock the child-
You lose your keys protector lock. (P.124)
The trunk lid is closed
 If you lose your mechanical with the electronic key
keys, new genuine mechani- left inside
cal keys can be made by your  The function to prevent the
Toyota dealer. (P.453) electronic key from being left
 If you lose your electronic inside the trunk will operate
keys, the risk of vehicle theft and you can open the trunk as
increases significantly. Con- usual. Take the key out from
tact your Toyota dealer imme- the trunk. (P.128)
diately. (P.453)
If you think something is
The doors cannot be wrong
locked or unlocked

 Is the power switch in ON? The fuel cell system does

not start
When locking the doors, turn the
power switch off. (P.164)  Did you press the power
 Is the electronic key battery switch while firmly depress-
weak or depleted? (P.405) ing the brake pedal?
 Is the electronic key left inside (P.160)
the vehicle?  Is the electronic key any-
When locking the doors, make sure where detectable inside the
that you have the electronic key on vehicle? (P.130)
your person.  Is the electronic key battery
 The function may not operate weak or depleted?

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 What to do if... (Troubleshooting) 511

In this case, the fuel cell system may also sound. (P.422, 432)
can be started in a temporary way.
(P.455) An alarm is activated and
 Is the 12-volt battery dis- the horn sounds
charged? (P.456)
 Did anyone inside the vehicle
The windows do not open a door during setting the
open or close by operat-
alarm?
ing the power window
switches The sensor detects it and the alarm
sounds. (P.68)
 Is the window lock switch
pressed? Do one of the following to deac-
tivate or stop the alarms:
The power window except for the
one at the driver’s seat cannot be  Unlock the doors or trunk
operated if the window lock switch using the entry function or
is pressed. (P.144) wireless remote control.

The power switch is  Turn the power switch to ACC

turned off automatically or ON, or start the fuel cell
system. (The alarm will be
 The auto power off function deactivated or stopped after a
will be operated if the vehicle few seconds.)
is left in ACC for a period of
time. (P.165) A warning buzzer sounds
when leaving the vehicle
A warning buzzer sounds
during driving  Is the message displayed on
the multi-information display?
 The seat belt reminder light is Check the message on the multi-
flashing information display. (P.432)
Are the driver and the front passen- A warning light turns on
ger wearing the seat belts? or a warning message is
(P.428) displayed
 The parking brake indicator is  When a warning light turns on
on or a warning message is dis-
Is the parking brake released? played, refer to P.422, 432.
(P.171)
Depending on the situation,
other types of warning buzzer

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 512 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

When a problem has

occurred

If you have a flat tire

 Stop the vehicle in a safe

place and repair the flat tire
temporarily with the emer-
gency tire puncture repair kit.
(P.438)

The vehicle becomes

stuck

 Try the procedure for when

the vehicle becomes stuck in
mud, dirt, or snow. (P.466)

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 Alphabetical Index 513

Alphabetical Index
A Modification and disposal of air-
bags......................................39
A/C ...........................................313 Side airbag operating conditions
Air conditioning filter.............401 .............................................35
Automatic air conditioning sys- Side airbag precautions..........36
tem .....................................313 Side and curtain shield airbags
Eco air conditioning mode....314 operating conditions .............35
Front seat concentrated airflow Side and curtain shield airbags
mode (S-FLOW).................318 precautions...........................36
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) SRS airbags ...........................33
...............................................303 SRS warning light .................423
Warning light ........................424 Alarm .........................................68
ACA (Active Cornering Assist) Warning buzzer ....................422
...............................................303 ALL AUTO control ..................312
ACC .........................................164 Anchor brackets .......................60
Active Cornering Assist (ACA) Antennas (smart key system)129
...............................................303 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
AHB (Automatic High Beam).180 ...............................................303
Air conditioning filter .............401 Warning light.........................424
Air conditioning system ........313 Approach warning ..................248
Air conditioning filter.............401 Armrest....................................339
Automatic air conditioning sys- Assist grips .............................339
tem .....................................313 Audio system-linked display .107
Eco air conditioning mode....314 Automatic air conditioning sys-
Front seat concentrated airflow tem .........................................313
mode (S-FLOW).................318 Eco air conditioning mode ....314
SYNC mode .........................317 Automatic door locking and
Air purification screen ...........109 unlocking systems ...............125
Airbags ......................................33 Automatic headlight leveling
Airbag operating conditions....34 system ...................................179
Airbag precautions for your child Automatic High Beam (AHB) .180
.............................................36 Automatic light control system
Correct driving posture...........27 ...............................................178
Curtain shield airbag operating Auxiliary boxes .......................328
conditions .............................35 Average fuel economy ...........105
Curtain shield airbag precautions Average vehicle speed ...........107
.............................................36
Front passenger occupant clas- B
sification system...................43
General airbag precautions....36 Back-up lights
Locations of airbags ...............33 Replacing light bulbs ............412
Battery (12-volt battery) .........378
Battery checking ...................378

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 514 Alphabetical Index

If the 12-volt battery is dis- Fixed with a seat belt..............53

charged ..............................456 Front passenger occupant clas-
Preparing and checking before sification system ...................43
winter..................................308 Points to remember ................49
Warning light ........................423 Riding with children ................48
Battery (traction battery) .........77 Types of child restraint system
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)......265 installation method ...............51
Enabling/disabling the system Using an anchor bracket ........60
...........................................267 Child safety ...............................48
Brake 12-volt battery precautions .379,
Brake hold ............................174 460
Fluid .............................377, 471 Airbag precautions .................36
Parking brake .......................171 Child restraint system .............51
Warning light ........................422 Heated steering wheel and seat
Brake assist ............................303 heater precautions..............321
Break-in tips ...........................150 How your child should wear the
Brightness control seat belt................................30
Instrument panel light control101 Power window lock switch ....144
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)......265 Power window precautions...143
Enabling/disabling the system Rear door child-protectors ....124
...........................................267 Riding with children ................48
Seat belt extender precautions
C .............................................30
Seat belt precautions..............29
Camera Trunk precautions.................126
Driver monitor.......................203 Child-protectors......................124
Front camera........................196 Cleaning ..........................358, 362
Rear camera ........................287 Aluminum wheel ornaments .359
Care .................................358, 362 Aluminum wheels .................359
Aluminum wheel ornaments.359 Exterior .................................358
Aluminum wheels .................359 Interior ..................................362
Exterior.................................358 Radar sensor ........................197
Interior ..................................362 Seat belts .............................362
Seat belts .............................362 Clock..........................................96
Traction battery air intake vents Coat hooks ..............................340
...........................................402 Condenser...............................376
Cargo and luggage.................155 Console box ............................327
Cargo capacity .......................157 Consumption screen..............109
Catch protection function Coolant ....................................375
Power windows ....................142 Capacity ...............................470
Chains .....................................310 Checking ..............................375
Child restraint system .............49
Fixed with a LATCH system ...58

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 Alphabetical Index 515

Preparing and checking before Rear window.........................315

winter..................................308 Windshield ............................315
Cooling system ......................375 Digital key................................119
Fuel cell system overheating 463 Dimension ...............................468
Overheating..........................463 Dinghy towing.........................159
Coussins gonflables ..............502 Display
Coussins gonflables SRS.....502 Cruise control .......................252
Emplacement des coussins gon- Dynamic radar cruise control244
flables.................................502 Intuitive parking assist ..........275
Modification et mise au rebut des Multi-information display.......102
coussins gonflables............507 Parking Support Brake function
Précautions générales relatives (pedestrians rear of the vehicle)
aux coussins gonflables .....503 ...........................................300
Précautions relatives aux couss- RCD (Rear Camera Detection)
ins gonflables en rideau .....503 ...........................................288
Précautions relatives aux couss- Rear Camera Detection (RCD)
ins gonflables latéraux .......503 ...........................................288
Précautions relatives aux couss- Warning message.................432
ins gonflables latéraux et en Display change button ...........100
rideau .................................503 Do-it-yourself maintenance ...365
Précautions relatives aux couss- Door courtesy lights...............323
ins gonflables pour vos enfants Door lock
...........................................503 Doors ....................................121
Coussins gonflables de protec- Smart key system .................129
tion des genoux....................502 Wireless remote control........118
Coussins gonflables en rideau Door trim ornament lights .....323
...............................................502 Doors .......................................121
Coussins gonflables latéraux502 Automatic door locking and
Cruise control unlocking system................125
Dynamic radar cruise control Door glasses ........................142
...................................241, 252 Door lock ..............................121
Warning lights.......................426 Door lock buttons .................124
Cup holder lights....................323 Open door warning buzzer .122,
Cup holders ............................327 124
Current fuel consumption .....105 Outside rear view mirrors .....140
Curtain shield airbags .............33 Rear door child-protectors ....124
Customizable features ...........484 Drive distance .........................107
Drive information....................107
D Driver monitor.........................203
Driving .....................................149
Daytime running light system178 Break-in tips .........................150
Defogger Correct driving posture ...........27
Outside rear view mirrors .....315

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 516 Alphabetical Index

Driving mode select switch...301 Emergency flashers ...............414

Fuel cell electric vehicle driving Emergency shut off system.....85
tips........................................87 Emergency tire puncture repair
Procedures...........................149 kit ...........................................438
Winter drive tips ...................308 Storage location ...................440
Driving assist information Emergency, in case of
Warning lights.......................425 If a warning buzzer sounds ..422
Driving range ....................96, 105 If a warning light turns on .....422
Driving support system informa- If a warning message is dis-
tion display ...........................106 played.................................432
Dynamic radar cruise control If the 12-volt battery is dis-
.......................................241, 252 charged ..............................456
Approach warning ................248 If the electronic key does not
Curve speed reduction function operate properly .................454
...........................................248 If the fuel cell system will not
Warning lights.......................425 start ....................................451
If the fuel door cannot be opened
E ...........................................453
If the vehicle is submerged or
ECB (Electronically Controlled water on the road is rising ..415
Brake System) ......................303 If you have a flat tire .............438
Warning light ........................422 If you lose your keys.............453
ECO Accelerator Guidance ...105 If you think something is wrong
Eco score ................................105 ...........................................421
EDR (Event data recorder).......10 If your vehicle becomes stuck
Elapsed time ...........................107 ...........................................466
Electric motor (traction motor) If your vehicle has to be stopped
...........................................72, 77 in an emergency.................414
Location..................................77 If your vehicle needs to be towed
Specification.........................469 ...........................................417
Electric Power Steering (EPS) If your vehicle overheats ......462
...............................................303 Energy monitor .......................109
Warning light ........................424 EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Electronic key ......................... 116 ...............................................303
Battery-saving function.........130 Warning light.........................424
If the electronic key does not Event data recorder (EDR).......10
operate properly .................454
Replacing the battery ...........405 F
Electronically Controlled Brake
System (ECB) .......................303 Flat tire.....................................438
Warning light ........................422 Tire pressure warning system
Emergency Driving Stop System ...........................................383
...............................................256 Floor mats .................................26

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 Alphabetical Index 517

Fluid Starting the system...............160

Brake....................................471 Traction battery air intake vents
Transmission ........................471 .............................................86
Washer .................................377 Fuel cell electric vehicle driving
Footwell light ..........................323 tips ...........................................87
Front passenger occupant clas- Fuel cell stack .....................72, 77
sification system ....................43 Fuel cell stack cover .............374
Front personal lights..............323 Fuel cell stack coolant ...........375
Front seats ..............................135 Checking ..............................375
Adjustment ...........................135 Preparing and checking before
Cleaning ...............................362 winter..................................308
Correct driving posture...........27 Fuel cell stack cover ..............374
Head restraints.....................136 Fuel cell system........................72
Seat heaters.........................321 Acoustic vehicle alerting system
Seat ventilators ....................321 .............................................75
Front side marker light Emergency shut off system ....85
Light switch ..........................178 High voltage components .......77
Replacing light bulbs ............412 If the fuel cell system will not
Front turn signal lights ..........170 start ....................................451
Replacing light bulbs ............412 If your vehicle has to be stopped
Turn signal lever...................170 in an emergency.................414
Fuel ..........................................189 Overheating ..........................463
Capacity ...............................469 Power switch ........................160
Fuel gauge .............................96 Precautions ............................77
Refueling ..............................189 Predictive efficient drive..........75
Type .....................................469 Starting the fuel cell system .160
Warning light ........................428 Water release .......................176
Fuel Cell Electric Vehicle .........72 Fuel cell System Indicator .......99
Charging the traction battery..74 Fuel cell unit
Driving tips .............................87 Compartment........................373
Handling hydrogen gas ..........82 Fuel cell unit compartment cover
Hydrogen gas.........................81 ...........................................374
Hydrogen-related components77 Fuel cell unit compartment cover
Maintenance, repair, recycling, ...............................................374
and disposal .........................74 Fuel consumption
Power output restriction .........80 Average fuel economy..........105
Power switch ........................160 Current fuel consumption .....105
Regenerative braking .............74 Fuel door .................................189
Road accident cautions..........84 Refueling ..............................189
Running out of fuel .................79 When the fuel door cannot be
Service plugs..........................83 opened ...............................453
Sounds and vibrations............73 Fuel economy .........................105

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 518 Alphabetical Index

Fuel gauge ................................96 I

Fuses .......................................407
Identification
G Vehicle ..................................468
Immobilizer system ..................67
Garage door opener ...............350 Indicators ..................................94
Gauges ......................................96 Initialization
Glove box ................................326 Items to initialize ...................497
Glove box light .......................327 Power windows ....................142
Tire pressure warning system
H ...........................................385
Inside door handle lights .......323
Head restraints .......................136
Inside rear view mirror ...........139
Headlights
Instrument panel light control
Automatic High Beam (AHB) 180
...............................................101
Light switch ..........................178
Instrument panel ornament lights
Replacing light bulbs ............412
...............................................323
Heated steering wheel ...........321
Interior lights...........................323
Heaters
Intuitive parking assist...........275
Automatic air conditioning sys-
Enabling/disabling the system
tem .....................................313
...........................................275
Heated steering wheel .........321
Function................................275
Outside rear view mirrors .....315
Warning lights.......................426
Seat heaters.........................321
Inverter coolant.......................375
High mounted stoplight
Checking ..............................375
Replacing light bulbs ............412
Ion filter .....................................80
High-voltage components .......77
Hill-start assist control ..........303
J
Hood ........................................371
Open ....................................371 Jack
Pop Up Hood..........................40 Positioning a floor jack .........371
Warning message ................124 Jam protection function
Hooks Power windows ....................142
Coat hooks ...........................340
Retaining hooks (floor mat) ....26 K
Horn .........................................138
Hydrogen detectors .................80 Keyless entry ..........................129
Hydrogen tanks ............72, 77, 79 Smart key system .................129
Capacity ...............................469 Wireless remote control........118
Location............................72, 77 Keys .........................................116
Hydrogen-related components77 Battery-saving function .........130
Digital key .............................119
Electronic key .......................116

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 Alphabetical Index 519

If the electronic key does not Lights

operate properly .................454 Automatic High Beam (AHB) 180
If you lose your keys ............453 Emergency flasher switch ....414
Key number plate ................. 116 Front personal lights .............324
Keyless entry........ 118, 121, 129 Headlight switch ...................178
Mechanical key ............ 116, 118 Interior lights .................323, 324
Power switch ........................160 Interior lights list ...................323
Replacing the battery ...........405 Rear personal lights .............324
Warning buzzer ....................130 Replacing light bulbs ............412
Wireless remote control ....... 118 Trunk light.............................127
Knee airbags.............................33 Turn signal lever ...................170
Vanity lights ..........................349
L LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ......216
Operation..............................216
Lane Change Assist (LCA) ....221 Warning lights.......................425
Operation .............................221 Luggage mats .........................328
Lane Departure Alert (LDA) ...224
Operation .............................224 M
Warning lights.......................424
Lane Tracing Assist (LTA)......216 Maintenance
Operation .............................216 Do-it-yourself maintenance ..369
Warning lights.......................425 General maintenance ...........366
Language (multi-information dis- Maintenance data .................468
play) .......................................108 Maintenance requirements ...365
LATCH anchors ........................58 Meter
LCA (Lane Change Assist) ....221 Clock ......................................96
Operation .............................221 Driving range ..........................96
LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ...224 Indicators ................................94
Operation .............................224 Instrument panel light control101
Warning lights.......................424 Meter control switches..........103
Lever Meters ....................................96
Auxiliary catch lever .............371 Multi-information display.......102
Hood lock release lever........371 Settings ................................108
Internal trunk release lever...128 Warning lights.................92, 422
Shift lever .............................165 Warning message.................432
Turn signal lever...................170 Meter control switches...........103
Wiper lever ...........................184 Mirrors
License plate lights Inside rear view mirror ..........139
Light switch ..........................178 Outside rear view mirror defog-
Replacing light bulbs ............412 gers ....................................315
Light bulbs Outside rear view mirrors .....140
Replacing .............................412 Vanity mirrors........................349
Multi-information display.......102

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 520 Alphabetical Index

Air purification screen...........109 Outside rear view mirrors

Audio system-linked display.107 Adjustment ...........................140
Changing the display............103 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .....265
Consumption screen ............109 Folding..................................141
Cruise control .......................252 Outside rear view mirror defog-
Driving support system informa- gers ....................................315
tion display .........................106 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
Dynamic radar cruise control244 ...........................................281
ECO Accelerator Guidance ..105 SEA (Safe Exit Assist) ..........270
Eco score .............................105 Outside temperature ................96
Energy monitor.....................109 Overheating.............................462
Fuel economy.......................105
LCA (Lane Change Assist) ...223 P
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)..228
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).....220 Panic mode .............................118
Map display ..........................107 Parking assist sensors (intuitive
Meter control switches .........103 parking assist) ......................275
Navigation system-linked display Parking brake..........................171
...........................................107 Brake system warning light ..422
Settings ................................108 Operation..............................171
Suggestion function..............109 Parking brake engaged warning
Tire inflation pressure...........108 buzzer.................................173
Tire pressure ........................383 Warning light.........................427
Vehicle information display...107 Warning message.................173
Warning message ................432 Parking lights
Light switch...........................178
N Replacing light bulbs ............412
Parking Support Brake (PKSB)
Navigation system-linked display ...............................................291
...............................................107 Enabling/disabling the system
...........................................292
O Parking Support Brake function
(moving vehicle rear of the
Odometer ................................100 vehicle) ...............................298
Odometer and trip meter display Parking Support Brake function
Display change button..........100 (pedestrians rear of the vehicle)
Display items........................100 ...........................................299
Opener Parking Support Brake function
Fuel door ..............................189 (static objects around of the
Hood.....................................371 vehicle) ...............................295
Trunk ....................................127 Parking Support Brake function
Outer foot lights .....................323 (static objects front and rear of
the vehicle) .........................295

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 Alphabetical Index 521

PCS (Pre-Collision System)...205 Power windows

Enabling/disabling the system Catch protection function......142
...........................................215 Door lock linked window opera-
Function ...............................205 tion......................................143
Warning light ........................424 Jam protection function ........142
PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) Operation..............................142
Warning lights.......................425 Window lock switch ..............144
PDA (Proactive driving assist) Pre-Collision System (PCS)...205
...............................................229 Enabling/disabling the system
PKSB (Parking Support Brake) ...........................................215
...............................................291 Function................................205
Enabling/disabling the system Warning light.........................424
...........................................292 Proactive driving assist (PDA)
Parking Support Brake function ...............................................229
(moving vehicle rear of the
vehicle)...............................298 R
Parking Support Brake function
(pedestrians rear of the vehicle) Radar cruise control...............252
...........................................299 Radar cruise control (dynamic
Parking Support Brake function radar cruise control).............241
(static objects around of the Radiator ...................................376
vehicle)...............................295 RCD (Rear Camera Detection)
Parking Support Brake function ...............................................287
(static objects front and rear of Enabling/disabling the system
the vehicle).........................295 ...........................................288
Pop Up Hood ............................40 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
Power control unit....................77 ...............................................281
Power control unit coolant Enabling/disabling the system
Preparing and checking before ...........................................282
winter..................................308 Rear Camera Detection (RCD)
Power outlet....................340, 341 ...............................................287
Power steering (Electric power Enabling/disabling the system
steering system)...................303 ...........................................288
Warning light ........................424 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
Power switch ..........................160 ...............................................281
Auto power off function ........165 Enabling/disabling the system
Changing the power switch ...........................................282
modes ................................164 Rear personal lights ...............323
If your vehicle has to be stopped Rear seats
in an emergency.................414 Cleaning ...............................362
Starting the fuel cell system .160 Head restraints .....................136
Seat heaters .........................321
Seat ventilators.....................321

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 522 Alphabetical Index

Rear side marker lights Automatic Locking Retractor

Light switch ..........................178 (ALR) ....................................31
Replacing light bulbs ............412 Child restraint system installation
Rear turn signal lights ...........170 .......................................51, 53
Replacing light bulbs ............412 Cleaning and maintaining the
Turn signal lever...................170 seat belt..............................362
Rear view mirror Emergency Locking Retractor
Inside rear view mirror..........139 (ELR) ....................................31
Outside rear view mirrors .....140 How to wear your seat belt .....30
Rear window defogger...........315 How your child should wear the
Refueling .................................189 seat belt................................30
Capacity ...............................469 Pregnant women, proper seat
Fuel types.............................469 belt use.................................29
When the fuel door cannot be Reminder light and buzzer .428,
opened ...............................453 429
Regenerative braking...............74 Seat belt extender ..................30
Warning lights.......................422 Seat belt pretensioners ..........32
Replacing SRS warning light .................423
Electronic key battery...........405 Seat heaters ............................321
Fuses ...................................407 Seat ventilators.......................321
Light bulbs............................412 Seating capacity .............157, 468
Tires .....................................394 Seats ........................................135
Road accident cautions ...........84 Adjustment ...........................135
Road Sign Assist (RSA).........238 Adjustment precautions ........135
RSA (Road Sign Assist) .........238 Child seats/child restraint system
Running out of fuel ..................79 installation ............................49
Cleaning ...............................362
S Head restraints .....................136
Properly sitting in the seat ......27
Safe Exit Assist (SEA) Seat heaters .........................321
Enabling/disabling the system Seat ventilators.....................321
...........................................272 Sécurité des enfants
Safety Connect .........................62 Précautions relatives aux couss-
SEA (Safe Exit Assist)............270 ins gonflables .....................503
Enabling/disabling the system Self-restoring coat..................358
...........................................272 Sensor
Seat belt reminder light .428, 429 Automatic headlight system .178
Seat belt shoulder anchor height Automatic High Beam (AHB) 180
Adjustment .............................32 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .....266
Seat belts ..................................29 Dynamic radar cruise control196
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder Inside rear view mirror ..........139
anchor height .......................32 Intuitive parking assist ..........275

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 Alphabetical Index 523

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)..224 Starting the fuel cell system .160
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).....216 Snow mode .............................302
Parking Support Brake function Snow tires ...............................308
(moving vehicles rear of the Specifications .........................468
vehicle)...............................266 Speedometer.............................96
Parking Support Brake function Steering wheel
(static objects front and rear of Adjustment ...........................138
the vehicle).........................275 Heated steering wheel..........321
PCS (Pre-Collision System) .196 Meter control switches..........103
Radar sensor........................196 Stop lights
Rain-sensing windshield wipers Replacing light bulbs ............412
...........................................186 Storage features .....................326
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) Storage precautions...............326
...................................266, 281 Stuck
SEA (Safe Exit Assist) ..........266 If the vehicle becomes stuck 466
Toyota Teammate Advanced Suggestion function...............109
Park....................................275 Sun visors ...............................349
Service plug ..............................77 Switches
Shift lever Activating the Automatic High
Shift position.........................165 Beam ..................................181
Shift lever light .......................323 Automatic High Beam (AHB) 180
Shift position ..........................165 Brake Hold switch.................174
Driving mode select switch...301 Cruise control .......................252
Side airbags ..............................33 Display change button ..........100
Side marker lights Door lock switches ...............124
Light switch ..........................178 Driving mode select switch ...301
Replacing light bulbs ............412 Dynamic radar cruise control244
Side mirrors Emergency flashers switch...414
Adjustment ...........................140 Garage door opener switches
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....265 ...........................................350
Folding .................................141 H2O switch ...........................176
Heaters.................................315 Heated steering wheel switch
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ...........................................321
...........................................281 LCA (Lane Change Assist)
SEA (Safe Exit Assist) ..........270 switch .................................223
Side turn signal lights............170 Light switches .......................178
Replacing light bulbs ............412 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch
Turn signal lever...................170 ...........................................219
Side windows .........................142 Meter control switches..........103
Smart key system...................129 Outside rear view mirror
Antenna location ..................129 switches..............................140
Entry functions .....................121 Parking brake switch ............171

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 524 Alphabetical Index

Power door lock switch ........124 Tire identification number .....475

Power switch ........................160 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 476
Power window switches .......142 Tire pressure display .............383
Rear window and outside rear Tire pressure warning system
view mirror defoggers switch ...............................................383
...........................................315 Function................................383
Seat heater switches............321 Initializing..............................385
Seat ventilator switches .......321 Installing tire pressure warning
Snow mode switch ...............302 valves and transmitters ......384
“SOS” button ..........................62 Registering ID codes ............389
Tilt and telescopic steering con- Selecting wheel set ..............392
trol switch ...........................138 Setting the tire pressure .......386
Trunk opener main switch ....128 Warning light.........................428
Trunk opener switch .............127 Tires .........................................381
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance Chains ..................................310
switch .................................244 Checking ..............................381
VSC OFF switch...................304 Emergency tire puncture repair
Window lock switch ..............144 kit........................................438
Windshield defogger switch .315 If you have a flat tire .............438
Windshield wiper and washer Inflation pressure ..................397
switch .................................184 Information ...........................474
Windshield wiper de-icer switch Replacing .............................394
...........................................320 Rotating tires ........................383
Size ......................................472
T Snow tires.............................308
Tire inflation pressure display
Tail lights function...............................383
Light switch ..........................178 Tire pressure warning system
Replacing light bulbs ............412 ...........................................383
Tailpipe ......................................80 Warning light.........................428
The Secondary Collision Brake Tools ........................................440
...............................................304 Top tether strap ........................60
Theft deterrent system Total load capacity .................468
Alarm......................................68 Towing
Immobilizer system ................67 Dinghy towing .......................159
Tire inflation pressure............397 Emergency towing ................417
Maintenance data.................472 Towing eyelet........................419
Tire inflation pressure display Trailer towing ........................158
function...............................383 Toyota Safety Sense 3.0.........195
Warning light ........................428 Automatic High Beam (AHB) 180
Tire information ......................474 Driver monitor .......................203
Glossary ...............................478 Dynamic radar cruise control241
Size ......................................475

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 Alphabetical Index 525

Emergency Driving Stop System U

...........................................256
LCA (Lane Change Assist) ...221 USB Type-C charging port.....330
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)..224
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).....216 V
PCS (Pre-Collision System) .205
Vanity lights ............................349
PDA (Proactive driving assist)
Vanity mirrors .........................349
...........................................229
Vanity lights ..........................349
RSA (Road Sign Assist) .......238
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Inte-
Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 Soft-
grated Management) ............303
ware update .......................193
Vehicle data recordings .............7
Traffic Jam Assist .................259
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated
Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 Software
Management (VDIM) .............303
update ...................................193
Vehicle identification number468
TRAC (Traction Control) ........303
Vehicle information display ...107
Traction battery ........................77
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
Charging.................................74
...............................................303
Location..................................77
Ventilators (seat ventilators) .321
Specification.........................469
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Traction battery air intake vents
...............................................303
.............................................86
Traction battery air intake vents
W
.........................................86, 402
Traction Control (TRAC) ........303 Warning buzzers
Traction motor (electric motor)72 Acceleration Suppression at Low
Traffic Jam Assist...................259 Speed .................................208
Trailer towing ..........................158 Approach warning ................248
Trip meters ..............................100 Brake hold ............................427
Trunk .......................................126 Brake Override System ........427
Internal trunk release lever...128 Brake system........................422
Smart key system.................127 Break suggestion function ....226
Trunk features ......................328 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .....425
Trunk grip .............................127 Drive-Start Control................427
Trunk light.............................127 Electric power steering .........424
Trunk opener main switch ....128 Fuel cell system overheat.....423
Trunk opener switch .............127 Hands off steering wheel warn-
Wireless remote control .......127 ing (LCA) ............................222
Trunk light ...............................127 Hands off steering wheel warn-
Turn signal lights....................170 ing (LDA) ............................226
Replacing light bulbs ............412 Hands off steering wheel warn-
Turn signal lever...................170 ing (LTA) .............................218
High coolant temperature .....423

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 526 Alphabetical Index

Hydrogen leak ......................422 PCS (Pre-Collision system) ..425

Intuitive parking assist..280, 426 PDA (Proactive Driving Assist)
LCA (Lane Change Assist) ...221 ...........................................425
LDA (Lane Departure Alert) 224, Pop Up Hood ........................423
424, 425 Pre-collision system .............424
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)...216, Seat belt reminder light 428, 429
425 Slip indicator .........................426
Open door ....................122, 124 SRS airbag ...........................423
Open window .......................143 Tire pressure ........................428
PCS (Pre-Collision System) .424 Warning messages .................432
PKSB (Parking Support Brake) Warning reflector ....................329
...........................................425 Washer.....................................184
Pre-collision warning ............206 Adding ..................................377
RCD (Rear Camera Detection) Preparing and checking before
...........................................425 winter..................................308
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) Switch ...................................184
...................................282, 425 Washing and waxing ..............358
Rear seat reminder ..............123 Weight
Safe Exit Assist ....................425 Cargo capacity .....................157
Seat belt .......................428, 429 Load limits ............................157
SRS airbag...........................423 Weight ..................................468
Warning label............................77 Wheels .....................................399
Warning lights ..................92, 422 Replacing wheels .................394
ABS ......................................424 Size ......................................472
Brake hold operated indicator Window lock switch ...............144
...........................................427 Windows
Brake Override System ........427 Power windows ....................142
Brake system .......................422 Rear window defogger .........315
Charging system ..................423 Washer .................................184
Cruise control .......................426 Windshield defogger ..............315
Drive-Start Control ...............427 Windshield wipers ..................184
Dynamic radar cruise control425 Rain-sensing windshield wipers
Electric power steering.........424 ...........................................184
Fuel cell system overheat ....423 Rest position.........................187
High coolant temperature.....423 Winter driving tips ..................308
Hydrogen leak ......................422 Wireless charger.....................331
Intuitive parking assist OFF indi- Wireless remote control.........118
cator ...................................426 Battery-Saving Function .......130
LDA indicator........................424 Locking/Unlocking ................118
Low fuel level .......................428 Panic mode ..........................118
LTA indicator.........................425 Replacing the battery ...........405
Parking brake indicator ........427

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 Alphabetical Index 527

For information regarding

the equipment listed
below, refer to the “MUL-
TIMEDIA OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
· Navigation system
· Audio/visual system
· Toyota parking assist monitor
· Panoramic view monitor

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 528

Certifications

Safety Connect

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 529

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 530

Smart key and Immobilizer system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 531
 For vehicles sold in Canada

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 532

Smart key system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 533

Digital key
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 534
 For vehicles sold in Canada

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 535

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 536

Toyota Safety Sense 3.0

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 537

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 538
 For vehicles sold in Canada

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 539

Intuitive parking assist

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Wireless charger
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 540
 For vehicles sold in the Canada

Garage door opener

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 541
 For vehicles sold in Canada

Tire pressure warning system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 542

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 543

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en
 544

HYDROGEN STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever (P.371)

Trunk opener (P.127)
Fuel door (P.191)
Fuel door opener (P.191)
Hood lock release lever (P.371)
Tire inflation pressure (P.472)

Hydrogen tanks’
P.469
fuel capacity
Fuel type Compressed hydrogen gas P.469
Cold tire inflation
P.472
pressure

Owner’s Manual_USA_M62137_en